510779-5EN1
(8/2010)
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
For Internal Use Only
[04]
Liability Disclaimer
bioMérieux, Inc. makes no express or implied warranty regarding this manual, its
quality, performance, or appropriate use regarding any type of specific procedure.
Furthermore, this manual may be modified by bioMérieux without notice and without
implying any obligation or liability on the part of the company.
Intellectual Property
bioMérieux, the blue logo, bioLIAISON, DensiCHEK, OBSERVA, PREVI, ViLINK, and
VITEK are used, pending and/or registered trademarks belonging to bioMérieux SA or
one of its subsidiaries.
Ghost and PCanywhere are registered trademarks of Symantec Corporation.
HP is a registered trademark of Hewelett-Packard Development Company.
HyperTerminal is a registered trademark of Hilgraeve, Incorporated.
InstallAnywhere is a registered trademark of Installshield Co, Inc.
Loctite is a registered trademark of the Henkel Corporation.
Vibratite is a registered trademark of ND Industries, Inc.
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation.
Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.
SNAPHAT is a registered trademark of STMicroelectronics, Inc.
Zip is a registered trademark of Iomega Corporation.
© 2010 bioMérieux, Inc. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a
retrieval system, or translated into any language (human or computer) in any form, or
by any means whatsoever, without the prior express written permission of bioMérieux,
Inc.
Patent Information
The VITEK® 2 Compact instrument is covered by one or more of the following U.S.
Patent Numbers:
• Carousel for Incubation Station – 6,136,270
• Incubation Station – 6,156,565
• Reader Head Assembly – 5,888,455
• Transport System from Incubation Station to Optical Reader – 5,853,666;
5,670,375; 5,798,085
• Cutting and Sealing Station – 5,891,396
• Instrument – 6,086,824
• Foreign Counterparts
Other Patents Pending.
The VITEK® 2 Compact instrument may also be covered by one or more of the
following U.S. Patent Numbers:
D414,272; D437,797; 5,609,828; 5,746,980; 5,804,437; 5,869,005; 5,932,177;
5,951,952; 6,267,929; 6,309,890; 6,340,573; and Foreign Counterparts.
Intended Audience
Standard Symbols
The following table presents symbols that may appear in the instructions for use or on
the instrument, package inserts, or packaging.
CE-Marking of Conformity
Consult Instructions for Use
Use by
Manufacturer
Date of manufacture
Contains sufficient for <n> tests
Keep dry
Fragile, handle with care
Caution, consult accompanying documents
Biological risks
Electric shock warning
Radiation warning
Potential pinch-point warning
i
Laser
Temperature limitation
Upper limit of temperature
Lower limit of temperature
In Vitro Diagnostic Medical Device
Batch code
Authorized Representative in the European Community
Catalog number
Serial Number
Do not reuse
Recyclable
Separate collection for waste electrical and electronic
equipment
Very toxic
Corrosive
Sodium azide
Irritant
ii
Positive control
Negative control
Keep away from sunlight
Protect from light
This way up
Do not stack
Humidity limitation
Fuse
Direct current
Alternating current
Both direct and alternating current
Three-phase alternating current
Earth (ground) terminal
Protective conductor terminal
Frame or chassis terminal
Equipotentiality
iii
ON (supply)
OFF (supply)
ON (only for a component of the system equipment)
OFF (only for a component of the system equipment)
Equipment protected throughout by double insulation or
reinforced insulation (Equivalent to Class II of IEC 536)
Potential tip over/crush hazard
iv
Table of Contents
List of Figures .................................................................................................. xv
List of Tables .................................................................................................. xxv
1
How to Use this Manual ............................................................................. 1-1
1.1
Purpose of the VITEK® 2 Compact System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2
Purpose of the This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3
Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.4
Manual Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.5
Reference Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.6
Chapter Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.7
Finding Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.8
Typographic and Usage Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.8.1
1.8.2
1.8.3
1.8.4
1.8.5
1.8.6
1.8.7
1.8.8
1.8.9
1.8.10
1.8.11
1.8.12
1.9
2
Attachments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Click . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Genus and Species Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Keyboard Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Mouse Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Names and Titles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Procedural Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Select. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
User Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Warnings, Cautions, and Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
System Setup.............................................................................................. 2-1
2.1
Required Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2
Preparations for Unpacking the VITEK® 2 Compact System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.3
Unpacking Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.4
System Placement and Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.5
System Cabling Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.6
Prepare Instrument for Power Up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
2.7
Power Up VITEK® 2 Compact System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.7.3
2.8
Verify Proper Instrument Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
2.8.1
2.8.2
2.9
Power On Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Power On Host Computer and Set Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Power On Instrument. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
General Instrument Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Login and Instrument Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Simulated Processing Cycle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
v
Table of Contents
2.9.1
2.9.2
2.9.3
2.9.4
2.9.5
2.9.6
Instrument Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Cassette Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Fill Cycle Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Cassette Scan Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Sealing and Cassette Removal Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Card Reading and Card Unload Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
2.10 Confirm Remote Diagnostic Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
2.11 Software Login and Alarm Message Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
2.12 Industry and 21 CFR Part 11 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
2.12.1 General Configuration Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
2.12.2 Enable Industry and 21 CFR Part 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
2.13 System Software Log Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
2.14 Perform Full System Image to DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
2.15 Prepare and Verify DensiCHEK™ Plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
3
Instrument Overview.................................................................................. 3-1
3.1
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.6
3.2.7
3.2.8
3.2.9
3.2.10
3.2.11
4
Instrument Components............................................................................ 4-1
4.1
VITEK® 2 Compact Interface System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
4.1.6
4.1.7
4.2
Instrument User Interface System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Menu System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
VITEK® 2 Compact Status Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Filler Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Loader Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
General Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Information and Warning Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Uninterruptible Power Supply (Optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.3
Host Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4.4
Vacuum/Filler Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4.5
Card Transport System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4.5.1
4.5.2
vi
User Interface System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Filler Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Load/Unload Station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Transport System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Bar Code Reader Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Card Sealer Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Autoloader and Reader/Incubator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Incubator Heater Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Reader System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Waste Collection Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Cassette Load/Unload Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Table of Contents
4.6
Bar Code Reader Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4.6.1
4.6.2
4.7
Reader/Incubator Processing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4.7.1
4.7.2
4.7.3
4.8
5
Carousel Card Ejector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Carousel Incubator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Reader System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
System Electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.8.1
4.8.2
4.8.3
4.8.4
4.8.5
4.8.6
4.9
Card Sealer Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Autoloader Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
BCB Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Head Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Sample Prep Node Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
DC Power Distribution Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
User Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Temperature Monitoring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Component Replacement .......................................................................... 5-1
5.1
Important Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.1.1
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.2.5
5.3
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Power Entry Module (PEM) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.5
Top Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Left Side Cover Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Right Side Cover Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Front Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Rear Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Power Switch Entry Module (PEM) Fuse Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.4
Repair Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Front Panel, Rear Panel, and/or Side Cover Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Power Supply Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
+5 Volt Adjustment to the +5/+12/–12 VDC Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.6
Power Supply Fan Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5.7
Solid-State Relay (SSR) Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5.7.1
5.7.2
5.7.3
5.7.4
5.8
Bay Controller Board (BCB) Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
5.8.1
5.8.2
5.9
Vacuum Pump SSR Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Vacuum Pump SSR Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Incubator SSR Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Incubator SSR Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
BCB Hardware Key Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
vii
Table of Contents
5.10 BCB Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
5.10.1 BCB Battery Replacement – Hot Swap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5.10.2 BCB Battery Replacement – Power Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
5.11 DC Power Distribution Supply Board Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
5.11.1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
5.11.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
5.12 Head Control Assembly Board (HCB) Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5.12.1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5.12.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5.13 Sample Prep Node (SPN) Board Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5.13.1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5.13.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
5.14 Transport Encoder Board Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
5.14.1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
5.14.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
5.15 Display Assembly Component Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
5.15.1 User Interface Assembly Board Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
5.15.2 User Interface Assembly Board Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
5.15.3 Blue and White LCD Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
5.16 Instrument Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
5.16.1
5.16.2
5.16.3
5.16.4
5.16.5
5.16.6
5.16.7
Transport Linear Actuator Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Incubator Motor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Reader Head Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Autoloader Linear Actuator Motor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Ejector Motor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42
Cam Motor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Sealer Linear Actuator Motor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
5.17 Instrument Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
5.17.1 Optical Switch Assembly Sensor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
5.17.2 Convergent Reflective Sensor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
5.18 Transport Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
5.18.1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50
5.18.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
5.19 Incubator Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
5.19.1
5.19.2
5.19.3
5.19.4
Heater Incubator Fan Replacement (Top) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
Incubator Fan Replacement (Bottom) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
Incubator Heater Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53
Static Removing Brush Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
5.20 Transmittance Replacement and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
5.20.1 Transmittance Optics Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55
5.20.2 Transmittance Minimum Threshold Reading Test and HCB Test . . 5-57
5.21 Reader Head Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
5.21.1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
5.21.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
viii
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Table of Contents
5.22 Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
5.22.1 Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt (P/N 6200190)
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
5.22.2 Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt (P/N 333612-2)
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
5.23 Reader Head Roller Plate Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
5.23.1 Reader Head Roller Plate (P/N 532151-903) Replacement . . . . . . 5-67
5.23.2 Reader Head Roller Plate (P/N 532151-902) Replacement . . . . . . 5-69
5.23.3 Reader Ledge Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
5.24 Vacuum Pump Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
5.24.1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-71
5.24.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
5.25 3-Way Filler Valve Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
5.25.1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
5.25.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-73
5.26 Rear Panel Fan Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
5.26.1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-74
5.26.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
5.27 Bar Code Scanner Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
5.27.1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
5.27.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
5.28 Sealer Assembly Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
5.28.1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
5.28.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
5.29 Sealer Hot Wire Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
5.29.1 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
5.29.2 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
6
Troubleshooting ......................................................................................... 6-1
6.1
Login — Operating System and Instrument Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.2
Instrument Diagnostics Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.5
6.3
Diagnostic Connection — Instrument Connected to Host PC . . . . . . 6-5
Diagnostic Connection — Instrument Connected to Service PC. . . . 6-5
Diagnostic Connection — Remote Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Diagnostic Connection — Remote-Anything . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
How to Use Diagnostics Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Verify Proper Instrument Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.4
Login to Host PC Operating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Login to Instrument Firmware Using Host PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Status Screen Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Login and Status Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Firmware Diagnostic Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
Searching for DML Commands and Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
System Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Cabinet Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
ix
Table of Contents
6.4.4
6.4.5
6.4.6
6.4.7
6.4.8
6.4.9
6.4.10
6.4.11
6.4.12
6.4.13
6.4.14
6.4.15
6.4.16
6.4.17
6.4.18
6.5
User Interface Hidden Menu Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
6.5.1
6.5.2
6.5.3
6.5.4
6.5.5
6.5.6
6.5.7
6.6
Check System Software Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90
Windows® Event Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90
6.8.1
x
AC Power to Instrument Has Failed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
No Power Output at AC Power Distribution Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79
BCB Board – Power Indicators Not Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79
DC Power Distribution Board – Indicator Lights Not Illuminated . . . 6-79
Transport Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79
Transmittance Optical Interrupt Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
Transmittance Calibration Errors / Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
Reader Jamming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
Carousel Jamming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81
Incubator Temperature Failures and Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81
Ambient Temperature Out of Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81
Drive Motor(s) Will Not Operate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
Instrument Not Communicating Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
Filler/Vacuum System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
Sealer Alarms or Failures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
UPS Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
Power Supply Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
VITEK® 2 Compact Electrical Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
Viewing Host PC Software Version. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-90
6.7.1
6.8
Sensor States. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
Keypad Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
Indicator Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
LCD Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
Select Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
Trigger Bar Code Reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
Ship Prep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
General Instrument Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
6.6.1
6.6.2
6.6.3
6.6.4
6.6.5
6.6.6
6.6.7
6.6.8
6.6.9
6.6.10
6.6.11
6.6.12
6.6.13
6.6.14
6.6.15
6.6.16
6.6.17
6.6.18
6.7
Vacuum/Filler Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Transport Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
Bar Code Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Sealer Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Autoloader Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Incubator/Carousel Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Reader/Transmittance/CAM Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
UPS Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
Host Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
Flash Log Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64
Diagnostic Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
Motor Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
Firmware Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
Macro Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-69
BURN-IN Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74
VITEK® 2 Compact System Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Table of Contents
6.9
DensiCHEK™ and DensiCHEK™ Plus Calibration/Verification . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
6.9.1
6.9.2
7
Schematics, Diagrams and Test Points ................................................... 7-1
7.1
Instrument Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.2
PC Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7.3
PC Board Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7.4
Bay Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
7.5
DC Power Distribution Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
7.6
Head Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
7.7
Sample Prep Node (SPN) Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7.7.1
7.8
7.9
Vacuum Sealer Board Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Transmittance Optics System Cross-Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Instrument Error Codes ............................................................................ 8-1
8.1
Instrument Firmware Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.1.4
9
SPN Board Block Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Vacuum Sealer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
7.8.1
8
Check and Calibrate DensiCHEK™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
DensiCHEK™ Plus Instrument Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-94
Diagnostic Login Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Instrument Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Error Code Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Error Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Host Computers ......................................................................................... 9-1
9.1
HP® d530 Host PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.2
HP® dc7100 Host PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
9.3
HP® dc7700 Host PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.4
HP® dc7800 Host PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9.5
HP® rp5700 Host PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
9.6
Software Login . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.6.1
9.6.2
9.6.3
Log in to Host PC Operating System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Start System Software Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Log in to System Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.7
Full System Image (Backup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
9.8
Full System Image Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
9.9
Data Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
9.9.1
9.9.2
9.9.3
9.9.4
9.9.5
Recommended Backup Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Automatic Data Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Backup Failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Manual Data Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
Data Backup – CD Drive Defective (Software Version Earlier
Than 5.01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
9.10 Data Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
9.10.1 Automated Data Restore (All System Software Except 3.01) . . . . . 9-19
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
xi
Table of Contents
9.10.2 Automated Data Restore (3.01 System Software Only). . . . . . . . . . 9-21
9.10.3 Correct Continuous Reboot After Restore – 3.01 System
Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
9.10.4 Manual Data Restore (2.01 or Higher System Software). . . . . . . . . 9-24
9.10.5 Manual Data Restore (System Software Earlier Than 2.01) . . . . . . 9-27
A Instrument Specifications .........................................................................A-1
A.1
Physical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A.2
Environmental Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
A.3
Electrical Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A.4
Optical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A.5
General Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
B Instrument Decontamination ....................................................................B-1
B.1
Decontaminating the VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
B.2
Decontaminating Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
C Installation Checklist .................................................................................C-1
D Instrument Improvements .........................................................................D-1
D.1 Magnetic Door Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
D.1.1
Magnetic Door Latch Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
D.2 Host PC Multiple Instrument Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
D.2.1
Host PC Multiple Instrument Configuration Installation . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
D.3 Sample Prep Node (SPN) Board Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-10
D.4 Molded Reader Ledge Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11
D.4.1
Molded Reader Ledge Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-11
D.5 Reader Head Roller Plate Update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
D.5.1
Reader Head Roller Plate Update Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-12
E Maintaining the Instrument ....................................................................... E-1
E.1
Unlock Front User Access Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2
E.2
Manual Temperature Check (Optional). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2
E.3
Cleaning the Carousel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
E.3.1
E.3.2
E.3.3
E.4
Cleaning the Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-11
E.5
Instrument Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-12
E.6
Cleaning the Optics (Power Off) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-14
E.7
Cleaning Instrument Exterior and User Access Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-16
E.8
Cleaning Interior Instrument Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-17
E.8.1
E.8.2
E.8.3
xii
Removing the Carousel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
Cleaning the Carousel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8
Replacing the Carousel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8
Cleaning the Waste Collection Bin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-17
Cleaning the Filler Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-18
Cleaning the Cassette Load/Unload Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-18
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Table of Contents
E.9
F
Turning the Instrument On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-19
User Diagnostics ........................................................................................ F-1
F.1
Error Handling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-2
F.1.1
Error Alarm Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3
F.2
Error Message Queue Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-3
F.3
Intervention Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5
F.3.1
F.3.2
F.3.3
F.3.4
F.3.5
Contents of Intervention Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5
Interventions During Filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5
Interventions During Loading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-6
Interventions During Bar Code Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-7
Jam Condition Intervention Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-10
F.4
Instrument Error Code User Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-11
F.5
User Interface Instrument Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-38
F.5.1
F.5.2
F.5.3
F.5.4
F.5.5
F.5.6
F.5.7
F.5.8
F.5.9
F.6
Instrument Diagnostics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-38
Diagnostic Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-38
Filler Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-38
Checking the Instrument Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-38
Displaying Version Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-39
Last Maintenance Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-39
Cleaning the Optics (With Cards Processing — Power On) . . . . . . F-40
Optics Self Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-41
Subsystem Error Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-42
Cycling the Power of the Instrument. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-42
G Electrostatic Discharge (ESD).................................................................. G-1
G.1 Equipment, Materials, or Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
G.2 General Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
G.3 Work Area Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
Reference Documents ................................................. Reference Documents-1
Change Summary.................................................................Change Summary-1
Glossary...............................................................................................Glossary-1
Index...........................................................................................................Index-1
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
xiii
Table of Contents
xiv
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
List of Figures
Figure 1-1:
Paperclip Icons ............................................................................................... 1-5
Figure 2-1:
Proper Handhold Locations ............................................................................ 2-3
Figure 2-2:
Power Entry Module ....................................................................................... 2-5
Figure 2-3:
VITEK® 2 Compact System Power Connection Diagram (with Optional
Power Conditioner) .......................................................................................... 2-6
Figure 2-4:
VITEK® 2 Compact System Power Connection Diagram (with Optional
UPS and Power Conditioner) .......................................................................... 2-7
Figure 2-5:
System Cabling Diagram – HP® d530 Host PC and One VITEK® 2
Compact Instrument ....................................................................................... 2-8
Figure 2-6:
System Cabling Diagram – HP® d530 Host PC and Two VITEK® 2
Compact Instruments ...................................................................................... 2-9
Figure 2-7:
System Cabling Diagram – HP® dc7100 Host PC and One VITEK® 2
Compact Instrument ..................................................................................... 2-10
Figure 2-8:
System Cabling Diagram – HP® dc7100 Host PC and Two VITEK® 2
Compact Instruments .................................................................................... 2-11
Figure 2-9:
System Cabling Diagram – HP® dc7700 / dc7800 Host PC and One
VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument .................................................................... 2-12
Figure 2-10: System Cabling Diagram – HP® dc7700 / HP® dc7800 Host PC and
Two VITEK® 2 Compact Instruments ........................................................... 2-13
Figure 2-11: System Cabling Diagram – HP® dc7700 / HP® dc7800 Host PC and
Three VITEK® 2 Compact Instruments ........................................................ 2-14
Figure 2-12: System Cabling Diagram – HP® dc7700 / HP® dc7800 Host PC and
Four VITEK® 2 Compact Instruments .......................................................... 2-15
Figure 2-13: System Cabling Diagram – HP® rp5700 Host PC and One VITEK® 2
Compact Instrument ..................................................................................... 2-16
Figure 2-14: System Cabling Diagram – HP® rp5700 Host PC and Two VITEK® 2
Compact Instruments .................................................................................... 2-17
Figure 2-15: System Cabling Diagram – HP® rp5700 Host PC and Three VITEK® 2
Compact Instruments .................................................................................... 2-18
Figure 2-16: System Cabling Diagram – HP® rp5700 Host PC and Four VITEK® 2
Compact Instruments .................................................................................... 2-19
Figure 2-17: Regional Options .......................................................................................... 2-23
Figure 2-18: Language Selection ...................................................................................... 2-23
Figure 2-19: Settings Tab ................................................................................................. 2-24
Figure 2-20: Keyboard Selection ...................................................................................... 2-25
Figure 2-21: Add Input Language ..................................................................................... 2-25
Figure 2-22: Advanced Tab .............................................................................................. 2-26
Figure 2-23: System Settings Change Window ................................................................ 2-32
Figure 2-24: Computer Desktop Icon Menu ...................................................................... 2-32
Figure 2-25: Computer Management Window — Device Manager .................................. 2-33
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
xv
List of Figures
Figure 2-26: Computer Management Window — Ports .....................................................2-33
Figure 2-27: Properties Window — Port Settings ..............................................................2-34
Figure 2-28: Advanced Settings ........................................................................................2-34
Figure 2-29: Computer Management — Scan for Hardware Changes .............................2-35
Figure 2-30: Computer Management — Port Settings ......................................................2-36
Figure 2-31: Initialization Screen .......................................................................................2-36
Figure 2-32: Second Initialization Screen ..........................................................................2-36
Figure 2-33: Status Screen in Idle Condition .....................................................................2-37
Figure 2-34: Vacuum Tube Connections ...........................................................................2-39
Figure 2-35: VITEK® 2 Compact Engineering Test Cards Arrangement ..........................2-41
Figure 2-36: Current Alarms ..............................................................................................2-45
Figure 2-37: Configuration Drop-Down Menu ....................................................................2-46
Figure 3-1:
VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument .......................................................................3-2
Figure 3-2:
User Interface Keypad and Screen .................................................................3-3
Figure 3-3:
Loaded Cassette .............................................................................................3-4
Figure 3-4:
VITEK® 2 Compact Station Block Diagram ....................................................3-4
Figure 3-5:
Filler Station Access Door Opened .................................................................3-5
Figure 3-6:
Vacuum Pump with Side Panel Removed ......................................................3-5
Figure 3-7:
Load/Unload Station Door Opened .................................................................3-6
Figure 3-8:
Transport Assembly ........................................................................................3-7
Figure 3-9:
Bar Code Reader Assembly ............................................................................3-7
Figure 3-10: Bar Code Scanner ..........................................................................................3-8
Figure 3-11: Card Sealer Assembly ....................................................................................3-8
Figure 3-12: Autoloader and Reader/Incubator Station .......................................................3-9
Figure 3-13: Heater Assembly ...........................................................................................3-10
Figure 3-14: Reader System Optics ..................................................................................3-10
Figure 3-15: Transmittance Optics Cross Section .............................................................3-11
Figure 3-16: Waste Collection Station Door Open ............................................................3-12
Figure 4-1:
Keypad and Screen ........................................................................................4-4
Figure 4-2:
VITEK® 2 Compact Main Menu ......................................................................4-5
Figure 4-3:
Main Menu Diagram ........................................................................................4-6
Figure 4-4:
Instrument Status Field ...................................................................................4-7
Figure 4-5:
Status Screen Showing Filler Ready ...............................................................4-8
Figure 4-6:
Filling-in-Progress Indicator ............................................................................4-8
Figure 4-7:
Message Queue Indicator (Warning Mode) ..................................................4-13
Figure 4-8:
UPS and Host PC Communication Port Locations .......................................4-14
Figure 4-9:
Host PC and Printer ......................................................................................4-15
Figure 4-10: Vacuum Chamber Door Opened ...................................................................4-16
xvi
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
List of Figures
Figure 4-11: Vacuum Chamber ......................................................................................... 4-16
Figure 4-12: Vacuum Station Vacuum Pump (Side View) ................................................ 4-17
Figure 4-13: Filler Station Pneumatic Diagram ................................................................. 4-17
Figure 4-14: Fill Indicator LED .......................................................................................... 4-18
Figure 4-15: Theoretical Vacuum Cycle Chart (Reference Only) ..................................... 4-19
Figure 4-16: Cassette Loaded with Cards ........................................................................ 4-20
Figure 4-17: Load Indicator LED ....................................................................................... 4-21
Figure 4-18: Transport Assembly with Instrument Front Removed .................................. 4-22
Figure 4-19: Bar Code Reader .......................................................................................... 4-23
Figure 4-20: Card Sealer Station ...................................................................................... 4-24
Figure 4-21: Incubator Autoloader Station ........................................................................ 4-24
Figure 4-22: Carousel Card Ejector .................................................................................. 4-25
Figure 4-23: Carousel System and Components .............................................................. 4-27
Figure 4-24: Incubator Heater ........................................................................................... 4-28
Figure 4-25: Optics System and Components .................................................................. 4-28
Figure 4-26: Reader System Components ....................................................................... 4-29
Figure 4-27: Optical System – Cross Section ................................................................... 4-30
Figure 4-28: Waste Collection Station .............................................................................. 4-31
Figure 4-29: Top Level Board Diagram ............................................................................. 4-32
Figure 4-30: BCB Location (Board Mount Assembly Opened) ......................................... 4-33
Figure 4-31: HCB Location ............................................................................................... 4-34
Figure 4-32: SPN Boards .................................................................................................. 4-35
Figure 4-33: DC Power Distribution Board ........................................................................ 4-36
Figure 4-34: User Interface Board .................................................................................... 4-36
Figure 4-35: Power Supply Assembly ............................................................................... 4-37
Figure 5-1:
Covers and Panels ......................................................................................... 5-5
Figure 5-2:
Rear Panel Assembly Screws ........................................................................ 5-8
Figure 5-3:
Main AC Power Entry Module Fuse Replacement ......................................... 5-9
Figure 5-4:
Power Entry Module ..................................................................................... 5-10
Figure 5-5:
Rear Power Supply Cover ............................................................................ 5-11
Figure 5-6:
Power Supply Components .......................................................................... 5-12
Figure 5-7:
Power Supply Voltage Adjustment .............................................................. 5-13
Figure 5-8:
Rear Power Supply Cover ............................................................................ 5-13
Figure 5-9:
Power Supply Components .......................................................................... 5-14
Figure 5-10: Vacuum Pump SSR ...................................................................................... 5-15
Figure 5-11: Incubator Solid-State Relay Replacement .................................................... 5-16
Figure 5-12: Hardware Key ............................................................................................... 5-18
Figure 5-13: BCB Circuit Board Replacement (Top Panel Removed) .............................. 5-19
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
xvii
List of Figures
Figure 5-14: TIME Command ............................................................................................5-20
Figure 5-15: Hardware Key ...............................................................................................5-25
Figure 5-16: BCB Battery ..................................................................................................5-26
Figure 5-17: Board Locations ............................................................................................5-28
Figure 5-18: SPN Board Replacement ..............................................................................5-32
Figure 5-19: Transport Assembly Encoder Board .............................................................5-33
Figure 5-20: Display Assembly Component Replacement ................................................5-34
Figure 5-21: Sample Drive Motor ......................................................................................5-36
Figure 5-22: Transport Linear Actuator Motor ...................................................................5-36
Figure 5-23: Transport Assembly (Shown with new Rod Mount) ......................................5-37
Figure 5-24: Incubator Motor .............................................................................................5-38
Figure 5-25: Reader Head Motor ......................................................................................5-40
Figure 5-26: Autoloader Motor ..........................................................................................5-41
Figure 5-27: Card Ejector Motor ........................................................................................5-42
Figure 5-28: Cam Motor (Top View) ..................................................................................5-44
Figure 5-29: Sealer Linear Actuator Motor ........................................................................5-45
Figure 5-30: Optical Switch Assembly Sensor ..................................................................5-47
Figure 5-31: Convergence Reflective Sensor ....................................................................5-48
Figure 5-32: Convergent Reflective Sensors .....................................................................5-49
Figure 5-33: Transport Replacement (Front) .....................................................................5-50
Figure 5-34: Transport Replacement (shown from rear of instrument) .............................5-51
Figure 5-35: Incubator Assembly with Back Cover Removed ...........................................5-52
Figure 5-36: Carousel and Antistatic Brush .......................................................................5-54
Figure 5-37: Optics Modules .............................................................................................5-55
Figure 5-38: Optics Modules (Top View) ...........................................................................5-56
Figure 5-39: Test Cards ....................................................................................................5-57
Figure 5-40: Optic Test Card Insertion ..............................................................................5-59
Figure 5-41: Reader Head Assembly ................................................................................5-61
Figure 5-42: Reader Head Roller Plate .............................................................................5-63
Figure 5-43: Reader Head Drive Belt Routing ...................................................................5-64
Figure 5-44: Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt (Partially Disassembled) ........................5-65
Figure 5-45: Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt ................................................................5-66
Figure 5-46: Reader Head Roller Plate .............................................................................5-67
Figure 5-47: Reader Head Drive Belt Routing ...................................................................5-68
Figure 5-48: Reader Head Roller Plate .............................................................................5-69
Figure 5-49: Reader Head Belt Position ............................................................................5-70
Figure 5-50: Reader Ledge ...............................................................................................5-71
Figure 5-51: Vacuum Pump (Shown with Cabinet Removed) ...........................................5-72
xviii
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
List of Figures
Figure 5-52: Instrument Cabinet Fans .............................................................................. 5-74
Figure 5-53: Bar Code Scanner ........................................................................................ 5-75
Figure 5-54: Sealer Assembly ........................................................................................... 5-77
Figure 5-55: Sealer Hot Wire ............................................................................................ 5-78
Figure 6-1:
Diagnostics Terminal Setup ............................................................................ 6-6
Figure 6-2:
Admin on BMXHOST1 – Manage ................................................................... 6-8
Figure 6-3:
Computer Management Window .................................................................... 6-8
Figure 6-4:
Terminal Services Properties – General ......................................................... 6-9
Figure 6-5:
Admin on BMXHOST1 – Properties ............................................................... 6-9
Figure 6-6:
System Properties – Remote ........................................................................ 6-10
Figure 6-7:
Network Connections ................................................................................... 6-11
Figure 6-8:
Modem Enable ............................................................................................. 6-11
Figure 6-9:
Remote Desktop Connection ........................................................................ 6-13
Figure 6-10: Remote Desktop – General .......................................................................... 6-14
Figure 6-11: Remote Desktop – Local Resources ............................................................ 6-14
Figure 6-12: Remote Desktop – Experience ..................................................................... 6-15
Figure 6-13: Network Connections ................................................................................... 6-17
Figure 6-14: Modem Enable ............................................................................................. 6-18
Figure 6-15: Diagnostics Terminal – Buttons .................................................................... 6-20
Figure 6-16: Diagnostics Terminal – Status ...................................................................... 6-20
Figure 6-17: Diagnostics Terminal – File Information ....................................................... 6-21
Figure 6-18: Diagnostics Terminal – Meta Keys and Editor .............................................. 6-22
Figure 6-19: Diagnostics Terminal – Connection Setup ................................................... 6-23
Figure 6-20: Diagnostics Terminal – Configuration ........................................................... 6-24
Figure 6-21: Diagnostics Terminal – Edit Tools ................................................................ 6-25
Figure 6-22: Diagnostics Terminal – Trace Color Settings ............................................... 6-26
Figure 6-23: Diagnostics Terminal – About ....................................................................... 6-27
Figure 6-24: Words Example One .................................................................................... 6-30
Figure 6-25: Words Example Two .................................................................................... 6-30
Figure 6-26: Words Example Three .................................................................................. 6-31
Figure 6-27: Words Example Four .................................................................................... 6-31
Figure 6-28: VER Example Output ................................................................................... 6-32
Figure 6-29: HEALTH Example Output ............................................................................. 6-34
Figure 6-30: DUMP_COMPSTAT Example Output .......................................................... 6-36
Figure 6-31: Listing of DUMP_STAT Component Names ................................................ 6-36
Figure 6-32: DUMP_STAT Example Output (Using Carousel) ......................................... 6-37
Figure 6-33: NODE_STATUS Example Output ................................................................ 6-38
Figure 6-34: WELLMAPS Output Example ....................................................................... 6-40
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
xix
List of Figures
Figure 6-35: SHOW_CAB_TEMP_INFO Output Example (fans running greater than
or equal to 40%) ............................................................................................6-41
Figure 6-36: SHOW_CAB_TEMP_INFO Output Example (fans running less than
or equal to 40%) ............................................................................................6-42
Figure 6-37: Filler Status Output Example ........................................................................6-43
Figure 6-38: DUMP_FILLER Output Example ...................................................................6-43
Figure 6-39: DUMP_CO 0 Output Example ......................................................................6-48
Figure 6-40: TEST_SEALER Output Example ..................................................................6-50
Figure 6-41: INCUBATOR_STATUS .................................................................................6-51
Figure 6-42: SHOW_INCU_TEMP_INFO Output Example ...............................................6-52
Figure 6-43: DUMP_CM 0 .................................................................................................6-52
Figure 6-44: CARO_STATUS ...........................................................................................6-54
Figure 6-45: CAL_TX 1 Output Example ...........................................................................6-58
Figure 6-46: SCAN_TX_SENSORS 0 Output Example ....................................................6-59
Figure 6-47: SCAN_TX_SENSORS 1 Output Example ....................................................6-59
Figure 6-48: READ_TX 1 Output Example ........................................................................6-60
Figure 6-49: UPS_STATUS Output Example ....................................................................6-61
Figure 6-50: COM_STATUS Output Example ...................................................................6-62
Figure 6-51: CTDB_STATUS Output Example .................................................................6-63
Figure 6-52: TAIL_LOG 5 Output Example .......................................................................6-64
Figure 6-53: GREP_LOG fill ..............................................................................................6-65
Figure 6-54: SHOW_ALIGNMENTS Output Example .......................................................6-73
Figure 6-55: Power Supply Components ..........................................................................6-86
Figure 6-56: VITEK® 2 Compact Electrical Architecture ...................................................6-89
Figure 6-57: Computer Management Screen ....................................................................6-90
Figure 7-1:
Instrument Schematic and Wiring Diagram (Power Supply) ..........................7-2
Figure 7-2:
Instrument Schematic and Wiring Diagram (Transport SPN Board) ...............7-3
Figure 7-3:
Instrument Schematic and Wiring Diagram (Front Panel SPN Board) ............7-4
Figure 7-4:
Instrument Schematic and Wiring Diagram (Incubator SPN Board) ...............7-5
Figure 7-5:
Instrument Schematic and Wiring Diagram (Vacuum Sealer SPN Board) ......7-6
Figure 7-6:
Instrument Schematic and Wiring Diagram (Head Control Board) .................7-7
Figure 7-7:
Instrument Schematic and Wiring Diagram (BCB, Power Distribution
and User Interface) .........................................................................................7-8
Figure 7-8:
Top Level Board Block Diagram .....................................................................7-9
Figure 7-9:
VITEK® 2 Compact Electronics and Connections ........................................7-10
Figure 7-10: Bay Controller Board (BCB) Layout (531750) ..............................................7-13
Figure 7-11: DC Power Distribution Board ........................................................................7-15
Figure 7-12: DC Power Distribution Board Layout (P/N 530774) ......................................7-16
Figure 7-13: Head Control Board for the VITEK® 2 Compact ...........................................7-16
xx
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
List of Figures
Figure 7-14: Head Control Board Layout (P/N 530772) .................................................... 7-17
Figure 7-15: Sample Prep Node (SPN) Board Layout (P/N 531720) ................................ 7-18
Figure 7-16: Sample Prep Node (SPN) Board Layout (P/N 6200271) .............................. 7-19
Figure 7-17: Transport SPN Board ................................................................................... 7-20
Figure 7-18: Front Panel SPN Board ................................................................................ 7-21
Figure 7-19: Carousel/Incubator SPN Board .................................................................... 7-22
Figure 7-20: Vacuum Sealer Board Layout (P/N 531728) ................................................ 7-23
Figure 7-21: Vacuum Sealer Board Layout (P/N 6200270) .............................................. 7-24
Figure 7-22: Vacuum Sealer SPN Board .......................................................................... 7-25
Figure 7-23: Transmittance Optics System — Cross-Section .......................................... 7-26
Figure 9-1:
HP® d530 Host PC – Front ............................................................................ 9-2
Figure 9-2:
HP® d530 Host PC – Back ............................................................................. 9-2
Figure 9-3:
HP® d530 Host PC – Cable ........................................................................... 9-2
Figure 9-4:
HP® dc7100 Host PC – Front ........................................................................ 9-3
Figure 9-5:
HP® dc7100 Host PC – Back ......................................................................... 9-3
Figure 9-6:
HP® dc7100 Host PC – Cable ....................................................................... 9-3
Figure 9-7:
HP® dc7700 Host PC – Front ........................................................................ 9-4
Figure 9-8:
HP® dc7700 Host PC – Back ......................................................................... 9-4
Figure 9-9:
HP® dc7700 Host PC – Cable ....................................................................... 9-4
Figure 9-10: HP® dc7800 Host PC – Front ........................................................................ 9-5
Figure 9-11: HP® dc7800 Host PC – Back ......................................................................... 9-5
Figure 9-12: HP® dc7800 Host PC – Cable ....................................................................... 9-5
Figure 9-13: HP® rp5700 Host PC – Front ......................................................................... 9-6
Figure 9-14: HP® rp5700 Host PC – Back ......................................................................... 9-6
Figure 9-15: Splash Screen ................................................................................................ 9-8
Figure 9-16: Login Screen .................................................................................................. 9-9
Figure 9-17: Launch Burn Backup .................................................................................... 9-12
Figure 9-18: Burn Backup ................................................................................................. 9-12
Figure 9-19: Burn Backup Result ...................................................................................... 9-13
Figure 9-20: Backup Login ................................................................................................ 9-16
Figure 9-21: Backup Icon .................................................................................................. 9-16
Figure 9-22: Select a Backup Location ............................................................................. 9-16
Figure 9-23: Backup Directory .......................................................................................... 9-18
Figure 9-24: Backup Zip® Files ........................................................................................ 9-18
Figure 9-25: Restore Login ............................................................................................... 9-20
Figure 9-26: Restore Icon ................................................................................................. 9-20
Figure 9-27: Restore Warning ........................................................................................... 9-20
Figure 9-28: bmxJavaService.exe in Task Manager ......................................................... 9-22
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
xxi
List of Figures
Figure 9-29: Restore Progress Bar ...................................................................................9-22
Figure 9-30: bmxJavaService.exe in Task Manager .........................................................9-23
Figure D-1:
Two Magnet Latch Catch with Door Lock ...................................................... D-3
Figure D-2:
Three Magnet Latch Catch without Door Lock ............................................... D-3
Figure D-3:
Spring-Loaded Dual Ball Catches (Old) ......................................................... D-3
Figure D-4:
Vacuum Plate and Springs ............................................................................ D-4
Figure D-5:
System Settings Change Window .................................................................. D-5
Figure D-6:
Computer Desktop Icon Menu ....................................................................... D-6
Figure D-7:
Computer Management Window — Device Manager .................................... D-6
Figure D-8:
Computer Management Window — Ports ...................................................... D-7
Figure D-9:
Properties Window — Port Settings ............................................................... D-8
Figure D-10: Advanced Settings ......................................................................................... D-8
Figure D-11: Computer Management — Scan for Hardware Changes .............................. D-9
Figure D-12: Computer Management — Port Settings ....................................................... D-9
Figure D-13: Machined Reader Ledge .............................................................................. D-11
Figure D-14: Molded Reader Ledge ................................................................................. D-12
Figure D-15: Reader Head Roller Plate ............................................................................ D-13
Figure D-16: Reader Head Drive Belt Routing .................................................................. D-13
Figure E-1:
Incubator with Thermometer .......................................................................... E-3
Figure E-2:
Thermometer Clip .......................................................................................... E-3
Figure E-3:
Main Menu ..................................................................................................... E-4
Figure E-4:
Carousel Removal Confirmation ................................................................... E-5
Figure E-5:
Preparing for Section Removal ...................................................................... E-5
Figure E-6:
Remove Carousel Section ............................................................................. E-6
Figure E-7:
Carousel with Cover ....................................................................................... E-6
Figure E-8:
Carousel without Cover .................................................................................. E-7
Figure E-9:
Rotating Carousel .......................................................................................... E-7
Figure E-10: Removal Complete ........................................................................................ E-8
Figure E-11: Ready to Replace Carousel ........................................................................... E-9
Figure E-12: Preparing to Replace Carousel ...................................................................... E-9
Figure E-13: Ready to Replace Carousel ........................................................................... E-9
Figure E-14: Carousel Replacement ................................................................................ E-10
Figure E-15: Carousel Replacement Complete ................................................................ E-10
Figure E-16: Shutdown System ........................................................................................ E-12
Figure E-17: Confirm Shutdown ....................................................................................... E-13
Figure E-18: Shutdown in Progress .................................................................................. E-13
Figure E-19: Shutdown Ready .......................................................................................... E-13
Figure E-20: Optics Assembly .......................................................................................... E-14
xxii
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
List of Figures
Figure E-21: Optics Cleaning ............................................................................................E-15
Figure F-1:
Error Handling Flowchart ................................................................................ F-2
Figure F-2:
Error Message Queue (List Form) .................................................................. F-3
Figure F-3:
Error Message Queue (Detail Form) .............................................................. F-4
Figure F-4:
Intervention Sample Screen ........................................................................... F-5
Figure F-5:
Incubator Not Ready ....................................................................................... F-6
Figure F-6:
Transfer Failure .............................................................................................. F-7
Figure F-7:
Jam Condition ............................................................................................... F-10
Figure F-8:
Jam Condition Fix Intervention ..................................................................... F-10
Figure F-9:
Temperatures ............................................................................................... F-39
Figure F-10: Version Information ...................................................................................... F-39
Figure F-11: Last Maintenance Date ................................................................................. F-40
Figure F-12: Optics Cleaning ............................................................................................ F-40
Figure F-13: Optics Cleaning Ready ................................................................................. F-41
Figure F-14: Optics Self Test ............................................................................................ F-41
Figure F-15: Subsystem Error Status Screen ................................................................... F-42
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
xxiii
List of Figures
xxiv
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
List of Tables
Table 1-1: Reference Documents ...................................................................................... 1-4
Table 1-2: General Documents .......................................................................................... 1-4
Table 2-1: Required Instrumentation and Equipment List .................................................. 2-2
Table 2-2: Power Entry Module Settings ............................................................................ 2-5
Table 2-3: VITEK® 2 Compact Cable Connections ............................................................ 2-5
Table 2-4: Pre-Defined User Accounts ............................................................................. 2-22
Table 2-5: Language Codes ............................................................................................. 2-28
Table 2-6: SeaPORT +4/232 USB to RS-232 Converter Port Configuration ................... 2-33
Table 4-1: Interface Keypad ............................................................................................... 4-4
Table 4-2: Fill Indicator Status .......................................................................................... 4-18
Table 4-3: Load Indicator Status ...................................................................................... 4-21
Table 4-4: Instrument Configurations for Carousel Capacity ........................................... 4-26
Table 5-1: BCB Part Numbers and Approved Software / Firmware Compatibility ........... 5-17
Table 5-2: SPN Part Numbers and Approved Software / Firmware Compatibility ........... 5-31
Table 5-3: Optical Switch Sensors ................................................................................... 5-46
Table 5-4: Convergent Reflective Sensors ....................................................................... 5-49
Table 5-5: Test Materials Required .................................................................................. 5-58
Table 5-6: HCB Test Results Example ............................................................................. 5-61
Table 5-7: Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt Replacement Information ........................ 5-63
Table 6-1: DML Groups .................................................................................................... 6-30
Table 6-2: Bay Controller Board HDR8 Jumper Configurations ....................................... 6-40
Table 6-3: Critical Data Description .................................................................................. 6-62
Table 6-4: VITEK® 2 Compact Motor Names .................................................................. 6-67
Table 6-5: Components Available for BURN-IN ............................................................... 6-74
Table 6-6: +12/–12 VDC Power Supply Information ........................................................ 6-87
Table 6-7: +5 VDC Power Supply Information ................................................................. 6-87
Table 6-8: 12 VDC Power Supply Information ................................................................. 6-87
Table 6-9: 24 VDC Power Supply Information ................................................................. 6-88
Table 6-10: 120 VAC Information ....................................................................................... 6-88
Table 6-11: File Descriptions .............................................................................................. 6-92
Table 6-12: File Descriptions .............................................................................................. 6-93
Table 6-13: Standard Acceptable Range ........................................................................... 6-94
Table 7-1: Bay Controller Board — Voltage Test Points .................................................. 7-10
Table 7-2: DC Power Distribution Board — Voltage Test Point ....................................... 7-11
Table 7-3: Head Control Board (HCB) — Voltage Test Point .......................................... 7-11
Table 7-4: User Interface Board — Voltage Test Point .................................................... 7-11
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
xxv
List of Tables
Table 7-5: Host PC Connector — Voltage Test Point .......................................................7-11
Table 7-6: HCB/Bar Code Connector — Voltage Test Points ...........................................7-12
Table 7-7: SPN Board — Voltage Test Points ..................................................................7-12
Table 7-8: Vacuum/Sealer Board — Voltage Test Points .................................................7-12
Table 7-9: VITEK® 2 Compact 15 — BCB Jumper Settings
..........................................7-13
Table 7-10: VITEK® 2 Compact 30 — BCB Jumper Settings .............................................7-14
Table 7-11: VITEK® 2 Compact 60 — BCB Jumper Settings ............................................7-14
Table 7-12: SPN Board Jumper Setting .............................................................................7-17
Table 7-13: SPN Board – General Information ...................................................................7-19
Table 7-14: Vacuum Sealer Board – General Information ..................................................7-24
Table 8-1: BCB Error Code List ..........................................................................................8-3
Table 9-1: Pre-Defined User Accounts ...............................................................................9-7
Table 9-2: Burn Backup Error Messages ..........................................................................9-13
Table D-1: VITEK® 2 Compact Door Latch Kit Contents (P/N 533346-901) ...................... D-2
Table D-2: SeaPORT +4/232 USB to RS-232 Converter Port Configuration ..................... D-7
Table D-3: Instrument Configurations for SPN Boards ..................................................... D-10
Table F-1: VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument Error Code User Response Table ................ F-11
Table F-2: Diagnostic Tests ............................................................................................. F-38
xxvi
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Chapter 1: How to Use this Manual
About this Chapter
This chapter contains information about how this manual is organized and how to use
this manual. It is recommended that you read this chapter first.
IMPORTANT:
Note:
Read this manual carefully before you attempt to work on or use the
VITEK® 2 Compact instrument.
The VITEK® 2 Compact instrument conforms to the relevant European
regulations for electrical safety and EMC.
Chapter Contents
1.1
Purpose of the VITEK® 2 Compact System • 1-2
1.2
Purpose of the This Manual • 1-2
1.3
Intended Audience • 1-2
1.4
Manual Organization • 1-2
1.5
Reference Documents • 1-4
1.6
Chapter Organization • 1-4
1.7
Finding Topics • 1-5
1.8
Typographic and Usage Conventions • 1-5
1.8.1 Attachments • 1-5
1.8.2 Click • 1-5
1.8.3 Commands • 1-6
1.8.4 Genus and Species Names • 1-6
1.8.5 Keyboard Entry • 1-6
1.8.6 Mouse Actions • 1-6
1.8.7 Names and Titles • 1-6
1.8.8 Press • 1-7
1.8.9 Procedural Steps • 1-7
1.8.10 References • 1-7
1.8.11 Select • 1-7
1.8.12 User Input • 1-7
1.9
Warnings, Cautions, and Information • 1-8
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
1-1
Purpose of the VITEK® 2 Compact System
1.1
How to Use this Manual
Purpose of the VITEK® 2 Compact System
The VITEK® 2 Compact system is dedicated to the identification of bacteria and
yeasts, and susceptibility testing of clinically significant bacteria and yeasts. The
system includes the VITEK® 2 Compact instrument, a host personal computer (host
PC), and a printer.
The VITEK® 2 Compact instrument is an integrated system, combining the tasks of
test card inoculation, incubation, and optical measurement into a single instrument.
1.2
Purpose of the This Manual
This Service Manual contains information on the operation, installation, maintenance,
and repair of the VITEK® 2 Compact integrated system. This information is intended
to provide an understanding of how the system performs, possible causes of
malfunctions, and how to isolate and correct performance problems.
IMPORTANT:
1.3
Figures, schematics and their components are not necessarily shown
to scale in this manual. Figures and schematics are included in this
manual for illustrative purposes or as examples.
Intended Audience
This manual is for use by bioMérieux Field Service Engineers to assist in the
troubleshooting and repair of the VITEK® 2 Compact integrated system. Every effort
has been made to ensure that the information contained in this manual is complete
and accurate. All calibration and adjustment procedures used in this manual are
adapted directly from current engineering documentation.
1.4
Manual Organization
The information in this manual is organized into nine chapters, arranged so that the
information you need first is in the beginning of the manual. Information required for
maintenance after the system is operating is found in later chapters.
The following is a brief outline of this manual:
• Chapter 1: How to Use This Manual – Explains how the manual is organized
and how to use the manual.
• Chapter 2: System Setup – A complete guide for the installation and setup of the
VITEK® 2 Compact integrated system. This chapter begins with unpacking the
instrument and proceeds through its power-up and configuration.
• Chapter 3: Instrument Overview – Introduces the VITEK® 2 Compact integrated
system hardware.
• Chapter 4: Instrument Components – Describes the components of the system
and their operation. This chapter contains the descriptions of the boards and the
major subassemblies.
1-2
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
How to Use this Manual
Manual Organization
• Chapter 5: Component Replacement – Describes how to remove, install, and
mechanically align the subassemblies that may be encountered during repair of
the VITEK® 2 Compact integrated system. This chapter is intended for use after
completion of troubleshooting and problem diagnosis.
• Chapter 6: Troubleshooting – Includes logging on and executing DML
commands used in troubleshooting and diagnosing instrument failures, along with
displaying system statuses. This chapter also contains a General Instrument
Troubleshooting section that lists possible instrument malfunctions and
recommended corrective actions.
• Chapter 7: Schematics, Diagrams and Test Points – Includes VITEK® 2
Compact instrument wiring diagrams, block diagrams, PC boards and PC board
test points.
• Chapter 8: Instrument Error Codes – Describes how to determine the
instrument status, how to identify error codes within instrument diagnostics, and
how to determine why errors are generated.
• Chapter 9: Host Computers – Shows examples of the host PC models used in
the VITEK® 2 Compact system. It also describes how to perform a host computer
full system image, a full system restore, a data backup, and a data restore.
• Appendix A: Instrument Specifications – Contains physical, environmental,
and electrical characteristics of the VITEK® 2 Compact instrument.
• Appendix B: Decontamination – Describes how to decontaminate the VITEK® 2
Compact instrument.
• Appendix C: Installation Checklist – Contains a master checklist to use during
system installation.
• Appendix D: Instrument Improvements – Contains a description of instrument
improvements.
• Appendix E: Maintaining the Instrument – Describes how to perform routine
cleaning of the instrument.
• Appendix F: User Diagnostics – Contains basic customer user diagnostics and
troubleshooting.
• Appendix G: Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) – Contains guidelines for
protecting Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive (ESDS) components, and assemblies
containing ESDS components, from static electricity.
• Reference Documents – Contains a list of Drawings, Bills of Material (BOM),
Design Notes, Quality Procedures (QP’s), and Specifications referenced when
creating and editing the service manual.
• Change Summary – Contains a summary of changes made to each revision of
the service manual.
• Glossary – Describes common terms used in this manual.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
1-3
Reference Documents
1.5
How to Use this Manual
Reference Documents
This manual includes documents referenced within the chapters. These are listed in
Table 1-1. Table 1-2 includes additional documents that may be helpful when
servicing a VITEK® 2 Compact instrument.
Note:
Always refer to the latest drawing revision.
Table 1-1: Reference Documents
Document
Number
Document
532600
VITEK® 2 Compact Alignment Procedure
Current
Version
DensiCHEK™ User manual
Current
Version
DensiCHEK™ Plus User manual
VKCXXX
Firmware, VKC
Table 1-2: General Documents
Document
Number
1.6
Document
Current
Version
VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument User Manual
Current
Version
VITEK® 2 Systems Software User Manual
531602
VITEK® 2 Compact System Electronics Jumper and Test Point Specification
532611
VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument Manufacturing Commands
532612
VITEK® 2 Compact Field Service Commands
Chapter Organization
All of the chapters are organized in the same way and include the following:
• About this Chapter – Summary of the chapter’s content and purpose
• Chapter Contents – A table of contents for the chapter
• Descriptions and/or Procedures – Descriptions and procedures appropriate for
this chapter’s subject matter
• Background Information, where applicable and useful
1-4
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
How to Use this Manual
1.7
Finding Topics
Finding Topics
This manual uses several methods to help you find information and keep your
bearings.
Table of Contents – Located at the front of the manual. It contains the titles of all
chapters/appendices and their sections, and the page number of each title and
section.
List of Figures – Located at the front of the manual. It contains a list of all figures in
the manual and the page number of each figure.
List of Tables – Located at the front of the manual. It contains a list of all tables in the
manual and the page number of each table.
Chapter Contents – Located at the front of each chapter. It lists all sections in the
chapter and their page number.
Page Headers – Located at the top of each page. There are two parts to a header:
the chapter title and the primary section title.
Page Footers – Located at the bottom of each page. There are three parts to a footer:
the manual name, the manual part number, and the page number.
Index – Located at the back of the manual. It contains topical entries and their page
numbers.
1.8
Typographic and Usage Conventions
1.8.1
Attachments
This manual includes attachments. The portable document format (PDF) attachments
are identified by the paperclip icon shown in Figure 1-1. The Microsoft Word
attachments are identified by the blue paperclip icon shown in Figure 1-1.
PDF Paperclip Icon
Microsoft Word
Paperclip Icon
Figure 1-1: Paperclip Icons
1.8.2
Click
This manual uses the word “click” to refer to using a mouse to choose or select a
command, window, button, or option.
Example: Click OK.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
1-5
Typographic and Usage Conventions
How to Use this Manual
See Section 1.8.11, Select for more information.
1.8.3
Commands
Menu, keyboard and button commands are in Proper Case, bold.
Example: Setup > Configure menu command.
1.8.4
Genus and Species Names
Family names and genus/species names of bacteria are italicized.
Example: Enterobacteriaceae
Example: Klebsiella pneumoniae
1.8.5
Keyboard Entry
Most of the actions you take in a graphical interface use the mouse. When keyboard
entry is required, certain conventions are used:
• An instruction to enter data begins with the words “Enter” or “Type.”
• Special function keys are shown in Proper Case, bold.
Example: Enter, Tab, Delete
• An instruction to use one of these keys begins with the word “Press.”
• Function keys that you must press simultaneously are shown together like this:
Shift + Tab
1.8.6
Mouse Actions
This manual uses the word “click” to refer to pressing the left mouse button one time
to choose or select a command, window, button or option.
Example: Click OK.
The term “right-click” refers to pressing the right mouse button one time to perform
these actions. “Double-click” refers to using two clicks in rapid succession to select a
command, window, button, or option.
1.8.7
Names and Titles
The names and titles of menus, dialog boxes, fields, icons, buttons and settings are in
Proper Case, bold.
Example: Setup menu.
The names of windows are in Proper Case, but are not bolded.
Example: Configuration window.
1-6
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
How to Use this Manual
1.8.8
Typographic and Usage Conventions
Press
This manual uses the word “press” to refer to pressing a key on the keyboard in order
to initiate action in the software. “Press” is also used to refer to pressing switches and
buttons on the instrument or other hardware components.
Example: Press Enter.
Note:
1.8.9
The “press Enter” command is often not stated explicitly in software
procedures, because it is commonly understood that you press this key after
you enter data into the system using a keyboard.
Procedural Steps
Steps in procedures are sequentially numbered. A bullet list in a step indicates
options.
1.8.10
References
References to chapter and section titles in this manual are in Proper Case.
Example: See Chapter 1, How to Use this Manual.
References to other manuals are in Proper Case and italic font.
Example: See the VITEK® Instrument and Accessories Manual.
Quick access to references are available if you are viewing this document
electronically in a portable document format (PDF). References may appear with a
blue font, indicating that they are linked to another step, section, procedure, or task in
this manual. Clicking the reference will take you directly to the location of the
reference in this manual. The Table of Contents, List of Figures, List of Tables,
Chapter Contents, and Index are all linked, but do not appear with a blue font.
1.8.11
Select
The word “select” is generally used for selecting menus, menu commands, and
graphical user interface (GUI) navigation.
Example: Select File > Save.
See Section 1.8.2, Click for more information.
1.8.12
User Input
Instructions for user input begin with the word “type” or “enter.” This manual uses bold
for literal user input and italic for placeholders.
Example of Literal User Input: In the box, type April 1.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
1-7
Warnings, Cautions, and Information
How to Use this Manual
In the Literal User Input example, you are to type exactly what you see on the page
(April 1 in this example).
Example of a Placeholder: Enter your password before you...
In the Placeholder example, you are to type your assigned password.
1.9
Warnings, Cautions, and Information
This manual uses different types of symbols to alert you to important information.
Symbols and their associated information are labeled in text where they occur and set
off from surrounding paragraphs, as shown in the following examples.
WARNING
Warning is a statement that alerts the user to the possibility of injury,
death, or other serious adverse reactions associated with the use or
misuse of a device.
CAUTION: Caution is a statement that alerts the user to the possibility
of a problem with the device associated with its use or misuse. Such
problems include device malfunction, device failure, damage to the
device, or damage to other property. Where applicable, a caution
statement may include a precaution that should be taken to avoid the
hazard.
IMPORTANT:
Note:
1-8
Important relates to content presented in this manual. It is used to
reinforce the importance of your understanding or remembering
something.
Note supplies additional information about a topic.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Chapter 2: System Setup
About this Chapter
This chapter contains instructions for unpacking, installing, and setting up the
VITEK® 2 Compact system. The steps of this procedure with a check mark
to the
left identifies the steps referenced in the corresponding Appendix C, Installation
Checklist.
Note:
See Section 1.5, Reference Documents for a list of documents referenced
within this service manual. Always refer to the latest drawing revision.
Chapter Contents
2.1
Required Equipment • 2-2
2.2
Preparations for Unpacking the VITEK® 2 Compact System • 2-2
2.3
Unpacking Procedure • 2-3
2.4
System Placement and Connections • 2-4
2.5
System Cabling Diagrams • 2-6
2.6
Prepare Instrument for Power Up • 2-19
2.7
Power Up VITEK® 2 Compact System • 2-20
2.7.1
2.7.2
2.7.3
2.8
Verify Proper Instrument Operation • 2-37
2.8.1
2.8.2
2.9
Power On Peripherals • 2-20
Power On Host Computer and Set Language • 2-20
Power On Instrument • 2-36
General Instrument Information • 2-37
Login and Instrument Check • 2-38
Simulated Processing Cycle • 2-40
2.9.1
2.9.2
2.9.3
2.9.4
2.9.5
2.9.6
Instrument Setup • 2-40
Cassette Setup • 2-41
Fill Cycle Test • 2-41
Cassette Scan Test • 2-42
Sealing and Cassette Removal Test • 2-42
Card Reading and Card Unload Test • 2-43
2.10 Confirm Remote Diagnostic Access • 2-44
2.11 Software Login and Alarm Message Review • 2-44
2.12 Industry and 21 CFR Part 11 Setup • 2-45
2.12.1 General Configuration Access • 2-46
2.12.2 Enable Industry and 21 CFR Part 11 • 2-46
2.13 System Software Log Out • 2-46
2.14 Perform Full System Image to DVD • 2-47
2.15 Prepare and Verify DensiCHEK™ Plus • 2-47
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
2-1
Required Equipment
2.1
System Setup
Required Equipment
IMPORTANT:
Calibrated test equipment must be NIST or bioMérieux traceable and
bear a valid calibration sticker.
Table 2-1: Required Instrumentation and Equipment List
Item
Quantity
Ref. No.
Calibrated NIST Traceable Dial Thermometer
1
27690
Smart Manometer Kit (or equivalent)
1
399129-901
Calibrated Digital Multimeter
1
N/A
19.05 cm (7.5 in.) minimum square, lint-free dark cloth
1
N/A
* Kit Contents:
399148-1
SMART MANOMETER, ABSOLUTE (NIST traceable
accuracy of ± 0.025% of F.S.)
530678-1
VACUUM CHAMBER Y INSERT (includes Y fitting & tubing)
397057-3
FITTING, (Y), BARB,.125
285501-2
FITTING, 1/8 NPT BARBED
* Kit components may be ordered individually.
2.2
Preparations for Unpacking the VITEK® 2 Compact System
1. Inspect the shipping container for external damage.
2. If the shipping container is damaged, verify that the VITEK® 2 Compact system
is not damaged.
3. If the instrument is damaged, file a claim with the shipper and notify bioMérieux.
4. Check the packing list and verify that all required items are included in the
shipment.
5. Verify that there is suitable bench space for the VITEK® 2 Compact instrument,
that the bench is capable of supporting the VITEK® 2 Compact instrument, and
that the bench is level to within 3 degrees.
Note:
Retain the packaging materials and shipping container for future
transportation needs (if necessary).
CAUTION: The VITEK® 2 Compact instrument weighs approximately
75 kg (165 lb). At least two people are required to lift or move the
instrument. When lifting the instrument, use only the handhold
pockets on all four sides of the gray Base Pan (see Figure 2-1 for
handhold locations). Otherwise, severe instrument damage can occur.
2-2
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
System Setup
Unpacking Procedure
WARNING
The fastening straps may have sharp edges. Use caution when
handling the straps.
2.3
Unpacking Procedure
The following steps make up the recommended procedure to remove the VITEK® 2
Compact instrument from its shipping container.
1. Cut the fastening straps that are wrapped around the shipping container.
2. Carefully remove and discard the straps.
3. Carefully remove the shipping container top from the bottom mounting skid and
set it aside. Use extreme caution to avoid damaging the instrument or the
container top.
4. Remove the accessory kit, foam packing blocks, and shipping bag.
5. With at least one person at each end, carefully lift the instrument using the
handhold pockets located on the front, back, and sides of the Base Pan
(Figure 2-1).
Proper Handhold Locations
Figure 2-1: Proper Handhold Locations
6. Move away from the bottom skid and end cap, and place the instrument in the
desired location.
7. Unpack the host PC, monitor, printer, and any optional peripherals.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
2-3
System Placement and Connections
2.4
System Setup
System Placement and Connections
The VITEK® 2 Compact system is intended for use on any normal, flat bench top
commonly found in a microbiology lab. The bench top must be capable of supporting
the weight and size of the instrument.
WARNING
The power source to the VITEK® 2 Compact instrument must be
properly grounded.
WARNING
Do not install the VITEK® 2 Compact instrument in direct sunlight.
Strong light shining onto the front of the instrument can cause the
optics to read incorrectly.
WARNING
The VITEK® 2 Compact instrument contains electrical components and
devices. Use extreme caution when performing service or
maintenance tasks as there is a danger of electric shock.
CAUTION: Do not connect the UPS interface cable to the PC serial port.
Doing so may damage the equipment.
Note:
The VITEK® 2 Compact instrument will process a maximum of 15, 30, or 60
cards in the carousel at one time. The 15-card, 30-card, and 60-card
capacities are pre-configured at the factory. If a change in configuration is
required, see Section 5.8, Bay Controller Board (BCB) Replacement and
Section 5.9, BCB Hardware Key Installation.
1. Verify that all of the required outlets are properly grounded.
2. Place the VITEK® 2 Compact instrument in its permanent location.
Position the instrument to meet the minimum clearance of 11 cm (4.3 in.) on
both sides and 21 cm (8.3 in.) above the instrument to provide necessary
access for cleaning and maintenance.
3. Configure the VITEK® 2 Compact instrument’s Power Entry Module (PEM),
located on the right side of the instrument, to the appropriate power
2-4
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
System Setup
System Placement and Connections
configuration (100 V, 120 V, 220 V, or 240 V) per Table 2-2. A line diagram is
shown in Figure 2-2.
Table 2-2: Power Entry Module Settings
Local Power
Parts Required
Voltage Selector
100 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Fuse Drawer (P/N 190178-26)
5 A Fuse (P/N 192810-5)
100 V
120 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Fuse Drawer (P/N 190178-26)
5 A Fuse (P/N 192810-5)
120 V
220 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Dual Fuse Drawer (P/N 190178-50)
two 4 A fuses (P/N 192821-4)
220 V
230–240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Dual Fuse Drawer (P/N 190178-50)
two 4 A fuses (P/N 192821-4)
240 V
Voltage
Selector
Power Entry
Module
Fuse Drawer
Figure 2-2: Power Entry Module
4. Place the host PC, monitor, printer, and any optional peripherals in their
permanent location.
5. Configure the host PC switch setting to the appropriate power configuration
(110 V or 220 V).
6. Configure the system peripherals to the appropriate input voltage.
7. Properly connect all power cables and system cables, interfacing the VITEK® 2
Compact, host PC, monitor, and printer. See Table 2-3 for instrument cable
connection locations. See Section 2.5, System Cabling Diagrams for system
power connections and system cable connections.
Table 2-3: VITEK® 2 Compact Cable Connections
Connections
Connection Location
Power Cable
Right Side Panel (standard universal IEC power connector)
UPS Interface
Left Side Panel (9 pin, RS 232)
Computer Interface
Left Side Panel (25 pin, RS 232)
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
2-5
System Cabling Diagrams
2.5
System Setup
System Cabling Diagrams
Compact Instrument #2
Compact Instrument #1
Laser printer
Power Conditioner
1200VA
(optional)
Monitor
Keyboard
Plug approved Laser Printer directly
into a wall outlet. Do not plug Laser
Printer into a UPS or Power
Conditioner. (The current draw for the
laser printer heater will overload most
UPS and Power Conditioners.)
IOIO B
Mouse
IOIO A
Monitor
Host PC - (Back View)
Power Conditioner
1200VA
(optional)
IOIO B
Modem
IOIO A
Alternate Remote
Communications
The VITEK® 2 Compact system power configurations and system cabling diagrams
are shown in the following figures. The system cabling diagrams include the validated
peripheral configurations used with the HP® d530, HP® dc7100, HP® dc7700,
HP® dc7800 and HP® rp5700 host computer models.
Figure 2-3: VITEK® 2 Compact System Power Connection Diagram (with Optional
Power Conditioner)
2-6
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Laser printer
IOIO B
Monitor
Compact Instrument #1
Power Conditioner
1200VA
(optional)
Plug approved Laser Printer directly
into a wall outlet. Do not plug Laser
Printer into a UPS or Power
Conditioner. (The current draw for the
laser printer heater will overload most
UPS and Power Conditioners.)
Keyboard
Mouse
IOIO A
UPS 1500VA
(optional)
Monitor
Host PC - (Back View)
IOIO B
IOIO A
Alternate Remote
Communications
UPS 1500VA
(optional)
Compact Instrument #2
Power Conditioner
1200VA
(optional)
Modem
System Setup
System Cabling Diagrams
Figure 2-4: VITEK® 2 Compact System Power Connection Diagram
(with Optional UPS and Power Conditioner)
2-7
2-8
Keyboard
(PS2)
(optional)
Bar Code Scanner
(PS/2 Wedge:
HHP 3800 LR12)
Laser printer
(Parallel: Okidata B4350 or
USB: Lexmark E352dn)
For the latest approved PC platform
configurations, refer to the most recent VITEK® 2
Systems Configuration Specification document.
Monitor
(HP® L1502 or Phillips 170B7CS
or Phillips 170A8FS)
BCI #2
(optional)
Printer Cable
p/n 186152-10
UPS 1500VA
(optional)
UPS/Instr. Cable
p/n 186133-10
V2c-PC Y Cable
p/n 186129-10
Ethernet Switch
to
Shared Printer
(optional)
Alternate
Remote
Communications
Mouse
(USB: HP®
Optical Scroll)
BCI #1
(optional)
Serial Cable
DB9-DB9 p/n 186126-XX
DB9-DB25 p/n 186065-XX
A
B
Data
(Green)
Telephone
Compact Instrument
Analog Modem
Telecommunications
(PCI: WinModem)
Diag.
Telco
System Cabling Diagrams
System Setup
Figure 2-5: System Cabling Diagram – HP® d530 Host PC and One VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
(optional)
Bar Code Scanner
(PS/2 Wedge:
HHP 3800 LR12)
Keyboard
(PS/2)
Laser printer
(Parallel: Okidata B4350 or
USB: Lexmark E352dn)
For the latest approved PC platform
configurations, refer to the most
recent VITEK® 2 Systems
Configuration Specification
document.
Monitor
(HP® L1502 or
Phillips 170B7CS or
Phillips 170A8FS)
BCI #1
(optional)
Printer Cable
p/n 186152-10
BCI #2
(optional)
Ethernet Switch
to
Shared Printer
(optional)
UPS/Instr. Cable
p/n 186133-10
UPS 1500VA
(optional)
Analog Modem
Telecommunications
(PCI: WinModem)
Alternate
Remote
Communications
Mouse
(USB: HP®
Optical Scroll)
Compact Instrument #2
Serial Cable
DB9-DB9 p/n 186126-XX
DB9-DB25 p/n 186065-XX
A
B
Diag.
D
Diag.
B
UPS/Instr. Cable
p/n 186133-10
V2c-PC Y Cable
p/n 186129-10
Data
A
Telephone
Compact Instrument #1
V2c-PC Y Cable
p/n 186129-10
Data
C
4 Port Serial Cable
(Green) Modem
UPS 1500VA
(optional)
System Setup
System Cabling Diagrams
Figure 2-6: System Cabling Diagram – HP® d530 Host PC and Two VITEK® 2 Compact Instruments
2-9
HP® L1740 Only
USB Cable to
Monitor
(Speaker to Monitor)
Line Out
(Green)
(optional)
Bar Code
Scanner
(PS/2 Wedge:
HHP 3800 LR12)
Keyboard
(PS/2)
Laser Printer
(USB: HP® 1320n or
USB: Lexmark E352dn)
For the latest approved PC platform
configurations, refer to the most recent VITEK® 2
Systems Configuration Specification document.
Analog Modem
Telecommunications
(USB: USR 5633 A/B)
Telco
2
4
Serial
Interface
Serial
Interface
UPS 1500VA
(optional)
BCI #2
(optional)
Serial Cable
DB9-DB9 p/n 186126-XX
DB9-DB25 p/n 186065-XX
BCI #1
(optional)
1
3
UPS/Instr. Cable
p/n 186133-10
Diag.
6
5
Data
8
8 Port Serial Cable
7
Compact Instrument
V2c-PC Y Cable
p/n 186129-10
Ethernet Switch
to
Shared Printer
(optional)
Alternate
Remote
Communications
External Modem
Mouse
(USB: HP®
Optical Scroll)
Mouse
2-10
Monitor
(HP® L1740 or
Samsung 713BM or
Philips 170B7CS or
Phillips 170A8FS)
Audio
USB
System Cabling Diagrams
System Setup
Figure 2-7: System Cabling Diagram – HP® dc7100 Host PC and One VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
HP® L1740 Only
USB Cable to
Monitor (Speaker
to Monitor)
Line Out
(Green)
(optional)
Bar Code
Scanner
(PS/2 Wedge:
HHP 3800 LR12)
Keyboard
(PS/2)
Compact Instrument #2
Analog Modem
Telecommunications
(USB: USR 5633 A/B)
Telco
UPS 1500VA
(optional)
V2c-PC Y Cable
p/n 186129-10
Ethernet Switch
to
Shared Printer
(optional)
UPS/Instr. Cable
p/n 186133-10
Alternate
Remote
Communications
External Modem
Mouse
(USB: HP® Optical
Scroll)
Laser Printer
(USB: HP® 1320n
USB: Lexmark E352dn)
For the latest approved PC platform
configurations, refer to the most recent VITEK® 2
Systems Configuration Specification document.
Monitor
(HP® L1740 or
Samsung 713BM or
Philips 170B7CS or
Phillips 170A8FS)
Audio
USB
Diag.
Data
2
4
Serial
Interface
Serial
Interface
UPS/Instr. Cable
p/n 186133-10
UPS 1500VA
(optional)
BCI #2
(optional)
Serial Cable
DB9-DB9 p/n 186126-XX
DB9-DB25 p/n 186065-XX
BCI #1
(optional)
1
3
Compact Instrument #1
6
Diag.
Data
5
8
7
8 Port Serial Cable
System Setup
System Cabling Diagrams
Figure 2-8: System Cabling Diagram – HP® dc7100 Host PC and Two VITEK® 2 Compact
Instruments
2-11
2-12
(optional)
Bar Code
Scanner
(PS/2 Wedge:
HHP 3800 LR12)
Keyboard
(PS/2)
Laser printer
(USB: HP® 1320n or
USB: HP® 2605dn or
USB: HP® 2015dn or
USB: Lexmark E352dn)
For the latest approved PC platform
configurations, refer to the most recent VITEK® 2
Systems Configuration Specification document.
Monitor
(HP® dc7700 used with Philips 170B7CS
or Phillips 170A8FS)
(HP® dc7800 used with Phillips 170A8FS)
Mouse
(PS/2 HP® Optical Scroll)
Mouse
Analog Modem
Telecommunications
(USB: USR 5633 A/B)
Telco
External Modem
USB
Compact Instrument
Alternate
Remote
Communications
Ethernet Switch
to
Shared Printer
(optional)
Diag.
Data
1
3
2
4
Serial
Interface
Serial
Interface
UPS 1500VA
(optional)
BCI #2
(optional)
Serial Cable
DB9-DB9 p/n 186126-XX
DB9-DB25 p/n 186065-XX
BCI #1
(optional)
UPS/Instr. Cable
p/n 186133-10
V2c-PC Y Cable
p/n 186129-10
6
8
5
7
8 Port Serial Cable
186197-100
System Cabling Diagrams
System Setup
Figure 2-9: System Cabling Diagram – HP® dc7700 / dc7800 Host PC
and One VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
(optional)
Bar Code
Scanner
(PS/2 Wedge:
HHP 3800 LR12)
Keyboard
(PS/2)
Laser printer
(USB: HP® 1320n or
USB: HP® 2605dn or
USB: HP® 2015dn or
USB: Lexmark E352dn)
For the latest approved PC platform
configurations, refer to the most recent VITEK® 2
Systems Configuration Specification document.
Monitor
(HP® dc7700 used with Philips 170B7CS
or Phillips 170A8FS)
(HP® dc7800 used with Phillips 170A8FS)
Mouse
(PS/2 HP® Optical Scroll)
Mouse
UPS 1500VA
(optional)
V2c-PC Y Cable
p/n 186129-10
Ethernet Switch
to
Shared Printer
(optional)
Compact Instrument #2
Analog Modem
Telecommunications
(USB: USR 5633 A/B)
Telco
UPS/Instr. Cable
p/n 186133-10
Alternate
Remote
Communications
External Modem
USB
Diag.
Data
2
4
Serial
Interface
Serial
Interface
UPS/Instr. Cable
p/n 186133-10
UPS 1500VA
(optional)
BCI #2
(optional)
Serial Cable
DB9-DB9 p/n 186126-XX
DB9-DB25 p/n 186065-XX
BCI #1
(optional)
1
3
Compact Instrument #1
6
Diag.
8
5
Data
7
8 Port Serial Cable
186197-100
System Setup
System Cabling Diagrams
Figure 2-10: System Cabling Diagram – HP® dc7700 / HP® dc7800 Host PC
and Two VITEK® 2 Compact Instruments
2-13
2-14
2
(COM12)
1
(COM11)
3
(COM13)
(COM14)
4
Laser printer
(USB: HP® 1320n or
USB: HP® 2605dn or
USB: HP® 2015dn or
USB: Lexmark E352dn)
4 Port USB Serial Adapter
(optional)
Bar Code
Scanner
(PS/2 Wedge:
HHP 3800 LR12)
Keyboard
(PS/2)
For the latest approved PC platform
configurations, refer to the most recent VITEK® 2
Systems Configuration Specification document.
Monitor
(HP dc7700 used with Philips 170B7CS
or Phillips 170A8FS)
(HP® dc7800 used with Phillips 170A8FS)
®
Mouse
(PS/2 HP® Optical Scroll)
Mouse
UPS/Instr. Cable
p/n 186133-10
Compact Instrument #3
UPS/Instr. Cable
p/n 186133-10
Compact Instrument #2
Analog Modem
Telecommunications
(USB: USR 5633 A/B)
Telco
Ethernet Switch
to
Shared Printer
(optional)
Alternate
Remote
Communications
External Modem
USB
UPS 1500VA
(optional)
UPS 1500VA
(optional)
V2c-PC Y Cable
p/n 186129-10
ViLINK®
(optional)
Diag.
Data
2
4
Serial
Interface
Serial
Interface
UPS/Instr. Cable
p/n 186133-10
UPS 1500VA
(optional)
BCI #2
(optional)
Serial Cable
DB9-DB9 p/n 186126-XX
DB9-DB25 p/n 186065-XX
BCI #1
(optional)
1
3
Compact Instrument #1
6
Diag.
8
5
Data
7
8 Port Serial Cable
186197-100
System Cabling Diagrams
System Setup
Figure 2-11: System Cabling Diagram – HP® dc7700 / HP® dc7800 Host PC
and Three VITEK® 2 Compact Instruments
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
2
(COM12)
1
(COM11)
3
(COM13)
(COM14)
4
Laser printer
(USB: HP® 1320n or
USB: HP® 2605dn or
USB: HP® 2015dn or
USB: Lexmark E352dn)
4 Port USB Serial Adapter
(optional)
Bar Code
Scanner
(PS/2 Wedge:
HHP 3800 LR12)
Keyboard
(PS/2)
For the latest approved PC platform
configurations, refer to the most recent VITEK® 2
Systems Configuration Specification document.
Monitor
(HP® dc7700 used with Philips 170B7CS
or Phillips 170A8FS)
(HP® dc7800 used with Phillips 170A8FS)
Mouse
(PS/2 HP® Optical Scroll)
Mouse
UPS/Instr. Cable
p/n 186133-10
Compact Instrument #4
UPS/Instr. Cable
p/n 186133-10
Compact Instrument #2
Analog Modem
Telecommunications
(USB: USR 5633 A/B)
Telco
Ethernet Switch
to
Shared Printer
(optional)
Alternate
Remote
Communications
External Modem
USB
UPS 1500VA
(optional)
UPS 1500VA
(optional)
V2c-PC Y Cable
p/n 186129-10
ViLINK
(optional)
®
Diag.
Data
2
4
Serial
Interface
Serial
Interface
UPS/Instr. Cable
p/n 186133-10
Compact Instrument #3
UPS/Instr. Cable
p/n 186133-10
UPS 1500VA
(optional)
UPS 1500VA
(optional)
BCI #2
(optional)
Serial Cable
DB9-DB9 p/n 186126-XX
DB9-DB25 p/n 186065-XX
BCI #1
(optional)
1
3
Compact Instrument #1
6
Diag.
8
5
Data
7
8 Port Serial Cable
186197-100
System Setup
System Cabling Diagrams
Figure 2-12: System Cabling Diagram – HP® dc7700 / HP® dc7800 Host PC
and Four VITEK® 2 Compact Instruments
2-15
2-16
COM4
5V/12V
Laser printer
(USB: HP® 1320n or
USB: HP® 2605dn or
USB: HP® 2015dn or
USB: Lexmark E352dn or
USB: Lexmark E360dn)
Analog Modem
Telecommunications
(USB: USR 5633 A/B
or USR 5637)
Alternate
Remote
Communications
Ethernet Switch
to
Shared Printer
(optional)
Data
COM3
5V/12V
Telco
External Modem
USB
Diag.
BCI #2
(optional)
Compact Instrument
V2c-PC Y Cable
p/n 186129-10
Monitor
(Samsung 713BM or
Philips 170B7CS or
Phillips 170A8FS or
HP L1710)
UPS/Instr. Cable
p/n 186133-10
UPS 1500VA
(optional)
Mouse
(PS/2 HP®
Optical Scroll)
BCI #1
(optional)
Serial Cable
DB9-DB9 p/n 186126-XX
DB9-DB25 p/n 186065-XX
COM1 5V/9V/12V
For the latest approved PC platform
configurations, refer to the most recent VITEK® 2
Systems Configuration Specification document.
Serial Cable
DB9-DB9 p/n 186126-XX
DB9-DB25 p/n 186065-XX
COM2 5V/12V
Note: The HP® rp5700 ports labeled COM3 and COM4 are configured
as COM5 and COM6 in the operating system.
Do not connect the UPS interface cable to the PC serial port.
Doing so may damage the equipment.
Keyboard
(PS/2)
(optional)
Bar Code
Scanner
(PS/2 Wedge:
HHP 3800 LR12 or
PS/2 Wedge:
Honeywell 3800G)
Mouse
System Cabling Diagrams
System Setup
Figure 2-13: System Cabling Diagram – HP® rp5700 Host PC
and One VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
COM4
5V/12V
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Laser printer
(USB: HP® 1320n or
USB: HP® 2605dn or
USB: HP® 2015dn or
USB: Lexmark E352dn or
USB: Lexmark E360dn)
Analog Modem
Telecommunications
(USB: USR 5633 A/B
or USR 5637)
Alternate
Remote
Communications
BCI #2
(optional)
Monitor
(Samsung 713BM or
Philips 170B7CS or
Phillips 170A8FS or
HP L1710)
UPS 1500VA
(optional)
UPS/Instr.
Cable
p/n 186133-10
V2c-PC Y Cable
p/n 186129-10
Compact Instrument #2
BCI #1
(optional)
Mouse
(PS/2 HP®
Optical Scroll)
Serial Cable
DB9-DB9 p/n 186126-XX
DB9-DB25 p/n 186065-XX
COM1 5V/9V/12V
For the latest approved PC platform
configurations, refer to the most recent VITEK® 2
Systems Configuration Specification document.
Serial Cable
DB9-DB9 p/n 186126-XX
DB9-DB25 p/n 186065-XX
COM2 5V/12V
Note: The HP® rp5700 ports labeled COM3 and COM4 are configured
as COM5 and COM6 in the operating system.
Compact Instrument #1
V2c-PC Y Cable
p/n 186129-10
Ethernet Switch
to
Shared Printer
(optional)
Data
Data
COM3
5V/12V
Telco
External Modem
USB
Diag.
Diag.
Do not connect the UPS interface cable to the PC serial port.
Doing so may damage the equipment.
UPS 1500VA
(optional)
UPS/Instr.
Cable
p/n 186133-10
Keyboard
(PS/2)
(optional)
Bar Code
Scanner
(PS/2 Wedge:
HHP 3800 LR12 or
PS/2 Wedge:
Honeywell 3800G)
Mouse
System Setup
System Cabling Diagrams
Figure 2-14: System Cabling Diagram – HP® rp5700 Host PC
and Two VITEK® 2 Compact Instruments
2-17
2-18
COM4
5V/12V
ViLINK ®
(optional)
2
(COM12)
1
(COM11)
(COM13)
3
4
Alternate
Remote
Communications
(COM14)
4 Port USB Serial Adapter
Laser printer
(USB: HP® 1320n or
USB: HP® 2605dn or
USB: HP® 2015dn or
USB: Lexmark E352dn or
USB: Lexmark E360dn)
Analog Modem
Telecommunications
(USB: USR 5633 A/B
or USR 5637)
BCI #2
(optional)
Monitor
(Samsung 713BM or
Philips 170B7CS or
Phillips 170A8FS or
HP L1710)
UPS 1500VA
(optional)
UPS/Instr.
Cable
p/n 186133-10
UPS 1500VA
(optional)
UPS/Instr.
Cable
p/n 186133-10
V2c-PC Y Cable
p/n 186129-10
Compact Instrument #2
BCI #1
(optional)
Mouse
(PS/2 HP®
Optical Scroll)
Serial Cable
DB9-DB9 p/n 186126-XX
DB9-DB25 p/n 186065-XX
COM1 5V/9V/12V
For the latest approved PC platform
configurations, refer to the most recent VITEK® 2
Systems Configuration Specification document.
Serial Cable
DB9-DB9 p/n 186126-XX
DB9-DB25 p/n 186065-XX
COM2 5V/12V
Note: The HP® rp5700 ports labeled COM3 and COM4 are configured
as COM5 and COM6 in the operating system.
Compact Instrument #3
V2c-PC Y Cable
p/n 186129-10
Ethernet Switch
to
Shared Printer
(optional)
Data
Data
COM3
5V/12V
Telco
External Modem
USB
Diag.
Diag.
Do not connect the UPS interface cable to the PC serial port.
Doing so may damage the equipment.
UPS 1500VA
(optional)
UPS/Instr.
Cable
p/n 186133-10
Keyboard
(PS/2)
(optional)
Bar Code
Scanner
(PS/2 Wedge:
HHP 3800 LR12 or
PS/2 Wedge:
Honeywell 3800G)
Mouse
System Cabling Diagrams
System Setup
Figure 2-15: System Cabling Diagram – HP® rp5700 Host PC
and Three VITEK® 2 Compact Instruments
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
2.6
COM4
5V/12V
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
ViLINK®
(optional)
2
(COM12)
1
(COM11)
(COM13)
3
4
Alternate
Remote
Communications
(COM14)
4 Port USB Serial Adapter
Laser printer
(USB: HP® 1320n or
USB: HP® 2605dn or
USB: HP® 2015dn or
USB: Lexmark E352dn or
USB: Lexmark E360dn)
Analog Modem
Telecommunications
(USB: USR 5633 A/B
or USR 5637)
BCI #2
(optional)
Compact Instrument #4
Monitor
(Samsung 713BM or
Philips 170B7CS or
Phillips 170A8FS or
HP L1710)
UPS 1500VA
(optional)
UPS/Instr.
Cable
p/n 186133-10
UPS 1500VA
(optional)
UPS/Instr.
Cable
p/n 186133-10
V2c-PC Y Cable
p/n 186129-10
Compact Instrument #3
Compact Instrument #2
BCI #1
(optional)
Mouse
(PS/2 HP®
Optical Scroll)
Serial Cable
DB9-DB9 p/n 186126-XX
DB9-DB25 p/n 186065-XX
COM1 5V/9V/12V
For the latest approved PC platform
configurations, refer to the most recent VITEK® 2
Systems Configuration Specification document.
Serial Cable
DB9-DB9 p/n 186126-XX
DB9-DB25 p/n 186065-XX
COM2 5V/12V
Note: The HP® rp5700 ports labeled COM3 and COM4 are configured
as COM5 and COM6 in the operating system.
Compact Instrument #1
V2c-PC Y Cable
p/n 186129-10
Ethernet Switch
to
Shared Printer
(optional)
Data
Data
COM3
5V/12V
Telco
External Modem
USB
Diag.
Diag.
Do not connect the UPS interface cable to the PC serial port.
Doing so may damage the equipment.
UPS 1500VA
(optional)
UPS/Instr.
Cable
p/n 186133-10
UPS 1500VA
(optional)
UPS/Instr.
Cable
p/n 186133-10
Keyboard
(PS/2)
(optional)
Bar Code
Scanner
(PS/2 Wedge:
HHP 3800 LR12 or
PS/2 Wedge:
Honeywell 3800G)
Mouse
System Setup
Prepare Instrument for Power Up
Figure 2-16: System Cabling Diagram – HP® rp5700 Host PC
and Four VITEK® 2 Compact Instruments
Prepare Instrument for Power Up
1. Clean the instrument Vacuum Chamber Door seal with a water-dampened cloth
or paper towel.
2. Clean both glass surfaces of each Transmittance Optics module with lint-free
lens paper, or an alcohol wipe with the excess alcohol squeezed out followed by
lint-free lens paper. While cleaning the emitter side of the Transmittance Optics
2-19
Power Up VITEK® 2 Compact System
System Setup
modules, push the reader head plate down and clean the glass as close to the
belt as possible.
Note:
If Reader Head Roller Plate (P/N 532151-903) is installed, the belt will not be
routed close to the emitter side of the Transmittance Optics.
3. Open the instrument Front and Top Access Doors.
4. Install the Carousel Cover.
5. Install a calibrated NIST Traceable Dial Thermometer (P/N 27690) into the
Incubator Cover, ensuring it is snapped all the way in place.
Note:
Industry instruments are shipped with a dial thermometer. The thermometer
is an option for clinical instruments. (If a Dial Thermometer is not provided
with the instrument, use the one referenced in Table 2-1, Required
Instrumentation and Equipment List.)
6. Turn the thermometer power ON.
7. Close all instrument doors.
8. Place the bar code labels on the cassette(s).
2.7
Power Up VITEK® 2 Compact System
2.7.1
Power On Peripherals
1. Turn the UPS and Power Conditioner switches ON, if applicable. (Both of these
are supplied only as options with the VITEK® 2 Compact system.)
2. Turn the Monitor and Printer power switches ON.
2.7.2
Power On Host Computer and Set Language
Note:
2.7.2.1
By default, VITEK® 2 Systems PCs are configured with Networking disabled.
In order to install a VITEK® 2 Systems PC on a network, networking
installation and configuration procedures, which include the application of
important security patches, must be followed. Please consult the ViLINK®
Installation Instructions or the INDUSTRY Networking Configuration Guide
for procedures on installing a VITEK® 2 Systems PC on a network.
English Setup
1. Turn the host PC power switch ON.
Once the host PC completes booting, log in to the Admin account.
2-20
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Power Up VITEK® 2 Compact System
System Setup
User Name: Admin
Password: bmx_admin
Note:
This is the factory default password for Admin and may be changed by the
user at a future time. See Section 6.1.1, Login to Host PC Operating System
for more information.
2. From the Windows® taskbar, select Start > Settings > Control Panel > Date
and Time.
3. Set the date, time, and time zone.
4. Simultaneously press Ctrl + Alt + Delete to reboot the host PC.
5. Leave a USB flash drive in the USB port for nightly backup use.
6. Proceed to Section 2.7.3, Power On Instrument.
2.7.2.2
Non-English Setup
CAUTION: The choice of language should correspond to the language
settings of all external system interfaces, such as the VITEK® 2
Systems Software language and Laboratory Information Systems.
Failure to do so may result in the inability to associate test results with
a patient record or possibly associating test results with the wrong
patient record.
To change the default regional and language settings, perform this section in its
entirety.
1. Turn the host PC power switch ON.
2. If applicable, configure the Bar Code Scanner to match the keyboard by
scanning the appropriate programming bar codes. (Refer to the Bar Code
Scanner User Guide.)
3. Once the host PC completes booting, log in to the operating system’s Admin
account.
User Name: Admin
Password: bmx_admin
Note:
This is the factory default password for Admin and may be changed by the
user at a future time. See Section 6.1.1, Login to Host PC Operating System
for more information.
4. From the Windows® taskbar, select Start > Settings > Control Panel > Date
and Time.
5. Set the date, time, and time zone.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
2-21
Power Up VITEK® 2 Compact System
System Setup
6. To change the default regional, language, and printer settings, log in to one of
the desired operating system Pre-Defined User Accounts. (See Table 2-4.)
Table 2-4: Pre-Defined User Accounts
Pre-Defined
User Account
User Name
Default Password
Usage
Administrator
Admin
bmx_admin
Intended for limited
use in recovery of
locked account.
Administrator
bmx_admin
“password of the day” or
“password of the
month”1
Used by bioMérieux
Personnel for on-site
servicing. Password
changes daily (d530,
dc7100) or monthly
(dc7700 and newer)
depending on
computer model.
Administrator
bmx_remote2
“password of the
month”1
Used by bioMérieux
personnel for remote
servicing. Password
changes monthly.
Administrator
temp_admin3
“password of the hour”1
bioMérieux technical
support can provide to
customer when
assisting them over
the phone. Password
changes hourly.
Administrator
LabAdmin
labadmin
Customer login for
managing the PC.
Lab Supervisor
LabSuper
labsuper
Customer login for
managing the
VITEK® 2 Systems
software.
Lab Technologist
LabTech
labtech
Customer login for
managing the
VITEK® 2 Systems
software.
1These passwords are set automatically by the PC in order to enhance security and
availability of these accounts. These passwords can be obtained from the GCS portal.
2The bmx_remote account is only available on dc7800 and newer PCs or PCs with ViLINK®
installed.
3The temp_admin account is only available on dc7700 and newer PCs.
7. From the Windows® taskbar select Start > Settings > Control Panel >
Regional and Language Options.
Note:
Not all accounts will have the Advanced tab available.
8. On the Regional Options tab, set the Standards and Formats to the desired
language. You may also want to set the Location. When finished, click Apply.
Do not restart at this time.
2-22
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Power Up VITEK® 2 Compact System
System Setup
Figure 2-17: Regional Options
9. On the Languages tab, set the Language used in menus and dialogs to the
desired language. When finished, click Apply. Do not restart at this time.
Figure 2-18: Language Selection
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
2-23
Power Up VITEK® 2 Compact System
System Setup
10. Click Details to go to the Text Services and Input Languages dialog.
11. On the Settings tab, set the Default input language to the desired language. If
the desired language does not appear in the drop-down list, click Add and
select the desired language. When finished, click Apply.
Figure 2-19: Settings Tab
IMPORTANT:
For input languages that require selection of an Input Method Editor
(IME), such as Chinese, the Keyboard Layout/IME must be selected
before the keyboard can be used. If the selection of an IME is not
required, click OK and proceed to Step 15.
12. On the Settings tab, click on the desired keyboard and click Add to go to the
Add Input Language dialog.
2-24
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Power Up VITEK® 2 Compact System
System Setup
Figure 2-20: Keyboard Selection
13. Select the Keyboard layout/IME option that you prefer. When finished, click OK.
Figure 2-21: Add Input Language
14. Repeat Step 12 and Step 13 to add additional Input Method Editors. When
finished, click OK.
15. On the Advanced tab, if available under the current account, set the Language
for non-Unicode programs to the desired language. If you have Administrator
privileges, you can check the box to “Apply all settings to the current user
account and to the default user profile” in order for these language settings to
apply to any new user accounts. When done, click OK.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
2-25
Power Up VITEK® 2 Compact System
System Setup
Figure 2-22: Advanced Tab
16. From the Windows® taskbar, click Start > Settings > Printers and Faxes. The
Printers and Faxes window appears.
17. Highlight the applicable printer. From the Printer Tasks, click Select Printing
Preferences. Refer to the printer’s user manual for instructions on how to set
the correct paper size. Close the Printer window when complete.
18. Repeat this procedure, (Step 6 to Step 17) to change the default regional,
language, and printer settings for each additional Pre-Defined User Account.
19. Reboot the host PC for these settings to take effect.
20. Once the host PC completes booting, log into the Windows® operating system
using an Admin account:
User Name: Admin
Password: bmx_admin
21. Insert the VITEK® 2 Systems Software CD (version 05.01) into the DVD drive.
22. Right-click the computer desktop icon (i.e. LabAdmin on BMXHOST1) and
select Explore.
23. Select the CD drive (e.g. E:) in the navigation tree.
24. Double-click the VITEK 2 Systems Software folder.
25. Double-click the install-v2s icon.
2-26
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Power Up VITEK® 2 Compact System
System Setup
26. Choose the appropriate language and click OK.
CAUTION: Changing the VITEK® 2 Systems software language erases
all patient data; therefore, the language should be set at the time of
installation.
The InstallAnywhere® application will open. Read the Important Software
Update Information and follow the on-screen installation instructions to install
the software.
IMPORTANT:
After the installation process starts, do not press Cancel.
IMPORTANT:
If the installation is successful, but an error is detected, call
bioMérieux for assistance.
IMPORTANT:
If the VITEK® 2 Systems software installation does not work, DO NOT
attempt to execute the installation process again. Call bioMérieux
immediately for assistance.
27. If the update is successful, the software installer will notify you that the system
must be restarted to finalize the installation process. Click the option to
automatically restart the system now.
28. Double-click the VITEK 2 Systems desktop icon to start the VITEK® 2 Systems
software.
IMPORTANT:
If the VITEK® 2 Systems software will not start, wait a few minutes and
try to initiate the system again.
29. Log in to the VITEK® 2 Systems software with a user ID that belongs to the
Administrator’s group.
30. Navigate to the Main View.
31. Click the Configuration icon.
32. From the Configuration menu, select Version.
33. Verify the current VITEK® 2 Systems software version is release 05.01.
IMPORTANT:
If the software version is not release 05.01, DO NOT continue. Call
bioMérieux for assistance.
34. Exit the VITEK® 2 Systems software.
35. Right-click the computer desktop icon (i.e. LabAdmin on BMXHOST1) and
select Explore.
36. Select the CD drive (e.g. E:) in the navigation tree.
37. Double-click the Software User Manual folder.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
2-27
Power Up VITEK® 2 Compact System
System Setup
38. Double-click the install-v2s-manual icon.
39. Choose the appropriate language and click OK.
Note: The language selected is for the installation process only, not the language of the
Software User Manual.
The InstallAnywhere® application will open. Follow the on-screen installation
instructions to install the user documentation.
40. At the Load Documentation CD prompt, remove the VITEK® 2 Systems
Software CD (version 05.01) from the DVD drive.
41. Insert the VITEK® 2 Systems Software User Manual CD and click Next.
42. Choose the user documentation language. See Table 2-5 to determine which
language code you will need.
Table 2-5: Language Codes
2-28
Language English Name
Origin Name
of Language
Language
Code
Bulgarian
български
BG
Chinese
Zhongwen
ZH
Czech
Ceský
CS
Danish
Dansk
DA
English
English
EN
Estonian
Eesti
ET
French
français
FR
German
Deutsch
DE
Greek
Ellenika
EL
Hungarian
magyar
HU
Italian
Italiano
IT
Japanese
Nihongo
JA
Latvian
Latviešu
LV
Lithuanian
Lietuviu
LT
Norwegian
norsk
NO
Polish
Polski
PL
Portuguese
português
PT
Romanian
româna
RO
Russian
Russkij
RU
Slovak
slovenský
SK
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Power Up VITEK® 2 Compact System
System Setup
Table 2-5: Language Codes (Continued)
Language English Name
Origin Name
of Language
Language
Code
Spanish
Español
ES
Swedish
Svenska
SV
Turkish
Türkçe
TR
43. Select the file name that contains the desired language code, and click Next.
Example: An example of an English file name would be EN_24482.
Note:
If the language code that you need does not appear on the list, call
bioMérieux for assistance.
The Copying Documents from CD display appears, followed by the Install
Complete window.
44. Review the Install Complete window to verify a successful installation and click
Done to close the installation application window.
45. Close all open windows.
46. Remove the VITEK® 2 Systems Software User Manual CD from the drive.
47. Log into the Windows® operating system with a user ID that belongs to the local
Administrator’s group.
A successful software manual installation generates the following:
• VITEK® 2 Systems documentation shortcut icon on the Desktop
• VITEK® 2 Systems documentation shortcut icon in the Start menu
The software manual is also accessible by clicking on the (?) icon within the
VITEK® 2 Systems software.
48. Verify that the updated software user manual has been installed.
49. From the desktop, double-click the V2S Documentation icon.
A screen may display asking if you would like Foxit Reader to be your default
PDF viewer.
50. Click Yes to set Foxit Reader as your default PDF viewer.
51. Verify that the revision date listed under the software user manual title is
(05/2010).
Note:
If the documentation installation process fails, or if you cannot access the
software user manual, repeat the software manual update instructions.
52. Select File > Exit to close the software user manual.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
2-29
Power Up VITEK® 2 Compact System
System Setup
53. Insert the VITEK® 2 Systems Base OS DVD (Base OS Image supplied with
your PC) into the DVD drive.
• rp5700 DV2SOS1–0501
54. Restart the host PC from the Windows® task bar by selecting Start > Shut
Down > Restart and click OK.
The computer boots from the Base OS DVD.
55. Select the language in which to see the backup/restore instructions.
Available languages:
• English
• Français
• Deutsch
• Italiano
• Español
• Portuguese
56. Press Enter.
57. Select option 1, Full System Backup.
58. Press Enter.
Note:
The system will briefly display several screens as it prepares for the backup.
The workstation will display the following message:
Error accessing CD/DVD disk (52101). CD/DVD is not blank. Insert
media not previously written to.
59. Remove the Base OS DVD and insert a blank DVD +R disk. Wait 30 seconds or
until the drive light dims.
60. After the disk initializes, press Retry.
The workstation displays the overall backup progress/percent complete of the
DVD image backup. When complete, the workstation will open the DVD tray
and display the following text:
Process complete. Remove CDROM and press any key to reboot.
Note:
2-30
Depending on the size of your database, the full system image creation
process may require more than one DVD+R. If a second DVD+R is required
to continue the process, the system will prompt you to remove the full
DVD+R and insert another blank DVD+R.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Power Up VITEK® 2 Compact System
System Setup
61. When the process finishes (approximately 30 minutes), remove the newly
created Full System Backup DVD and label it as “Full System Backup 05.01”
and record the date on the backup DVD.
Note:
If the full system image process required multiple DVD+Rs, label the first
DVD “Disk 1” and the second DVD “Disk 2”.
62. Close the DVD drive tray. After you have removed the full system image
DVD+R, press any key to reboot the system.
63. Log in to the Windows® operating system using your standard login and
password.
64. Provide the DVD to the customer as their Restore DVD. (The factory DVD is in
English only and does not have the VITEK® 2 software installed).
65. Leave a USB flash drive in the USB port for nightly backup use.
2.7.2.3
Multiple Instrument Port Configuration
IMPORTANT:
Do not attempt to install more than two instruments on any host PC
other than the dc7700, dc7800, or rp5700.
IMPORTANT:
For three or four instruments to be configured with the host PC using
the 4 Port USB Serial Adapter, all of the instruments must be VITEK® 2
Compact instruments. You cannot configure VITEK® 2 and/or
VITEK® 2 XL instruments with VITEK® 2 Compact instruments on the
same host PC.
1. Make sure the PC is turned on and operational.
2. Log in to the bmx_admin account. The password of this login is a proprietary
algorithm and changes daily. To determine the appropriate password, refer to
the GCS Portal.
User Name: bmx_admin
Password: password of the day or password of the month (proprietary
algorithm)
Note:
Password changes daily (d530, dc7100) or monthly (dc7700 and newer)
depending on computer model.
3. Connect the 4 Port USB Serial Adapter to an available USB port on the back of
the host PC.
Note:
The host PC should automatically detect the new hardware, display a Found
New Hardware message, and install the appropriate drivers.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
2-31
Power Up VITEK® 2 Compact System
System Setup
4. Wait for the host PC to finish installing the drivers.
Note:
When the host PC has finished installing the appropriate drivers, a message
will appear stating that the new hardware is ready to use.
5. If the Systems Settings Change window appears and prompts you to restart the
system, click Yes.
Figure 2-23: System Settings Change Window
6. Once the host PC completes startup, log back in to the bmx_admin account.
7. Right-click the computer desktop icon (i.e. LabAdmin on BMXHOST1) and
select Manage.
Figure 2-24: Computer Desktop Icon Menu
8. From the navigation tree, expand System Tools and select the Device Manager
folder.
2-32
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Power Up VITEK® 2 Compact System
System Setup
Figure 2-25: Computer Management Window — Device Manager
9. From the Computer Management workspace, expand the Ports (COM & LPT)
entry.
Figure 2-26: Computer Management Window — Ports
10. Verify the ports listed for SeaPORT +4/232 USB to RS-232 Converter are
configured as shown in Table 2-6.
Table 2-6: SeaPORT +4/232 USB to RS-232 Converter Port Configuration
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
SeaPORT +4/232
USB to RS-232
Converter Port
Number
COM Port Number
Port 1
COM11
Port 2
COM12
Port 3
COM13
Port 4
COM14
2-33
Power Up VITEK® 2 Compact System
Note:
System Setup
If the ports listed for SeaPORT +4/232 USB to RS-232 Converter are
configured correctly, the multiple port configuration is complete. If the ports
listed for SeaPORT +4/232 USB to RS-232 Converter were not configured
correctly, perform Step 11 through Step 37 to configure the ports.
11. From the Ports (COM & LPT) window, right-click Port 4 of the SeaPORT +4/232
USB to RS-232 Converter and select Properties.
12. Click the Port Settings tab in the Properties window.
Figure 2-27: Properties Window — Port Settings
13. Click the Advanced button.
14. Click the arrow next to the COM Port Number field and select COM14 from the
drop-down list.
Figure 2-28: Advanced Settings
15. Click OK to save the setting and close the Advanced Settings window.
16. Click OK to close the Properties window.
17. From the Ports (COM & LPT) window, right-click Port 3 of the SeaPORT +4/232
USB to RS-232 Converter and select Properties.
18. Click the Port Settings tab in the Properties window.
19. Click the Advanced button.
2-34
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Power Up VITEK® 2 Compact System
System Setup
20. Click the arrow next to the COM Port Number field and select COM13 from the
drop-down list.
21. Click OK to save the setting and close the Advanced Settings window.
22. Click OK to close the Properties window.
23. From the Ports (COM & LPT) window, right-click Port 2 of the SeaPORT +4/232
USB to RS-232 Converter and select Properties.
24. Click the Port Settings tab in the Properties window.
25. Click the Advanced button.
26. Click the arrow next to the COM Port Number field and select COM12 from the
drop-down list.
27. Click OK to save the setting and close the Advanced Settings window.
28. Click OK to close the Properties window.
29. From the Ports (COM & LPT) window, right-click Port 1 of the SeaPORT +4/232
USB to RS-232 Converter and select Properties.
30. Click the Port Settings tab in the Properties window.
31. Click the Advanced button.
32. Click the arrow next to the COM Port Number field and select COM11 from the
drop-down list.
33. Click OK to save the setting and close the Advanced Settings window.
34. Click OK to close the Properties window.
35. Right-click Ports (COM & LPT) and select Scan for hardware changes.
Figure 2-29: Computer Management — Scan for Hardware Changes
36. Verify the ports listed for SeaPORT +4/232 USB to RS-232 Converter are
configured as shown in Figure 2-30.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
2-35
Power Up VITEK® 2 Compact System
System Setup
Figure 2-30: Computer Management — Port Settings
37. If the ports are not configured correctly, repeat Step 11 through Step 36.
2.7.3
Power On Instrument
1. Turn the VITEK® 2 Compact power switch to the ON position. The instrument
power switch is located on the right side of the instrument.
2. The first Initialization screen displays the VITEK® 2 Compact logo and the
bioMérieux logo (Figure 2-31).
Figure 2-31: Initialization Screen
3. The second Initialization screen displays the instrument name, VITEK® 2
Compact, copyright date, BCB version, and an initializing progress bar (see
Figure 2-32).
Figure 2-32: Second Initialization Screen
2-36
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
System Setup
Verify Proper Instrument Operation
4. Once power-up is complete, the Status screen displays Filler: Not Ready, the
Quad Missing icon, and the word Error in the lower left corner with an
alternating exclamation point (!).
5. From the keypad panel, press the Status/Menu key
Menu displays.
until the Main
6. From the Main Menu select Maintenance > Replace Carousel.
7. Follow the directions on the User Interface screen to install all four carousel
quadrousels. (Refer to Section E.3.3, Replacing the Carousel.)
8. From the keypad panel, press the Status/Menu key
screen displays.
until the Status
9. After a successful power-up, the User Interface screen should look similar to
Figure 2-33.
10. Review the instrument Status screen and ensure the carousel capacity is
correct, based on the instrument configuration.
• 15 slots available for a VITEK® 2 Compact 15 instrument.
• 30 slots available for a VITEK® 2 Compact without a BCB Hardware key
installed.
• 60 slots available for a VITEK® 2 Compact with a BCB Hardware key
installed.
Figure 2-33: Status Screen in Idle Condition
Note:
The instrument may still be warming.
2.8
Verify Proper Instrument Operation
2.8.1
General Instrument Information
1. Review the instrument Status screen for Warnings or Error Messages.
2. Review the instrument Status screen for Warning Indicators.
Note:
Refer to Section 6.3.1, Status Screen Review for detailed information.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
2-37
Verify Proper Instrument Operation
2.8.2
System Setup
Login and Instrument Check
1. From the desktop of the host PC, double-click the appropriate Instrument
Diagnostic icon (Instrument 1 Diagnostic, Instrument 2 Diagnostic, etc.).
2. At the diagnostic Prompt > type LOGIN watson9 and press Enter.
A line describing the login group confirms a successful login.
Note:
IMPORTANT:
Logins are case-sensitive.
This login is only to be used by trained bioMérieux personnel, and
must not be given to the customer. (See the VITEK® 2 Compact Field
Service Commands [Drawing 532612] for more information.)
3. At the Prompt > type VER and press Enter. Confirm that the displayed
firmware Application Version (BCB), BOOT, and SPN for nodes 2, 3, 6, and 8
match the latest revision per Drawing VKCXXX.
Record the firmware versions for future reference. (The version information is
also found from the Main Menu of the instrument’s User Interface screen by
selecting Diagnostics > Versions.)
4. At the Prompt > type SET_SYS_NUM XXXXX and press Enter (where XXXXX
is the company-assigned site number).
5. Verify instrument name. If the instrument has no name, at the Prompt > type
SET_INST_NAME XXXXX and press Enter (where XXXXX is the desired
name). Please note that multi-word entries must be enclosed within quotations.
6. For the purposes of this procedure, the incubator must remain ON for at least
one hour with all four Quadrousels installed, the Incubator Cover in place, and
the Thermometer installed.
7. Confirm the incubator is within specification (35.5 °C ±1°C) from the User
Interface Main Menu by selecting Diagnostics > Temperature. Record the
incubator temperature.
8. From the Keypad Panel, press the Status/Menu key
Screen displays.
until the Status
9. From the User Interface Main Menu select Maintenance > Temperature
Check and perform a manual incubator temperature check. Record the
temperature displayed on the disk thermometer. (Refer to Section E.2, Manual
Temperature Check (Optional) for detailed information.)
10. Confirm the Instrument Incubator Temperature on the User Interface reads
within ±1.0 °C of the temperature displayed on the Disk Thermometer.
11. At the Prompt > type ALIGN_ON and press Enter. This configures the
instrument for alignment, which includes unlocking the doors, displaying the
word ALIGN in the diagnostic prompt, and indicating on the User Interface that it
is in Maintenance mode.
12. Ensure that the Filler Door is closed.
2-38
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
System Setup
Verify Proper Instrument Operation
13. At the Prompt > type FILLER_LEAK_TEST and press Enter. The firmware
starts the Vacuum Pump, pulls down to the calibrated PSIA value, holds for 30
seconds, and returns to ambient pressure. Confirm that no errors occur.
• Confirm that the message “Success: NO leak was detected during the fill
cycle” appears.
• If the message “Error: leak was detected during the fill cycle” occurs, there
was a loss greater than or equal to 0.06 PSIA during the hold time. Fix the
leak and repeat this step.
14. Loosen the eight hex-head screws securing the Top Panel Assembly.
15. Remove the Top Panel Assembly by slightly lifting up the back end, moving the
Top Panel toward the back of the instrument, and lifting it up.
16. Set the Top Panel Assembly aside.
17. Disconnect the Vacuum Tubing Line from the small, barbed fitting at the back of
the Filler Chamber and connect it to the Y of the Vacuum Chamber Y Insert
(Figure 2-34).
See Step 19
See Step 17
See Step 18
Figure 2-34: Vacuum Tube Connections
18. Connect the shorter tubing length of the Vacuum Chamber Y Insert to the fitting
that was just occupied.
19. Connect the longer tubing length of the Vacuum Chamber Y Insert to your
Absolute Pressure Gauge.
20. Ensure that the Filler Chamber is empty and the door is closed.
21. Turn the Absolute Pressure Gauge ON.
22. Type the command CYCLE_VAC and press Enter. This runs a standard
vacuum cycle. Confirm the value displayed on the Pressure Gauge during the
five-second holding time is correct.
• If the value 0.89 PSIA ±0.04 PSIA is met, continue with Step 23.
• If the value 0.89 PSIA ±0.04 PSIA is not met or if an error occurs, perform the
Vacuum Filler Calibration procedure found in the VITEK® 2 Compact
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
2-39
Simulated Processing Cycle
System Setup
Alignment Procedure (Drawing 532600). When complete type the command
SAVE_ALIGNMENTS and press Enter.
23. Disconnect the Absolute Pressure Gauge tubing and reconnect the instrument
Vacuum Tubing.
24. Reinstall the Top Panel Assembly by first placing the front end underneath the
Front Panel Assembly. Carefully lower the back end. Secure the eight hex-head
screws.
25. At the Prompt > type ALIGN_OFF and press Enter. This disables Alignment
mode and the instrument reboots.
26. Wait for completion of the reboot before using the instrument.
27. Perform Section 5.20.2, Transmittance Minimum Threshold Reading Test and
HCB Test.
2.9
Simulated Processing Cycle
This section verifies proper processing operation of the instrument. During the
simulated processing cycle, visually check the operation of the VITEK® 2 Compact as
the cards are moved from one station to the next and note any misalignments. If
misalignments are observed, realign the section, as described in the VITEK® 2
Compact Alignment Procedure (Drawing 532600).
2.9.1
Instrument Setup
1. Temporarily disconnect the data end of the corresponding VT2c-PC Y cable
from the host PC.
2. Ensure the Filler Station is empty and the Filler Door is closed.
3. At the User Interface Keypad, press the Status/Menu key
Status screen displays.
until the
4. Select Maintenance > Unlock User Access Door > Yes. The User Access
Door unlocks.
5. Open both the Front and Top User Access Doors.
6. Apply electrical tape (or equivalent) to block the Top Access Door optical
sensors.
7. Quickly and without hesitation, apply electrical tape (or equivalent) to block the
Optical Sensors of the Front Access Door Sensor. The instrument re-initializes.
Note:
If an emergency stop (e-stop) occurs, remove the tape and recycle the
instrument power. Once initialized, resume the procedure at Step 2.
8. Cover the top of the Transmittance Optics with a dark, lint-free cloth.
9. Leave the Top and Front Access Doors open for visual confirmation of cassette
processing.
2-40
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
System Setup
2.9.2
Simulated Processing Cycle
Cassette Setup
Set up a VITEK® 2 Compact cassette as indicated in Figure 2-35. Set the cassette
aside for later use.
Empty test tube
1
Test Card for TX1 & TX3 (ENG-9)
Empty test tube
2
Test Card for TX1 & TX3 (ENG-9)
Empty test tube
3
Test Card for TX1 & TX3 (ENG-9)
Empty test tube
4
Test Card for TX1 & TX3 (ENG-9)
Empty test tube
5
Test Card for TX1 & TX3 (ENG-9)
Empty test tube
6
Test Card for TX1 & TX3 (ENG-9)
Empty test tube
7
Test Card for TX1 & TX3 (ENG-9)
Empty test tube
8
Test Card for TX1 & TX3 (ENG-9)
Empty test tube
9
Test Card for TX1 & TX3 (ENG-9)
Empty test tube
10
Test Card for TX1 & TX3 (ENG-9)
Figure 2-35: VITEK® 2 Compact Engineering Test Cards Arrangement
2.9.3
Fill Cycle Test
1. At the User Interface Keypad Panel, press Status/Menu key
Main Status screen appears.
until the
2. Press Start Fill.
3. Confirm the User Interface screen displays the following:
• The Filler status as Filling.
• A scrolling filling-in-progress indicator.
4. Confirm that the Filler Status Indicator is illuminated with a solid blue arrow.
5. Upon completion of a successful vacuum cycle, confirm the following:
• An audible alarm sounds.
• The Filler status displays Complete.
• The Loader status displays Transfer.
• The Filler Status Indicator changes to a flashing arrow.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
2-41
Simulated Processing Cycle
System Setup
6. Open and close the Filler Door. The Load Door unlocks.
Note:
2.9.4
A maximum of 10 minutes is allowed before the cassette can no longer be
loaded. This countdown displays on the upper right corner of the User
Interface screen.
Cassette Scan Test
1. Open the Load Door and insert the prepared cassette from Section 2.9.2,
Cassette Setup.
2. Confirm the cassette icon displays on the User Interface screen.
IMPORTANT:
Do not close the door.
3. Quickly and without hesitation, place electrical tape (or equivalent) to block the
Load Door Optical Sensor. The door lock should engage and a solid blue arrow
appears at the Load Door Indicator.
Note:
If an emergency stop (e-stop) occurs, ensure that tape is blocking the Load
Door Optical Sensor. Leave the cassette in the transport and then recycle
power. Once initialized, the instrument should begin processing the
cassette.
4. Confirm the following:
• From the User Interface screen, the Loader status displays Reading Bar
Code.
• By reviewing instrument diagnostics, the bar code scanner reads all 10
cards as “BAR CODE IS GOOD”.
• The instrument sounds the Cassette Success alert.
• The cassette bar code number displays on the User Interface screen.
2.9.5
Sealing and Cassette Removal Test
1. Confirm the following:
• The Loader status changes to Sealing.
• The Filler status changes to Idle.
• All of the cards in the cassette progress smoothly past the sealer.
• All of the cards are sealed.
2. Confirm the following:
• The Loader status changes to Loading Card.
• All cards are loaded into the incubator without jamming or hitting the
carousel edges.
3. When the processed cassette returns to the Load Station, confirm the following:
2-42
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
System Setup
Simulated Processing Cycle
• The Loader status changes to Remove.
• The Load Door indicator arrow is blinking.
4. Remove the electrical tape from the Load Door Sensor.
5. Remove the cassette from the instrument.
6. Confirm the following:
• The arrow is no longer illuminated.
• The cassette is no longer displayed on the User Interface screen.
7. Close the Load Door and confirm that the door locks.
8. Repeat Section 2.9.2, Cassette Setup through Section 2.9.5, Sealing and
Cassette Removal Test, as needed.
Note:
2.9.6
The filler can be cycled when a cassette is processing through the transport;
however, no more than one filler cycle can be performed per cassette
processing in transport.
Card Reading and Card Unload Test
1. Confirm proper exchange of the cards between each position of the Carousel
and the Reader. The cards should exit the Carousel and go onto the belt of the
Reader smoothly, without hitting any rollers. Each card should also exit the
Reader without hitting the sides of the Carousel or causing the Quadrousel to
move as the card is reinserted.
2. At the Prompt > type DUMP_CM 0 and press Enter. (The alias macro is
caramap.)
3. Confirm that all of the cards show a Read Count of at least 1. Press Spacebar
as necessary to display all of the cards.
4. After all of the cards are read at least once (as indicated by the read count of 1
or greater), at the Prompt > type UNLOAD and press Enter.
5. Confirm that all cards are unloaded into the Waste Container without jamming
or retries.
6. Confirm that all of the transfer tube stub lengths are 1.25 mm ±0.25 mm
(0.049 in. ±0.010 in.), with no stringing of plastic.
7. At the Prompt > type SAVE_ALIGNMENTS and press Enter. This will save a
copy of the alignments for all nodes (SPN boards) to the Bay Controller Board
(BCB).
8. At the User Interface Keypad Panel, press STATUS/MENU
Main Menu appears.
until the
9. Select Maintenance > Unlock User Access Door > Yes. The User Access
Door unlocks.
10. Remove the electrical tape (or equivalent) from the Front and Top Access Door
Optical Sensors.
11. Remove the dark, lint-free cloth from the optics.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
2-43
Confirm Remote Diagnostic Access
System Setup
12. Close the top and then the Front Access Doors. The Access Door locks.
13. Re-connect the data end of the VT2c-PC Y cable to the host PC as shown in
Section 2.5, System Cabling Diagrams.
14. Type COLD and press Enter. Confirm that the instrument initializes properly
and no errors or warnings occur. (For more information see Section 2.8.1,
General Instrument Information.)
2.10
Confirm Remote Diagnostic Access
WARNING
When remote access is no longer necessary, the Host PC modem
MUST be disabled. If the modem is left enabled to receive incoming
calls, there is a security risk. (In addition, the VITEK® 2 Compact
system software cannot use the modem for BCI connections.)
Note:
When a Remote Desktop connection is established, the user of the Host PC
will automatically be logged out. If someone logs into the Host PC, the
Remote Desktop session will be terminated.
Note:
If installing a host PC earlier than a dc7800, refer to Section 6.2.3.1, Host PC
— Configure Remote Desktop.
Perform the following to confirm remote diagnostics access:
• Section 6.2.3.2, Host PC — Enable Modem for Remote Access.
• Section 6.2.3.3, Service (Remote) PC — Set Up Dial-Up Connection.
• Section 6.2.3.4, Service (Remote) PC — Establish Dial-Up Connection.
• Section 6.2.3.5, Service (Remote) PC — Remote Desktop Connection.
• Section 6.2.3.6, Service (Remote) PC — Disable Host PC Modem and Log Out.
• Section 6.2.3.7, Service (Remote) PC — Disconnect Dial-Up Connection.
2.11
Software Login and Alarm Message Review
1. Start the System Software. (See Section 9.6.2, Start System Software
Application.)
2. Log in to the System Software. (See Section 9.6.3, Log in to System Software.)
2-44
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
System Setup
Industry and 21 CFR Part 11 Setup
3. Click the Instrument Status icon at the bottom of any Workspace View.
OK – The icon with the green square means the connection with the
VITEK® 2 instrument is okay. Click this icon to see the instrument status.
Warning – The icon with the orange triangle indicates a problem with
the instrument. Click the icon to see a description of the warning.
Error – The icon with the red circle indicates an error in the instrument.
Click the icon to see a description of the error condition.
Note:
Instrument messages are acknowledged at the instrument. The system
software only manages system software alarms.
4. The Alarm workspace appears.
5. Select the Current Alarm tab and review all of the messages, ensuring that all
issues are resolved.
6. Ensure the Acknowledge All Messages box is checked, and then click OK.
Figure 2-36: Current Alarms
2.12
Industry and 21 CFR Part 11 Setup
When the Host PC is shipped from the factory, the default Compact System Software
is set to Clinical mode, and the 21 CFR Part 11 Compliance Mode is disabled. To
change the System Software to Industry mode, perform Section 2.12.1, General
Configuration Access. To enable 21 CFR Part 11 mode in the System Software,
perform Section 2.12.2, Enable Industry and 21 CFR Part 11.
IMPORTANT:
Do not enable 21 CFR Part 11 unless directed to do so by the
customer!
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
2-45
System Software Log Out
2.12.1
System Setup
General Configuration Access
1. From the navigation bar, click the VITEK® 2 Systems Main view icon.
2. From the Main view, click the Configuration icon.
3. Select General Configuration from the Configuration Option drop-down
menu.
Figure 2-37: Configuration Drop-Down Menu
4. The General Configuration view appears.
5. Unlock the view by clicking on the Unlock/Lock icon.
2.12.2
Enable Industry and 21 CFR Part 11
The Industry Mode and enable 21 CFR Part 11 are set within the General
Configuration Window.
1. Perform the following, as needed.
• To change the Clinical Mode to Industry Mode, click the Industry radio
button.
• To enable 21 CFR Part 11, click the Enable 21 CFR 11 mode check box.
IMPORTANT:
Do not enable 21 CFR Part 11 unless directed to do so by the
customer!
2. Save the changes by clicking Save icon.
3. Lock the view by clicking the Lock/Unlock icon.
2.13
System Software Log Out
1. Click the Login icon at the bottom of any Workspace View.
2. The Logout window appears.
3. To quit the application, click Quit. A window appears asking:
Do you really want to quit the application?
2-46
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
System Setup
Perform Full System Image to DVD
4. Click Yes.
5. Close any other running applications, including Diagnostics Terminal.
6. Log off of the host PC from the Windows® taskbar by selecting Start > Log Off
Admin. A window appears asking:
Are you sure you want to log off?
7. Click Log Off. The Windows® Login window appears.
2.14
Perform Full System Image to DVD
Refer to Section 9.7, Full System Image (Backup) and perform a full system image of
the host PC.
2.15
Prepare and Verify DensiCHEK™ Plus
Refer to the current version of the DensiCHEK™ Plus User Manual for setup of the
DensiCHEK™ Plus instrument.
Note:
To verify the DensiCHEK™ Plus, refer to Section 6.9.2, DensiCHEK™ Plus
Instrument Verification.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
2-47
Prepare and Verify DensiCHEK™ Plus
2-48
System Setup
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Chapter 3: Instrument Overview
About this Chapter
This chapter describes the basic functions of the instrument and its subsystems.
Chapter Contents
3.1
Overview • 3-2
3.2
Operation • 3-2
3.2.1 User Interface System • 3-3
3.2.2 Cassettes • 3-3
3.2.3 Filler Station • 3-5
3.2.4 Load/Unload Station • 3-6
3.2.5 Transport System • 3-6
3.2.6 Bar Code Reader Assembly • 3-7
3.2.7 Card Sealer Assembly • 3-8
3.2.8 Autoloader and Reader/Incubator Station • 3-9
3.2.9 Incubator Heater Assembly • 3-10
3.2.10 Reader System • 3-10
3.2.11 Waste Collection Station • 3-11
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
3-1
Overview
3.1
Instrument Overview
Overview
The VITEK® 2 Compact instrument is a semi-automated bacteriological testing
system. This design integrates incubation and optical measurement systems into a
single instrument for use in the identification and susceptibility testing of
microorganisms.
Automation provided by the VITEK® 2 Compact instrument includes transferring of
fluid to the test card, loading the card into the optical reader/incubator, and disposing
of the card once the test is complete. This instrument is comparable to the existing
VITEK® 2 susceptibility test methods. Enhancements to the optical system provide
multi-wavelength capability.
Figure 3-1: VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument
3.2
Operation
The VITEK® 2 Compact integrated system is a combination of several independent
stations working together to optically scan test cards within a controlled temperature
environment. The major subsystem stations of the instrument are the Vacuum/Filler
Station, Load/Unload Station, Autoloader and Reader/Incubator Station, and Waste
Collection Station.
The LCD User Interface Control Panel, located on the front of the instrument, allows
operator access through menu functions for normal setup and operation, and specific
menus for maintenance and troubleshooting.
The internal layout of the VITEK® 2 Compact instrument consists of a sample
Processing Station and a Reader/Incubator. The operator loads test cards and test
3-2
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Instrument Overview
Operation
tubes with prepared inoculum into a cassette (see Section 3.2.2, Cassettes for a
description of the cassettes).
The operator then places the cassette into the Filler Station for card filling. When the
fill cycle is complete, the operator transfers the cassette to the Load/Unload Station
for processing.
3.2.1
User Interface System
A keypad and screen (Figure 3-2) are located on the front of the VITEK® 2 Compact
instrument. These in combination are referred to as the User Interface System. This
provides the user instrument status, instrument configuration, and notification of
instrument-related problems. Use the keypad to respond to instructions, communicate
commands to the VITEK® 2 Compact instrument, and perform other functions.
Function
Buttons
Numeric
Keys
Status/Menu
Previous
Screen
Message
Arrow Keys
Figure 3-2: User Interface Keypad and Screen
For the use and operation of the User Interface, see Section 4.1, VITEK® 2 Compact
Interface System.
3.2.2
Cassettes
The Transport System automatically moves the cassette (Figure 3-3) past the Bar
Code Scanner, where the bar codes are recorded into the instrument. The cassette is
fitted with a bar code identifying it to the instrument. Each cassette has a bar code
identification label numbered 1 through 9. Each card has a bar code that includes
information such as test type, lot number, expiration date, and a unique sequence
number. Patient identification test data entry may be made prior to placing the
cassette into the instrument. See the VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument User Manual for
details.
The cassette is then moved back to the sealer where the hot wire cuts and seals the
transfer tube. Finally, the cassette is moved to the Autoloader Station where the cards
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
3-3
Operation
Instrument Overview
are transferred to the Incubator Carousel. An operational description of each
subsystem is discussed in this chapter. Component parts of each subsystem are
discussed in Chapter 4.
Figure 3-3: Loaded Cassette
WARNING
All of the materials in an empty cassette should be treated as biohazards
and disposed of accordingly. All organism suspensions should be
considered as potentially infectious. Qualified laboratory personnel
should use acceptable procedures for biohazardous material.
Figure 3-4 illustrates a block diagram of the VITEK® 2 Compact instrument system
flow and station locations.
Filler Station
Transport Station
Incubator/Reader
Station
Cassette
Load/Unload
Station
Waste Collection
Station
User Interface
Figure 3-4: VITEK® 2 Compact Station Block Diagram
3-4
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Instrument Overview
3.2.3
Operation
Filler Station
The Filler Station fills the wells of the card with an inoculum using vacuum
displacement. The operator places a cassette in the Filler Station, closes the door,
and presses the Start Fill function button to initiate the filling process.
The Filler Station uses a Vacuum Chamber and Pump. The rate of change in the
vacuum is regulated by a pneumatic servo-feedback system under microprocessor
control.
Figure 3-5: Filler Station Access Door Opened
When the cassette is placed in the Filler Station and the Start Fill function button is
pressed, the Vacuum Pump (Figure 3-6) starts evacuating the air from the Vacuum
Chamber. The air escapes from the card channels and wells via the transfer tubes
and bubbles up through the suspension. The channels and wells inside of each card
are then in a vacuum.
Figure 3-6: Vacuum Pump with Side Panel Removed
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
3-5
Operation
Instrument Overview
After a short period, the vacuum is slowly released in the Vacuum Chamber. The
increasing air pressure inside the chamber forces the suspension in each test tube
through the transfer tube and into the channels and wells of the card.
Once the cards are filled, the Filler LED Indicator flashes, and the user can open the
Filler Access Door and remove the cassette. When the Filler Door is open, the Load/
Unload Door will unlock to receive the cassette.
3.2.4
Load/Unload Station
When the cassette is placed into the Load/Unload Station and the door is closed, the
door locks and the cassette begins processing using the Transport System.
Figure 3-7: Load/Unload Station Door Opened
3.2.5
Transport System
The Transport System processes the cassette past the Bar Code Scanner that reads
the bar codes, the Sealer assembly that seals the transfer tubes, and the Autoloader
that loads the cards into the carousel, as described in the following sections.
The cassette then returns to the Load/Unload Station for removal from the system. It
is parked at the cassette Load/Unload Door with the door unlocked. When the LED
indicator light begins to flash, the operator can remove the cassette and dispose of the
processed test tubes. The transport block remains in place for the next cassette.
3-6
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Instrument Overview
Operation
Transport
Assembly
Transport
Block
Figure 3-8: Transport Assembly
3.2.6
Bar Code Reader Assembly
Bar Code
Reader Assembly
Figure 3-9: Bar Code Reader Assembly
The Bar Code Reader is angled to read the bar code ID to identify the cassette to the
instrument. It is also used to read the card type to determine the optics scan method.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
3-7
Operation
Instrument Overview
Bar Codes
Bar Code
Scanner
Beam
Figure 3-10: Bar Code Scanner
As the transported cassette and cards enter the Bar Code Reader area, the scanner
triggers to read the bar code information on the cassette and on a card for each slot of
the cassette. Each card is read as the cassette moves through this area. This
information is used by the instrument to determine the card types and the card
location within the cassette.
3.2.7
Card Sealer Assembly
The Card Sealer Assembly completes the functions inside the VITEK® 2 Compact
instrument that prepare the test cards for reading and incubation. Before a test card
can be read and incubated, the wells and channels inside the card must be sealed off
from the outside environment. This is accomplished by heat-sealing the transfer tube
that delivered inoculum to the card from its test tube.
Card Sealer
Assembly
without Front
Panel
Figure 3-11: Card Sealer Assembly
3-8
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Instrument Overview
Operation
As the cassette moves past the Card Sealer Assembly, a heated nichrome wire
comes in contact with each transfer tube. The plastic tube melts, causing the majority
of it to separate from the card and drop into the test tube. The portion that remains in
the card is sealed by the melting plastic. The heat-sealed stub that is left in the card
from the transfer tube is 1.25 mm ±0.25 mm long.
3.2.8
Autoloader and Reader/Incubator Station
After the cards are filled, read by the Bar Code Reader, and sealed, the cassette
moves to the Autoloader and Reader/Incubator Station. The components of this
station are the Autoloader Assembly, the Carousel Incubator, and the Reader Optics
System (Figure 3-12).
Incubator
Optics
Autoloader
Figure 3-12: Autoloader and Reader/Incubator Station
When a cassette reaches the card loading station, the cards are transferred (pushed)
from the cassette into the slots of the 15-, 30- or 60-position carousel by the
Autoloader. Here they are incubated at a temperature of 35.5 °C ±1 °C
(95.9 °F ±1.8 °F).
Note:
The Carousel is divided into four sections, so the components can be easily
removed for periodic cleaning. (See Section E.3, Cleaning the Carousel for
details.)
As the Carousel rotates, each card moves into the reading position every 15 minutes.
A card ejector pushes the card onto a Drive Belt, where it is moved through the
Reader Station. After the reading cycle is complete, the card returns to its slot in the
Carousel, where it continues incubation until the next reading.
Once the cards are loaded into the Carousel in the Incubator, the cassette containing
processed patient isolate tubes returns to the Load/Unload Station for removal from
the instrument. The cassette parks at the cassette Load Door with the door unlocked
and the operator is notified by the flashing Load/Unload LED. The operator can then
remove the cassette and dispose of the processed test tubes. The Transport Block
remains in place for the next cassette.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
3-9
Operation
3.2.9
Instrument Overview
Incubator Heater Assembly
The carousel contains a heater and two circulating fans used to incubate the test
cards. The temperature is monitored and controlled by two remote precision
thermistors monitored by an A/D converter. These inputs are compared to voltages
produced by high-precision resistors. This enables the temperature at the card to be
held at an average of 35.5 °C ±1 °C (95.9 °F ±1.8 °F).
Solid-State Relay
Circulating Fan
Incubator Heater
Circulating Fan
Figure 3-13: Heater Assembly
3.2.10
Reader System
The VITEK® 2 Compact Reader System is made up of a motor-driven Card Drive Belt
system, two Transmittance Optical Assemblies, and a Cam Assembly. The optical
systems are modular, with each module independently controlled by a
microprocessor. This area is accessible to the user for maintenance functions. (See
Section E.6, Cleaning the Optics (Power Off) and Section F.5.7, Cleaning the Optics
(With Cards Processing — Power On) for maintenance details.)
Transmittance
Optics
Figure 3-14: Reader System Optics
3-10
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Instrument Overview
Operation
The VITEK® 2 Compact instrument performs its identification and susceptibility
analyses by continually monitoring the growth of organisms inside the wells of the test
cards.
The Transmittance Optics use visible light to directly measure organism growth.
These optics are based on an initial light reading of a well before significant growth
has begun. Periodic light transmittance samplings of the same well measure organism
growth by how much light is prevented from going through the well.
The optics use light emitting diodes (LEDs) that produce light at 660 nm, 568 nm, and
428 nm and silicon photodetectors to capture the transmitted light. The system is
self-calibrating to 100% transmission through air.
Figure 3-15: Transmittance Optics Cross Section
3.2.11
Waste Collection Station
Once testing of a card is complete, the card is removed automatically from the
carousel by the Card Ejector. It then advances through the Reader System and is
deposited into the Waste Bin. These cards are collected at the Waste Collection
Station for removal and disposal.
A Waste Collection Bin level icon on the user interface displays the level of cards in
the bin. The system sends a message to the User Interface Panel when the Waste
Station Bin is full. The bin can then be removed from the instrument and emptied. The
Waste Collection Station collects and holds up to 60 cards for disposal. However, it is
recommended that the bin is checked and emptied before it reaches capacity.
Access the Waste Collection Station through the door on the front of the VITEK® 2
Compact instrument (Figure 3-16).
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
3-11
Operation
Instrument Overview
Figure 3-16: Waste Collection Station Door Open
WARNING
Make sure the test card processing is complete before commanding a
test card to eject.
CAUTION: Never reinsert a test card after it has been removed from the
Waste Collection Station. This may cause the instrument to jam.
The Waste Collection Door should remain closed when cards are not being removed
from the station.
WARNING
Although VITEK® 2 Compact test cards are sealed, they should be
treated as biohazards and disposed of accordingly.
3-12
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Chapter 4: Instrument Components
About this Chapter
This chapter is designed to familiarize the user with the five major systems of the
VITEK® 2 Compact instrument. Information from the previous chapter explained the
workflow through the various stations of the instrument. This chapter includes a more
detailed description of the individual component parts of each system and their
functions.
The VITEK® 2 Compact instrument is made up of the following systems:
• Interface System
• Vacuum/Filler Station
• Card Transport System
• Reader/Incubator Processing System
• Waste Collection System
Note:
See Section 1.5, Reference Documents for a list of documents referenced
within this service manual. Always refer to the latest drawing revision.
Chapter Contents
4.1
VITEK® 2 Compact Interface System • 4-3
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
4.1.6
4.1.7
Instrument User Interface System • 4-3
Menu System • 4-5
VITEK® 2 Compact Status Screen • 4-6
Filler Status • 4-7
Loader Status • 4-9
General Status • 4-11
Information and Warning Indicators • 4-11
4.2
Uninterruptible Power Supply (Optional) • 4-13
4.3
Host Computer • 4-14
4.4
Vacuum/Filler Station • 4-15
4.5
Card Transport System • 4-20
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.6
Bar Code Reader Assembly • 4-22
4.6.1
4.6.2
4.7
Card Sealer Assembly • 4-23
Autoloader Assembly • 4-24
Reader/Incubator Processing System • 4-25
4.7.1
4.7.2
4.7.3
4.8
Cassettes • 4-20
Cassette Load/Unload Station • 4-20
Carousel Card Ejector • 4-25
Carousel Incubator • 4-25
Reader System • 4-28
System Electronics • 4-31
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
4-1
Instrument Components
4.8.1
4.8.2
4.8.3
4.8.4
4.8.5
4.8.6
4.9
4-2
BCB Board • 4-32
Head Control Board • 4-33
Sample Prep Node Board • 4-34
DC Power Distribution Board • 4-35
User Interface Board • 4-36
Power Supply • 4-37
Temperature Monitoring System • 4-37
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Instrument Components
4.1
VITEK® 2 Compact Interface System
VITEK® 2 Compact Interface System
The VITEK® 2 Compact Interface System is made up of the following primary
components:
• Instrument User Interface System
• Host PC
• Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) (optional)
4.1.1
Instrument User Interface System
The Instrument User Interface System consists of the User Interface Board, Keypad,
Display, Display Backlight, and Speaker. It is a collection of instrument components
that is intended to communicate with the user. Information is conveyed to the user via
the display and speaker. The instrument receives information from the user via the
keypad.
The keypad and screen are located on the front of the instrument and provide the user
with instrument status, configuration, and notification of instrument-related problems.
An audible alarm feature and a flashing display alert the user in the event of
instrument alarm conditions.
The keypad is composed of a set of numeric digit keys and several function keys for
the user to communicate commands to the instrument. The screen is a backlit Liquid
Crystal Display (LCD). Five function buttons are located beside the LCD. The screen
provides the visual information during normal operation and user intervention.
The keypad and screen allow the user functional support of the following:
• Local instrument operation and system status
• Diagnostics and maintenance operations
• Configuration options
• Intervention and error messages
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
4-3
VITEK® 2 Compact Interface System
Instrument Components
2
}
1
3
4
5
6
Figure 4-1: Keypad and Screen
The user interface keypad and screen have the following components:
Table 4-1: Interface Keypad
1
Function Buttons
Use these buttons to select menu options or other
specified functions.
2
Numeric Keys
Use these keys to enter a number onto a screen.
3
Status/Menu Key
Use this key to provide access to selection of either the
Status screen or Menu screen or to access the Status
screen from any screen.
4
Previous Screen Key
Use this key to:
• Exit this screen or function to its menu
• Return to a previous screen in a function
• Go from a sub-menu to its previous menu
• Go from the Main Menu to the Status Screen
5
Message Key
Press this key anytime to access the Message Queue.
6
Arrow Keys
Use these keys to:
• Scroll a screen or menu
• Move the cursor on a screen
Note: When Arrow keys are active, their icons appear on
the display.
4-4
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
VITEK® 2 Compact Interface System
Instrument Components
4.1.2
Menu System
All of the functions used on the VITEK® 2 Compact instrument are available through
the User Interface Menu System. The system is composed of a Main Menu and a set
of five sub-menus. Figure 4-2 shows the Main Menu.
Figure 4-2: VITEK® 2 Compact Main Menu
Figure 4-3 depicts the menu structure with all of the function options added. The lines
show the menus and the pathways between them.
This diagram describes the pathway to a specific function by naming each menu to
access, with the menus separated by arrows.
Example: the pathway to clean the carousel on the Maintenance menu would
be shown as follows:
Main Menu > Maintenance > Remove Carousel
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
4-5
VITEK® 2 Compact Interface System
Instrument Components
Main Menu
QC Status
Maintenance
Unlock User Access Door
Diagnostics
Configuration
Error Handling
Temperature
Instrument Name
Cancel Cassette
Incubator
Remove Carousel
Replace Carousel
Optics Cleaning
Temperature Check
Shutdown
Cabinet
Versions
System Number
Serial Numbar
Carousel Capacity
Firmware BCB
Firmware BCB Boot
Carousel SPN
Vacuum / Sealer
Front Panel SPN
Transport SPN
Last Maintenance Date
Optics Self Test
Sub-system Error Status
Date Format
Schedule QC Status
Alert Options
All
Fill Complete
Intervention
Error in Queue
Warning in Queue
Load Timeout Warning
Timeout Warning; Reading Paused
Alert Volumes
All
Fill Complete
Cassette Success
Cassette Exception
Intervention
Error in Queue
Warning in Queue
Load Timeout Warning
Timeout Warning; Reading Paused
Display Options
LCD Screen Contrast
Keyclick Volume
Figure 4-3: Main Menu Diagram
4.1.3
VITEK® 2 Compact Status Screen
The Status screen is used more often than any other screen in the VITEK® 2 Compact
User Interface. Since it is basic to the workflow, the Status screen is easy to display
and, in many cases, it displays automatically. (Figure 4-4 shows the Status Screen.)
This section details the various icons and informational messages that you see while
operating the instrument.
There are three ways to display the Status screen:
• The Status screen automatically displays at the end of the instrument’s power-up
initialization process.
• Press the Status/Menu or Previous Screen key from the Main Menu.
• Press the Status/Menu key from any menu or from the Error Message Queue
screen.
The Status field appears at the bottom of the VITEK® 2 Compact Status screen.
4-6
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
VITEK® 2 Compact Interface System
Instrument Components
Figure 4-4: Instrument Status Field
The white section at the bottom of the screen may contain three types of information:
• New Error/Warning Indicator (!). See Section 4.1.7.11, New Error/Warning
Indicator.
• Instrument Status. Displayed in bottom left of screen. (See Figure 4-4.)
• Current Time of the day in 24-hour format. This time is based on the Host PC
time, and is displayed in bottom right of screen. (See Figure 4-4.)
The Instrument Status field displays the following:
• OK. All of the subsystems in the instrument are working normally, and the
instrument is ready to accept test cards for processing.
• Warming. This status displays after instrument startup or any time the incubation
temperature in the Reader Station has not reached its specified temperature. The
instrument can still process cards when the status Warming is active.
• Error. The instrument is in an error state and needs user intervention or service.
For user intervention refer to Appendix F, User Diagnostics. For service
intervention refer to Section 6.4, Firmware Diagnostic Commands, Section 6.6,
General Instrument Troubleshooting and Section 8, Instrument Error Codes.
• Maintenance. At least one maintenance item is initiated, such as a carousel
section was removed for cleaning. In this case, test card processing cannot
resume unless all carousel sections are replaced.
• Intervention. The Intervention warning displays if there is an error during
power-up or card cassette processing that needs the user’s immediate attention.
(Refer to Section F.3, Intervention Screen and Chapter 8, Instrument Error
Codes.)
4.1.4
Filler Status
The Filler Status includes a Filler Status indicator on the left and a possible Detailed
Message/Action on the right. If there are any warnings or errors related to filling the
cards, an Intervention screen appears.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
4-7
VITEK® 2 Compact Interface System
4.1.4.1
Instrument Components
Idle
When the display reads Filler: Idle, the instrument is ready to start the fill cycle.
The Start Fill function is shown on the upper-right side of the screen. Press the Start
Fill key to initiate the fill cycle.
Figure 4-5: Status Screen Showing Filler Ready
4.1.4.2
Filling
The screen displays Filler: Filling when the filling process has started. The
Filling-in-Progress indicator displays (Figure 4-6) to indicate filling.
Figure 4-6: Filling-in-Progress Indicator
This indicator overwrites the Start Fill box, and tells the user that the cards are filling.
It does not show the actual progress or stage of the filling cycle. When the entire bar is
filled, it repeats from the beginning until the fill cycle is complete.
CAUTION: If individual cards are exposed to multiple fill cycles, these
cards must be discarded as the test results will be inaccurate.
4.1.4.3
Complete
The Filler: Complete indicator shows that the fill cycle is done, and the cassette is
ready for transfer into the Loader. This Filler: Complete indicator displays regardless
of fill success or failure, and the instrument provides an alert to indicate that the fill is
complete. This alert can be audible and/or blinking, depending on the custom settings.
4-8
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
VITEK® 2 Compact Interface System
Instrument Components
4.1.4.4
Not Ready
When the Filler: Not Ready indicator displays, the instrument cannot start the filling
cycle, because either the Filler is not ready or there is a fault condition in the Filler or
in the instrument.
Reasons for a Not Ready filler status include:
• Instrument Overall Status is in Error state.
• Instrument Overall Status is in Maintenance state.
• 21 CFR Part 11 is enabled and the host PC has timed out.
WARNING
Biohazardous spills can occur inside the VITEK® 2 Compact
instrument. All organism suspensions should be considered as
potentially infectious.
4.1.5
Loader Status
The Loader Status sub-screen is comprised of two parts:
• Loader Status on the left.
• A display area for messages on the immediate right.
Based on the workflow, under error-free conditions, the Loader Status proceeds as
follows:
Empty Status > Transfer Cassette > Bar Code Reading > Sealing >
Loading into Carousel > Remove Cassette
If there are errors during cassette processing in the Loader, an Intervention screen
appears. The following messages display during normal instrument operation.
4.1.5.1
Empty Status
When there is no status in the Loader field, the loader is not ready for the user to load
a cassette, and the Loader Door is locked.
4.1.5.2
Transfer
When the Loader: Transfer message displays, the filling cycle is complete and the
user should transfer the cassette from the Filler Station to the Loader Station. A
maximum of 10 minutes is allowed to transfer the cassette. After this time period, the
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
4-9
VITEK® 2 Compact Interface System
Instrument Components
system no longer accepts the cards. This countdown is visible in the upper-right
corner of the screen.
CAUTION: When there is less than one minute left to transfer the
cassette, the instrument sounds an alert to indicate a Load Timed Out
Warning. If the time has expired, an Intervention Message appears to
alert the user to discard the test cards.
4.1.5.3
Reading Bar Code
When the Loader: Reading Bar Code message displays, the cassette is in the
Loader, and the instrument is processing the cassette and checking the readability of
all bar codes.
The instrument provides an alert for Cassette Success, if the cassette setup is OK,
as well as a unique alert for Cassette Exception if the cassette setup has
non-correctable errors.
4.1.5.4
Sealing
The Loader: Sealing message indicates that the instrument successfully read the bar
codes, and the instrument continues to process the card cassette for sealing.
4.1.5.5
Loading Card
The Loader: Loading Card message means that the sealing is complete, and the
instrument is loading cards into the carousel.
4.1.5.6
Remove
When Loader: Remove message displays, the instrument has finished processing
the cards in the cassette, and the cassette is ready to be removed. However, if there
are still cards remaining in the cassette, an error condition has occurred and the user
was not able to fix the error.
4.1.5.7
Virtual Cassette Icon
In a Virtual Cassette workflow, this icon displays to the right of the Loader Status after
the instrument has successfully read the bar codes of the cassette and all of the
cards.
4-10
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
VITEK® 2 Compact Interface System
Instrument Components
4.1.5.8
Cassette Number
The icon displays to the right of the Loader Status after successful bar code reading
and the cassette number is known.
4.1.5.9
Countdown Timer
A countdown timer in the upper, right corner of any screen displays in the Start Fill
field and indicates the total number of minutes and seconds left for the user to transfer
the cassette from the Filler to the Loader. The continuation of this counter is used
when any other Intervention Message displays.
4.1.6
General Status
The General Status sub-screen uses various icons to display messages that alert the
user to general conditions. Users should become familiar with these indicators to
ensure smooth operation of the instrument.
Note:
Some of these indicators or icons are only visible on the screen when the
function they represent is active.
4.1.7
Information and Warning Indicators
4.1.7.1
Door Opened Indicator
At least one of the following doors is opened:
• Top User Access Door
• Front User Access Door
• Waste Collection Door
4.1.7.2
UPS Status
UPS is present, and there is a power failure.
4.1.7.3
UPS Battery
UPS is present, and the battery is low.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
4-11
VITEK® 2 Compact Interface System
4.1.7.4
Instrument Components
Waste Collection Bin Not Present
The Waste Collection Bin is not present in the instrument.
4.1.7.5
Waste Collection Bin Level
This icon indicates the level of cards in the Waste Collection Bin. When the waste
collection bin is replaced, the icon displays an empty waste collection bin icon.
4.1.7.6
Host Communication Failure
This icon indicates that the host PC is not communicating with the instrument.
4.1.7.7
Instrument Name
The name of the instrument as input by the user.
4.1.7.8
Available Slots
This icon indicates the number of available slots in the carousel. The number range is
zero to 15, zero to 30 or zero to 60, depending on the instrument model.
The Available Slots field indicates the number of unoccupied slots in the instrument.
You can load one or more cassettes containing up to that number of test cards. If you
load more than that number, the instrument will not process some of the test cards
unless additional slots become available by the time the test cards reach the carousel.
4.1.7.9
Cassette Presence
The cassette is present in the Loader Station.
4.1.7.10
Carousel Quad Missing
At least one quadrousel is missing in the Carousel.
4-12
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Instrument Components
4.1.7.11
Uninterruptible Power Supply (Optional)
New Error/Warning Indicator
This indicator displays to the left of the Instrument Status if there are messages (both
errors and warnings) in the Error Message Queue that the user has not viewed. This
indicator moves from side to side on the screen. The instrument sounds an alert and/
or the screen blinks (depending on the configuration settings) if there is an error or
warning in the queue. Press the Message key (!) to view the Error Message Queue.
The screen below displays the message queue indicator’s warning icon (bottom left).
Figure 4-7: Message Queue Indicator (Warning Mode)
4.1.7.12
21 CFR Part 11 Unauthorized Indicator
When the instrument operation is not authorized due to 21 CFR Part 11, a small
unauthorized indicator displays on the upper-right corner of the screen. When the
instrument is in this state, several functions and screens are not accessible and a
message appears if the user attempts to access them.
For more information, refer to the VITEK® 2 Systems Software User Manual .
4.2
Uninterruptible Power Supply (Optional)
The UPS is provided as an option and is connected to a 9-pin communications port
located on the left rear corner of the instrument via a RS232 cable. See Figure 4-8 for
the location of the port connection.
In the event of a power failure, the UPS signals the VITEK® 2 Compact instrument. If
the power failure lasts longer than five seconds, the instrument goes into a Power
Failure mode.
The instrument then:
• Initiates a Power Failure error message and displays a Power Fail icon on the
Main Status screen.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
4-13
Host Computer
Instrument Components
• Continues processing test cards in the carousel.
• Continues to support the card Transport System’s previously filled cassettes, but
does not allow you to fill new cassettes.
Host PC
Communication
Port
UPS
Connection Port
Figure 4-8: UPS and Host PC Communication Port Locations
4.3
Host Computer
The Host PC (Figure 4-9) is a central diagnostic station. It is connected to a 25-pin
communication port located on the left rear corner of the instrument via an RS232
cable (Figure 4-8). Under normal conditions, the instrument sends system status, test
card data, and operational data to the Host PC. The Host PC serves as the instrument
supervisory control, test data storage, system status information, and data entry for
the instrument. Should the computer fail, the VITEK® 2 Compact instrument is
capable of sequentially buffering 2184 card readings (60 cards for 36.4 hours) before
the oldest data begins dropping off.
Refer to Section 7.3, PC Board Test Points for the proper Host PC connector voltage
test point outputs.
4-14
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Instrument Components
Vacuum/Filler Station
Figure 4-9: Host PC and Printer
4.4
Vacuum/Filler Station
The Vacuum/Filler Station is the first station of the VITEK® 2 Compact instrument that
receives a prepared cassette with test cards and prepared inoculum in test tubes (see
Section 4.5.1, Cassettes for further cassette information).
The Vacuum/Filler Station fills the test cards with the inoculum solution contained in
the corresponding test tubes, using vacuum displacement inside the Vacuum
Chamber.
Figure 4-10 shows the Vacuum Station Door in the open position. Figure 4-11 shows
the Vacuum Chamber from the inside of the instrument.
The Vacuum/Filler Station consists of a Vacuum Chamber and Door, a Filler LED
Indicator, a Vacuum Pump, a Vacuum Sealer SPN Board with a Mounted Pressure
Transducer, a Solid-State Relay (mounted inside the Rear Panel Assembly), a
Proportional Valve, a Three-Way Valve, an Air Filter, and associated pneumatic
components.
Figure 4-12 shows the Vacuum Pump and Three-Way Valve Assembly (Proportional
Valve, Three-Way Valve, and Air Filter (mounted in the instrument).
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
4-15
Vacuum/Filler Station
Instrument Components
Figure 4-10: Vacuum Chamber Door Opened
Vacuum
Chamber
Figure 4-11: Vacuum Chamber
4-16
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Instrument Components
Vacuum/Filler Station
Figure 4-12: Vacuum Station Vacuum Pump (Side View)
The Vacuum Chamber is part of the molded plastic Front Panel of the instrument and
cannot be removed or replaced individually. The chamber is designed such that a
cassette can only be installed with the cassette hand grip facing outward. The
Vacuum Chamber has a seal surrounding the door.
Figure 4-13 shows the pneumatic diagram for the Vacuum/Filler Station.
0.375" I.D.
Vacuum Tubing
Vacuum Tubing
Muffler
Copper Tubing
Air Filter
Proportional Valve
IN
Vacuum Chamber
Muffler
Pressure
Transducer
Exh.
3-Way Direct Acting
Solenoid Valve
Vacuum Sealer SPN Board
0.375" I.D.
Vacuum Tubing
Exhaust
Intake
Vacuum Pump
Muffler
Figure 4-13: Filler Station Pneumatic Diagram
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
4-17
Vacuum/Filler Station
Instrument Components
The operator places the loaded cassette into the chamber, closes the door, and
presses the Start Fill button on the User Interface. The Fill Indicator LED illuminates a
curved solid blue arrow, the User Interface displays an activity bar, and the filler cycle
begins. Once complete, the Filler LED illuminates a curved flashing blue arrow.
The operator has 10 minutes to transfer the cassette to the Load/Unload Station.
When the Filler Door is open the Load/Unload Door unlocks, awaiting the insertion of
the filled cassette (Figure 4-14 shows examples of the Fill Indicator. Table 4-2
describes each status of the Fill Indicator).
Figure 4-14: Fill Indicator LED
Table 4-2: Fill Indicator Status
Indicator Light (LED)
Status
OFF
Filler Idle
Solid Blue Arrow
Cards are Filling
Blue Blinking Arrow
Filling Cycle Complete with No Errors
X (Red LED)
Filling Error
When the Vacuum Pump is turned on during the fill cycle, it begins drawing free air
through the Filter/Muffler attached to the Three-Way Solenoid Valve. To fill the test
card, the following sequence occurs:
1. The Proportional Valve opens 100%.
2. The three-way, direct-acting solenoid energizes, and air is evacuated or
pumped out of the Vacuum Chamber through the Air Filter and the Three-Way
Solenoid Valve.
3. The Absolute Pressure Transducer monitors the decrease of Vacuum Chamber
pressure and sends a proportional, continuously changing voltage output to the
SPN Board.
4. The SPN Board samples the continuously changing voltage signal at regular
intervals, and compares the rate of change to the programmed rate to pump
down the Vacuum Chamber (approximately 30 seconds).
5. A voltage signal is sent to the Proportional Valve, causing the Proportional
Valve to incrementally close.
4-18
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Instrument Components
Vacuum/Filler Station
6. When the Vacuum Chamber is evacuated to the pre-calibrated vacuum target
pressure (0.89 PSIA ± 0.04 PSIA), the Vacuum Pump turns off, the Three-Way
Solenoid Valve closes, and the Proportional Valve closes for a total of five
seconds. The Absolute Pressure Transducer continues to monitor the Vacuum
Chamber pressure for leaks and sends the voltage signal to the SPN Board.
Note:
Air is forced from inside the test card via the transfer tube and bubbles up
through the suspension. The channels and wells inside the test card are now
in a vacuum.
7. After five seconds, the Proportional Valve gradually opens to raise the pressure
inside the Vacuum Chamber. The Absolute Pressure Transducer continues to
monitor the Vacuum Chamber pressure and sends the voltage signal to the
SPN Board. The SPN Board samples the continuously changing voltage at
regular intervals and compares it to the programmed rate of return to
atmospheric pressure (approximately 30 seconds).
8. A voltage signal is sent to the Proportional Valve, causing the Proportional
Valve to incrementally open and then level off at the preset value.
Note:
The increasing air pressure inside the Vacuum Chamber forces the
suspension in each test tube to flow through the transfer tube and into the
channels and wells of the card.
9. The Proportional Valve opens 100% at the completion of the return to
atmospheric pressure.
10. The Proportional Valve closes, and the system is ready to run again.
Throughout the entire cycle, the air pressure inside the Vacuum Chamber is
monitored to ensure that the rate of pressure change and the maximum vacuum value
are maintained without boiling the sample.
Up Slope
Down Slope
5 Second
Dwell Timel
Figure 4-15: Theoretical Vacuum Cycle Chart (Reference Only)
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
4-19
Card Transport System
4.5
Instrument Components
Card Transport System
The VITEK® 2 Compact Card Transport System is made up of the following primary
internal components:
• Cassette
• Cassette Load/Unload Station
• Transport Assembly
• Bar Code Reader Assembly
• Card Sealer Assembly
• Autoloader Assembly
4.5.1
Cassettes
The Cassette is the main component of the Transport System. The Cassettes are
pre-loaded external to the instrument with tubes of inoculum and test cards, and then
placed in the Filler Station for filling.
The Cassette holds a maximum of 10 test cards in specially fitted slots. The front
portion of the Cassette has 10 wells for the inoculum test tubes. The Cassette is
placed into the Load/Unload Station for transport through the instrument. The special
shape of the Cassette matches the shape of the station well, ensuring that the
Cassette is properly loaded.
Figure 4-16: Cassette Loaded with Cards
4.5.2
Cassette Load/Unload Station
Cassettes are placed into and removed from the cassette Load/Unload Station. The
station consists of a cassette Load Door, a Load/Unload LED Indicator, and a
door-locking solenoid.
4-20
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Instrument Components
Card Transport System
Cassettes are loaded into the open door at the Load/Unload Station. When the Load
Door is closed, the door locks and a load indicator LED appears as a solid blue arrow.
Test card processing automatically initiates.
Note:
The Load/Unload Door remains locked if the instrument is in an idle state,
such as no cards have been filled or whenever a cassette is moving through
the Load/Unload Station.
Once the cards are processed and loaded into the incubator, the Cassette containing
processed isolate tubes returns to the Load/Unload Station for removal from the
system. The Cassette parks at the cassette Load Door with the door unlocked, and
the operator is notified by the flashing load indicator LED. The operator can then
remove the Cassette and dispose of the processed test tubes. When the Cassette is
removed and the Load Door is closed, the door locks. (Figure 4-17 shows examples
of the Load Indicator. Table 4-3 describes each status of the Load Indicator.)
Figure 4-17: Load Indicator LED
Table 4-3: Load Indicator Status
Indicator Light (LED)
Status
Off
Either the loader is idle and the door is locked, or it is ready to
load a cassette and the door is unlocked.
Solid Blue Arrow
Cards are processing in the station and the cassette Load
Door is locked and cannot be opened.
Blue Blinking Arrow
The cassette is ready to be removed from the station. The
cassette Load Door is unlocked. When you remove the
cassette and close the door, the indicator LED turns off.
X (Red LED)
Indicates a processing error.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
4-21
Bar Code Reader Assembly
4.5.2.1
Instrument Components
Transport Assembly
The Transport Assembly moves the Cassette by pulling it through each process
station within the instrument. Various sensors tell the instrument where the cassette is
located and the status of the transport system.
Transport
Assembly
Figure 4-18: Transport Assembly with Instrument Front Removed
The Transport Assembly consists of a Transport Drive Nut Mechanism, which is
moved by a motor-driven drive screw and slides across an engagement slide guide
rod. The Transport Assembly also includes a Home Reflective Sensor located in the
back of the transport and a Cassette Encoder Board with three mounted Optical
Sensors.
The cassette is first detected by a Reflective Sensor mounted to the incubator nearest
the Load Door. When the door is closed the Transport Drive Nut Mechanism steps the
Cassette back and detects the individual test cards using the second Card Reflective
Sensor mounted to the incubator. The cassette is then transported to each station by
continually referencing and monitoring the three optical sensors on the Cassette
Encoder Board.
4.6
Bar Code Reader Assembly
While passing the Bar Code Reader Assembly, the cassette bar code identification
label is read first. Then the Cassette is indexed toward the back of the instrument so
the light beam from the Bar Code Reader can scan the test card’s bar code
information. Figure 4-19 shows the Bar Code Reader.
Note:
4-22
The Bar Code Reader inside the instrument has no lasers and is certified to
IEC60825-1 LED Safety: Class 1.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Instrument Components
Bar Code Reader Assembly
Figure 4-19: Bar Code Reader
4.6.1
Card Sealer Assembly
Before the instrument can incubate and read a test card, the wells must be sealed off
from the outside environment. The Card Sealer Hot Wire comes in contact with each
transfer tube, causing the plastic to melt, sealing the transfer tube that delivered the
inoculum to the card from the test tube.
After the cassette ID and test card bar code reading completes successfully, a hot
wire from the Sealer Station drops down and begins heating. As the cassette moves
through the Sealer Station, the hot wire melts and cuts the transfer tube. The majority
of the transfer tube then falls into its associated test tube. Remaining in the test card is
the sealed stub that extends 1.25 mm ±0.25 mm from the card’s edge. Once all cards
are sealed, the hot wire retracts back into a wire shield housing, where it cools.
Note:
In the event of a halted transport, the sealer wire also retracts and stops
heating until the problem is corrected.
The Sealer Assembly consists of a Housing Unit, a Sealer Motor to raise and lower a
drive block, a Sealer Connector Assembly, a Nicrome Wire (Sealer Hot Wire), a
Sealer Hot Wire Cable, and an Optical Sensor used to reference the hot wire up/down
position. The Sealer Assembly is controlled by the Vacuum Sealer Assembly Board.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
4-23
Bar Code Reader Assembly
Instrument Components
Sealer
Assembly
Figure 4-20: Card Sealer Station
4.6.2
Autoloader Assembly
Test cards transported and processed at the Sealer Assembly are transferred into the
slots of the carousel at the Autoloader Assembly. The Autoloader consists of an
Optical Home Sensor, Drive Nut, and Card Pusher moved by a motor-driven drive
screw across an alignment bar. Figure 4-21 shows the Autoloader Station.
When a cassette reaches the card loading station, each card is pushed by the
Autoloader from the cassette into a slot of the carousel. Then the Autoloader retracts
back to the Autoloader Home Sensor.
Autoloader
Figure 4-21: Incubator Autoloader Station
4-24
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Instrument Components
4.7
Reader/Incubator Processing System
Reader/Incubator Processing System
The VITEK® 2 Compact Reader/Incubator Processing System is made up of one set
of the following primary internal components:
• Carousel Card Ejector
• Carousel Incubator
• Reader System
• Waste Collection Station
4.7.1
Carousel Card Ejector
After the cards are loaded into the carousel, they must complete their first read. Then,
each card is read at 15-minute intervals from its first read. Initially, this time may vary
if more than one cassette is loaded. For the card to be read, the Card Ejector must
push the card out of the Carousel onto the Reader Belt and Reader Ledge.
The Card Ejector Assembly consists of an Ejector Guide, Ejector Blade, Card Ejector
Motor, Tray Drive Gear, and Ejector Home Sensor.
The Card Ejector Motor turns a rack gear attached to the Card Ejector Blade. The
motor fully extends the Card Ejector Blade, which pushes the card from the Carousel
to the Reader. The Ejector Blade then retracts to the Ejector Home Sensor.
Ejector
Assembly
Figure 4-22: Carousel Card Ejector
4.7.2
Carousel Incubator
The Carousel Incubator is comprised of a rotating carousel capable of holding 60 test
cards contained inside an Incubation Chamber with a Heater, two Thermistors, two
Manual Reset Thermostats, a Solid-State Relay, and two Circulating Fans. An
Incubator Motor for the Carousel and an Incubator SPN Board are located outside the
Incubation Chamber at the rear of the Carousel Incubator.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
4-25
Reader/Incubator Processing System
Instrument Components
The temperature inside the Incubator is controlled at an average of 35.5 °C ±1 °C
(95.9 °F ±1.8 °F). The Carousel holds the test cards throughout the complete
incubation cycle. The cards are removed from the Carousel once every 15 minutes for
optical measuring. The Carousel is divided into four sections, called Quadrants. Each
Carousel Quadrant can be removed independently for easy cleaning.
The firmware determines the Carousel capacity, based on the configuration of the
instrument. See Table 4-4 for the possible instrument configurations.
Table 4-4: Instrument Configurations for Carousel Capacity
Instrument Type
Instrument
Configuration
Functionality
VITEK® 2 Compact 15
Jumper installed
Will process a maximum of 15 cards in the
across pins 11 and carousel at one time. (See Section 7.4, Bay
12 of Bay Controller Controller Board.)
Board HDR8.
VITEK® 2 Compact 30
No BCB Hardware
Will process a maximum of 30 cards in the
key installed and no carousel at one time.
jumper installed
across pins 11 and
12 of Bay Controller
Board HDR8.
VITEK® 2 Compact 60
BCB Hardware key
installed.
Will process a maximum of 60 cards in the
carousel at one time. (See Section 5.9,
BCB Hardware Key Installation.)
Positioning the carousel is accomplished by three optical sensors:
• Incubator Top Sensor – reads the positioning slots on the outside edge of the
carousel quadrants. This sensor aligns the carousel slots with the Reader, so the
Ejector Assembly can push the card into the Reader to be read.
• Incubator Home Sensor – located behind the Carousel (not shown) and
determines the carousel home position (slot 0).
• Incubator Bottom Sensor – located at the bottom of the Carousel (not shown).
Used for proper positioning when cards are loaded from the Autoloader Station
into the Carousel.
Also included on the Carousel Incubator is an Incubator Cover with external
Thermometer Clip (not shown), an Incubator Cover Optical Sensor (which detects if
the Incubator Cover has been removed), an Antistatic Brush (used to dissipate any
static electricity buildup on the Carousel), a Reflective Card Presence Sensor (not
shown), and a Reflective Cassette Presence Sensor (not shown).
4-26
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Instrument Components
Reader/Incubator Processing System
Incubator Cover
Sensor
Top Optical
Position Sensor
Carousel
Carousel Quadrants
(one of four shown)
Antistatic Brush
Figure 4-23: Carousel System and Components
4.7.2.1
Incubator Temperature Control
The Incubator Heater is monitored and controlled through the use of two Remote
Precision Thermistors monitored by an A/D converter. One Thermistor is located
below the Heater and the other is located behind the Carousel Quadrants and an Air
Table (not shown). These inputs are compared to voltages produced by
high-precision resistors.
This design enables the cards to be held at an average temperature of 35.5 °C ±1 °C
(95.9 °F ±1.8 °F).
Air inside the Incubator is circulated by a Fan above the Heater Assembly, across the
Heater to a second Fan that pushes the heated air through a series of holes on an Air
Table, through the Carousel card slots and back up to the Fan above the Heater. The
Carousel Motor rotates the Carousel inside the Incubator.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
4-27
Reader/Incubator Processing System
Instrument Components
Incubator
Heater
Assembly
Thermistor
Figure 4-24: Incubator Heater
4.7.3
Reader System
The Reader System of the instrument performs the card positioning and optical
readings of both identification and susceptibility test cards. After the Card Ejector
pushes the card out of the Carousel onto the Reader Belt and Reader Ledge, the
reader transports the card through the Transmittance Optics. It then returns the card
to the Incubator.
TX3 Optics
TX1 Optics
Figure 4-25: Optics System and Components
4-28
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Instrument Components
Reader/Incubator Processing System
The VITEK® 2 Compact Reader System is comprised of an Optical/Mechanical Head
Assembly that includes a Drive Belt Motor and Pulley, a Reader Timing Belt, a
spring-loaded Roller Plate Assembly, a Cam Assembly, a 660 nm Transmittance
Optical System (TX1), and a 568 nm and 428 nm Transmittance Optical System
(TX3).
The Card Ejector pushes a card out of the Carousel slot onto the Motor Drive Belt of
the Reader System. The Reader Timing Belt turns counterclockwise, transporting the
card through the Optics System and verifies the card’s presence by checking for the
card’s edge and counting the interrupts on the base of the card. Next, the Timing Belt
turns clockwise again, transporting the card through the Optics System, this time
positioning the card for well readings.
Once read, the Cam Assembly pushes the card back into the same Carousel slot for
incubation until the next reading cycle. The reader reads each card in the Carousel
once every 15 minutes. When the card is complete (a duration determined by card
type and dictated through the software), the card ejects by traveling through the
Reader System and dropping into the Waste Container.
Reader
Ledge
Cam
Assembly
Optics
Assembly
Reader
Drive Belt
Reader Head
Roller Plate
Drive Belt
Motor and
Pulley
Figure 4-26: Reader System Components
4.7.3.1
Transmittance (TX) Optical System
Transmittance (TX) Optics use visible light to directly measure organism growth.
These optics are based on an initial light reading of a well before significant growth
has begun. Periodic light transmittance samplings of the same well measure organism
growth by how much light is prevented from going through the well.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
4-29
Reader/Incubator Processing System
Instrument Components
The TX Optical System is an eight-channel configuration, meaning it can read eight
wells in a column (rows 1 to 8, bottom to top) for a total of 64 wells per card. The
emitter uses LEDs for the light source (at present wavelengths of 660 nm for TX1 and
568 nm and 428 nm for TX3). The detector captures the LED light using silicon
photodiodes.
Physically there are three possible mounting locations for the Transmittance Optic
Assemblies. However for proper functionality of the instrument, TX1 must be mounted
nearest to the Carousel Incubator and TX3 must be mounted nearest to the Waste
Collection Station. (The middle mounting location is unused.) The emitter and detector
housings are hinged for ease of servicing or access to the optics area.
The TX optics calibration is verified before each reading and then electronically
re-calibrated, if necessary. The system scans across the well in 16 steps and takes
three readings per step. The readings are smoothed and the peak value is chosen
(the instrument ignores any readings resulting from air bubbles).
Figure 4-27: Optical System – Cross Section
4.7.3.2
Waste Collection Station
The Waste Collection Station is located below the cassette Filler Station at the front of
the instrument. The Waste Collection Station consists of a Waste Collection Bin, a
Reflective Sensor to detect if the bin is present, and a Reflective Sensor to detect if a
card is blocking the waste chute.
Each station holds up to 60 cards, which are deposited into the bin after the reading
cycles are complete or the cards are rejected. When the bin is removed and replaced,
the control system starts an internal firmware counter that monitors the cards ejected
into the bin and alerts the operator when the bin is full.
4-30
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Instrument Components
System Electronics
Figure 4-28: Waste Collection Station
Upon completion of the card testing by the VITEK® 2 Compact, the test cards are
ejected from the Carousel. The card then travels through the Reader System, slides
down the Waste Card Deflector (through the chute of the Waste Shroud), and drops
into the Waste Collection Bin.
Note:
The bin has a capacity of 60 test cards. However, it is recommend that the
bin is checked and emptied before it reaches capacity.
WARNING
Make sure the test card processing is complete before commanding a
test card to eject.
CAUTION: Never reinsert a test card after it has been removed from the
Waste Collection Station. This may cause the instrument to jam.
4.8
System Electronics
The internal electronic architecture of the VITEK® 2 Compact integrated system is a
distributive Control System comprised of two types of microprocessor-based controller
boards connected with a serial network. Instrument electrical power is comprised of a
Power Supply subsystem serving all internal power consumption requirements.
The VITEK® 2 Compact system electronics include the following primary internal
components:
• Bay Controller Board (BCB)
• Head Controller Board
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
4-31
System Electronics
Instrument Components
• Sample Prep Node (SPN) Boards
• Vacuum Sealer SPN Board
• DC Power Supply Board
• User Interface Board
• Power Supply
Note:
For the instrument schematic/wiring diagram and the instrument jumper and
test point specification, refer to Chapter 7, Schematics, Diagrams and Test
Points.
Figure 4-29: Top Level Board Diagram
4.8.1
BCB Board
A Bay Controller Board (BCB) controls the optics, the communications to the host PC,
and the User Interface. It also serves as the master controller for the Sample Prep
Node (SPN) boards.
The firmware for the instrument is downloaded by way of the host PC during periodic
updates to the flash memory on the BCB. This flash memory contains all the upperlevel processing for the instrument and sequentially buffers card data and alarm
4-32
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Instrument Components
System Electronics
messages. The Bay Controller Board can also capture a user-invoked backup of all
the alignment settings.
The BCB is located inside the Board Mount Assembly, above the Vacuum Pump.
Figure 4-30: BCB Location (Board Mount Assembly Opened)
The BCB is a Motorola MC68332-based computer board and is responsible for the
following instrument functions:
• Controls for the Optical Systems and the associated data collection
• Non-volatile memory, holding up to 2184 card readings (60 cards for 36.4 hours)
• User Interface control
• Controls for card movement within the Reader and Incubator
• Bar Code reader
• Communications to the host PC
• Master control to the SPN network
Refer to Section 7.4, Bay Controller Board for the BCB jumper configuration and
Section 7.3, PC Board Test Points for the BCB DC voltage test point outputs.
4.8.2
Head Control Board
The Head Control Board (HCB) connected to the BCB serves as an analog I/O
extension board for the Reader Drive Belt Motor, Bar Code Reader, and the
Transmittance Optics. It also serves as the Analog to Digital (ADC) and Digital to
Analog Converter (DAC) for the Transmittance Optics.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
4-33
System Electronics
Instrument Components
DC Power
Distribution
Board
Head Control
Board
Transport SPN
Board
Bar Code Reader
Board
Vacuum Sealer
Assembly Board
Figure 4-31: HCB Location
Refer to Section 7.3, PC Board Test Points for the HCB DC voltage test point outputs.
4.8.3
Sample Prep Node Board
The Sample Prep Node (SPN) Board is a slave controller to the BCB. The SPN
boards provide the remaining instrument interface and control functions. The SPN
Board is networked to the BCB as a slave via a serial interface.
The SPN Board is based on the Motorola 68HC908AB32 microcontroller. This board
is responsible for controlling a subsystem. It receives commands from the BCB, reads
sensors, drives motors or other actuators, and transmits a response to the BCB.
During periodic updates, the flash memory of the SPN boards is updated by way of
the BCB. Each board location has an individual jumper configuration connection to
determine the specific function or operation the board performs.
The SPN board design and distributed control allow the boards to be placed close to
the systems they are controlling. By means of the jumper connection, the board is
specialized for the control of Stepper Motors, optical sensors, and general purpose
I/O. The SPN board dedicated to the vacuum and sealing functions is the only unique
SPN board in the instrument. Refer to Figure 4-31, Figure 4-32, and Figure 4-34 for
board locations.
The VITEK® 2 Compact contains four SPN boards:
• The Front Panel SPN is mounted to the Front Panel Assembly, above the Filler
Chamber (see Figure 4-34).
• The Transport SPN is mounted inside the Board Mount Assembly (see
Figure 4-31 and Figure 4-32).
• The Vacuum Sealer Assembly (SPN) is mounted inside the Board Mount
Assembly (see Figure 4-31 and Figure 4-32).
4-34
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Instrument Components
System Electronics
• The Incubator Carousel SPN is mounted on the backside of the Incubator
Assembly.
Each SPN board is responsible for the corresponding subsection.
Transport SPN
Board
Vacuum Sealer
Board
Figure 4-32: SPN Boards
Refer to Chapter 7, Schematics, Diagrams and Test Points for additional setup and
configuration information.
4.8.4
DC Power Distribution Board
The DC Power Distribution Board is a breakout board mounted inside the Board
Mount Assembly (see Figure 4-33). All the SPN boards receive power from this board,
along with the Bay Controller Board, the Head Controller Board, the Door Lock
Solenoids, and the LCD Assembly.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
4-35
System Electronics
Instrument Components
DC Power
Distribution Board
Figure 4-33: DC Power Distribution Board
Refer to Section 7.3, PC Board Test Points for the proper voltage test point outputs.
4.8.5
User Interface Board
The User Interface Board is mounted behind the Instrument Display and serves as an
interface between the BCB, Display Assembly, and Keypad.
User
Interface
Board
Front Panel
SPN Board
Figure 4-34: User Interface Board
Refer to Section 7.3, PC Board Test Points for the user interface DC voltage test point
outputs.
4-36
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Instrument Components
4.8.6
Temperature Monitoring System
Power Supply
The VITEK® 2 Compact instrument power supply subsystem is part of the Rear Panel
Assembly. It houses and supplies the required AC and DC voltages for instrument
operation. The power supply subsystem is located in the rear of the instrument,
behind the power supply cover (Figure 4-35).
Power Supply
Thermistor
Power Supply
65 W, +24 V
Power Supply
65 W, +5 V,
+12 V, –12 V
Pump Control
Solid-State
Relay (SSR)
Power Supply
+12 V, 110 W
Step Up/Down
Toroidal
Transformer
Power Entry
Module, 6 A
Fan Assembly
Power Supply
Figure 4-35: Power Supply Assembly
The Power Supply Subsystem houses the AC voltage distribution for the Vacuum
Pump and Incubator Heater. The DC voltages feed the DC Power Distribution Board.
Refer to Figure 7-1 in Section 7.1, Instrument Wiring Diagram.
The Power Supply Subsystem consists of a Power Entry Module, an AC Breakout
Board, a +24 VDC supply, +12 VDC supply, +5/+12/–12 VDC supply, a Solid-State
Relay for the Filler Pump, a Power Supply Fan Assembly, a Thermistor, and a Toroid.
Note:
4.9
The Rear Panel Assembly contains the Power Supply Subsystem, as well as
two Cabinet Fans.
Temperature Monitoring System
The VITEK® 2 Compact instrument contains five thermistors used to monitor the
instrument’s environmental (ambient) temperature and help regulate the instrument’s
internal temperature. The locations of the five thermistors are as follows:
• One thermistor located near the inlet cabinet fan is used by the firmware to
monitor the environmental (ambient) temperature of the instrument.
• Two thermistors located inside the Incubator are used by the firmware to control
the incubator’s temperature. One thermistor is located below the Incubator Heater
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
4-37
Temperature Monitoring System
Instrument Components
and the other is located behind the Incubator Carousel quadrants and air table.
(See Section 4.7.2.1, Incubator Temperature Control.)
• One thermistor located inside the Power Supply is used by the firmware to
monitor the power supply temperature. (See Section 4.8.6, Power Supply.)
• One thermistor located on the outside back of the incubator assembly is used for
internal cabinet temperature control. This thermistor measures the warmest air
inside the instrument. The thermistor measurement is used by the firmware to
control the instrument’s inside temperature using the cabinet fans.
4-38
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Chapter 5: Component Replacement
About this Chapter
This chapter contains the common field repair procedures for replacing various
defective components of the VITEK® 2 Compact instrument. Before performing any of
these repair procedures, use the procedures in Chapter 6, Troubleshooting of this
manual to properly isolate the instrument’s problems.
IMPORTANT:
When performing component replacement while cards are processing,
it is important to note that the first card in the carousel will be forced to
terminate about 25 minutes after loss of power, or when two missed
card readings are caused by the carousel or transport not moving
cards through the card reading cycle. Subsequent cards will be forced
to terminate in 15 second intervals thereafter. The entire carousel will
be forced to terminate after 40 minutes. To reduce the number of cards
forced to terminate, make sure the instrument is returned to service as
soon as possible, or avoid performing component replacement while
cards are processing if at all possible.
For a list of available spare parts, contact your local bioMérieux subsidiary or refer to
the most recent Global Customer Service worldwide spare parts list.
See Section 7.1, Instrument Wiring Diagram for the instrument wiring diagram.
Note:
See Section 1.5, Reference Documents for a list of documents referenced
within this service manual. Always refer to the latest drawing revision.
Chapter Contents
5.1
Important Information • 5-4
5.1.1
5.2
Front Panel, Rear Panel, and/or Side Cover Removal • 5-5
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.2.5
5.3
Removal • 5-9
Installation • 5-9
Power Entry Module (PEM) Replacement • 5-9
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.5
Top Panel Assembly • 5-5
Left Side Cover Assembly • 5-6
Right Side Cover Assembly • 5-6
Front Panel Assembly • 5-7
Rear Panel Assembly • 5-7
Power Switch Entry Module (PEM) Fuse Replacement • 5-9
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.4
Repair Notes • 5-4
Removal • 5-10
Installation • 5-10
Power Supply Components • 5-11
5.5.1
Removal • 5-11
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-1
Component Replacement
5.5.2
5.5.3
Installation • 5-12
+5 Volt Adjustment to the +5/+12/–12 VDC Supply • 5-12
5.6
Power Supply Fan Assembly Replacement • 5-13
5.7
Solid-State Relay (SSR) Replacement • 5-14
5.7.1
5.7.2
5.7.3
5.7.4
5.8
Bay Controller Board (BCB) Replacement • 5-16
5.8.1
5.8.2
5.9
Vacuum Pump SSR Removal • 5-14
Vacuum Pump SSR Installation • 5-15
Incubator SSR Removal • 5-15
Incubator SSR Installation • 5-16
Removal • 5-18
Installation • 5-19
BCB Hardware Key Installation • 5-24
5.10 BCB Battery Replacement • 5-25
5.10.1 BCB Battery Replacement – Hot Swap • 5-26
5.10.2 BCB Battery Replacement – Power Off • 5-27
5.11 DC Power Distribution Supply Board Replacement • 5-28
5.11.1 Removal • 5-28
5.11.2 Installation • 5-28
5.12 Head Control Assembly Board (HCB) Replacement • 5-29
5.12.1 Removal • 5-29
5.12.2 Installation • 5-29
5.13 Sample Prep Node (SPN) Board Replacement • 5-29
5.13.1 Removal • 5-31
5.13.2 Installation • 5-32
5.14 Transport Encoder Board Replacement • 5-33
5.14.1 Removal • 5-33
5.14.2 Installation • 5-33
5.15 Display Assembly Component Replacement • 5-34
5.15.1 User Interface Assembly Board Removal • 5-34
5.15.2 User Interface Assembly Board Installation • 5-34
5.15.3 Blue and White LCD Replacement • 5-35
5.16 Instrument Motors • 5-35
5.16.1 Transport Linear Actuator Motor • 5-36
5.16.2 Incubator Motor Replacement • 5-38
5.16.3 Reader Head Motor • 5-39
5.16.4 Autoloader Linear Actuator Motor Replacement • 5-40
5.16.5 Ejector Motor Replacement • 5-42
5.16.6 Cam Motor Replacement • 5-43
5.16.7 Sealer Linear Actuator Motor Replacement • 5-44
5.17 Instrument Sensors • 5-46
5.17.1 Optical Switch Assembly Sensor Replacement • 5-46
5.17.2 Convergent Reflective Sensor Replacement • 5-48
5.18 Transport Assembly Replacement • 5-50
5.18.1 Removal • 5-50
5-2
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
5.18.2 Installation • 5-51
5.19 Incubator Assembly • 5-51
5.19.1 Heater Incubator Fan Replacement (Top) • 5-52
5.19.2 Incubator Fan Replacement (Bottom) • 5-53
5.19.3 Incubator Heater Assembly Replacement • 5-53
5.19.4 Static Removing Brush Replacement • 5-54
5.20 Transmittance Replacement and Testing • 5-54
5.20.1 Transmittance Optics Replacement • 5-55
5.20.2 Transmittance Minimum Threshold Reading Test and HCB Test • 5-57
5.21 Reader Head Assembly Replacement • 5-61
5.21.1 Removal • 5-62
5.21.2 Installation • 5-62
5.22 Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt Replacement • 5-62
5.22.1 Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt (P/N 6200190) Replacement • 5-63
5.22.2 Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt (P/N 333612-2) Replacement • 5-65
5.23 Reader Head Roller Plate Assembly Replacement • 5-66
5.23.1 Reader Head Roller Plate (P/N 532151-903) Replacement • 5-67
5.23.2 Reader Head Roller Plate (P/N 532151-902) Replacement • 5-69
5.23.3 Reader Ledge Replacement • 5-71
5.24 Vacuum Pump Replacement • 5-71
5.24.1 Removal • 5-71
5.24.2 Installation • 5-73
5.25 3-Way Filler Valve Assembly Replacement • 5-73
5.25.1 Removal • 5-73
5.25.2 Installation • 5-73
5.26 Rear Panel Fan Replacement • 5-74
5.26.1 Removal • 5-74
5.26.2 Installation • 5-75
5.27 Bar Code Scanner Replacement • 5-75
5.27.1 Removal • 5-75
5.27.2 Installation • 5-75
5.28 Sealer Assembly Replacement • 5-76
5.28.1 Removal • 5-76
5.28.2 Installation • 5-77
5.29 Sealer Hot Wire Replacement • 5-77
5.29.1 Removal • 5-77
5.29.2 Installation • 5-78
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-3
Important Information
5.1
Component Replacement
Important Information
Ensure you read and understand the following warning information prior to performing
any maintenance or entry into the instrument.
CAUTION: Follow all procedures, cautions, and warnings in this
manual to avoid damage to the instrument, parts, or personal injury
due to impact.
CAUTION: Only authorized VITEK® 2 Compact instrument service
technicians should attempt to perform any component installation or
servicing of this instrument beyond normal operational and routine
maintenance tasks. Contact bioMérieux for any additional information
or procedural direction.
WARNING
The Sealer Station contains a wire that is heated during the sealing
operation. The instrument also contains areas of elevated
temperatures in or near the incubator. Take proper precautions.
5.1.1
Repair Notes
This chapter includes the recommended procedures for component replacement.
However, alternate methods of removal and replacement can be practiced as long as
the integrity of the instrument is not compromised.
CAUTION: The instrument circuit boards are sensitive to static
electricity. Wear a static wrist strap when handling circuit boards or
any electronic components. Before removing any circuit boards or
internal components, place the main AC Power Switch in the OFF
position. After removing a circuit board, wrap it in antistatic material
for storage or shipment. (See Appendix G, Electrostatic Discharge
(ESD).) Before installing a new circuit board, check the switches and
jumpers for correct settings by referring to current documentation, or
compare it to the circuit board being removed.
Most of the VITEK® 2 Compact securing screws have ND Industries, Inc. Vibratite®
Formula 3 thread-locking adhesive applied. Upon two to three removals/insertions of
these screws, reapply Vibratite® as follows:
1. Completely cover threads in the gripping area with an approximate length of 1.5
times the diameter of screw. (Threads should be at least half full when dry.)
5-4
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
Front Panel, Rear Panel, and/or Side Cover Removal
2. Allow Vibratite® to fully dry before use (approximately 10 to 30 minutes,
depending on the part size). When dry, install fasteners immediately or store
them for use at a later time.
After replacing a component and performing any required instrument alignments,
always confirm instrument functionality by performing the Simulated Processing Cycle
found in Chapter 2 of this manual.
5.2
Front Panel, Rear Panel, and/or Side Cover Removal
Removal of the cabinet panels and covers may be necessary during replacement of
components such as the Transport Motor or the Vacuum Pump. (See Figure 5-1.)
Top Panel
Front Panel
Side Cover
Rear Panel
Figure 5-1: Covers and Panels
5.2.1
Top Panel Assembly
Refer to Figure 5-1 for panel and cover locations.
5.2.1.1
Removal
1. Loosen the eight hex head screws securing the Top Panel Assembly to the
instrument.
2. Remove the Top Panel Assembly by slightly lifting up the back end, moving the
Top Panel toward the back of the instrument, and then lifting it up.
5.2.1.2
Installation
1. Insert the lip of the Top Panel Assembly under the Front Panel Assembly and
then lower it in place.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-5
Front Panel, Rear Panel, and/or Side Cover Removal
Component Replacement
2. Secure the eight hex-head screws.
5.2.2
Left Side Cover Assembly
Refer to Figure 5-1 for panel and cover locations.
5.2.2.1
Removal
1. Open the Waste Collection Door, and from the hinge area remove the two Left
Panel screws labeled SIDE.
2. Loosen the inside top screw securing the Left Panel to the Front Panel.
3. Remove the five screws securing the Left Side Cover to the Rear Panel
Assembly.
4. Lift the Side Cover up and out.
5.2.2.2
Installation
1. Set the Left Side Cover in place, ensuring it is hooked onto the Front Panel
inside top screw.
2. Push down on the Side Cover to ensure proper contact with EMC gaskets and
then secure using the hardware previously removed.
3. Secure the Front Panel inside top screw.
4. Close the Waste Collection Door.
5.2.3
Right Side Cover Assembly
Refer to Figure 5-1 for panel and cover locations.
5.2.3.1
Removal
1. Open the Front User Access Door and remove from the hinge area the two right
panel screws labeled SIDE.
2. Remove the five screws securing the Right Side Cover to the Rear Panel
Assembly.
3. Lift the Side Cover up and out.
5.2.3.2
Installation
1. Set the Right Side Cover in place, ensuring it is hooked onto the Front Panel.
2. Push down on the Side Cover to ensure proper contact with EMC gaskets and
then secure using the hardware previously removed.
3. Close the Front User Access Door.
5-6
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
5.2.4
Front Panel, Rear Panel, and/or Side Cover Removal
Front Panel Assembly
Refer to Figure 5-1 for panel and cover locations.
5.2.4.1
Removal
1. Perform the Top Panel Assembly Removal procedure (Section 5.2.1.1).
2. Tag and disconnect cables from the Front Panel Assembly connecting to the
Board Mount Assembly.
3. Disconnect the vacuum tubing going to the Front Panel Assembly.
4. Open the Waste Collection Door and remove from the hinge area the two Left
Panel screws labeled SIDE.
5. Loosen the inside top screw securing the Left Panel to the Front Panel.
6. Open the Front User Access Door and remove the two right panel screws
labeled SIDE.
7. Open the Load/Unload Door and loosen one screw that secures the Front Panel
to the Base Pan.
8. Lift up on both the Left and Right Panels to unhook them from the Front Panel.
9. Slide the Front Panel forward to remove.
5.2.4.2
Installation
1. Install the Front Panel Assembly and hook the Left and Right Panels.
2. Secure the screw behind the Load/Unload Door, install the side panel screws,
and tighten the inside top screw securing the Left Panel to the Front Panel.
3. Connect cables and tubing.
4. Perform the Top Panel Assembly Installation procedure (Section 5.2.1.2).
5.2.5
Rear Panel Assembly
5.2.5.1
Removal
1. Perform the Top Panel Assembly Removal procedure (Section 5.2.1.1).
2. Perform the Left and Right Side Cover Assembly Removal procedures
(Section 5.2.2.1 and Section 5.2.3.1, respectively).
3. Remove the two screws securing the lid of the Board Mount Assembly and open
the lid to expose the boards.
4. Tag and disconnect the following cables.
• Speaker cable plugged into the BCB.
• Cable plugged into the UPS Connector PCB.
• Cable plugged into the Host PC Connector PCB.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-7
Front Panel, Rear Panel, and/or Side Cover Removal
Component Replacement
• Power Supply Harness plugged into the Rear Panel Assembly power
supply encasing.
• AC Incubator and Vacuum Harness plugged into the Rear Panel Assembly
power supply encasing.
• Cabinet fans plugged into J23 and J17 of the Transport SPN Board
5. Open the two cable clamps located on the side of the Rear Panel Assembly
power supply encasing.
6. Ensure that the Fan Wires are separated from the Wire Bundle.
7. Remove the Rear Panel mounting hardware (see Figure 5-2):
• Seven screws across the bottom.
• Two screws securing the Board Mount Assembly to the Rear Panel
Assembly.
• Two hex-head screws and washers securing the Vacuum Mounting Plate to
the Rear Panel Assembly.
Board Mount
Vacuum
Mounting
Plate
Bottom
Access
Figure 5-2: Rear Panel Assembly Screws
8. Lift the Rear Panel Assembly up and out.
5.2.5.2
Installation
1. Place the Rear Panel Assembly and secure it with mounting hardware.
2. Reconnect the wires to the parts as tagged.
3. Secure wire bundles by locking down the cable clamps previously opened.
4. Secure the lid of the Board Mount Assembly with hardware previously removed.
5. Perform the Left and Right Cover Installation procedures (Section 5.2.2.2 and
Section 5.2.3.2, respectively).
6. Perform the Top Panel Assembly Installation procedure (Section 5.2.1.2).
5-8
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
5.3
Power Switch Entry Module (PEM) Fuse Replacement
Power Switch Entry Module (PEM) Fuse Replacement
Refer to Figure 5-3 for the Power Switch Fuse location.
5.3.1
Removal
1. Turn the instrument Power Switch OFF and unplug the power cord from the
instrument.
2. Note the voltage setting on the Voltage Selector. With a flat-blade screwdriver,
pry open the Fuse Drawer.
3. Remove the defective fuse(s) from the Fuse Drawer.
Voltage Selector
Fuse Drawer
Power Entry
Module
Figure 5-3: Main AC Power Entry Module Fuse Replacement
5.3.2
Installation
1. Replace the fuse(s) in the Fuse Drawer. (Refer to Table 2-2 in Section 2.4,
System Placement and Connections for proper fuse usage.)
2. Install the Fuse Drawer.
3. Plug the power cord into the instrument Power Connection Plug.
4. Ensure the instrument is ready to be started.
5. Turn the Power Switch ON and verify system operation.
5.4
Power Entry Module (PEM) Replacement
The VITEK® 2 Compact instrument PEM is located on the right side of the instrument.
Power to the instrument is supplied from a power cord connected to an optional UPS,
an optional Power Conditioner, or plugged into the lab facility’s wall outlet.
Refer to Figure 5-4 for an illustration of the PEM front.
Figure 5-5 shows the access cover that must be removed before gaining access to
the PEM for removal.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-9
Power Entry Module (PEM) Replacement
5.4.1
Component Replacement
Removal
1. Turn the switch to the OFF position and unplug the power cord.
2. Note the voltage on the PEM, and with a flat-blade screwdriver, open the Fuse
Cover.
3. Remove the Fuse Drawer and set it aside.
4. Remove the Power Supply Cover to expose the rear of the Power Switch.
5. Tag and disconnect the wires attached to the PEM.
6. Remove the screws holding the PEM to the Rear Panel Base.
7. Gently remove the switch from the panel.
Figure 5-4: Power Entry Module
5.4.2
Installation
1. Install the PEM and reconnect the wires as tagged.
2. Position the voltage selector as noted from the removal. (Refer to Table 2-2 in
Section 2.4, System Placement and Connections for proper fuse usage.)
3. Install the Fuse Drawer in the PEM.
4. Reconnect the Power Cable to the instrument’s Power Connection Plug.
5. Verify the instrument is ready to be started.
6. Turn the Power Switch ON, and verify instrument operation.
5-10
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
5.5
Power Supply Components
Power Supply Components
This replacement procedure is common to all the power supply components
contained inside the Rear Panel Assembly (Figure 5-6).
5.5.1
Note:
Section 6.6.17, Power Supply Information lists the individual components
supplied by the +5/+12/-12 VDC 65 W, 12 VDC 110 W, 24 VDC 65W, and
the 120 VDC power supplies.
Note:
Each component should be replaced individually.
Removal
1. Ensure that the instrument power is turned OFF.
2. Remove the Rear Power Supply Cover.
Figure 5-5: Rear Power Supply Cover
3. Replace the non-functioning part. (See Figure 5-6 for individual part locations
and Figure 7-1 in Section 7.1, Instrument Wiring Diagram for wiring locations.)
4. Tag and disconnect the wires attached to the part to be replaced.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-11
Power Supply Components
Component Replacement
Power Supply
65 W, +24 V
Power Supply
65 W, +5 V,
+12 V, –12 V
Pump Control
Solid-State
Relay (SSR)
Power Supply
+12 V, 110 W
Step Up/Down
Toroidal
Transformer
Power Entry
Module, 6 A
Fan Assembly
Power Supply
Figure 5-6: Power Supply Components
5.5.2
Installation
1. Reconnect the wires to the part(s) as tagged.
2. Reinstall the Rear Power Supply Cover and tighten the fasteners.
3. Turn the Power Switch ON and verify voltages as necessary. (See Section 7.3,
PC Board Test Points.)
5.5.3
+5 Volt Adjustment to the +5/+12/–12 VDC Supply
After replacing the +5/+12/–12 VDC Supply the +5 VDC output voltage MUST be
adjusted.
1. Turn instrument ON.
2. Remove the Rear Power Supply Cover.
3. Using a DC voltage meter, place the positive lead into terminal 10 of the DC
bulkhead connector and place the negative lead into terminal 11. (See
Figure 5-7.)
4. Using a flat-tip insulated screwdriver adjust R36 until the voltage output is
5.20 VDC to 5.25 VDC. (Turn the potentiometer clockwise to increase the
voltage and counterclockwise to decrease the voltage.)
5. Remove terminal leads from the connector and reinstall the Rear Power Supply
Cover.
5-12
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
Power Supply Fan Assembly Replacement
R36
Terminal 11
(– lead)
Terminal 10
(+ lead)
Figure 5-7: Power Supply Voltage Adjustment
5.6
Power Supply Fan Assembly Replacement
1. Remove the Rear Power Supply Cover from the back of instrument.
Figure 5-8: Rear Power Supply Cover
2. Note orientation of the Power Supply Fan wires, and then disconnect fan
connector.
3. Remove hardware from Power Supply Fan and the fan bracket.
4. Discard Fan.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-13
Solid-State Relay (SSR) Replacement
Component Replacement
Air Flow
Direction
Power Supply
Fan Assembly
P/N 532181902
Figure 5-9: Power Supply Components
5. Position the Power Supply Fan so the airflow is directed out of the instrument.
6. Install and secure the Fan.
7. Reconnect the Fan wires, as previously noted.
8. Reinstall the Rear Power Supply Cover and tighten the fasteners.
5.7
Solid-State Relay (SSR) Replacement
There are more than one Solid-State Relays installed in the instrument, one for the
Reader Incubator and one for the Vacuum Pump. This procedure is common to both
Solid-State Relays installed in the instrument.
Access to the Incubator Heater Solid-State Relay is gained by removing the Top
Panel Assembly and then by removing the Heater Cover, located on top of the
Incubator Assembly.
Access to the Vacuum Pump Solid-State Relay is from the Rear Power Supply Cover
of the instrument. Figure 5-10 and Figure 5-11 show the Solid-State Relay locations.
5.7.1
Vacuum Pump SSR Removal
1. Ensure that the instrument power is turned OFF.
2. Remove the Rear Power Supply Cover.
3. Disconnect and tag all wires going to the Relay.
4. Note the Relay position (Figure 5-10 and Figure 5-11) and remove the screws
from each end of the Relay.
5. Remove the Relay and discard.
5-14
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
Solid-State Relay (SSR) Replacement
Solid-State Relay
120 V, 10 A
Figure 5-10: Vacuum Pump SSR
5.7.2
Vacuum Pump SSR Installation
1. Place the SSR into position on the Rear Panel Assembly as noted during
removal.
2. Install the screws to attach the Relay to the Mounting Plate.
3. Reconnect the tagged wires to the proper points on the Relay.
4. Install the Access Panels removed for replacement of the Relay.
5. Turn the Power Switch ON and verify operation.
5.7.3
Incubator SSR Removal
1. Ensure that the instrument power is turned OFF.
2. Remove the Top Panel Assembly.
3. Remove the Heater Cover and SSR from the Incubator Assembly.
4. Disconnect and tag all wires going to the Relay.
5. Remove the Relay Cover.
6. Note the Relay position and remove the screws and washer from each end of
the Relay.
7. Remove and discard the Relay.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-15
Bay Controller Board (BCB) Replacement
Component Replacement
Heater Cover
Solid-State
Relay
Figure 5-11: Incubator Solid-State Relay Replacement
5.7.4
Incubator SSR Installation
1. Place the Relay into position on the Heater Cover as noted during removal.
2. Install screws to attach the Relay to the Heater Cover.
3. Reconnect the tagged wires to the proper points on the Relay.
4. Install the Relay.
5. Install the Top Panel Assembly.
6. Turn the Power Switch ON and verify operation.
5.8
Bay Controller Board (BCB) Replacement
Refer to Figure 5-13 for BCB Circuit Board Location.
For each VITEK® 2 Systems Software release, there are approved versions of BCB,
SPN and Boot firmware that work together. Table 5-1 shows the different BCB dash
numbers, and the corresponding instrument firmware and Systems Software versions.
Never mix the different versions of Systems Software and instrument firmware
versions. Upon completion of a BCB replacement, the BCB firmware loaded on the
instrument must correspond with the appropriate Systems Software version.
When replacing a BCB, try to install a replacement that has the same version as the
old board. If the same version of board is not available, only replace the BCB with an
older version of firmware. Then update the board as described in the following
Installation procedure. Never replace a BCB that has a newer version of firmware, as
compared to the SPN and Systems Software. Otherwise, when the BCB is installed
and the instrument is turned on, the SPN firmware on the SPN boards will update to
5-16
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
Bay Controller Board (BCB) Replacement
correspond with the new BCB firmware. The only way to return the instrument to a
prior firmware version is to reload BCB firmware and replace all of the affected SPN
boards.
Table 5-1 lists the BCB part numbers, the BCB firmware pre-loaded on the boards,
and the corresponding software and firmware versions.
CAUTION: The instrument circuit boards are sensitive to static
electricity. Wear a static wrist strap when handling circuit boards or
any electronic components. After removing a circuit board, wrap it in
antistatic material for storage or shipment. (See Appendix G,
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD).)
IMPORTANT:
Once an instrument is updated, it cannot be returned to a prior
firmware version without replacing all of the SPN boards.
IMPORTANT:
Upon completion of a BCB replacement, the BCB firmware loaded on
the instrument must correspond with the appropriate Systems
Software version.
Note:
There are no functional differences between the different 531750 BCB part
numbers. The only difference is the BCB firmware version pre-installed on
the board.
Note:
To login to the System Software, refer to Section 6.1.1, Login to Host PC
Operating System. To determine the System Software version on the host
PC, refer to Section 6.7, Viewing Host PC Software Version.
Note:
To login to the instrument DML, refer to Section 6.2.4.6, Opening Instrument
Diagnostic Window. To determine the firmware version on the instrument,
refer to Section 6.4.2.2, VER or Section F.5.5, Displaying Version
Information.
Table 5-1: BCB Part Numbers and Approved Software / Firmware Compatibility
BCB Part
Number
VITEK® 2 Systems
General
Vacuum
BCB
BCB
Boot
Compact Software
SPN
SPN
Firmware
Firmware
Firmware
Card
Version
Firmware Firmware
on Board
Version
Version
Capacity Release
Version
Version
531750-902
0.83
30 or 60
2.01
0.83
4.17
4.16
0.12
531750-903
1.02
30 or 60
3.01
1.02
4.17
4.16
0.12
531750-915
1.02
15
3.01
1.02
4.17
4.16
0.12
531750-904
1.04
30 or 60
4.01
1.04
4.17
4.16
0.12
531750-90415
1.04
15
4.01
1.04
4.17
4.16
0.12
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-17
Bay Controller Board (BCB) Replacement
Component Replacement
Table 5-1: BCB Part Numbers and Approved Software / Firmware Compatibility (Continued)
BCB Part
Number
VITEK® 2 Systems
General
Vacuum
BCB
BCB
Boot
Compact Software
SPN
SPN
Firmware
Firmware
Firmware
Card
Version
Firmware Firmware
on Board
Version
Version
Capacity Release
Version
Version
6200113
1.10
30 or 60
5.01
1.10
4.18
4.18
0.12
6200114
1.10
15
5.01
1.10
4.18
4.18
0.12
5.8.1
Removal
1. If the instrument is responsive, eject all of the processing cards by performing
Section E.3, Cleaning the Carousel, or eject the cards by using the host PC
Systems Software.
2. After all cards have ejected, turn OFF the instrument.
3. Perform the Top Panel Assembly Removal procedure (Section 5.2.1.1).
4. Open the Board Mount Assembly Door of the instrument by removing the
screws to access the Compact BCB Circuit Board.
5. Disconnect and tag all wires and cables from the BCB Circuit Board.
6. If a Hardware Key is installed in the BCB Circuit Board, remove it and set it
aside (see Figure 5-12).
Hardware
Key
Figure 5-12: Hardware Key
7. Note the mounting position of the BCB Circuit Board on the Mounting Plate.
8. Using a screwdriver, remove the screws holding the board in place, and then
gently pry the board from the standoffs. (Be sure not to damage the board.)
5-18
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
Bay Controller Board (BCB) Replacement
BCB Board
Figure 5-13: BCB Circuit Board Replacement (Top Panel Removed)
5.8.2
Installation
1. Ensure the replacement BCB has the same BCB firmware version as the old
board. If the same version of board is not available, only replace the BCB with
an older version of firmware. Then update the board as described in this
procedure. Also, ensure that the boot firmware is the latest version. (Refer to
Table 5-1 and Drawing VKCXXX.)
2. Compare the replacement board with the old board for any jumper or switch
configuration, and make any adjustments. (Refer to Section 7.4, Bay Controller
Board.)
Note:
If installing a BCB into a VITEK® 2 Compact 15 instrument, ensure that there
is a jumper across pins 11 and 12 of HDR8.
3. Place the new BCB into the noted position from removal of the old board, and
install the screws to hold it in place.
4. Reconnect the cables and wires to the BCB Circuit Board connectors that were
previously removed.
5. Install the Hardware Key, if applicable. (Refer to Section 5.9, BCB Hardware
Key Installation.)
6. Perform the Top Panel Assembly Installation procedure (Section 5.2.1.2).
7. Turn the Power Switch ON and verify the board is working. (See Section 7.3,
PC Board Test Points for voltage test point information.)
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-19
Bay Controller Board (BCB) Replacement
Component Replacement
8. Wait for the User Interface to complete Initializing, and for the Status screen to
appear.
CAUTION: If it takes an unusually long time for the Status screen to
appear, do NOT reboot the instrument until the instrument LOG files
are reviewed. A SPN Board may be updating. If power is cycled when a
SPN Board is updating, SPN firmware could be lost and the SPN Board
will need to be replaced.
9. From the desktop of the host PC, double-click the appropriate Instrument
Diagnostic icon (Instrument 1 Diagnostic, Instrument 2 Diagnostic, etc.).
10. At the diagnostic Prompt > type LOGIN pasteur95 and press Enter. (This is
only a temporary login, because the field service login does not allow the
following TIME command.)
A line describing the login group confirms a successful login.
Note:
IMPORTANT:
Logins are case-sensitive.
This password is only to be used by trained bioMérieux personnel, and
must not be given to the customer. (See the VITEK® 2 Compact
Instrument Manufacturing Commands [Drawing 532611] for more
information.)
11. At the Prompt > type NV_DEFAULTS and press Enter.
12. Press Y for Yes.
13. At the Prompt > type TIME and press Enter. The current time in the format
below is displayed.
VKC 2 VITEK2C > time
Uptime: '35::22:31:13'
Epoch Time: 18911623 '218::21:13:43'
System Ticks: 1.1031953413 '36::19:10:36.413'
Daylight Savings: 0, TimeZone: 0
UTC: 903146844, Sat Aug 15 02:07:24 1998
Local Time: 903146844, Sat Aug 15 02:07:24 1998
Figure 5-14: TIME Command
14. Verify the number after the Epoch Time is a positive number.
• If it is a positive number, proceed to Step 15.
• If it is a negative number, repeat Step 11 and Step 12.
15. At the diagnostic Prompt > type COLD and press Enter.
5-20
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
Bay Controller Board (BCB) Replacement
16. Verify the instrument user interface screen is functioning normally.
Note:
See Section 6.1.1, Login to Host PC Operating System and Section 6.2.4.6,
Opening Instrument Diagnostic Window for login information.
17. From the diagnostic terminal Prompt > type SAVE_ALIGNMENTS. (This
command uploads the current alignments from the SPN Boards to the BCB
board.)
18. Determine the BCB firmware compatibility with the Systems Software:
• If the BCB firmware version corresponds with the installed Systems
Software (see Table 5-1) continue with Section 5.8.2.1, BCB Firmware
Compatible (O.K.) – Add Instrument & System Information.
• If the BCB firmware version is older than the installed Systems Software,
and the Systems Software is earlier than 2.01, continue with Section
5.8.2.2, Older BCB Firmware & Systems Software Earlier than 2.01.
• If the BCB firmware version is older than the installed Systems Software,
and the Systems Software is 2.01 or later, continue with Section 5.8.2.3,
Older BCB Firmware & Systems Software 2.01 or Later.
Note:
5.8.2.1
To determine the Systems Software version on the host PC, refer to Section
6.7, Viewing Host PC Software Version. To determine the firmware version
on the instrument, refer to Section 6.4.2.2, VER or Section F.5.5, Displaying
Version Information.
BCB Firmware Compatible (O.K.) – Add Instrument & System Information
1. After the Status screen displays on the User Interface, type the following DML
commands with instrument-specific information. (Reference Chapter 6,
Troubleshooting for more information.)
• SET_SYS_NUM
• SET_SN
• SET_PM_DATE
• SET_PROD_DATE
Note:
Historical instrument statistics are not retained when a BCB is replaced.
2. From the instrument User Interface, select Main Menu > Configuration and
configure the following as desired.
• Instrument Name
• Date Format
• Schedule QC Status
• Alert Options
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-21
Bay Controller Board (BCB) Replacement
Component Replacement
• Alert Volumes
• Display Options
5.8.2.2
Older BCB Firmware & Systems Software Earlier than 2.01
This procedure describes how to update the BCB firmware using a Software CD and a
Diagnostics Terminal installed on an alternate PC (service PC).
1. Connect the end of the instrument cable marked DIAGNOSTIC to a COM port
available on an alternate PC.
2. Open the Diagnostics Terminal installed on an alternate PC. (See Section 6.2.2,
Diagnostic Connection — Instrument Connected to Service PC.)
3. Ensure that the Software CD corresponds with the installed host PC software.
4. Insert the Software CD into the host PC CD drive.
5. From the Diagnostics Terminal window, click the File Download button.
6. Browse the CD and select the firmware folder.
7. From the firmware folder, select the compact folder.
8. Select the firmware file Vitek2Compact.bin.
CAUTION: When performing this BCB firmware update method, there
are no error checks to prevent VITEK® 2 firmware from installing on a
VITEK® 2 Compact instrument, or to prevent older firmware versions
from overwriting newer firmware versions.
9. Click OK. A Progress Status Bar appears on the instrument User Interface, and
the BCB firmware update begins. (Downloading the VITEK® 2 Compact flash
memory using a .mot or .bin file through Diagnostics Terminal takes less than
10 minutes.)
10. Once the download is complete and the Status screen displays on the User
Interface, type the following DML commands with instrument-specific
information. (Reference Chapter 6, Troubleshooting for more information.)
• SET_SYS_NUM
• SET_SN
• SET_PM_DATE
• SET_PROD_DATE
Note:
Historical instrument statistics are not retained when a BCB is replaced.
11. From the instrument User Interface, select Main Menu > Configuration and
configure the following, as desired.
• Instrument Name
• Date Format
5-22
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
Bay Controller Board (BCB) Replacement
• Schedule QC Status
• Alert Options
• Alert Volumes
• Display Options
5.8.2.3
Older BCB Firmware & Systems Software 2.01 or Later
This procedure describes how to update the BCB firmware using a Firmware CD and
the Diagnostics Terminal installed on the host PC.
CAUTION: Performing an alternate method of BCB firmware update by
using the InstallAnywhere® Firmware Installer (v2s-fw.exe) on the
Firmware CD (as described in the VITEK® 2 Systems 03.01 Update
Instructions, for example) forces a BCB firmware update to ALL
instruments connected to the host PC. If test cards are processing on
a functional instrument, and a Firmware Installer firmware update
occurs, the test card results will be lost.
1. Double-click the corresponding Instrument Diagnostic icon located on the host
PC desktop (for example, Instrument 1 Diagnostic, Instrument 2 Diagnostic,
etc.).
2. Ensure that the Firmware CD corresponds with the installed host PC software.
3. Insert the Firmware CD into the host PC CD drive.
4. From the Diagnostics Terminal window, click the File Download button.
5. Browse the CD and select the firmware folder.
6. From the firmware folder, select the compact folder.
7. Select the firmware file Vitek2Compact.bin.
CAUTION: When performing this BCB firmware update method, there
are no error checks to prevent VITEK® 2 firmware from installing on a
VITEK® 2 Compact instrument, or to prevent older firmware versions
from overwriting newer firmware versions.
8. Click OK. A Progress Status Bar appears on the instrument User Interface, and
the BCB firmware update begins. (Downloading the VITEK® 2 Compact flash
memory using a .mot or .bin file through Diagnostics Terminal takes less than
10 minutes.)
9. Once the download is complete and the Status screen displays on the User
Interface, type the following DML commands with instrument-specific
information. (Reference Chapter 6, Troubleshooting for more information.)
• SET_SYS_NUM
• SET_SN
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-23
BCB Hardware Key Installation
Component Replacement
• SET_PM_DATE
• SET_PROD_DATE
Note:
Historical instrument statistics are not retained when a BCB is replaced.
10. From the instrument User Interface, select Main Menu > Configuration and
configure the following as desired.
• Instrument Name
• Date Format
• Schedule QC Status
• Alert Options
• Alert Volumes
• Display Options
5.9
BCB Hardware Key Installation
The VITEK® 2 Compact instrument is factory-configured to process 15, 30 or 60 cards
in the carousel at one time. For the instrument to process 60 cards, the Bay Controller
Board requires a BCB Hardware Key.
CAUTION: The instrument circuit boards are sensitive to static
electricity. Wear a static wrist strap when handling circuit boards or
any electronic components. After removing a circuit board, wrap it in
antistatic material for storage or shipment. (See Appendix G,
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD).)
Note:
Ensure that the Carousel is empty prior to the installation of the BCB
Hardware Key.
1. Ensure that the instrument power is turned OFF.
2. Perform the Top Panel Assembly Removal procedure (Section 5.2.1.1).
3. Set the Top Panel Assembly aside.
4. Loosen and remove the two pan-head screws securing the lid of the Board
Mount Assembly.
5. Pivot the lid forward and allow it to rest on the Front Panel Assembly.
6. Insert the Hardware Key into the P15 connector, so the board sits over the P14
connector (Figure 5-15).
5-24
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
BCB Battery Replacement
Hardware
Key
Figure 5-15: Hardware Key
7. Close the lid of the Board Mount Assembly and reinstall the two pan-head
screws.
8. Perform the Top Panel Assembly Installation procedure (Section 5.2.1.2).
5.10
BCB Battery Replacement
BCB battery failure symptoms include instrument and customer settings defaulting to
factory settings, and possible internal clock error messages. If these symptoms occur,
replace the BCB battery prior to replacing the Bay Controller Board.
There are two ways to replace a VITEK® 2 Compact BCB battery.
• Hot swapping the battery with power on. This procedure may be used for routine
PM type replacements, to prevent losing instrument settings.
• Replacing the battery with power turned off.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-25
BCB Battery Replacement
Component Replacement
Figure 5-16: BCB Battery
5.10.1
BCB Battery Replacement – Hot Swap
It is possible to hot swap the BCB battery while the instrument is still powered on.
While performing this procedure, use extreme care not to damage the BCB or shortcircuit any surrounding components.
Note:
The following statement comes directly from the manufacturer
acknowledging that this is an acceptable method to use.
“As the battery reaches the end of its useful life, it is possible to remove the
SNAPHAT® top containing the nearly expended cell, and to replace it with a
fresh unit. No data will be lost during the process, provided that the board
remains powered-up during the operation.”
1. Note the orientation of the SNAPHAT® battery in the Bay Controller Board
socket.
2. Carefully remove the battery by using a DIP/IC extractor tool. Grab the narrow
end of the battery to avoid bending the pins.
3. Install the new battery, making sure of correct orientation. The battery is keyed
on one end.
4. After replacing the battery, restart the instrument. Verify successful start-up and
instrument initialization. An Internal Clock Error may occur. Review the
message to silence the alarm. No further action is required for this message.
5. Process engineering cards to verify operation. (See Section 2.9, Simulated
Processing Cycle.)
5-26
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
5.10.2
BCB Battery Replacement
BCB Battery Replacement – Power Off
Note:
Because the battery is being removed from the BCB while powered off, all
system settings will return to factory defaults.
1. Verify that no cards are processing in the instrument. If cards are processing,
use one of the following methods to eject/remove cards.
• Use the UNLOAD DML command to eject cards from the carousel.
• Perform a carousel cleaning. (See Section E.3, Cleaning the Carousel.)
2. From the instrument User Interface, access the instrument Configuration menu
and record the following instrument settings:
• • Instrument Name
• • Date Format
• • Schedule QC Status
• • Alert Options
• • Alert Volumes
• • Display Options
3. Record the last Preventive Maintenance date from the User Interface by
selecting Main Menu > Diagnostics > Last Maintenance Date.
4. Shut down instrument and remove power.
5. Note the orientation of the SNAPHAT® battery in the Bay Controller Board
socket.
6. Carefully remove the battery by using a DIP/IC extractor tool. Grab the narrow
end of the battery to avoid bending the pins.
7. Install the new battery, making sure of correct orientation. The battery is keyed
on one end.
8. Restore power to the instrument. When restarting, various errors will occur. This
is because all BCB settings have defaulted, including alignment parameters.
The messages may be reviewed to stop the alarming, but do not try to resolve
the errors.
9. At the diagnostic Prompt > type LOGIN watson9 and press Enter.
10. At the Prompt > type SAVE_ALIGNMENTS to save the parameters from the
SPN Boards to the BCB.
11. Type COLD to restart and reinitialize the instrument. The error messages
should not reappear, unless they were not viewed during the previous restart.
12. Restore the previously recorded instrument settings.
13. Process engineering cards to verify operation. (See Section 2.9, Simulated
Processing Cycle.)
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-27
DC Power Distribution Supply Board Replacement
5.11
Component Replacement
DC Power Distribution Supply Board Replacement
Refer to Figure 5-17 for the location of the DC Power Distribution Supply Board.
5.11.1
Removal
1. Ensure that the instrument power is turned OFF.
2. Perform the Top Panel Assembly Removal procedure (Section 5.2.1.1).
3. To access the DC Power Distribution Board, open the Board Mount Assembly
door of the instrument by removing the securing screws.
4. Disconnect and tag all cables from the DC Power Distribution Board.
5. Using a screwdriver, remove the screws holding the board in place and then
gently pry the board from the standoffs. (Be sure not to damage the board.)
DC Power
Distribution
Board
Head Control
Board
Transport SPN
Board
Bar Code Reader
Board
Vacuum Sealer
Assembly Board
Figure 5-17: Board Locations
5.11.2
Installation
1. Place the new DC Power Distribution Supply Board into position and install the
screws.
2. Reconnect the cables.
3. Secure the Board Mount Assembly.
4. Perform the Top Panel Assembly Installation Procedure (Section 5.2.1.2).
5. Turn the Power Switch ON and verify the board is working. (See Section 7.3,
PC Board Test Points for voltage test point information.)
5-28
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
5.12
Head Control Assembly Board (HCB) Replacement
Head Control Assembly Board (HCB) Replacement
Refer to Figure 5-17 for the location of the HCB Circuit Board.
5.12.1
Removal
1. Ensure that the instrument power is turned OFF.
2. Perform the Top Panel Assembly Removal procedure (Section 5.2.1.1).
3. To access the HCB, open the Board Mount Assembly Door of the instrument by
removing the securing screws.
4. Tag and disconnect the cables attached to the HCB board.
5. Disconnect the HCB/Bar Code Interconnect Assembly from the HCB and set it
aside.
6. Note the mounting position of the board.
7. Using a screwdriver, remove the screws holding the board in place and then
gently pry the board from the standoffs. (Be sure not to damage the board.)
8. Remove the HCB.
5.12.2
Installation
1. Place the HCB into the proper position noted from the removal of the old board,
and gently push the board on the standoffs and install the screws.
2. Connect the cables to the HCB as tagged from the removal of the old board.
3. Connect the previously set-aside HCB/Bar Code Connector Assembly to J6 of
the HCB.
4. Reinstall the screws securing the Board Mount Assembly Door.
5. Perform the Top Panel Assembly Installation procedure (Section 5.2.1.2).
6. Turn the power switch ON and verify proper operation. (Refer to Section 7.3, PC
Board Test Points for voltage readings and test point information.)
5.13
Sample Prep Node (SPN) Board Replacement
The instrument houses four SPN Boards: the Transport SPN, Front Panel SPN,
Incubator SPN, and Vacuum Sealer Assembly Board.
This procedure is common to all SPN Boards located inside the instrument. All SPN
Boards are interchangeable except the Vacuum Sealer Assembly Board. The
instrument is designed for easy access to allow for easy serviceability and
replacement of SPN Boards.
Each SPN Board is designed to perform the operational process of the system to
which it is assigned. To configure the particular system the SPN Board is to control,
the jumper configuration must be set to allow the SPN Board to function to that
system. (Refer to Section 7.7, Sample Prep Node (SPN) Board.)
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-29
Sample Prep Node (SPN) Board Replacement
Component Replacement
When replacing a SPN, try to install a replacement that has the same version as the
old board. If the same version of board is not available, only replace the SPN with an
older version of firmware. When a SPN board with older SPN firmware is installed into
an instrument with a newer version of BCB firmware, the BCB firmware will
automatically update the SPN board during initialization.
Do not replace a SPN that has a newer version of firmware, as compared to the BCB
and Systems Software. Otherwise, the instrument will act as if the SPN board is nonfunctional, and may give errors in the instrument log indicating that components did
not initialize.
Example: SPN DL: Node 2 Version from BCB 4.16 < Version from
SPN 4.17: This node is disabled.
Table 5-2 lists the SPN board part numbers, the SPN firmware pre-loaded on the
boards, and the corresponding software and firmware versions.
Refer to Section 7.7, Sample Prep Node (SPN) Board for the jumper configuration for
the SPN Board that you are replacing. Figure 5-18 shows a typical SPN Board.
CAUTION: The instrument circuit boards are sensitive to static
electricity. Wear a static wrist strap when handling circuit boards or
any electronic components. After removing a circuit board, wrap it in
antistatic material for storage or shipment. (See Appendix G,
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD).)
5-30
IMPORTANT:
Upon completion of a SPN replacement, the SPN firmware loaded on
the instrument must correspond with the released Systems Software
version.
IMPORTANT:
Sample Prep Node Boards with part numbers 6200271 (General) and
6200270 (Vacuum) can only be used with BCB firmware version 1.10 or
higher.
Note:
There are no functional differences between the different 531720 SPN part
numbers. The only difference is the SPN firmware version
pre-installed on the board.
Note:
To login to the System Software, refer to Section 6.1.1, Login to Host PC
Operating System. To determine the System Software version on the host
PC, refer to Section 6.7, Viewing Host PC Software Version.
Note:
To login to the instrument DML, refer to Section 6.2.4.6, Opening Instrument
Diagnostic Window. To determine the firmware version on the instrument,
refer to Section 6.4.2.2, VER or Section F.5.5, Displaying Version
Information.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
Sample Prep Node (SPN) Board Replacement
Table 5-2: SPN Part Numbers and Approved Software / Firmware Compatibility
Replacement SPN P/N
Systems
General
Vacuum
Firmware
BCB
Boot
Software
SPN
SPN
on SPN
Firmware
Firmware
Version
Firmware Firmware
Board
Version
Version
Release
Version
Version
531720-905 Sample Prep
Node (SPN) Assembly
VKCSPN
4.17
531728-3 Vacuum Sealer
Assembly
VKCFILL
4.16
531720-905 Sample Prep
Node (SPN) Assembly
VKCSPN
4.17
531728-3 Vacuum Sealer
Assembly
VKCFILL
4.16
531720-905 Sample Prep
Node (SPN) Assembly
VKCSPN
4.17
531728-3 Vacuum Sealer
Assembly
VKCFILL
4.16
6200271 Sample Prep Node
(SPN) Assembly
VKCSPN
4.18
6200270 Vacuum Sealer
Assembly
VKCFILL
4.18
5.13.1
2.01
0.83
4.17
4.16
0.12
3.01
1.02
4.17
4.16
0.12
4.01
1.04
4.17
4.16
0.12
5.01
1.10
4.18
4.18
0.12
Removal
1. Ensure that the instrument power is turned OFF.
2. Remove the instrument panels to expose the SPN Board to be replaced.
3. Tag and disconnect the cables attached to the SPN Board.
4. Note the mounting position and jumper configuration of the SPN board.
5. Using a screwdriver, remove the screws holding the board in place. Then, if
necessary, gently pry the board from the standoffs. (Be sure not to damage the
board.)
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-31
Sample Prep Node (SPN) Board Replacement
Component Replacement
SPN Board
Figure 5-18: SPN Board Replacement
5.13.2
Installation
1. Configure the replacement SPN Board jumper setting to correspond with the
system it will control. Refer to the old board or Section 7.7, Sample Prep Node
(SPN) Board for the correct jumper configuration.
2. Install the SPN Board into the proper position noted from the removal of the old
board.
IMPORTANT:
If installing the Carousel SPN Board, ensure the ground wires are
reconnected.
3. Connect the cables to the SPN Board as tagged from the removal of the old
board.
4. Install the instrument panels that were previously removed.
5. Turn the power switch ON and verify proper operation. (Refer to Section 7.3, PC
Board Test Points for any voltage readings and test point information.)
6. Wait for the User Interface to complete Initializing and the Status screen to
appear.
CAUTION: If it takes an unusually long time for the Status screen to
appear, do NOT reboot the instrument until the instrument LOG files
are reviewed. A SPN Board may be updating. If power is cycled when a
SPN Board is updating, SPN firmware could be lost and the SPN Board
will need to be replaced.
7. From the Diagnostic prompt of the corresponding VITEK® 2 Compact, type
restore_alignments and press ENTER. (This command downloads the saved
alignments from the BCB Board to the SPN Boards.)
5-32
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
Transport Encoder Board Replacement
8. Verify alignments. If the Vacuum Sealer Assembly SPN was replaced, perform
both the Sealer and Vacuum Filler alignment/calibration procedures. (See
Drawing 532600.)
5.14
Transport Encoder Board Replacement
The Encoder Board is part of the Transport Assembly located near the center of the
instrument.
5.14.1
Removal
1. Ensure that the instrument power is turned OFF.
2. Perform the Front Panel Assembly Removal procedure (Section 5.2.4.1).
3. Tag and disconnect the cables attached to the Encoder Board.
4. Remove the two screws anchoring the board to the Transport Assembly and
gently pry the board off of the standoffs.
Encoder
Board
Figure 5-19: Transport Assembly Encoder Board
5.14.2
Installation
1. Place the board into position and replace the screws.
2. Connect the cables to the board as tagged from the removal of the old board.
3. Perform the Front Panel Assembly Installation procedure (Section 5.2.4.2).
4. Turn the power switch ON and verify proper operation.
5. Perform the Transport System alignment procedures. (See Drawing 532600.)
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-33
Display Assembly Component Replacement
5.15
Component Replacement
Display Assembly Component Replacement
The display assembly consists of a User Interface Assembly Board, a Display Mount
Bracket, a blue and white LCD, and a display to UIF cable.
Refer to Figure 5-20 for the location of the display assembly.
5.15.1
User Interface Assembly Board Removal
1. Ensure that the instrument power is turned OFF.
2. Perform the Front Panel Assembly Removal procedure (Section 5.2.4.1).
3. Tag and disconnect the cables plugged into the board.
CAUTION: Sufficiently tag Ribbon Cables for when you reconnect the
ribbons to the instrument. Improperly placed Ribbon Cables prevent
the keypad from functioning properly.
4. Remove the screws holding the board in place and then gently pry the board
from the standoffs. (Be sure not to damage the board.)
Display
Mount
Bracket
User
Interface
Assembly
Board
Front Panel
SPN Board
Bracket
Figure 5-20: Display Assembly Component Replacement
5.15.2
User Interface Assembly Board Installation
1. Place the board into position, snap the board into place, and install the screws.
2. Connect the Ribbon Cable and Backlight Cable. Ensure the Ribbon Cable is
properly oriented.
3. Perform the Front Panel Assembly Installation procedure (Section 5.2.4.2).
5-34
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
Instrument Motors
4. Turn the power switch ON and verify proper operation. (Refer to Section 7.3, PC
Board Test Points for any voltage readings and test point information.)
5.15.3
Blue and White LCD Replacement
5.15.3.1
Removal
1. Ensure that the instrument power is turned OFF.
2. Perform the Front Panel Assembly Removal procedure (Section 5.2.4.1).
3. Tag and disconnect the cables going to the LCD.
4. Remove the two screws securing the Front Panel SPN Board Bracket. (This is
to allow access to the lower screws securing the Display Mount Bracket.)
5. Remove the two top screws securing the Display Mount Bracket and loosen the
two bottom screws.
6. Orient the Display Mount Bracket so the LCD is facing outward.
7. Remove the screws securing the LCD, and then remove the LCD.
5.15.3.2
Installation
1. Mount the LCD to the Display Mount Bracket using the screws previously
removed.
2. Reinstall the Display Mount Bracket onto the Front Panel Assembly using the
screws previously removed.
3. Secure the Front Panel SPN Board Bracket using the screws previously
removed.
4. Perform the Front Panel Assembly Installation procedure (Section 5.2.4.2).
5. Turn the power switch ON and verify proper operation.
5.16
Instrument Motors
All of the transporting motors are similar in manufacture, but the biggest difference is
what they are driving. Some motors drive belts, while others are gear- or screw-driven.
The following motors can be found in the VITEK® 2 Compact:
• Transport Linear Actuator Motor
• Incubator Motor
• Reader Head Motor
• Autoloader Linear Actuator Motor
• Ejector Motor
• Cam Motor
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-35
Instrument Motors
Component Replacement
• Sealer Linear Actuator Motor
Refer to Section 7.1, Instrument Wiring Diagram for motor pin and wiring connections.
Figure 5-21: Sample Drive Motor
5.16.1
Transport Linear Actuator Motor
A new Motor/Guide Rod Mount (P/N 533349-1) has been introduced into Transport
Linear Actuator Motor. The new Motor/Guide Rod Mount does not allow for the ground
wires to be installed on the screws of the Transport Motor.
Refer to Figure 5-22 and Figure 5-23 for examples of the Transport Motor.
Transport
Motor
Figure 5-22: Transport Linear Actuator Motor
5-36
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
Instrument Motors
Ground
Wire
Transport
Motor
Figure 5-23: Transport Assembly (Shown with new Rod Mount)
5.16.1.1
Removal
1. Ensure that the instrument power is turned OFF.
2. Perform the Rear Panel Assembly Removal procedure (Section 5.2.5.1).
3. Tag and disconnect the Transport Motor Wire going to the Transport SPN
Board, located in the Board Mount Assembly.
4. Remove the two screws securing the Motor/Guide Rod Mount.
Note:
Instruments that have the old Motor/Guide Rod Mount installed will need to
note the ground wires when they remove the two screws.
5. Pull the Motor away from the Transport Assembly and then unscrew the Motor
from the Floating Drive Nut.
6. Remove the four hex head screws securing the Motor to the Motor/Guide Rod
Mount.
5.16.1.2
Installation
1. Secure the Transport Motor to the Motor/Guide Rod Mount.
2. Place the Motor into the Transport Assembly and thread the drive screw
through the Floating Drive Nut.
Note:
Perform Step 3 if the new Motor/Guide Rod Mount is installed, then proceed
to Step 5. Perform Step 4 if the old Motor/Guide Rod Mount is installed, then
proceed to Step 5.
3. Install two screws to secure the Motor/Guide Rod Mount to the transport insert.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-37
Instrument Motors
Component Replacement
4. Position the ground wires on the Motor/Guide Rod Mount and install two screws
to secure the Motor/Guide Rod Mount and ground wires to the transport insert.
5. Connect the Transport Motor to the Transport SPN Board as tagged.
6. Perform the Rear Panel Assembly Installation procedure (Section 5.2.5.2).
7. Turn the power switch ON and verify proper operation.
8. After turning the instrument ON, perform the Transport System alignment
procedures. (See Drawing 532600.)
5.16.2
Incubator Motor Replacement
Refer to Figure 5-24 for an example of the Incubator Motor.
5.16.2.1
Removal
1. Ensure that the instrument power is turned OFF.
2. Perform the Top Panel Assembly Removal procedure (Section 5.2.1.1).
3. Perform the Right Side Cover Assembly Removal procedure (Section 5.2.3.1).
4. Tag and disconnect the motor wires attached to the Carousel SPN Board.
5. Remove the two screws mounting the Motor Mount Bracket and Motor to the
Incubator Assembly. Remove the Bracket and Motor.
6. Loosen and remove the four screws and washers mounting the Stepper Motor
to the Motor Mount Bracket. (Note the Motor orientation to the Bracket.)
7. Measure and note the distance of the Drive Pulley mounted on the Motor Drive
Shaft.
8. Loosen the Pulley set screws and remove from the Motor Shaft.
9. Discard the Motor.
Ejector
Motor
Incubator
Motor
Figure 5-24: Incubator Motor
5-38
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
5.16.2.2
Instrument Motors
Installation
1. Install the Motor Pulley on the Motor Shaft to the distance measured during
removal of the Motor. Place the set screws of the Motor Pulley over flat spots of
the Shaft and tighten the set screws securely.
2. Mount the replacement Stepper Motor to the Motor Mount Bracket in the same
orientation as removed.
3. Mount the Motor Mount Bracket and Motor to the Incubator Assembly.
4. Reconnect the wires to the Carousel SPN Board as tagged.
5. Perform the Right Side Cover Assembly Installation procedure
(Section 5.2.3.2).
6. Perform the Top Panel Assembly Installation procedure (Section 5.2.1.2).
7. Turn the power switch ON and verify proper operation.
8. After turning the instrument ON, perform the carousel alignment procedures.
(Refer to Drawing 532600.)
5.16.3
Reader Head Motor
Refer to Figure 5-25 for an example of the Reader Head Motor.
5.16.3.1
Removal
1. Ensure that the instrument power is turned OFF.
2. Perform the Top Panel Assembly Removal procedure (Section 5.2.1.1).
3. Tag and disconnect the Reader Head Motor wires attached to the Head
Controller Board, located in the Board Mount Assembly.
Note:
Step 4 is not necessary if Reader Head Roller Plate (P/N 532151-903) is
installed. If Reader Head Roller Plate (P/N 532151-903) is installed, proceed
to Step 5.
4. Open the optics assembly, and press the belt where the optics assembly sits.
Note the belt tension.
5. Turn the Motor shaft and pulley of the Reader Head Motor and note the force
required to turn them by hand. (The belt must be adjusted accordingly, after the
replacement Motor has been installed.)
6. Loosen the Reader Motor Bracket and push it upward, adding slack to the belt.
7. Loosen and remove the four mounting screws, securing the Reader Head Motor
to the Reader Motor Bracket.
8. Remove the Motor. (Note the Motor orientation of the Motor Bracket.)
9. Measure and note the distance of the Drive Pulley mounted on the Motor Drive
Shaft.
10. Loosen the Pulley set screws and remove them from the Motor Shaft.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-39
Instrument Motors
Component Replacement
11. Discard the Motor.
Reader Head Motor
shown from the front
with Pulley and Belt
attached to Motor
Figure 5-25: Reader Head Motor
5.16.3.2
Installation
1. Install the Motor Pulley on the Motor Shaft to the distance measured during
Motor removal. Place the set screws of the Motor Pulley over the flat spots of
the Shaft, and tighten the set screws securely.
2. Install the Motor in the same orientation to the Bracket as removed. Place the
Belt around the Motor Pulley.
3. Position and tighten the Motor so that the belt tension is the same as noted
during removal.
Note:
Step 4 is not necessary if Reader Head Roller Plate (P/N 532151-903) is
installed. If Reader Head Roller Plate (P/N 532151-903) is installed, proceed
to Step 5.
4. Open the optics assembly to check belt tension.
5. Rotate the Motor shaft and the pulley, checking the force required to turn them
by hand.
6. Reconnect the wires to the HCB as tagged.
7. Secure the Board Mount Assembly and perform the Top Panel Assembly
Installation procedure (Section 5.2.1.2).
8. Turn the instrument ON and verify the system operation.
5.16.4
Autoloader Linear Actuator Motor Replacement
Refer to Figure 5-26 for the location of the Autoloader Motor.
5-40
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
5.16.4.1
Instrument Motors
Removal
1. Ensure that the instrument power is turned OFF.
2. Perform the Front Panel Assembly Removal procedure (Section 5.2.4.1).
3. Remove the hardware securing the Sealer Assembly to the Base Pan to make
the Autoloader more accessible.
4. Tag and disconnect the Motor and Sensor Wires attached to the Transport SPN
Board, located in the Board Mount Assembly.
5. Remove the two screws securing the Assembly to the Center Mount.
6. Slide the Autoloader Assembly from the Mounting Plate.
7. Loosen and remove the four screws attaching the Linear Actuator Motor to the
Actuator Mounting Bracket.
8. Remove the Linear Actuator Motor from the Extension Arm and then discard the
motor.
Motor
Extension
Arm
Autoloader
Autoloader
Mounting
Plate
Figure 5-26: Autoloader Motor
5.16.4.2
Installation
1. Thread the Linear Actuator Motor into the Extension Arm.
2. Secure the Motor to the Actuator Mounting Bracket.
3. Insert the Autoloader Assembly into the Mounting Plate and secure it to the
Center Mount using the hardware previously removed.
4. Connect the Motor and Sensor Wires to the Transport SPN Board as previously
noted.
5. Perform the Front Panel Assembly Installation procedure (Section 5.2.4, Front
Panel Assembly).
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-41
Instrument Motors
Component Replacement
6. Turn the power switch ON.
7. Verify that the Motor is operating properly and perform the alignment procedure.
(See Drawing 532600.)
5.16.5
Ejector Motor Replacement
Refer to Figure 5-27 for the location of the Ejector Motor.
5.16.5.1
Removal
1. Ensure that the instrument power is turned OFF.
2. Perform the Top Panel and Right Side Cover Assembly Removal procedures
(Section 5.2.1.1 and Section 5.2.3.1).
3. Tag and disconnect the motor wires attached to the Incubator SPN Board.
4. Move the Ejector Blade by hand to expose the four pan-head screws securing
the Motor.
5. Loosen and remove the four mounting screws attaching the Motor to the back of
the Ejector Rack. (Note the Motor orientation to the Ejector Rack.)
6. Measure and note the distance of the Tray Drive Gear mounted on the Motor
Drive Shaft.
7. Loosen the hex screw and remove the gear from the Motor Shaft.
8. Discard the Motor.
Ejector
Motor
Figure 5-27: Card Ejector Motor
5.16.5.2
Installation
1. Position the Tray Drive Gear on the Motor Shaft to the distance measured
during removal. Tighten hex screw securely.
5-42
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
Instrument Motors
2. Mount the replacement Motor onto the Ejector Rack in the same orientation
noted during removal.
3. When tightening the Motor mounting screws, make sure the Drive Gear
engages the Rack enough to remove backlash, but not tight enough to produce
binding.
4. Connect the Motor wires to the Incubator SPN Board as noted during removal.
5. Perform the Top Panel Assembly and the Right Side Cover Assembly
Installation procedure (Section 5.2.1.2 and Section 5.2.3.2, respectively).
6. Turn the power switch ON.
7. Verify that the motor is operating properly and confirm carousel top alignment.
(See Drawing 532600.)
5.16.6
Cam Motor Replacement
Refer to Figure 5-28 for the location of the Cam Motor.
5.16.6.1
Removal
1. Ensure that the instrument power is turned OFF.
2. Perform the Top Panel Assembly Removal procedure (Section 5.2.1.1).
3. Tag and disconnect the Motor wires attached to the Transport SPN Board,
located in the Board Mount Assembly.
4. While supporting the Cam Motor on the inside of the Reader Head, loosen and
remove the Cam Motor Assembly’s two mounting screws.
5. Carefully lift the Cam Motor Assembly from the Reader Head.
6. Loosen and remove the four mounting screws attaching the Motor to the Motor
Mount Bracket. (Note the Motor orientation to the Bracket.)
7. Measure and note the distance of the Tray Drive Gear mounted on the Motor
Drive Shaft.
8. Loosen the set screws and remove the gear from the Motor Shaft.
9. Discard the Motor.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-43
Instrument Motors
Component Replacement
Cam
Cam
Motor
Figure 5-28: Cam Motor (Top View)
5.16.6.2
Installation
1. Position the Tray Drive Gear on the Motor Shaft to the distance measured
during removal of the Motor. Place the set screws of the Motor Pulley over the
flat spots of the Shaft and tighten the set screws securely.
2. Mount the replacement Motor onto the Motor Mount Bracket in the same
orientation as noted during removal.
3. When tightening the Motor Mounting Screws, make sure the Drive Gear
engages the Rack enough to remove backlash, but not tight enough to produce
binding.
4. Carefully place the Cam Motor Assembly inside the Reader Head, and while
supporting the Cam Motor, reinstall the assembly using the two mounting
screws.
5. Connect the motor wires to the Transport SPN Board as previously noted.
6. Perform the Top Panel Assembly Installation procedure (Section 5.2.1.2).
7. Turn the power switch ON.
8. Verify that the motor is operating properly and perform the Cam alignment
procedure. (See Drawing 532600.)
5.16.7
Sealer Linear Actuator Motor Replacement
Refer to Figure 5-29 for the location of the Sealer Linear Actuator Motor Assembly.
Note:
5-44
The Sealer Linear Actuator Motor and Sealer Drive Pin may become
damaged during the removal process. Ensure availability of replacement
parts before continuing.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
Instrument Motors
Sealer Linear
Actuator
Motor
Figure 5-29: Sealer Linear Actuator Motor
5.16.7.1
Removal
1. Ensure that the instrument power is turned OFF.
2. Perform the Sealer Assembly Removal procedure (Section 5.28.1).
3. Remove the six screws securing the Motor Mount/Shaft Assembly to the Sealer
Frame Housing.
4. Remove the two screws securing the Motor to the Motor Mount.
5. Remove the Sealer Motor Shaft Cover from the Sealer Motor Assembly.
6. Attach locking pliers onto the Motor Drive Screw, and then unscrew the Motor
from the Sealer Drive Pin.
7. Inspect to determine if the threads of the Motor Drive Screw broke off in the
Sealer Drive Pin.
8. If the Motor was functional prior to removal, inspect the Motor Drive Screw for
breakage or irregularities due to the force applied.
5.16.7.2
Installation
1. If required, replace the Sealer Drive Pin and Sealer Motor.
2. Apply a drop of cylinder bond adhesive (Loctite® RC 609) to the threads of the
Motor Assembly.
3. Screw the Motor into the Sealer Drive Pin and then secure the Motor to the
Motor Mount.
4. Secure the Motor Mount to the Sealer Frame Housing.
5. Perform the Sealer Assembly Installation procedure (Section 5.28.2).
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-45
Instrument Sensors
5.17
Component Replacement
Instrument Sensors
There are two types of sensors inside the instrument. One type is an Optical Switch
Sensor and the other is a Convergent Reflective Sensor.
The Sensor Replacement procedures are similar with the exception of the location of
the device. Refer to Table 5-3 and Table 5-4 for the locations of the Sensors. The
specific location of the Sensors requires the technician to open or remove panels to
access the area they serve. Most sensors are positioned in close proximity to the
component they monitor or control.
The VITEK® 2 Compact instrument has the following sensors.
• Optical Switch Assembly Sensors
• Convergent Reflective Sensors
5.17.1
Optical Switch Assembly Sensor Replacement
All Optical Sensors operate identically. The only change is in the physical construction
of the specific sensing arrangement. All have mounting screws and bases along with
wiring for board connection (see Figure 5-30 for an example).
See Section 7.1, Instrument Wiring Diagram for the Optical Switch Assembly wiring
configuration.
Table 5-3: Optical Switch Sensors
Part
Number
532173-1
530154-1
532162-1
5-46
Name
Location
Function
WIDE OPTICAL
SWITCH ASSY
Behind Filler Chamber
Door
Filler Door detection
Behind Front Access
Door
Front Access Door
detection
Behind Top Access
Door
Top Access Door
detection
Behind Waste
Container Door
Waste Container Door
detection
Behind Load/Unload
Door
Load/Unload Door
detection
Load/Unload Door lock
Load/Unload Door lock
detection
Front Access Door lock
Front Access Door lock
detection
Carousel Assembly
Carousel Index Bottom
Sealer Assembly
Sealer Home Sensor
WIDE OPTICAL
SWITCH ASSY
SEALER HOME
SWITCH ASSY
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
Instrument Sensors
Table 5-3: Optical Switch Sensors (Continued)
Part
Number
Name
Location
Function
532163-1
AUTOLOADER
HOME SENSOR
Assembly
Home
532157-1
OPTICAL
SWITCH ASSY,
CAROUSEL
Carousel Assembly (3)
Carousel Cover
Carousel Index Top
Carousel Home
532158-1
OPTICAL
SWITCH ASSY,
EJECTOR
Ejector Assembly
Ejector home
530119-1
OPTICAL
SWITCH ASSY
Cam Assembly
Cam home
Optical
Sensor
Figure 5-30: Optical Switch Assembly Sensor
5.17.1.1
Removal
1. Ensure that the instrument power is turned OFF.
2. Open the Door or remove an Access Panel of the instrument to access the
Optical Sensor to be replaced.
3. Disconnect and tag the cable from the SPN Board to where the Optical Sensor
attaches. Note the mounting position.
4. Remove the screw(s) holding the Sensor and remove the Sensor from the
instrument.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-47
Instrument Sensors
5.17.1.2
Component Replacement
Installation
1. Place the new Optical Switch Assembly Sensor into position and install the
mounting screws.
2. Reconnect the cable to the SPN Board connectors that was previously
removed.
3. Install or close any access doors or covers previously removed.
4. Turn the instrument ON and verify that the Sensor operates properly. (See
Section 7.1, Instrument Wiring Diagram for wiring information.)
5. Verify alignments. (See Drawing 532600.)
5.17.2
Convergent Reflective Sensor Replacement
The Convergent Reflective Sensors only sense in a limited area. (See Figure 5-31.)
They all operate identically, with the only difference being the physical positioning or
mounting. (See Figure 5-32 for an example.) Section 7.1, Instrument Wiring Diagram
shows the Reflective Sensors wiring configuration.
Detects an
object within the
convergent area
Figure 5-31: Convergence Reflective Sensor
5-48
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
Instrument Sensors
Table 5-4: Convergent Reflective Sensors
Part
Number
Name
Location
Function
158008-1
SENSOR, TOP SENSING
REFLECTIVE
Transport Assembly (rear)
Transport Home Sensor
158009-1
SENSOR, REFLECTIVE,
5 VOLTS
Waste Collection Bin
(side)
Waste Collection Bin (top)
Waste Bin detection
Waste Chute card jam detection
158008-2
SENSOR, FRONT
SENSING REFLECTIVE
Incubator Assembly (front)
Cassette Presence Sensor
Card Presence Sensor
Convergent
Reflective
Sensors
Figure 5-32: Convergent Reflective Sensors
5.17.2.1
Removal
1. Ensure that the instrument power is turned OFF.
2. Open the door or remove the Access Panel of the instrument to access the
Optical Sensor.
3. Remove the mounting hardware from the Reflective Sensor.
4. Disconnect the Reflective Sensor Harness from the Reflective Sensor.
5.17.2.2
Installation
1. Connect the Reflective Sensor Harness to the Reflective Sensor.
2. Secure the Reflective Sensor using hardware previously removed.
3. Install or close any access doors or panels previously removed.
4. Turn the instrument ON and verify that the Sensor operates properly. (See
Section 7.1, Instrument Wiring Diagram for wiring information.)
5. Verify alignments. (See Drawing 532600.)
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-49
Transport Assembly Replacement
5.18
Component Replacement
Transport Assembly Replacement
The Transport Assembly can be replaced as one unit or at the component level.
Replacement of the Transport Encoder Board, Transport Linear Actuator Motor, and
Transport Home Reflective Sensor were described earlier in this chapter.
Transport
Assembly
Figure 5-33: Transport Replacement (Front)
5.18.1
Removal
1. Ensure that the instrument power is turned OFF.
2. Perform the Rear Panel Assembly Removal procedure (Section 5.2.5.1).
3. Tag and disconnect the external wires going to the Transport Assembly.
4. Remove the four screws that mount the Assembly to the Base Pan.
5-50
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
Incubator Assembly
Two of Four
Mounting
Screws
Figure 5-34: Transport Replacement (shown from rear of instrument)
5.18.2
Installation
1. Place the Transport Assembly into the instrument and replace the screws
holding it to the Base Pan.
2. Reconnect the wires to the Transport Assembly.
3. Perform the Rear Panel Assembly Installation procedure (Section 5.2.5.2).
4. Turn the power switch ON and verify the correct operation of the Transport
Assembly.
5. After turning the instrument ON, perform Transport System alignments. (See
Drawing 532600.)
5.19
Incubator Assembly
Replacement procedures for the following Incubator Assembly component parts are
covered in this section:
• Two Incubator Fans
• Heater Assembly
• Static Removing Brush
Replacement of the incubator SPN Board, carousel Optical Sensors, and Carousel
Motor have been described earlier in this chapter. Removal of the Carousel
Quadrants can be found in the Section E.3, Cleaning the Carousel.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-51
Incubator Assembly
Component Replacement
Heater Cover
Fan Air Flow
Heater
Incubator Fan
Assembly
Heater
Assembly
Fan Air Flow
Bottom
Incubator Fan
Assembly
Figure 5-35: Incubator Assembly with Back Cover Removed
5.19.1
Heater Incubator Fan Replacement (Top)
Refer to Figure 5-35 for the location of the Heater Incubator Fan.
5.19.1.1
Removal
1. Ensure that the instrument power is turned OFF.
2. Perform the Top Panel Assembly Removal procedure (Section 5.2.1.1).
3. Remove the Heater Cover from the top of the Incubator Assembly and set it to
the side.
4. Tag and disconnect the Heater Incubator Fan Wire from the Incubator SPN
Board. (Note the fan position and airflow direction.)
5. Remove the two screws securing the Fan Assembly and remove the Fan.
5.19.1.2
Installation
1. Install the Fan as noted during removal. (Airflow should be directed down into
the Heater Assembly.)
2. Connect the Heater Incubator Fan to J23 of the Incubator SPN Board.
3. Reinstall the Heater Cover onto the top of the Incubator Assembly.
4. Perform the Top Panel Assembly Installation procedure (Section 5.2.1.2).
5. Turn the instrument ON and confirm that the fan is working.
5-52
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
5.19.2
Incubator Assembly
Incubator Fan Replacement (Bottom)
Refer to Figure 5-35 for the location of the Bottom Incubator Fan.
5.19.2.1
Removal
1. Ensure that the instrument power is turned OFF.
2. Perform the Top Panel Assembly and Right Side Cover Assembly Removal
procedures (Section 5.2.1.1 and Section 5.2.3.1, respectively).
3. Remove the Incubator Back Cover from the Incubator Assembly.
4. Label and disconnect the Fan Wires from the Incubator SPN Board. (Note the
Fan position and airflow direction.)
5. Remove the screws, attaching the Bottom Fan to the Incubator Assembly.
5.19.2.2
Installation
1. Place the Fan into the Incubator Housing as noted during removal. Direct the
airflow into the carousel.
2. Install the screws to attach the Bottom Fan to the Incubator Assembly.
3. Connect the Bottom Fan to J17 of the Incubator SPN Board.
4. Perform the Top Panel Assembly and Right Side Cover Assembly Installation
procedure (Section 5.2.1.2 and Section 5.2.3.2).
5. Turn the instrument ON and verify that the Fan is working.
5.19.3
Incubator Heater Assembly Replacement
Refer to Figure 5-35 for the location of the Heater Assembly.
5.19.3.1
Removal
1. Ensure that the instrument power is turned OFF.
2. Perform the Top Panel Assembly and the Right Side Cover Assembly Removal
procedures (Section 5.2.1.1 and Section 5.2.3.1).
3. Remove the Incubator Back Cover from the Incubator Assembly.
4. Tag and disconnect the Wiring Cables of the Heater Assembly.
5. Remove the Heater Assembly by pulling it up and out.
5.19.3.2
Installation
1. Insert the Heater Assembly into the Incubator Assembly.
2. Connect the Wiring Cables as previously tagged.
3. Install the Incubator Back Cover.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-53
Transmittance Replacement and Testing
Component Replacement
4. Perform the Top Panel Assembly and the Right Side Cover Assembly
Installation procedures (Section 5.2.1.2 and Section 5.2.3.2).
5. Turn the instrument ON and verify that the Heater Assembly is working.
5.19.4
Static Removing Brush Replacement
Antistatic Brush
P/N 532212-1
Figure 5-36: Carousel and Antistatic Brush
1. Remove incubator cover.
2. Remove securing hardware from Static Removing Brush.
3. Discard Brush.
4. Wear clean rubber gloves to prevent dirt, oil, or grease contamination on brush.
5. Remove new Static Removing Brush from packaging.
6. Install and secure new Static Removing Brush to incubator assembly.
7. Reinstall incubator cover.
5.20
Transmittance Replacement and Testing
Installed in the instrument are Transmittance Optics 1 (TX1) and Transmittance
Optics 3 (TX3). The Transmittance Optics Replacement procedure is written to allow
you to make the required replacements as efficiently as possible.
After performing the Transmittance Optics Replacement, perform Section 5.20.2,
Transmittance Minimum Threshold Reading Test and HCB Test. This will ensure
proper operation of the transmittance, prior to the processing of test cards.
5-54
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
5.20.1
Transmittance Replacement and Testing
Transmittance Optics Replacement
Reader
Ledge
Optics
Module
Figure 5-37: Optics Modules
5.20.1.1
Removal
1. Ensure that the instrument power is turned OFF.
2. Perform the Top Panel Assembly Removal procedure (Section 5.2.1.1).
3. Tag and disconnect the Ribbon Cables that are plugged into both sides of the
optics.
Note:
Step 4 is not necessary if Reader Head Roller Plate (P/N 532151-903) is
installed. If Reader Head Roller Plate (P/N 532151-903) is installed, proceed
to Step 5.
4. While supporting each of the Optics Modules, one at a time push the Clamp
Lever on the top of each Optics Module. Open the optics assembly, and press
the belt where the optics assembly sits. Note the belt tension.
5. Turn the Motor shaft and pulley of the Reader Head Motor and note the force
required to turn them by hand. (The belt must be adjusted accordingly, after the
replacement Motor has been installed.)
6. Unscrew the screws from the Reader Ledge and remove the Ledge from the
Reader Frame.
7. Note the placement of the Timing Belt on the Reader Head. Loosen the Reader
Motor Bracket and push it upward, adding slack to the belt.
8. Partially remove the belt by pulling it over the upper right corner of the Roller
Plate Assembly.
9. With the optics open, maneuver the belt around and down so it comes off of the
TX optics. (The belt will still be threaded around the Reader Head.)
10. Close each of the Optics Modules until the Clamp Lever locks in place.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-55
Transmittance Replacement and Testing
Component Replacement
11. Remove the two mounting screws attaching the Optics Module(s) you need to
replace from the Reader Head assembly.
12. Carefully slide the Optics Module(s) from the Reader.
13. Set the Optics Module(s) aside.
TX3 Optics
TX1 Optics
Figure 5-38: Optics Modules (Top View)
5.20.1.2
Installation
1. Carefully install the Optics Module(s) into the Reader Head Assembly.
2. Install the mounting screws, attaching the Optics Module(s) to the frame.
3. While supporting each of the Optics Modules, one at a time push the Clamp
Lever on the top of each of the Optics Modules. Gently allow the Optics to hinge
down.
4. Move the Belt up and over the Optics and reposition the Belt around the Roller
Plate Assembly.
5. Install the Reader Ledge onto the frame and tighten the three screws.
6. Carefully close each of the Optics Modules until the Clamp Lever locks in place,
ensuring that the Drive Belt is in the proper position on the Rollers.
7. Position and tighten the Motor so that the belt tension is the same as noted
during removal.
Note:
Step 8 is not necessary if Reader Head Roller Plate (P/N 532151-903) is
installed. If Reader Head Roller Plate (P/N 532151-903) is installed, proceed
to Step 9.
8. Open the optics assembly to check belt tension.
9. Rotate the Motor shaft and the pulley, checking the force required to turn them
by hand.
10. Reconnect the flat cables to the Optics.
5-56
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
Transmittance Replacement and Testing
11. Perform the Top Panel Assembly Installation procedure (Section 5.2.1.2).
12. Turn the power switch ON and verify the system operation.
5.20.2
Transmittance Minimum Threshold Reading Test and HCB Test
Both the Transmittance Minimum Threshold Reading Test and Head Controller Board
(HCB) Test should be performed upon instrument installation, at each instrument
preventive maintenance (PM), and whenever transmittance optics module TX1 or
transmittance optics module TX3 are replaced. (The replacement procedure is located
in Section 5.20.1, Transmittance Optics Replacement of this manual.)
The VITEK® 2 TX Optic Test Card used in the Transmittance Minimum Threshold
Reading Test is contained in a sealed pouch. The pouch protects the card from UV
light degradation and particle contaminants. Always store the Optics Test Card in its
sealed pouch. If the Optics Test Card becomes damaged, dirty, or its condition is in
question, discard and replace it with a new Optics Test Card. Never attempt to create
a test card by removing tape from another card type. Never attempt to clean an Optics
Test Card.
The HCB Test Card and the VITEK® 2 TX Optic Test Card are physically different.
(See Figure 5-39.) Do not use these cards interchangeably for testing, or incorrect
results will be produced.
IMPORTANT:
Do not attempt to use the HCB Test Card for the Transmittance
Minimum Threshold Reading Test.
IMPORTANT:
Never attempt to create a test card by removing tape from another card
type.
IMPORTANT:
Never clean an Optics Test Card. Replace it instead.
HCB Test Card
P/N 371468-1
Optics Test Card
P/N 001026-1
Figure 5-39: Test Cards
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-57
Transmittance Replacement and Testing
Component Replacement
Table 5-5: Test Materials Required
Material Required
Part Number
VITEK® 2 TX Optic Test Card
001026-1
HCB Test Card
371468-1
WARNING
The transmittance optics module TX3 is very sensitive to ambient
light. Ensure all access doors are closed when cards are processing
in the instrument.
5.20.2.1
Transmittance Minimum Threshold Reading Test
Note:
Perform Section 5.20.2.1, Transmittance Minimum Threshold Reading Test
and Section 5.20.2.2, Head Controller Board (HCB) Test consecutively.
1. Ensure that no cards are processing in the instrument and the user interface
Status displays OK.
2. Ensure both glass surfaces of each Transmittance Optics module are clean. (As
performed in Section 2.6, Prepare Instrument for Power Up, Step 2.)
3. Ensure the instrument doors and panels are closed.
4. If not already displayed, open the instrument Diagnostic window. (See Section
2.8.2, Login and Instrument Check.)
5. At the Prompt > type CAL_TX 1 and press Enter. Confirm that CAL_TX
completes successfully and the prompt displays. (The alias macro is calwave.)
6. Find the DAC values reported in the CAL_TX1 response. If any of the 8 DAC
values are not between 550 and 3600, replace the transmittance optics module
TX1.
7. At the Prompt > type CAL_TX 3 and press Enter. Confirm that CAL_TX
completes successfully and the prompt displays. (The alias macro is calwave.)
8. Find the DAC values reported in the CAL_TX3 response. If any of the 8 DAC
values are not between 550 and 3600, replace the transmittance optics module
TX3.
9. From the user interface keypad, press the Status/Menu key
Status screen displays.
until the
10. From the user interface keypad type 7763 and then push the Status/Menu key
.
11. Select Indicator Test > User Access Door Lock > 1 (Unlock Door). This will
unlock the front user access door.
5-58
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
Transmittance Replacement and Testing
12. Open the front user access door and place the VITEK® 2 TX Optics Test Card
(P/N 001026-1) into the Reader Head Assembly, as shown in Figure 5-40.
Figure 5-40: Optic Test Card Insertion
13. Close the front user access door. The access door will lock automatically.
14. At the Prompt > type $DISPLAY_CARDDATA=1 and press Enter.
15. At the Prompt > type LOAD 1 9 and press Enter. The instrument loads and
reads the Test Card.
16. After the instrument finishes reading the card, a table of 64 numbers displays on
the terminal. The table heading labeled Wave 1 corresponds with transmittance
optics module TX1 and the table labeled Wave 3 corresponds with
transmittance optics module TX3. The numbers in the tables identify the value
read by each well of the Optic Test Card.
17. Review the TX1 (Wave 1) table and determine if any numbers are less than the
threshold limit of 3750.
• If all the numbers in the TX1 table are above or equal to 3750, the
instrument has passed the Minimum Threshold Reading Test for the
transmittance optics module TX1.
• If the TX1 table includes a number less than 3750, the instrument has failed
the Minimum Threshold Reading Test. Unload the Test Card by performing
Step 19 & Step 20. After the Test Card has ejected:
a. Use a different VITEK® 2 TX Optic Test Card and repeat this
procedure starting with Step 9.
b. Ensure the reader ledge is securely mounted flush against the
Reader Head Assembly. If the reader ledge is improperly mounted,
correct and then repeat this procedure starting with Step 9.
c.
Replace the transmittance optics module TX1. (See Section 5.20.1,
Transmittance Optics Replacement.) Then repeat this procedure
starting with Step 9.
d. Replace the reader ledge. Then repeat this procedure starting with
Step 9.
18. Review the TX3 (Wave 3) table and determine if any of the numbers are less
than the threshold limit of 3618.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-59
Transmittance Replacement and Testing
Component Replacement
• If all the numbers in the TX3 table are above or equal to 3618, the
instrument has passed the Minimum Threshold Reading Test for the
transmittance optics module TX3.
• If the TX3 table includes a number less than 3618, the instrument has failed
the Minimum Threshold Reading Test. Unload the Test Card by performing
Step 19 & Step 20. After the Test Card has ejected:
a.
Use a different VITEK® 2 TX Optic Test Card and repeat this
procedure starting with Step 9.
b.
Ensure the reader ledge is securely mounted flush against the
Reader Head Assembly. If the reader ledge is improperly mounted,
correct and then repeat this procedure starting with Step 9.
c.
Replace the transmittance optics module TX1. (See Section 5.20.1,
Transmittance Optics Replacement.) Then repeat this procedure
starting with Step 9.
d.
Replace the reader ledge. Then repeat this procedure starting with
Step 9.
19. Type UNLOAD and press Enter.
Note:
Type the UNLOAD command only after the instrument finishes taking the
first reading of the card.
20. Wait for the Optic Test Card to eject into the waste bin. Then place it into its
storage pouch.
5.20.2.2
Head Controller Board (HCB) Test
1. From the user interface keypad, press the Status/Menu key
Status screen displays.
2. Type 7763 and then push the Status/Menu key
until the
.
3. Select Indicator Test > User Access Door Lock > 1 (Unlock Door). This will
unlock the front user access door.
4. Open the front user access door and place the HCB Test Card
(P/N 371468-1) into the Reader Head Assembly, as shown in Figure 5-40.
5. Close the front user access door. The access door will lock automatically.
6. At the Prompt > type LOAD 1 9 and press Enter. The instrument loads and
reads the HCB Test Card.
7. After the instrument finishes reading the card, two tables of 64 numbers are
displayed.
8. Review both tables. Determine if the numbers along the diagonal are zeros,
similar to those shown in Table 5-6, HCB Test Results Example.
• If zeros are displayed along the diagonal of both tables, the instrument has
passed the HCB test.
5-60
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
Reader Head Assembly Replacement
• If a number along the diagonal is not a zero (in either table), the instrument
has failed the HCB test. Replace the HCB board with P/N 530772-1 and
repeat this procedure.
Table 5-6: HCB Test Results Example
Wave: 1
WellData:
Row 1:
0
3343
3329
3364
3337
3389
3384
3439
WellData:
Row 2:
3329
0
3309
3323
3322
3337
3355
3410
WellData:
Row 3:
3348
3293
0
3330
3314
3345
3374
3389
WellData:
Row 4:
3323
3302
3305
0
3358
3362
3314
3391
WellData:
Row 5:
3309
3287
3265
3297
0
3335
3344
3380
WellData:
Row 6:
3327
3298
3305
3303
3336
0
3345
3391
WellData:
Row 7:
3289
3269
3192
3253
3321
3380
0
3383
WellData:
Row 8:
3326
3309
3256
3288
3314
3348
3350
0
9. At the Prompt > type $DISPLAY_CARDDATA=0 and press Enter.
10. From the user interface keypad, press the Previous Screen key
Status screen displays.
until the
11. Ensure the instrument Status displays OK.
5.21
Reader Head Assembly Replacement
The Reader Head Assembly consists of the Reader Head Plate, Roller Plate, the Cam
Assembly and Reader Motor. It does not include the Reader Ledge, Reader Belt, or
Transmittance Optics.
Reader Head
Assembly
Figure 5-41: Reader Head Assembly
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-61
Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt Replacement
5.21.1
Component Replacement
Removal
1. Ensure that the instrument power is turned OFF.
2. Perform the Transmittance Optics Removal procedure (Section 5.20.1.1).
3. Tag and disconnect the Cam and Reader Motor Wires.
4. Remove the two ground straps attached to the Reader Head Assembly.
5. Loosen the three screws securing the Reader/Bar Code Mount to the Center
Mount.
6. Remove the two screws securing the Reader Head Plate to the Reader/Bar
Code Mount and the two screws securing the Reader Head Plate to the
Incubator Assembly.
7. Gently lift the Reader Assembly from the instrument and set it on a flat surface.
8. Note the placement of the Belt on the Reader Head.
9. Remove the Reader Motor Bracket screws and set the Motor Assembly aside.
10. Remove the Reader Belt.
5.21.2
Installation
1. Install the Reader Belt, Reader Motor, and Bracket onto the Reader Head
Assembly as previously noted.
2. Place the Reader Head into the instrument and loosely install the securing
hardware.
3. Tighten the two screws securing the Reader Head to the Incubator.
4. Tighten the two screws securing the Reader Head to the Reader/Bar Code
Mount.
5. Tighten the three screws securing the Reader/Bar Code Mount to the Center
Mount.
6. Connect the two ground straps to the Reader Head Assembly.
7. Connect all wires disconnected during removal.
8. Perform the Transmittance Optics Installation procedure (Section 5.20.1.2).
9. Turn the power switch ON, perform the Carousel Top Alignment and Cam
Alignment procedures.
5.22
Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt Replacement
There are two different models of Reader Head Roller Plates available for the
VITEK® 2 instrument. Because the type of Reader Head Roller Plate installed will
determine how the Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt is replaced, this procedure
contains two replacement sections for the Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt.
Reader Head Roller Plate (P/N 532151-903) routes the Reader Head Assembly Drive
Belt below the optics and the Reader Head Roller Plate must be removed to replace
the belt. Reader Head Roller Plate (P/N 532151-902) routes the Reader Head
5-62
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt Replacement
Assembly Drive Belt above the optics and the Reader Head Roller Plate does not
need to be removed to replace the belt. See Table 5-7 for information on which
Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt to replace and which replacement procedure to
use.
Table 5-7: Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt Replacement Information
Instrument
Description
Reader Head
Roller Plate Part
Number
Reader Head
Assembly Drive
Belt Part
Number
Replacement
Procedure
Number
VITEK® 2 Compact
532151-903
6200190
Section 5.22.1
532151-902
333612-2
Section 5.22.2
5.22.1
Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt (P/N 6200190) Replacement
5.22.1.1
Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt (P/N 6200190) Removal
1. Turn the instrument power switch to the OFF position, and unplug the
instrument power cord.
2. Note the placement and tension of the Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt.
3. Remove two motor bracket screws securing the Reader Head Motor Bracket to
the Roller Plate Assembly.
4. Remove eight screws, lock washers, and flat washers securing the Roller Plate
Assembly to the Reader Head Assembly (see Figure 5-42).
Springs
Roller Plate
Screws (8)
Reader Head
Motor Bracket
Roller Plate
Figure 5-42: Reader Head Roller Plate
5. Remove three springs from the Roller Plate Assembly.
6. Carefully remove the Roller Plate Assembly from the Reader Head Assembly.
Note:
Take care not to allow the linear way rails to drop from the Reader Head
Assembly.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-63
Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt Replacement
Component Replacement
7. Remove the Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt from the Roller Plate Assembly.
5.22.1.2
Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt (P/N 6200190) Installation
1. Loosely install two screws to secure the Reader Head Motor Bracket to the
Roller Plate Assembly.
IMPORTANT:
Do not tighten the screws.
2. Route the Reader Head Drive Belt on the Roller Plate Assembly. See
Figure 5-43 for the proper routing of the Reader Head Drive Belt.
Drive Belt
Figure 5-43: Reader Head Drive Belt Routing
3. Apply pressure to the Reader Head Motor to tension the Reader Head Drive
Belt and tighten the two screws securing the Reader Head Motor Bracket to the
Roller Plate Assembly.
4. Position the Roller Plate Assembly over the lugs on the Reader Head
Assembly.
5. Loosely install eight flat washers, lock washers, and screws to secure the Roller
Plate Assembly to the linear bearings on the Reader Head Assembly.
IMPORTANT:
Do not tighten the screws.
6. Install three springs on the Roller Plate Assembly.
7. Tighten the eight screws securing the Roller Plate Assembly to the linear
bearings on the Reader Head Assembly.
8. Connect the accessible ribbon cable (detector cable).
9. Turn the power switch ON and verify proper operation.
10. Load any VITEK® 2 card through the reader head using the load 1 1 2 DML
command.
11. Watch as the card is loaded, read, and unloaded. Make certain the card does
not strike either shield.
5-64
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt Replacement
12. Make sure all doors to the instrument are closed.
13. Perform Section 5.20.2, Transmittance Minimum Threshold Reading Test and
HCB Test.
5.22.2
Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt (P/N 333612-2) Replacement
Figure 5-44: Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt (Partially Disassembled)
5.22.2.1
Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt (P/N 333612-2) Removal
1. Ensure that the instrument power is turned OFF.
2. Perform the Top Panel Assembly Removal procedure (Section 5.2.1.1).
3. Tag and disconnect the Ribbon Cable plugged into the Optics.
4. While supporting each of the Optics Modules, one at a time push the Clamp
Lever on the top of each of the Optics Modules and gently allow the Optics to
hinge down.
5. Press on the Belt where the Optics sit and make a mental note of the Belt
tension. Also turn the Motor Shaft and Pulley of the Reader Head Motor and
make a mental note of the force required to turn it by hand. (When
re-assembling, adjust the belt accordingly.)
6. Note the placement of the Belt on the Reader Head. Loosen and remove the
Reader Motor Bracket screws, slip the belt off of the Drive Pulley, and set the
Motor Assembly aside.
7. Partially remove the belt by pulling it over the upper right corner of the Roller
Plate Assembly. Then with the Transmittance Optics opened, maneuver the belt
around and down so it comes off of the Optics.
8. Remove the Belt from the Reader Head Assembly.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-65
Reader Head Roller Plate Assembly Replacement
Component Replacement
Drive Belt
Figure 5-45: Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt
5.22.2.2
Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt (P/N 333612-2) Installation
1. Install the Belt on the Card Reader Assembly as noted during removal.
2. Move the Belt up and over the Optics, and reposition the belt around the Roller
Plate Assembly.
3. Carefully close each of the Optics Modules until the Clamp Lever locks in place.
4. Reconnect the Ribbon Cable.
5. Install the Motor and Mount Bracket Assembly with the mounting screws.
IMPORTANT:
Do not tighten the screws.
6. Place the Drive Belt over the Drive Motor Pulley. Slide the Motor and Mount to
remove the slack in the Drive Belt.
7. Position and tighten the Motor so the Belt tension is the same as noted during
removal. (Open the optics to check the Belt tension and rotate the Motor Shaft
and Pulley, checking the force required.)
8. Perform the Top Panel Assembly Installation procedure (Section 5.2.1.2).
9. Turn the power switch ON and verify instrument operation.
5.23
Reader Head Roller Plate Assembly Replacement
An instrument improvement is available for this component. A new Reader Head
Roller Plate is now available for the instrument. The redesigned Reader Head Roller
5-66
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
Reader Head Roller Plate Assembly Replacement
Plate will route the belt below the optics. See Section D.5, Reader Head Roller Plate
Update, for more information.
This procedure contains two replacement sections for the Reader Head Roller Plate
and Extension Plate. Section 5.23.1, Reader Head Roller Plate (P/N 532151-903)
Replacement, is for replacement of the Reader Head Roller Plate
(P/N 531152-3). Section 5.23.2, Reader Head Roller Plate (P/N 532151-902)
Replacement, is for replacement of the Reader Head Roller Plate
(P/N 532151-902).
IMPORTANT:
If you are replacing a Reader Head Roller Plate (P/N 531151-2) with a
Reader Head Roller Plate (P/N 531152-3), you must refer to Section D.5
and perform the Reader Head Roller Plate Update procedure.
IMPORTANT:
It is recommended that you replace the Reader Head Assembly Drive
Belt any time the Roller Plate Assembly is replaced. There are two
different sizes of Reader Head Assembly Drive Belts. It is extremely
important to use the correct belt.
5.23.1
Reader Head Roller Plate (P/N 532151-903) Replacement
5.23.1.1
Removal
1. Ensure that the instrument power is turned OFF.
2. Note the placement and tension of the Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt.
3. Remove two motor bracket screws securing the Reader Head Motor Bracket to
the Reader Head Roller Plate Assembly.
4. Remove the Reader Head Motor Bracket.
5. Remove eight screws, lock washers, and flat washers securing the Reader
Head Roller Plate to the Reader Head Assembly (see Figure 5-46).
Springs
Roller Plate
Screws (8)
Reader Head
Motor Bracket
Roller Plate
Figure 5-46: Reader Head Roller Plate
6. Remove three springs from the Reader Head Roller Plate Assembly.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-67
Reader Head Roller Plate Assembly Replacement
Component Replacement
7. Carefully remove the Reader Head Roller Plate Assembly from the Reader
Head Assembly.
Note:
Take care not to allow the linear way rails to drop from the Reader Head
Assembly.
8. Discard the old Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt and obtain a new
replacement belt.
5.23.1.2
Installation
1. Route the Reader Head Drive Belt on the Reader Head Roller Plate. See
Figure 5-47 for the proper routing of the Reader Head Drive Belt.
Drive Belt
Figure 5-47: Reader Head Drive Belt Routing
2. Position the Reader Head Roller Plate over the lugs on the Reader Head
Assembly.
3. Loosely install eight flat washers, lock washers, and screws to secure the
Reader Head Roller Plate to the linear bearings on the Reader Head Assembly.
IMPORTANT:
Do not tighten the screws.
4. Install three springs on the Reader Head Roller Plate.
5. Tighten the eight screws securing the Reader Head Roller Plate to the linear
bearings on the Reader Head Assembly.
6. Using the two motor bracket screws, install the Reader Head Motor Bracket on
the Reader Head Roller Plate Assembly, and place the drive belt around the
pulley.
7. Position and tighten the motor so the belt tension is the same as noted during
removal. (Rotate the motor shaft and pulley, checking the force required.)
8. Turn the power switch ON and verify proper operation.
5-68
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
Reader Head Roller Plate Assembly Replacement
5.23.2
Reader Head Roller Plate (P/N 532151-902) Replacement
5.23.2.1
Removal
1. Ensure that the instrument power is turned OFF.
2. While supporting each of the Optics Modules, one at a time push the Clamp
Lever on the top of each Optics Module and gently allow the Optics to hinge
down.
3. Press on the Belt where the Optics sit and make a mental note of the Belt
tension. Also turn the Motor Shaft and Pulley of the Reader Head Motor and
make a mental note of the force required to turn it by hand. (When
re-assembling, adjust the Belt accordingly.)
4. Close each of the Optics Modules until the Clamp Levers lock in place.
5. Note the placement of the Timing Belt on the Reader Head.
6. Tag and disconnect the Motor wires attached to the Head Control Board.
7. Remove two motor bracket screws securing the Reader Head Motor Bracket to
the Roller Plate Assembly.
8. Remove the Reader Head Motor Bracket.
9. Remove eight screws, lock washers, and flat washers securing the Roller Plate
Assembly (see Figure 5-48).
Roller Plate
Assembly
Step 9
Figure 5-48: Reader Head Roller Plate
10. Remove three springs from the Roller Plate Assembly.
11. Carefully remove the Roller Plate Assembly from the Reader Head Assembly.
Note:
Take care not to allow the linear way rails to drop from the Reader Head
Assembly.
12. Discard the old Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt and obtain a new
replacement belt.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-69
Reader Head Roller Plate Assembly Replacement
5.23.2.2
Component Replacement
Installation
1. Position the Reader Head Motor Bracket on the new Roller Plate Assembly.
2. Loosely install two screws to secure the Reader Head Motor Bracket to the
Roller Plate Assembly.
IMPORTANT:
Do not tighten the screws.
3. Route the Reader Head Drive Belt on the Roller Plate Assembly. See
Figure 5-49 for the proper routing of the Reader Head Drive Belt.
Figure 5-49: Reader Head Belt Position
4. Carefully install the Roller Plate Assembly while routing the Timing Belt as
previously noted around the Rollers.
5. Position the Reader Head Roller Plate over the lugs on the Reader Head
Assembly.
6. Loosely install eight screws, lock washers, and flat washers to secure the
Reader Head Roller Plate to the linear bearings on the Reader Head Assembly.
IMPORTANT:
Do not tighten the screws.
7. Install three springs on the Reader Head Roller Plate.
8. Tighten the eight screws evenly to secure the Reader Head Roller Plate
Assembly to the linear way rails.
9. While supporting the optics assembly, one at a time push the clamp lever on top
of each Transmittance Optics Assembly. Gently allow the optics assembly to
hinge down.
10. Working from the side of the Reader Head Assembly that is closer to the
Carousel, manipulate the timing belt up and over each optics assembly, and
reposition the belt around the Reader Head Roller Plate Assembly.
11. Carefully close each optics assembly until the clamp lever locks in place,
ensuring the drive belt is in the proper position on the rollers.
12. Apply pressure to the Reader Head Motor to tension the Reader Head Drive
Belt and tighten the two screws securing the Reader Head Motor Bracket to the
Roller Plate Assembly.
13. Connect the accessible ribbon cable (detector cable).
14. Turn the power switch ON and verify proper operation.
5-70
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
5.23.3
Vacuum Pump Replacement
Reader Ledge Replacement
A new molded Reader Ledge is now in use in VITEK® 2 Compact instruments. The
original machined Reader Ledge is no longer available. If you are replacing a
machined Reader Ledge with a molded Reader Ledge, see Section D.4, Molded
Reader Ledge Upgrade.
5.23.3.1
Removal
1. While supporting each of the Optics Modules, one at a time push the Clamp
Lever on the top of each Optics Module. Gently allow the Optics to hinge down.
2. Remove three screws securing the Reader Ledge to the Reader Frame.
3. Remove the Reader Ledge from the Reader Frame.
Reader Ledge
Optics
Module
Figure 5-50: Reader Ledge
5.23.3.2
Installation
1. Position the Reader Ledge onto the Reader Frame.
2. Install three screws to secure the Reader Ledge to the Reader Frame.
3. Carefully close each of the Optics Modules until the Clamp Lever locks in place,
ensuring that the Drive Belt is in the proper position on the Rollers.
5.24
Vacuum Pump Replacement
Refer to Figure 5-51 for the location of the Vacuum Pump.
5.24.1
Removal
1. Ensure that the instrument power is turned OFF.
2. Perform the Rear Panel Assembly Removal procedure (Section 5.2.5.1).
3. Remove the two hex-head screws securing the Board Mount Assembly to the
top of the Vacuum Mounting Plate.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-71
Vacuum Pump Replacement
Component Replacement
4. Remove the two grounding straps from the Board Mount Assembly.
5. Tag and disconnect the following cables and tubing from the Board Mount
Assembly, so it can temporarily be placed on top of the Incubator Assembly.
• cables going into the TX Optics
• cable going into the Bar Code Reader
• 3-Way Filler Valve Assembly wires going to the Vacuum Sealer PCB
• large and small tubing going into the Filler Chamber
• cable clamps securing the wire bundles
• any other cables preventing the Board Mount Assembly from being moved
6. Carefully set the Board Mount Assembly on top of the Incubator Assembly,
ensuring cable clearance.
7. Remove the four screws securing the Vacuum Mounting Plate to the Base Pan.
8. Disconnect the cable from the Vacuum Pump Assembly.
9. Disconnect tubing from the Vacuum Pump Assembly to the 3-Way Filler Valve
Assembly.
10. Turn the Vacuum Pump and Valve Assembly upside down, and remove the four
pump mounting screws.
11. Place the Vacuum Pump and Valve Assembly right side up and remove the
three screws mounting the black Shipping Restrainer to the Vacuum Mounting
Plate.
12. Once the pump is removed, visually check the four Vacuum Pump Bubble
Mounts (i.e. shock mounts) for wear or cracking.
Shipping
Restrainer
3-Way Filler
Valve Assembly
Vacuum
Mounting Plate
Vacuum Pump
Assembly
Vacuum Pump
Bubble Mounts
Figure 5-51: Vacuum Pump (Shown with Cabinet Removed)
5-72
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
5.24.2
3-Way Filler Valve Assembly Replacement
Installation
1. Replace the Vacuum Pump Bubble Mounts as required.
2. Position the Pump inside the Vacuum Mounting Plate and loosely install the
black Shipping Restrainer.
3. Turn the Vacuum Pump and Valve Assembly upside down.
4. Support the Pump while installing the pump mounting hardware.
5. Support the Pump and place the Vacuum Pump and Valve Assembly right side
up.
6. Connect the tubing from the 3-Way Valve Assembly to the Pump.
7. Place the Vacuum Pump and Valve Assembly onto the Base Pan, connect the
Pump Cable, and then secure. Ensure that the Ground and Cable Clamp are
mounted to the Vacuum Mounting Plate.
8. Reconnect all cables, wires, and tubing to parts as tagged.
9. Reconnect the two Grounding Straps to the Board Mount Assembly.
10. Perform the Rear Panel Assembly Installation procedure (Section 5.2.5.2).
11. Turn the power switch ON, perform Vacuum Filler Alignment/Calibration
procedures. (See Drawing 532600.)
5.25
3-Way Filler Valve Assembly Replacement
Refer to Figure 5-51 for the location of the 3-Way Filler Valve Assembly.
5.25.1
Removal
1. Ensure that the instrument power is turned OFF.
2. Perform the Rear Panel Assembly Removal procedure (Section 5.2.5.1).
3. Tag and disconnect the 3-Way Filler Valve Assembly wires connected to the
Vacuum Sealer PCB.
4. Remove the two screws securing the 3-Way Filler Valve Assembly to the
underside of the Vacuum Mounting Plate.
5. Note the orientation of the filler valve assembly and the filler tubing.
6. Disconnect the tubing from the filler valve assemblies filter and the 3-way valve
assembly.
5.25.2
Installation
1. Connect the tubing to the filler valve assembly as previously noted during
removal.
2. Mount the 3-Way Filler Valve Assembly to the underside of the Vacuum
Mounting Plate.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-73
Rear Panel Fan Replacement
Component Replacement
3. Connect the 3-Way Filler Valve Assembly to the Vacuum Sealer PCB as
tagged.
4. Perform the Rear Panel Assembly Installation procedure (Section 5.2.5.2).
5. Turn the power switch ON and verify proper operation.
6. After turning the VITEK® 2 Compact instrument ON, perform the Vacuum Filler
Alignment procedures. (See Drawing 532600.)
7. Perform the Proportional Valve Calibration (INIT_PROP_VALVE) and the
Vacuum Filler Leak Test (FILLER_LEAK_TEST). (See Drawing 532600.)
5.26
Rear Panel Fan Replacement
Refer to Figure 5-52 for the location of the instrument Cabinet Fans.
5.26.1
Removal
1. Ensure that the instrument power is turned OFF.
2. Perform the Rear Panel Assembly Removal procedure (Section 5.2.5.1).
3. Tag and disconnect the Wiring Connectors going to the Fan.
4. Note the Fan position and airflow direction.
5. If removing the Air Intake Fan, remove the Fan Filter/Grill Assembly.
6. Remove the mounting hardware and Wire Finger Guards from the Fan.
Intake Fan
Exhaust Fan
Figure 5-52: Instrument Cabinet Fans
5-74
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
5.26.2
Bar Code Scanner Replacement
Installation
1. Install the Fans and Wire Finger Guard as noted during removal. Ensure the
airflow is in the proper direction (Figure 5-52).
2. Connect Wiring Connectors to Fans.
3. Perform the Rear Panel Assembly Installation procedure (Section 5.2.5.2).
4. Turn the power switch ON and verify the system operation.
5.27
Bar Code Scanner Replacement
Refer to Figure 5-53 for the Bar Code Scanner location.
5.27.1
Removal
1. Ensure that the instrument power is turned OFF.
2. Perform the Top Panel Assembly Removal procedure (Section 5.2.1.1).
3. Note the position of the Scanner on the Bracket and then remove the Scanner.
4. Disconnect the cable going to the Bar Code Scanner.
5. Remove the two screws securing the Bar Code Scanner Mounting Bracket to
the Reader Head.
6. Remove the four screws securing the Bar Code Scanner to the Bar Code
Scanner Mounting Bracket.
7. Set the Scanner aside for return, repair, or replacement.
Figure 5-53: Bar Code Scanner
5.27.2
Installation
1. Secure the Bar Code Scanner to the Bar Code Scanner Mounting Bracket.
2. Secure the Bar Code Scanner Mounting Bracket to the Reader Head.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-75
Sealer Assembly Replacement
Component Replacement
3. Connect the cable going to the Bar Code Scanner.
4. Perform the Top Panel Assembly Installation procedure (Section 5.2.1.2).
5. After turning the VITEK® 2 Compact instrument ON, perform the Transport
Alignment procedures. (See Drawing 532600.)
5.28
Sealer Assembly Replacement
WARNING
The Sealer Station contains a wire that is heated during the sealing
operation. The instrument also contains areas of elevated
temperatures in or near the incubator. Take proper precautions.
The Sealer Assembly can be replaced as one unit or at the component level.
Replacement of the Sealer Motor and Sealer Home Optical Sensor were described
earlier in this chapter. Replacement of the Sealer Hot Wire is described in
Section 5.29.
Refer to Figure 5-54 and Figure 5-55 for the Sealer Replacement.
5.28.1
Removal
1. Ensure that the instrument power is turned OFF.
2. Perform the Top Panel Assembly Removal procedure (Section 5.2.1.1).
3. Remove the mounting hardware securing the Sealer Assembly to the Base Pan.
4. Disconnect and tag the Sealer Wire Assembly wiring and remove the assembly
from the instrument.
Note:
5-76
When disconnecting the red Sealer Hot Wire cable from the Vacuum Sealer
Board, use a 3 mm flat-tip screwdriver and press down through the top
opening of the Spring Terminal Block.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Component Replacement
Sealer Hot Wire Replacement
Sealer
Assembly
Figure 5-54: Sealer Assembly
5.28.2
Installation
1. Place the Sealer Assembly into the instrument.
2. Install the mounting screws to the Sealer Assembly.
3. Connect the wiring as noted during removal.
4. Turn the power switch ON and check the instrument operation.
5. Perform the alignment/calibration procedures for the Sealer Assembly. (See
Drawing 532600.)
5.29
Sealer Hot Wire Replacement
Refer to Figure 5-55 for the Sealer Hot Wire Replacement.
5.29.1
Removal
1. Ensure that the instrument power is turned OFF.
2. Perform the Sealer Assembly Removal procedure (Section 5.28.1).
3. Remove the Hot Wire Rotating Shield from the Sealer Frame Housing. Take
caution not to lose nylon washers that are placed between the Rotating Shield
and Housing.
4. Note the orientation of the Sealer Hot Wire and then remove it from the Sealer
Connector Assembly.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
5-77
Sealer Hot Wire Replacement
Component Replacement
Sealer Hot
Wire
Figure 5-55: Sealer Hot Wire
5.29.2
Installation
1. Install the Sealer Hot Wire as noted during removal.
2. Ensure that sealer wire is vertical. If instead it is bent, manually reposition it.
3. Install the Hot Wire Rotating Shield to the Sealer Frame Housing, ensuring that
the nylon washers are placed between the two parts.
4. Perform the Sealer Assembly Installation procedure (Section 5.28.2).
5-78
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Chapter 6: Troubleshooting
About this Chapter
This chapter describes how to perform a VITEK® 2 Compact instrument diagnostic
connection, the DML commands used to aid in diagnosing instrument problems,
general instrument troubleshooting, as well as general host PC information and how
to perform a DensiCHEK™ calibration or DensiCHEK™ Plus verification.
To aid in troubleshooting a VITEK® 2 Compact system, also refer to the following:
• Chapter 7, Schematics, Diagrams and Test Points
• Chapter 8, Instrument Error Codes
• Chapter 9, Host Computers
• Appendix E, Maintaining the Instrument
• Appendix F, User Diagnostics
WARNING
POTENTIAL BIOHAZARDOUS MATERIAL. Instrument surfaces and
contaminated test kit components are potentially biohazardous and
should be handled according to good laboratory practices. Observe
universal precautions when operating the instrument and when
performing maintenance or troubleshooting.
IMPORTANT:
Note:
When performing troubleshooting while cards are processing, it is
important to note that the first card in the carousel will be forced to
terminate about 25 minutes after loss of power, or when two missed
card readings are caused by the carousel or transport not moving
cards through the card reading cycle. Subsequent cards will be forced
to terminate in 15 second intervals thereafter. The entire carousel will
be forced to terminate after 40 minutes. To reduce the number of cards
forced to terminate, make sure the instrument is returned to service as
soon as possible, or avoid performing troubleshooting while cards are
processing if at all possible.
See Section 1.5, Reference Documents for a list of documents referenced
within this service manual. Always refer to the latest drawing revision.
Chapter Contents
6.1
Login — Operating System and Instrument Firmware • 6-4
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.2
Login to Host PC Operating System • 6-4
Login to Instrument Firmware Using Host PC • 6-4
Instrument Diagnostics Connection • 6-5
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-1
Troubleshooting
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.5
6.3
Verify Proper Instrument Operation • 6-27
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.4
Diagnostic Connection — Instrument Connected to Host PC • 6-5
Diagnostic Connection — Instrument Connected to Service PC • 6-5
Diagnostic Connection — Remote Desktop • 6-7
Diagnostic Connection — Remote-Anything • 6-16
How to Use Diagnostics Terminal • 6-20
Status Screen Review • 6-27
Login and Status Check • 6-28
Firmware Diagnostic Commands • 6-29
6.4.1 Searching for DML Commands and Variables • 6-29
6.4.2 System Commands • 6-31
6.4.3 Cabinet Commands • 6-41
6.4.4 Vacuum/Filler Commands • 6-43
6.4.5 Transport Commands • 6-46
6.4.6 Bar Code Commands • 6-49
6.4.7 Sealer Commands • 6-49
6.4.8 Autoloader Commands • 6-50
6.4.9 Incubator/Carousel Commands • 6-51
6.4.10 Reader/Transmittance/CAM Commands • 6-58
6.4.11 UPS Commands • 6-61
6.4.12 Host Communication • 6-62
6.4.13 Flash Log Commands • 6-64
6.4.14 Diagnostic Commands • 6-66
6.4.15 Motor Commands • 6-67
6.4.16 Firmware Commands • 6-69
6.4.17 Macro Commands • 6-69
6.4.18 BURN-IN Commands • 6-74
6.5
User Interface Hidden Menu Access • 6-77
6.5.1
6.5.2
6.5.3
6.5.4
6.5.5
6.5.6
6.5.7
6.6
Sensor States • 6-77
Keypad Test • 6-77
Indicator Test • 6-77
LCD Test • 6-77
Select Language • 6-78
Trigger Bar Code Reader • 6-78
Ship Prep • 6-78
General Instrument Troubleshooting • 6-78
6.6.1 AC Power to Instrument Has Failed • 6-78
6.6.2 No Power Output at AC Power Distribution Board • 6-79
6.6.3 BCB Board – Power Indicators Not Illuminated • 6-79
6.6.4 DC Power Distribution Board – Indicator Lights Not Illuminated • 6-79
6.6.5 Transport Failures • 6-79
6.6.6 Transmittance Optical Interrupt Failures • 6-80
6.6.7 Transmittance Calibration Errors / Failures • 6-80
6.6.8 Reader Jamming • 6-80
6.6.9 Carousel Jamming • 6-81
6.6.10 Incubator Temperature Failures and Errors • 6-81
6-2
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
6.6.11 Ambient Temperature Out of Range • 6-81
6.6.12 Drive Motor(s) Will Not Operate • 6-82
6.6.13 Instrument Not Communicating Messages • 6-82
6.6.14 Filler/Vacuum System • 6-82
6.6.15 Sealer Alarms or Failures • 6-85
6.6.16 UPS Failure • 6-86
6.6.17 Power Supply Information • 6-86
6.6.18 VITEK® 2 Compact Electrical Architecture • 6-89
6.7
Viewing Host PC Software Version • 6-90
6.7.1
6.8
Windows® Event Logs • 6-90
6.8.1
6.9
Check System Software Version • 6-90
VITEK® 2 Compact System Logs • 6-91
DensiCHEK™ and DensiCHEK™ Plus Calibration/Verification • 6-93
6.9.1
6.9.2
Check and Calibrate DensiCHEK™ • 6-93
DensiCHEK™ Plus Instrument Verification • 6-94
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-3
Login — Operating System and Instrument Firmware
Troubleshooting
6.1
Login — Operating System and Instrument Firmware
6.1.1
Login to Host PC Operating System
Log in to an administrator account of the Windows® host PC operating system. (See
Section 9.6.1, Log in to Host PC Operating System.)
6.1.2
Login to Instrument Firmware Using Host PC
When logged in as Admin or BMX_Admin there are up to four shortcut icons on the
desktop called Instrument 1 Diagnostic, Instrument 2 Diagnostic, Instrument 3
Diagnostic, and Instrument 4 Diagnostic.
Note:
Only systems with software version 05.01 or higher will have the
Instrument 3 Diagnostic icon and Instrument 4 Diagnostic icon.
• For VITEK® 2 Compact systems with 3.01 system software or later, these are
Diagnostics Terminal shortcut icons.
• For systems with 2.01 system software or earlier, these are HyperTerminal®
shortcut icons.
To login to either type of terminal emulator, perform the following:
1. From the desktop of the host PC, double-click the appropriate Instrument
Diagnostic icon (Instrument 1 Diagnostic, Instrument 2 Diagnostic, etc.).
2. At the diagnostic Prompt > type LOGIN watson9 and press Enter.
A line describing the login group confirms a successful login.
Note:
IMPORTANT:
Logins are case-sensitive.
This login is only to be used by trained bioMérieux personnel, and
must not be given to the customer. (See the VITEK® 2 Compact Field
Service Commands [Drawing 532612] for more information.)
WARNING
It is imperative that the operator accessing the Development Macro
Language (DML) type all commands with preexisting knowledge of
the result. Erroneously executing commands could have a
detrimental effect on the operation of the VITEK® 2 Compact
instrument. Any person accessing the DML should first have the
proper training through bioMérieux, Inc.
6-4
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
6.2
Instrument Diagnostics Connection
Instrument Diagnostics Connection
Instrument Diagnostics can be accessed by the following four methods:
• Diagnostics Terminal or HyperTerminal® on the host computer (host PC), when
the instrument is physically connected to the host PC. (See Section 6.2.1,
Diagnostic Connection — Instrument Connected to Host PC.)
• A terminal emulator such as Diagnostics Terminal on a Service Engineer’s PC,
when the Service PC is physically connected to the instrument. (See
Section 6.2.2, Diagnostic Connection — Instrument Connected to Service PC.)
• A remote connection to the host PC from the Service Engineer’s PC with
Microsoft Windows® Dial-Up Connection and Remote Desktop, and using
Diagnostics Terminal or HyperTerminal® on the host PC. (See Section 6.2.3,
Diagnostic Connection — Remote Desktop.)
• A remote connection to the host PC using Remote-Anything (a remote
communication software package), and then using the HyperTerminal® on the
host PC. (See Section 6.2.4, Diagnostic Connection — Remote-Anything.)
6.2.1
Diagnostic Connection — Instrument Connected to Host PC
To perform VITEK® 2 Compact instrument diagnostics with host PC terminal
emulator:
1. Ensure instrument is properly connected to host PC.
2. Perform the Host PC Windows® Operating System login. (See Section 6.1.1,
Login to Host PC Operating System.)
3. Then login to the instrument firmware using a terminal emulator. (See
Section 6.1.2, Login to Instrument Firmware Using Host PC.)
6.2.2
Diagnostic Connection — Instrument Connected to Service PC
One of the following terminal emulators can be used when an instrument is physically
connected to a Service Engineer’s PC.
• The Diagnostics Terminal (DiagTerm.exe) software, which first needs to be
installed onto the Service PC. (See Service PC – Connect Instrument & Set Up
Diagnostics Terminal.)
• Another type of terminal emulator on the Service PC, such as HyperTerminal®.
(See Service PC – Connect Instrument & Set Up Terminal Emulator.)
6.2.2.1
Service PC – Connect Instrument & Set Up Diagnostics Terminal
1. Copy the DiagTerm.exe file from the most current version of the VITEK® 2
Systems Firmware CD to a folder located on the Service Engineer’s PC.
2. Connect the Data/Diagnostic Reader Cable to the VITEK® 2 Compact
instrument.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-5
Instrument Diagnostics Connection
Troubleshooting
3. Connect the end of the cable marked DIAGNOSTIC to a COM port available on
the Service Engineer’s PC.
4. Open the DiagTerm.exe from the Service PC.
5. From the Diagnostics Terminal window, click the Connection Setup button.
The Connection Setup window appears.
6. Click the check box next to Serial Port.
7. From the Available Ports drop-down list, select the serial COM port the
instrument is connected.
8. Enter 9600 for the Target Baud rate.
9. Click OK.
Figure 6-1: Diagnostics Terminal Setup
10. At the diagnostic Prompt > type LOGIN watson9 and press Enter.
A line describing the login group confirms a successful login.
Note:
IMPORTANT:
6.2.2.2
Logins are case-sensitive.
This login is only to be used by trained bioMérieux personnel, and
must not be given to the customer. (See the VITEK® 2 Compact Field
Service Commands [Drawing 532612] for more information.)
Service PC – Connect Instrument & Set Up Terminal Emulator
1. Connect the Data/Diagnostic Reader Cable to the VITEK® 2 Compact
instrument.
2. Connect the end of the cable marked DIAGNOSTIC to a COM port available on
the Service Engineer’s PC.
3. Open HyperTerminal® or an equivalent communications software package on a
Field Service PC.
4. Configure the communication package COM port as follows:
6-6
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
Instrument Diagnostics Connection
• Terminal: VT100
• Baud Rate: 9600
• Parity: None
• Data Bits: 8
• Stop Bits: 1
• Flow Control: none
5. At the diagnostic Prompt > type LOGIN watson9 and press Enter.
A line describing the login group confirms a successful login.
Note:
IMPORTANT:
6.2.3
Logins are case-sensitive.
This login is only to be used by trained bioMérieux personnel, and
must not be given to the customer. (See the VITEK® 2 Compact Field
Service Commands [Drawing 532612] for more information.)
Diagnostic Connection — Remote Desktop
One remote diagnostic method available for the VITEK® 2 Compact system is using
Windows® Remote Desktop. VITEK® 2 Compact host PC models HP® d530,
HP® dc7100 and HP® dc7700 include Windows® Remote Desktop, but must first be
configured. Beginning with the host PC model HP® dc7800, Windows® Remote
Desktop is preconfigured.
Note:
The method described in this section only defines remote communication via
a modem connection. The VITEK® 2 Compact host PC modem must be
connected to a standard analog phone line.
WARNING
When remote access is no longer necessary, the host PC modem
MUST be disabled. If the modem is left enabled to receive incoming
calls, there is a security risk. (In addition, the VITEK® 2 Compact
system software cannot use the modem for BCI connections.)
6.2.3.1
Host PC — Configure Remote Desktop
This section only applies to host PC models HP® d530, HP® dc7100, and
HP® dc7700 that are not configured for remote instrument diagnostics using
Windows® Remote Desktop.
The host PC model HP® dc7800 and later are preconfigured to use Remote Desktop.
(If this applies, skip to Section 6.2.3.2, Host PC — Enable Modem for Remote
Access.)
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-7
Instrument Diagnostics Connection
Troubleshooting
1. Log in to an administrator account of the Windows® host PC operating system.
(See Section 6.1.1, Login to Host PC Operating System.)
2. From the host PC desktop, right-click the Admin on BMXHOST 1 icon. (This is
the My Computer icon on a standard PC desktop.)
3. From the drop-down list, select Manage. The Computer Management window
will appear.
Figure 6-2: Admin on BMXHOST1 – Manage
4. In the Computer Management window, click the (+) to expand the Services and
Applications directory.
Figure 6-3: Computer Management Window
5. Select Services.
6. Scroll down the Services list and double-click the Terminal Services
application. The Terminal Services Properties window will appear.
7. On the Terminal Services Properties window, under the General tab, select the
Startup type as Automatic.
6-8
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
Instrument Diagnostics Connection
Figure 6-4: Terminal Services Properties – General
8. Click the Apply button and then click the Start button.
9. When complete, click the OK button to close the Terminal Service window.
10. From the Computer Management window, select File > Exit.
11. From the host PC desktop, right-click the Admin on BMXHOST 1 icon. (This is
the My Computer icon on a standard PC desktop.)
12. From the drop-down list select Properties. The System Properties window will
appear.
Figure 6-5: Admin on BMXHOST1 – Properties
13. From the System Properties window, select the Remote tab.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-9
Instrument Diagnostics Connection
Troubleshooting
Figure 6-6: System Properties – Remote
14. Enable the check box next to Allow users to connect remotely to this
computer. (An information pop-up window may display. Click the OK button.)
15. From the System Properties Remote tab, click the Apply button.
16. Click the OK button to close the System Properties Window.
6.2.3.2
Host PC — Enable Modem for Remote Access
WARNING
When remote access is no longer necessary, the host PC modem
MUST be disabled. If the modem is left enabled to receive incoming
calls, there is a security risk. (In addition, the VITEK® 2 Compact
system software cannot use the modem for BCI connections.)
1. From the Windows® taskbar, select Start > Settings > Control Panel >
Network Connections > Incoming Connections.
6-10
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
Instrument Diagnostics Connection
Figure 6-7: Network Connections
2. Click the check box next to the Modem device to enable the modem to receive
calls.
3. Click the OK button.
Figure 6-8: Modem Enable
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-11
Instrument Diagnostics Connection
6.2.3.3
Troubleshooting
Service (Remote) PC — Set Up Dial-Up Connection
Microsoft Windows® Dial-Up Connection is set up on a Service Engineer’s PC to
establish a modem connection.
1. From the Service Engineer’s Windows® taskbar, click Start > All Programs >
Accessories > Communications > New Connection Wizard. The Welcome
to the New Connection Wizard window appears.
2. Click the Next button. The Network Connection Type window appears.
3. Enable Connect to the network at my workspace radio button.
4. Click the Next button. The Network Connection window appears.
5. Enable Dial-up connection radio button.
6. Click the Next button. The Connection Name window appears.
7. In the Company Name field, type the system number/name.
8. Click the Next button. The Phone Number to Dial window appears.
9. In the Phone number field, type the VITEK® 2 Compact system phone number.
10. Click the Next button. The Connection Availability window appears.
11. Enable the Anyone’s use radio button.
12. Click the Next button.
13. Click the Finish button.
6.2.3.4
Service (Remote) PC — Establish Dial-Up Connection
1. From the Service Engineer’s Windows® taskbar, click Start > All Programs >
Accessories > Communications > Network Connections.
2. Select the appropriate dial-up connection.
3. Log in to an administrator account of the Windows® host PC operating system.
(See Section 6.1.1, Login to Host PC Operating System.)
4. Click Dial.
5. Once connected, a Communication Status icon appears in the Windows®
taskbar.
6.2.3.5
Service (Remote) PC — Remote Desktop Connection
Note:
When a Remote Desktop connection is established, the user of the host PC
will automatically be logged out. If someone logs into the host PC, the
Remote Desktop session will be terminated.
1. On a Service PC, start Remote Desktop by selecting the following:
Start > All Programs > Accessories > Communications > Remote Desktop
Connection.
6-12
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
Instrument Diagnostics Connection
2. From the Remote Desktop Connection window, select Options>> to expand
the window.
Figure 6-9: Remote Desktop Connection
3. On the General tab of the Remote Desktop Connections window, set the
following:
Computer: 10.0.0.101
User Name and Password:
• Default Admin login. Following is the factory default password for Admin.
This password may have been changed.
User Name: Admin
Password: bmx_admin
• d530 and dc7100 bmx_admin login. The password of this login is a
proprietary algorithm and changes daily. To determine the appropriate
password, refer to the GCS Portal.
User Name: bmx_admin
Password: password of the day (proprietary algorithm)
• dc7700 bmx_admin login. The password of this login is a proprietary
algorithm and changes monthly. To determine the appropriate password,
refer to the GCS Portal.
User Name: bmx_admin
Password: password of the month (proprietary algorithm)
• dc7800 and rp5700 bmx_remote login. The password of this login is a
proprietary algorithm and changes monthly. To determine the appropriate
password, refer to the GCS Portal.
User Name: bmx_remote
Password: password of the month (proprietary algorithm)
IMPORTANT:
The bmx_admin and bmx_remote logins and passwords are only to be
used by trained bioMérieux personnel, and must not be given to the
customer.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-13
Instrument Diagnostics Connection
Troubleshooting
Figure 6-10: Remote Desktop – General
4. On the Local Resources tab of the Remote Desktop Connections window,
enable the Disk Drives check box. This will allow access to your local drives, so
files can be transferred between PCs.
Note:
To access Service PC applications by using Alt + Tab when running
Remote Desktop, from the Keyboard drop-down list select On the local
computer.
Figure 6-11: Remote Desktop – Local Resources
6-14
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
Instrument Diagnostics Connection
5. On the Experience tab of the Remote Desktop Connections window, select
Modem 56 Kbps as the default connection speed.
Figure 6-12: Remote Desktop – Experience
6. Click the Connect button.
7. Click the OK button for any security warnings.
8. The desktop window of the host PC will display on the service PC.
The hard drives of the host PC can be accessed from the Service PC using Windows®
Explorer. Using this method, files can be moved between the two PCs.
6.2.3.6
Service (Remote) PC — Disable Host PC Modem and Log Out
WARNING
When remote access is no longer necessary, the host PC modem
MUST be disabled. If the modem is left enabled to receive incoming
calls, there is a security risk. (In addition, the VITEK® 2 Compact
system software cannot use the modem for BCI connections.)
1. From the Remote Desktop screen, select Start > Settings > Control Panel >
Network Connections > Incoming Connections.
2. Uncheck the check box next to the Modem device. The checkmark should be
removed from the box.
3. Click OK. The modem will no longer accept incoming calls.
4. Close any windows opened during troubleshooting.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-15
Instrument Diagnostics Connection
Troubleshooting
5. Select Start > Disconnect and follow the prompts to disconnect from Remote
Desktop.
6.2.3.7
Service (Remote) PC — Disconnect Dial-Up Connection
1. Click the Communication Status icon from the Windows® taskbar.
2. A Status window appears.
3. Click the Disconnect button.
6.2.4
Diagnostic Connection — Remote-Anything
Remote-Anything slave software was factory installed on host PC models HP® d530,
HP® dc7100, and HP® dc7700. Beginning with the host PC model HP® dc7800,
Remote-Anything slave software is not installed. Alternatively Windows® Remote
Desktop may be used. (See Section 6.2.3, Diagnostic Connection — Remote
Desktop.)
6.2.4.1
Set Up Guidelines for Remote-Anything Master
To establish a diagnostic connection using Remote-Anything, the Remote-Anything
Master (Master.exe) must be installed on the Service Engineer’s PC.
1. Ensure that a master license has been obtained.
2. Place a copy of Master.exe in a folder created on the Service Engineer’s PC.
You may also create a shortcut icon on the PC’s desktop.
3. Import a master license by following the instructions provided by the
Remote-Anything distributor.
4. Set up Remote-Anything Master with the following Slave Computer settings:
Slave IP Address: 10.0.0.101 (Alternate 10.0.0.102)
Note:
6.2.4.2
Password:
bmx_remote
Port:
4000
You can save these settings by clicking the EDIT button and placing these
settings in the RA Address Book.
Set Up Guidelines for Microsoft Windows® Dial-Up Connection
Microsoft Windows® Dial-Up Connection must be set up on the Service Engineer’s PC
to establish a modem connection. This is done for each VITEK® 2 Compact system at
the time of installation by the bioMérieux Service Engineer.
1. Depending on your setup, from the Windows® taskbar click Start > Programs >
Accessories > Communications > Remote-Access.
or
6-16
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
Instrument Diagnostics Connection
Click Start > Programs > Accessories > Communications > Network and
Dial-up Connections
or
Click Start > Programs > Accessories > Communications > Network
Connections.
2. Create a new connection using the available link.
3. Follow the prompts to set up a dial-up connection.
4. When complete, click Finish.
6.2.4.3
Enable Host Computer Modem for Remote Access
For service to gain access remotely to the computer, the user/customer with
Administrative login privileges to the host PC Windows® Operating System needs to
enable the modem.
• Default Admin login. Below is the factory default password for Admin. This
password may have been changed.
User Name: Admin
Password: bmx_admin
1. Once the user/customer is logged in as Administrator, from the Windows®
taskbar, select Start > Settings > Control Panel > Network Connections >
Incoming Connections.
Figure 6-13: Network Connections
2. Click the check box next to the Modem device.
3. Click OK. This enables the modem to receive calls.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-17
Instrument Diagnostics Connection
Troubleshooting
Figure 6-14: Modem Enable
WARNING
If you leave the modem enabled to receive incoming calls, there is a
security risk. In addition, the VITEK® 2 Compact system software
cannot use the modem for BCI connections. When remote access is
no longer necessary, the modem MUST be disabled. Follow this
section’s procedure, but remove the check mark.
6.2.4.4
Start Up Microsoft Windows® Dial-Up Connection to Host PC
1. From the Service Engineer’s PC Windows® taskbar, click Start > Programs >
Accessories > Communications > Remote-Access.
or
Click Start > Programs > Accessories > Communications > Network and
Dial-up Connections
or
Click Start > Programs > Accessories > Communications > Network
Connections.
2. Select the appropriate dial-up connection.
3. Log in to the host PC using an operating system login. (See Section 6.1.1, Login
to Host PC Operating System.)
4. Click Dial.
5. Once connected, a Communication Status icon appears in the Windows®
taskbar.
6-18
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
6.2.4.5
Instrument Diagnostics Connection
Start Up Remote-Anything Master for Connection to Host PC
1. Run Master.exe from the Service Engineer’s PC by selecting the
Remote-Anything icon from the Windows® taskbar.
2. Select the appropriate Slave Computer.
3. Click the Monitor button at the bottom of Remote-Anything Master to “View the
screen of the selected slave PC”.
4. The VITEK® 2 Compact host PC screen displays. This is the Graphical User
Interface (GUI) screen that the user/customer sees. It can be accessed by both
the user and the Service Engineer (remotely).
6.2.4.6
Opening Instrument Diagnostic Window
1. Double-click the corresponding HyperTerminal icon located on the host PC
desktop (for example, Instrument 1 Diagnostic, Instrument 2 Diagnostic,
etc.).
2. At the diagnostic Prompt > type LOGIN watson9 and press Enter.
A line describing the login group confirms a successful login.
Note:
IMPORTANT:
Note:
6.2.4.7
Logins are case-sensitive.
This login is only to be used by trained bioMérieux personnel, and
must not be given to the customer. (See the VITEK® 2 Compact Field
Service Commands [Drawing 532612] for more information.)
To discontinue use of the Instrument Diagnostics, close the HyperTerminal®
window.
Disable Modem of Host Computer and Log Out
IMPORTANT:
For security purposes, once a remote connection is no longer
necessary, the host PC modem must be disabled prior to disconnect.
1. When VITEK® 2 Compact troubleshooting is complete, from the Windows®
taskbar select Start > Settings > Control Panel > Network Connections >
Incoming Connections.
2. Uncheck the check box next to the Modem device. The checkmark should be
removed from the box.
3. Click OK. This disables the modem so it will not receive incoming calls.
4. Close any windows that were opened during troubleshooting.
5. Log out of the host PC by selecting Start > Log Off Admin and follow the
prompts to log out.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-19
Print Preview
Troubleshooting
Instrument Diagnostics Connection
6.2.4.8
Disconnect Microsoft Windows® Dial-Up Connection
1. Click the Communication Status icon from the Windows® taskbar.
2. A Status window appears.
3. Click the Disconnect button.
4. Close Remote-Anything Master.
6.2.5
How to Use Diagnostics Terminal
The Diagnostics Terminal is used as a terminal emulator to review the VITEK® 2
Compact instrument status, instrument logs, and execute instrument diagnostic
commands.
The Diagnostics Terminal window and a description of the function buttons are shown
in Figure 6-15. The following sections detail the Diagnostics Terminal functions. When
pointing at a function button with the mouse pointer, the button information displays in
the Status/Information area, as shown in Figure 6-16. The Diagnostic Terminal dropdown menus include the same functions as the function buttons.
About Diagnostic
Terminal
Save
File Download
File Information
Print Preview
Print
Meta Keys
Trace Color
File Capture
Connection Setup
Font Size
Stop Display
Configuration
Figure 6-15: Diagnostics Terminal – Buttons
Status/Information
Number and Capital Lock Information
Connection Information
Port Information
Host Name
Figure 6-16: Diagnostics Terminal – Status
6.2.5.1
Diagnostics Terminal — Save
The Save command saves the text in the scroll back buffer to a file in Rich Text
Format. The Save command button, and the File > Save As from the drop-down
6-20
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
Instrument Diagnostics Connection
menu basically work the same way. The first time the Save command is used, the
Save As window displays. Enter a file name, followed by the .rtf extension.
Subsequent saves will save the file in the same location. Any Trace Color formatting is
retained in the saved .rtf file.
To change the save location or file name, use the File > Save As from the drop-down
menu.
Figure 6-17: Diagnostics Terminal – File Information
6.2.5.2
Diagnostics Terminal — File Download
The File Download command works with instruments that have Boot Firmware 0.12
or later. This command performs a firmware update in less than 10 minutes using
either a .mot or .bin file. A dialog box asks the user to indicate which file to download
to the BCB.
CAUTION: Be careful when using the File Download command! There
are no error checks to prevent VITEK® 2 code from installing on a
VITEK® 2 Compact, or to prevent older versions from installing over
newer versions.
6.2.5.3
Diagnostics Terminal — File Information
The File Information command will query a firmware file and display the version
information for that file.
6.2.5.4
Diagnostics Terminal — Meta Keys
The Meta Keys feature allows commonly used DML commands to be set up as Meta
Keys. When a user clicks a Meta Key button, the DML commands assigned to that
key is executed.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-21
Instrument Diagnostics Connection
Troubleshooting
Figure 6-18: Diagnostics Terminal – Meta Keys and Editor
Selecting the Meta Keys function brings up the Meta Keys dialog window, which
always stays on top of any other open windows. Meta Keys can be created by
selecting the Meta Key Editor button on the Meta Keys window.
To create a Meta Key:
1. Click the Meta Key function button from the Diagnostics Terminal.
2. Click the Meta Key Editor button.
3. Select one of the 10 Meta Keys on the Meta Key Editor.
4. Add a name to the Meta Key in the Button Text box.
5. Add the DML Commands to be executed in the DML Command Text box.
6. Click the OK button.
The <<< and >>> buttons are used on the Meta Keys window and Meta Key Editor
window to create and view up to 100 Meta Keys.
Meta Key files may be exported from the Meta Key Editor and then imported into
another Diagnostics Terminal program. Importing a set of Meta Keys replaces all Meta
Keys currently in the Diagnostics Terminal program.
6.2.5.5
Diagnostics Terminal — File Capture
The File Capture command opens a Capture File window. In the File name field type
a designated file name followed by the .txt extension. The text displayed thereafter
will be saved to that file. The text file will contain no formatting such as color coding.
In addition to this file capture command, Diagnostics Terminal automatically captures
all text into a log file named with the date of its creation. If Diagnostics Terminal is
running from the VITEK® 2 Compact host PC, the log file name is saved in the
directory D:\Programs Files\VITEK 2 compact\log\diagTerm. If Diagnostics
Terminal is running on a different PC (such as a laptop), a folder named log will be
created in the directory where Diagnostics Terminal is placed.
6-22
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
6.2.5.6
Instrument Diagnostics Connection
Diagnostics Terminal — Connection Setup
The Connection Setup allows the connectivity between the Diagnostics Terminal and
an instrument with a serial connection, or a remote connection to an open Diagnostics
Terminal on a host PC.
Figure 6-19: Diagnostics Terminal – Connection Setup
Serial Connection
• For Diagnostics Terminal software installed on a VITEK® 2 Compact host PC, the
default connection for Instrument 1 is COM6, and Instrument 2 is COM8.
• For Diagnostics Terminal software running from an alternate PC (such as a
Service Engineer’s PC) and connected to an instrument, select the appropriate
serial COM port connection and enter 9600 for the Target Baud rate.
Remote Connection
Using the Remote Host function allows a remote PC Diagnostics Terminal to run in
parallel communications with the host PC Diagnostics Terminal. With this connection
both the host PC user and remote PC user are able to view and enter commands to
the same instrument in the same login session.
To establish a remote connection:
1. Diagnostics Terminal must be open on the VITEK® 2 Compact host PC.
2. Obtain the Host name and Port number of the host PC Diagnostics Terminal.
This information is located in the status bar of the host PC Diagnostics Terminal
window. (See Figure 6-16.)
3. Using the remote PC, establish a connection (such as a dial-up connection with
Remote Anything or Remote Desktop) to the host PC.
4. Using the remote PC, open Diagnostics Terminal.
5. Click the Connection Setup button from the remote PC Diagnostics Terminal.
6. From the Connection Setup window, enable Remote Host. (See Figure 6-19.)
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-23
Instrument Diagnostics Connection
Troubleshooting
7. Enter the VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument Field Service Password watson9 into
the Password box.
Note:
IMPORTANT:
Logins are case-sensitive.
This login is only to be used by trained bioMérieux personnel, and
must not be given to the customer. (See the VITEK® 2 Compact Field
Service Commands [Drawing 532612] for more information.)
8. Enter the host name and host port number.
9. Click the OK button.
Note:
6.2.5.7
Not all Diagnostics Terminal functions such as Meta Keys and Firmware
Download are available when using Diagnostics Terminal remotely.
Diagnostics Terminal — Configuration
The Configuration function allows some program configurations to be changed. (See
Figure 6-20.)
• When checked, the Enable Download Tone function allows a .wav file to play
when a firmware download is complete. The default tone is enabled. Optionally
any .wav file on the PC may be selected.
• The Scroll Back Buffer setting allows the user to adjust the number of lines
saved in the scroll back buffer from 10 to 1000 lines.
• When the Prompt to Save Changes function is checked and the user exits the
Diagnostics Terminal, a popup asks if the contents of the current Scroll Back
Buffer should be saved.
• The Enable Serial Port sniffing function allows the Diagnostics Terminal to check
all serial ports and determine availability. When this function is checked, the list of
available ports in the Connection Setup dialog will be limited to the available ports.
If this box is not checked, the pull down list of available ports will show all 16
possible ports.
Figure 6-20: Diagnostics Terminal – Configuration
6-24
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
6.2.5.8
Instrument Diagnostics Connection
Diagnostics Terminal — Stop Display
The Stop Display function stops new text from displaying in the Diagnostics Terminal
window. Using the scroll bar or scroll up functions on the right side of the Diagnostics
Terminal window also performs the Stop Display function. When the display is
stopped, the Diagnostics Terminal Status bar includes the status STOPPED, and the
window will flash.
When the display is stopped, the Edit tools such as Copy and Find are available. (See
Figure 6-21.)
Click the Stop Display button again to resume the displaying of new text.
Figure 6-21: Diagnostics Terminal – Edit Tools
6.2.5.9
Diagnostics Terminal — Font Size
The Font Size function changes the size of text displayed on the Diagnostics
Terminal. Changing the font size affects the display of all text, including text in the
Scroll Back Buffer.
6.2.5.10
Diagnostics Terminal — Trace Color
The Trace Color function will color code and bold new lines of text generated on the
Diagnostics Terminal display. The default DML configuration for Unexpected text lines
such as ALM (alarms) is enabled as red. The LOG text lines and Debug text lines may
be enabled at any time.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-25
Instrument Diagnostics Connection
Troubleshooting
Figure 6-22: Diagnostics Terminal – Trace Color Settings
Five user configurable Match Strings are also available. Color and bold can be set for
each of them. When a new line of text is displayed, if any text in a line matches one of
the configured Match Strings, the color and bold setting for that line is set accordingly.
If the new line of text matches more than one Match String, the setting for the first
match is used.
Note:
6.2.5.11
Text in the scroll back buffer with Trace Color formatting may be saved to a
file using the Save and Save As commands. To view the saved file in Rich
Text format, the .rtf file extension is used. Capture files are text files and will
not contain any formatting information.
Diagnostics Terminal — Print and Print Preview
The Print function prints the contents of the Scroll Back Buffer. The format (font, color,
or bold text) is included in the printout. The printout is sent to the Windows® default
printer, or to the printer specified in Print Setup.
The Print Preview command displays a preview of the printout.
File > Print Setup allows the user to select the printer and configure the output.
6-26
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
6.2.5.12
Verify Proper Instrument Operation
Diagnostics Terminal — About
The About function displays version information of the Diagnostics Terminal.
Figure 6-23: Diagnostics Terminal – About
6.2.5.13
Diagnostics Terminal — Issues
The command Ctrl + C does not correctly process a terminate active loops command
in DML.
6.3
Verify Proper Instrument Operation
6.3.1
Status Screen Review
1. Review the instrument Status screen for Warnings or Error Messages.
• On the User Interface screen, a dancing exclamation point to the left of the
Overall Status (OK, Maintenance, Warming, Error, or Intervention)
signifies a warning or error message was generated. The detailed message
must be reviewed to clear the alarm.
• To review all messages, press the ! key on the instrument user interface. A
list displays on the Error Message Queue screen. An asterisk (*) to the far left
of a message signifies that it was never reviewed. An exclamation (!) to the
immediate left of a message signifies that it is an error. Use the Up/Down
Arrow keys to move the pointer to the desired message. Then, press ! to
display the detailed message. An error code displays on the lower right corner
of the screen. Refer to Chapter 8, Instrument Error Codes for the
recommended user response.
• An Intervention screen displays only if there is an error or warning during
initialization or card cassette processing that needs the user’s immediate
attention. The Intervention screen contains intervention messages and any
other pertinent information, and always requires some type of response by the
user.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-27
Verify Proper Instrument Operation
Troubleshooting
2. Review the instrument Status screen for Warning Indicators.
• There are several icons that may appear as warnings on the user interface
screen.
Door Opened – Top User Access Door, Front User Access Door,
and/or Card Waste Access Door is open.
UPS Present, But Power Fail
UPS Present, But Low Battery
Waste Container Not Present
Host Communication Failure
• Other icon indicators include:
Cassette Number – The icon to the right of the Loader Status displays
after successful bar code reading, and the cassette number is known.
Virtual Cassette – After successful bar code reading of the cassette
and all of the cards, if the cassette is a Virtual Cassette, this icon
displays to the right of the Loader Status.
Waste Container – The Waste Container is present and the
approximate level of cards in the waste container displays. [Range of
Levels: 0 to 5.]
Available Slots – Number of available slots in the carousel.
[Range: 0 to 15, 0 to 30 or 0 to 60, depending on instrument
configuration.]
Cassette Presence – The cassette is present in the loader area.
Carousel Quad Missing – At least one Quadrousel is missing in the
Carousel.
6.3.2
Login and Status Check
1. From the desktop of the host PC, double-click the appropriate Instrument
Diagnostic icon (Instrument 1 Diagnostic, Instrument 2 Diagnostic, etc).
2. At the diagnostic Prompt > type LOGIN watson9 and press Enter.
A line describing the login group confirms a successful login.
Note:
6-28
Logins are case-sensitive.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
IMPORTANT:
This login is only to be used by trained bioMérieux personnel, and
must not be given to the customer. (See the VITEK® 2 Compact Field
Service Commands [Drawing 532612] for more information.)
3. At the Prompt > type HEALTH and press Enter. The instrument’s Health
Information displays. Ensure there are no instrument errors or warnings. (For
more information see Section 6.4.2.13, HEALTH.)
4. At the Prompt > type DUMP_EQM and press Enter. The instrument’s historical
messages from DML displays.
6.4
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
6.4.1
Searching for DML Commands and Variables
The Development Macro Language (DML) is a tool to determine, diagnose, and
maintain the VITEK® 2 Compact instrument. There are over 500 commands and
variables in the VITEK® 2 Compact DML. To simplify searching for a specific
command, use the MANUAL, MANUAL_EXPORT, WORDS, CMDS, and/or VARS
tools (detailed below).
Note:
There is no case sensitivity to DML commands or variables, so they can be
typed in either upper or lower case.
There are various ways to access Help or retrieve a listing of commands.
Note:
Entering a question mark after a command or variable displays Help text for
that command.
• Type MANUAL and MANUAL_EXPORT to display the entire list of commands
and variables in DML and its associated Help text. The MANUAL_EXPORT
format is designed to be exported to a document table. Because the text output is
extremely long and scrolls off the screen, bioMérieux recommends enabling a
capture file prior to executing either command. It takes several minutes for the
command to complete. An instrument prompt reappears when the command is
complete. Stop the capture file and review as necessary.
• Type WORDS and press ENTER to list commands and variables in the DML
display. Prior to scrolling off the screen, the message “Press any key to
continue” displays. To escape from the scroll, press q or Esc key. To scroll nonstop, press the g key.
• Type WORDS PATTERN and press ENTER to search for a particular command.
PATTERN indicates the text of the command being searched. For example,
typing WORDS FILLER and pressing ENTER displays all DML commands and
variables containing FILLER (Figure 6-24).
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-29
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
Troubleshooting
Figure 6-24: Words Example One
Words are categorized into 22 groups. To search for commands and variables in
a specific group, type WORDS followed by a space, a comma ( , ) and the group.
For example, typing the WORDS ,TRANS and pressing Enter lists all commands
in the Transmittance and Transport groups (Figure 6-25).
Note:
The entire group name does not have to be entered.
Table 6-1: DML Groups
Alignment
BarCodeScanner
BurnIN
Carousel
DevTest
Diagnostics
Duart
Exec
Filler
GUI
HCB
Host Communication
Keywords
LDM Card Test DataBase:
LDM Driver
LDM Log History DataBase:
Network
Reader Head Motor
SPN
SystemMonitor
Transmittance
Transport
Figure 6-25: Words Example Two
To search for commands and variables beginning with a specific text pattern, type
WORDS followed by a space, a caret (^), and a PATTERN. For example, typing
WORDS ^TRANS and pressing Enter lists all the commands and variables
beginning with TRANS (Figure 6-26).
6-30
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
Figure 6-26: Words Example Three
• Type CMDS or VARS. These commands are used the same way as WORDS. If
CMDS is typed, the entire list of commands scrolls on the screen. If VARS is
typed, the entire list of variables scroll on the screen.
• Find a specific command by typing CMDS PATTERN.
• Find a specific variable by typing VARS PATTERN.
• Enter a question mark (?) after a command or variable to display a short definition
or Help text of that command. For example, by typing FILLER_STATUS ? and
pressing ENTER a short description of the command FILLER_STATUS displays
(Figure 6-27).
Figure 6-27: Words Example Four
6.4.2
System Commands
6.4.2.1
HELP
Format: HELP
Definition: HELP displays information on how to obtain help about DML commands.
6.4.2.2
VER
Format: VER
Definition: VER displays the current instrument firmware versions. Figure 6-28 shows
an example of the VER command.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-31
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
Troubleshooting
Example:
Figure 6-28: VER Example Output
• Application version (BCB) – The Bay Controller Board firmware version.
• BOOT version – The boot firmware version written on the EPROM chip located
on the Bay Controller Board.
• SPN Nodes – The firmware versions of all the SPN boards.
• Instrument System Number – The system number associated with the
instrument (This first needs to be manually entered by the DML command
SET_SYS_NUM).
• Instrument Serial Number – The instrument serial number assigned by
Instrument Manufacturing.
• 1-Wire Touch Serial Number – The unique BCB serial number. This is only
identified in DML. It is not written on the BCB PCB.
6.4.2.3
COLD
Format: COLD
Definition: COLD performs a reset (reboot) of the instrument. This command is
prioritized by the data manager. If there are any processes that have a higher priority,
it performs those tasks first before rebooting.
6.4.2.4
INST_DATA
Format: INST_DATA
Definition: INST_DATA displays the instrument system number, instrument serial
number, electronic BCB serial number, instrument production date, and the field
service maintenance date.
6.4.2.5
SERIAL_NUMBER
Format: SERIAL_NUMBER
6-32
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
Definition: SERIAL_NUMBER displays the unique electronic BCB serial number. This
serial number is also displayed with the VER command. This number is only identified
in DML. It is NOT physically written on the BCB PCB.
6.4.2.6
SET_INST_NAME
Format: SET_INST_NAME <name>
Definition: SET_INST_NAME sets the instrument name in NV Ram. The instrument
name can also be set from the Instrument User Interface from the Main Menu by
selecting Configuration > Instrument Name.
6.4.2.7
SET_SN
Format: SET_SN <numeric>
Definition: SET_SN sets the instrument number in non-volatile memory. This string
can be from 0 to 640000.
Example: SET_SN 1100
6.4.2.8
SET_SYS_NUM
Format: SET_SYS_NUM <alpha/numeric string>
Definition: SET_SYS_NUM sets the system number in non-volatile memory. This
string can be up to 20 characters long.
Example: SET_SYS_NUM 50000
6.4.2.9
TIME
Format: TIME
Description: TIME displays the current Time (Real Time Clock [RTC]).
6.4.2.10
SET_TIME
Format: SET_TIME (year:YYYY) (month:MM) (day:DD) (hour:HH) (minute:MM)
Description: SET_TIME sets the date and time of the instrument. The date and time of
the instrument is referenced from the connecting host PC. Therefore, do not use this
command if the instrument is connected to a host PC.
Example: SET_TIME 2004 09 20 15 30 (20 September 2004 at 3:30 p.m.)
6.4.2.11
CHECK_HDW_KEY
Format: CHECK_HDW_KEY
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-33
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
Troubleshooting
Description: CHECK_HDW_KEY checks for the presence of a Hardware Key or a
15-card capacity jumper located on the Bay Controller Board, and displays the status.
• If a Hardware Key is detected, the instrument reads 60 cards in the carousel at
one time.
• If no Hardware Key or Compact jumper is detected, the instrument reads 30
cards. (See Section 6.4.2.28, JUMPER.)
• If no Hardware Key is detected, but the Compact jumper is detected, the
instrument reads 15 cards. (See Section 6.4.2.28, JUMPER.)
6.4.2.12
STAT
Format: STAT
Description: STAT displays general system status information.
6.4.2.13
HEALTH
Format: HEALTH
Description: HEALTH displays system health information. Anything out of the ordinary
is displayed by this command. This includes any warning icons displayed on the User
Interface, if the fans are in an error condition (see SHOW_CAB_TEMP_INFO for more
information), or if the instrument was in an error state.
This command does not show if the instrument requires an intervention or if an alarm
with warning recently occurred.
It is not unusual for this command to show things such as “Duart (A0) Errors” or “Duart
(A1) Errors”. These are variable names with an associated output. They are not
errors.
Example:
Figure 6-29: HEALTH Example Output
6-34
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
6.4.2.14
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
DUMP_EQM
Format: DUMP_EQM
Description: DUMP_EQM displays the entire contents of historical warnings and
instrument errors. EQM is an abbreviation for Error Queue Manager.
Alias Macro: messages
6.4.2.15
CLEAR_EQM
Format: CLEAR_EQM
Description: CLEAR_EQM clears the entire contents of the historical warnings and
errors of the instrument. EQM is an abbreviation for Error Queue Manager.
6.4.2.16
SHIP_CLEAR
Format: SHIP_CLEAR
Description: SHIP_CLEAR prepares the instrument for shipment by clearing the Error
Queue Manager (EQM) and the Card Test DataBase (CTDB).
6.4.2.17
TELL_ERROR
Format: TELL_ERROR (detail code)
Description: TELL_ERROR displays information about the given error code. The
instrument error code is displayed in the following manner: (user code) : (sub-system)
. (component) . (detail code). Only type the detail code after the TELL_ERROR
command. For more information about Compact error codes, refer to Chapter 8,
Instrument Error Codes and Appendix F, User Diagnostics.
6.4.2.18
DUMP_COMPSTAT
Format: DUMP_COMPSTAT
Description: DUMP_COMPSTAT displays any section/component in an error state
along with a description of the error.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-35
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
Troubleshooting
Example:
Figure 6-30: DUMP_COMPSTAT Example Output
6.4.2.19
DUMP_STATS
Format: DUMP_STATS <component name>
Description: DUMP_STATS displays the burn-in and normal statistics for the given
component. The following example includes a list of all the instrument component
names used with this command. These names can be shortened and are not
case-sensitive.
Example:
Figure 6-31: Listing of DUMP_STAT Component Names
6-36
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
Figure 6-32: DUMP_STAT Example Output (Using Carousel)
6.4.2.20
CLEAR_COMP_STATS
Format: CLEAR_COMP_STATS <component name or ALL>
Description: CLEAR_COMP_STATS clears the components statistics for the given
component or for ALL components. Use this command when the corresponding
component is replaced.
6.4.2.21
DUMP_ALL
Format: DUMP_ALL
Description: DUMP_ALL calls a string of commands that could assist with instrument
troubleshooting. Because of its size, it is best to enable a screen capture prior to
executing this command.
6.4.2.22
NODE_STATUS
Format: NODE_STATUS
Description: NODE_STATUS displays all SPN Board node numbers, functions, and
status.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-37
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
Troubleshooting
Example:
Figure 6-33: NODE_STATUS Example Output
• # (number): Indicates all of the possible jumper configurations of the SPN boards.
Only 2, 3, 6, and 8 are used on VITEK® 2 Compact.
• Node: Indicates the SPN board function.
• Status: Indicates if the SPN board is present (detected) or disabled (not
detected).
• Seq Out: Indicates the communication packet sent from BCB to SPN
(development purposes).
• Seq In: Indicates the communication packet sent from SPN to BCB (development
purposes).
• Zero’s: Indicates the number of times the SPN board has reset since the last
boot. Under normal operating conditions, the SPN board should NOT reset. If the
SPN board does reset, the instrument emergency stops and card processing
discontinues.
• Pkts Out: Indicates the total communication packets sent from BCB to SPN since
power up (development purposes).
• Pkts In: Indicates the total communication packets sent from SPN to BCB since
power up (development purposes).
6.4.2.23
CLEAR_PM_STATS
Format: CLEAR_PM_STATS <component name or ALL>
Description: CLEAR_PM_STATS clears the Preventive Maintenance statistics for the
given component or for ALL components. This command should be used when
preventive maintenance is performed on a corresponding component(s).
6-38
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
6.4.2.24
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
SET_PM_DATE
Format: SET_PM_DATE (year:YYYY) (month:MM) (day:DD)
Description: SET_PM_DATE sets the date of the last preventive maintenance
operation in non-volatile memory. This date can be reviewed from the Instrument User
Interface main menu by selecting Diagnostics > Last Maintenance Date.
Example: SET_PM_DATE 2004 01 01
6.4.2.25
GET_SYS_LANG
Format: GET_SYS_LANG
Description: GET_SYS_LANG prints the current system language.
6.4.2.26
SET_SYS_LANG
Format: SET_SYS_LANG <language>
Description: SET_SYS_LANG sets the instrument language. The system’s language
should always be set from the host PC. This command is only used for demonstration
purposes when the instrument is not connected to a host PC.
Example: SET_SYS_LANG 4
• 0 = ENGLISH
• 1 = SPANISH
• 2 = GERMAN
• 3 = ITALIAN
• 4 = FRENCH
• 5 = PORTUGUESE
• 6 = JAPANESE
• 7 = RUSSIAN
6.4.2.27
SPN_SENSORS
Format: SPN_SENSORS
Description: SPN_SENSORS shows the current state of all SPN Sensors. This can be
used to diagnose Optical Switch Sensors. An alternative to this command is
accessing the User Interface hidden menu, as described in Section 6.5, User
Interface Hidden Menu Access, and selecting Sensor States.
6.4.2.28
JUMPER
Format: JUMPER
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-39
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
Troubleshooting
Description: JUMPER displays the configuration for HDR8 on the Bay Controller
Board. The asterisk in the far right column indicates if a jumper is installed for that
specific location. Table 6-2 shows the HDR8 jumper configuration for each type of
VITEK® 2 Compact instrument.
Table 6-2: Bay Controller Board HDR8 Jumper Configurations
6.4.2.29
Instrument Type
HDR8 Installed Jumpers
VITEK® 2 Compact 15
1–2
3–4
11 – 12
VITEK® 2 Compact 30
1–2
3–4
VITEK® 2 Compact 60
1–2
3–4
WELLMAPS
Format: WELLMAPS
Description: WELLMAPS lists all cards that the instrument knows how to process.
When the instrument leaves manufacturing, it has a limited knowledge of specific card
wellmaps. These include specialty wellmaps, engineering card wellmaps, and
identification card wellmaps. The operator is instructed to enter new AST cards at the
host PC (Maintain AST Card Definition) before trying to process them. Once entered
at the host PC, the new wellmap definition is sent to the instrument. That card type
remains in non-volatile memory and should not need to be entered again. The host
PC’s wellmap definitions update if the BCB is replaced, upon instrument power-up, or
if the instrument reboots.
If the operator tries to process a card that is not listed in WELLMAPS, it returns the
cassette back to the Load/Unload Station. An error occurs and the instrument
automatically rejects the cards (i.e. terminates). The cassette must be removed and
the cards must be discarded. The appropriate AST Card Definition should be entered
at the host PC before proceeding.
Example:
Figure 6-34: WELLMAPS Output Example
6-40
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
Card Type – The numeric card type.
Incu Time – The maximum incubator time the card reads before it ejects.
Class – I for identification, S for susceptibility, O for neither.
Group – N for gram-negative, P for gram-positive, O for neither.
Flex – T if the card was entered through the software Flex Panel and F if not.
Well Map Definition – Which optic reads the referenced well.
• 0 = well is not read
• 1 = well read by Transmittance 1
• 2 = well read by Transmittance 2
• 3 = well read by both Transmittance 1 and 2
• 4 = well read by Transmittance 3
• 5 = well read by both Transmittance 1 and 3
• 6 = well read by both Transmittance 2 and 3
• 7 = well read by Transmittance 1, 2 and 3
Name – Indicates the 64-well card name.
6.4.3
Cabinet Commands
6.4.3.1
SHOW_CAB_TEMP_INFO
Format: SHOW_CAB_TEMP_INFO
Description: SHOW_CAB_TEMP_INFO reads the tachometer outputs of the intake
and exhaust cabinet fans. If the fan is running at 40% or greater, the message “fan
speed is within its range” displays. If the fan is running at a duty cycle of less than
40%, the message “XXX fan speed below duty cycle threshold –not tested”
displays.
To properly test the fans, use the SET_CAB_FAN_SPEED and set the duty to 100
and the time to 255. The fans turn on. Then type SHOW_CAB_TEMP_INFO.
Example:
Figure 6-35: SHOW_CAB_TEMP_INFO Output Example
(fans running greater than or equal to 40%)
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-41
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
Troubleshooting
Figure 6-36: SHOW_CAB_TEMP_INFO Output Example
(fans running less than or equal to 40%)
6.4.3.2
SET_CAB_FAN_SPEED
Format: SET_CAB_FAN_SPEED (duty cycle<0 – 100>) (period<0 – 255>)
Description: SET_CAB_FAN_SPEED sets the duty cycle (%) and the run time (in ms)
of the cabinet fans. After the given time has expired, the firmware monitors/cycles the
fans.
Example: SET_CAB_FAN_SPEED 50 25
Alias Macro: FAN
6.4.3.3
GUI_ALERTS_DEFAULT
Format: GUI_ALERTS_DEFAULT
Description: GUI_ALERTS_DEFAULT immediately changes the User Interface
contrast as well as the Visual and Audible Alarm settings to a default configuration.
6.4.3.4
DEC_SCREEN_CONTRAST
Format: DEC_SCREEN_CONTRAST
Description: DEC_SCREEN_CONTRAST decrements the Screen Contrast. This
lightens each pixel of the LCD display. This can be performed from the User Interface
Main Menu by selecting Configuration > Display Options > LCD Screen Contrast.
6.4.3.5
INC_SCREEN_CONTRAST
Format: INC_SCREEN_CONTRAST
Description: INC_SCREEN_CONTRAST increments the Screen Contrast. This
darkens each pixel of the LCD display. This can also be performed from the User
Interface Main Menu by selecting Configuration > Display Options > LCD Screen
Contrast.
6-42
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
6.4.4
Vacuum/Filler Commands
6.4.4.1
FILLER_STATUS
Format: FILLER_STATUS
Description: FILLER_STATUS displays the current status of the Filling Module. This
includes ambient PSIA.
Example:
Figure 6-37: Filler Status Output Example
6.4.4.2
DUMP_FILLER
Format: DUMP_FILLER
Description: DUMP_FILLER displays information from the last vacuum cycle. The
numbers displayed are readings from the Pressure Transducer and are used in a
calculation based on the setting given when performing CAL_VAC. Therefore, all of
the readings are relative, with the exception of the down and up slope.
Note:
An instrument power cycle will clear the dump_filler information. If the last
vacuum cycle was aborted, all of the dump_filler information may not be
displayed.
Example:
Figure 6-38: DUMP_FILLER Output Example
• Start Pressure:
This is the ambient pressure read by the pressure transducer before the start of
the vacuum cycle. This value must be between 9.0 and 17.0. This value is not
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-43
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
Troubleshooting
calibrated. Because the pressure transducer is only used for relative
measurements (the up and down slopes), and the set point (0.89 PSIA) is set by
raw counts off the transducer, this lack of calibration does not affect instrument
function.
• Start Hold Pressure (PSI): and End (PSI):
These are the start and end pressures read by the pressure transducer at the
beginning and end of the five second dwell in the vacuum cycle. If these numbers
differ by more than 0.1 PSI, a leak test should be performed. As with the Start PSI,
this value is not calibrated and may not reflect the true 0.89 PSIA set point.
• End PSI:
This is the pressure read by the pressure transducer after the completion of the
vacuum cycle.
• Down Time (sec): and Up Time (sec):
This is the amount of time the vacuum down and up cycles took. This number is
used to calculate the down and up slopes.
• Prop valve target point:
This is the A/D count value sent to the proportional valve on the start of the up
slope, when the pressure started to change. This is approximately the dead band
of the proportional valve.
• Down slope (PSI/sec):
The firmware calculates the down slope by dividing the difference between the
Start and Hold Start PSI by the Down Time. The acceptable pump-down rate
(down slope) is 0.30 to 0.60 PSI/second. Using Figure 6-38, DUMP_FILLER
Output Example this would be as follows:
14.2
– 0.7 PSI- = 0.44 PSI/Sec
--------------------------------30.9 sec
Up slope (PSI/sec): – The firmware calculates the up slope by dividing the
difference between the end and hold end PSI by the up time. The acceptable
return rate (up slope) is 0.35 to 0.60 PSI/second. Using Figure 6-38,
DUMP_FILLER Output Example this would be as follows:
14.0
– 0.7 PSI- = 0.45 PSI/sec
--------------------------------29.6 sec
6.4.4.3
INIT_VAC (Alignment mode only)
Format: INIT_VAC
Description: INIT_VAC initializes the Vacuum. If the cycle is completed without errors,
the message Success displays. INIT_VAC includes checking ambient pressure using
the Vacuum Pressure Transducer and verifying that it is within range.
6-44
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
6.4.4.4
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
CYCLE_VAC (Alignment mode only)
Format: CYCLE_VAC
Description: CYCLE_VAC cycles the Vacuum System using SPN. If the cycle is
completed without errors, the message Success displays. Refer to Section 4.1.4,
Filler Status for the filler station pneumatic process.
6.4.4.5
CYCLE_FILLER
Format: CYCLE_FILLER
Description: Performs a vacuum filling cycle using the BCB. When complete the
message success or failure displays.
6.4.4.6
FILLER_LEAK_TEST (Alignment mode only)
Format: FILLER_LEAK_TEST
Description: FILLER_LEAK_TEST tests the Filler for leaks. The firmware starts the
Vacuum Pump, pulls down to the calibrated PSIA value, holds for 30 seconds, and
then returns to ambient pressure. Confirm that no errors occur. Refer to
Section 6.6.14.4, Leak Test Procedure or the VITEK® 2 Compact Alignment
Procedure (Drawing 532600) for more information.
Example Output:
• Success: NO leak was detected during the fill cycle – Message should appear
at the terminal.
• Error: leak was detected during the fill cycle – There was a loss greater than
or equal to 0.06 PSIA during the hold time.
• Warning: Unexpected failure during the leak test – The vacuum system failed
for a reason described after the warning.
6.4.4.7
DIAG_FILLER (Alignment mode only)
Format: DIAG_FILLER (prop value 0 – 255) (pump 0 – 1) (valve 0 – 1)
Description: DIAG_FILLER allows for full control of vacuum system hardware for
diagnostics purposes. Always connect a pressure gauge in-line with the vacuum
system and monitor the pull-down. Do not let the Filler pull down past 0.89 PSIA.
Example: DIAG_FILLER 010
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-45
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
6.4.5
Transport Commands
6.4.5.1
INIT_TRANS (Alignment mode only)
Troubleshooting
Format: INIT_TRANS
Description: INIT_TRANS initializes the transport so that the Transport Block travels
to the back of the instrument and references the Transport Home Reflective Sensor.
6.4.5.2
TEST_TRANSPORT (Alignment mode only)
Format: TEST_TRANSPORT
Description: TEST_TRANSPORT performs a self-test of the Transport System. This
test requires a cassette to be installed at the Load/Unload Station, prior to executing
the TEST_TRANSPORT command. After the command is executed, the cassette is
detected by the Cassette Reflective Sensor. It then moves the cassette to the back of
the instrument, initializes to the Transport Home Reflective Sensor, and returns to the
Load/Unload Door. The Encoder Board is not being used for this command. To test
the Encoder Board, either use the SPN_SENSORS command or the
TRANS_TO_BAR_CODE 0 1 and TRANS_TO_SEALER 1 commands.
6.4.5.3
TRANS_TO_DOOR (Alignment mode only)
Format: TRANS_TO_DOOR <0=no stall detection> or <1=stall detection>
Description: TRANS_TO_DOOR moves the Transport Block to the Load/Unload
Station.
Example: TRANS_TO_DOOR 1
• TRANS_TO_DOOR 0 – Does not monitor the status of the Cassette Encoder
Board. It does not require a cassette to be loaded on the Transport Block.
• TRANS_TO DOOR 1 – Monitors the status of the Cassette Encoder Board. It
requires a cassette to be loaded on the Transport Block.
6.4.5.4
TRANS_TO_BAR_CODE (Alignment mode only)
Format: TRANS_TO_BAR_CODE (last card 0 – 9) (next card 1 –10)
Description: TRANS_TO_BAR_CODE moves a cassette to the specified cassette
card slot position, such that it is lined up with the Bar Code Scanner. It requires the
cassette to be loaded on the Transport Block. It only moves the cassette in toward the
Home Reflective Sensor. You must specify the Last Card slot number and the Next
Card slot number.
Last Card is defined as the previous cassette card slot which was positioned to be
read by the Bar Code Scanner. Next Card is defined as the following card slot position
to be read by the bar code scanner.
6-46
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
• TRANS_TO_BAR_CODE moves the cassette to the bar code read location and
displays a Success message at the terminal.
• If the message Error [0X31] Motor stalled occurs, there is a problem with the
transport mechanical components, the motor, or the front or back Transport
Sensor on the Cassette Encoder Board.
Example: TRANS_TO_BAR_CODE 3 4 (cassette moves from card position 3 to card
position 4 of the Bar Code Scanner). TRANS_TO_BAR_CODE 0 3 (cassette moves
from Load Door to card position 3 of the Bar Code Scanner).
6.4.5.5
TRANS_TO_LOADER (Alignment mode only)
Format: TRANS_TO_LOADER (last card 0 – 9) (next card 1 – 10)
Description: TRANS_TO_LOADER moves a cassette to the specified cassette card
slot position, such that it is lined up with the Autoloader. It requires the cassette to be
loaded on the Transport Block. It only moves the cassette in toward the Home
Reflective Sensor. You must specify the Last Card slot number and the Next Card slot
number.
Last Card is defined as the previous cassette card slot that was positioned to be
loaded into the carousel by the autoloader. Next Card is defined as the following card
slot position to be loaded in the carousel.
For example: If you want the cassette to move such that cassette card slot 3 is lined
up with the autoloader, and the cassette had not previously been positioned, the
proper syntax of the command is “trans_to_loader 0 3”.
Example: TRANS_TO_LOADER 3 4 (cassette moves from card position 3 to card
position 4 in front of the autoloader). TRANS_TO_LOADER 0 3 (cassette moves from
load door to card position 2 in front of the autoloader).
6.4.5.6
TRANS_TO_SEALER (Alignment mode only)
Format: TRANS_TO_SEALER
Description: TRANS_TO_SEALER moves the cassette behind the Sealer. Then it
slowly moves the cassette past the Sealer toward the Load/Unload Door. This
command requires the cassette to be loaded on the transport block. It only moves the
cassette out toward the Load/Unload Door.
Example Output:
• Success – This command should move the cassette to the beginning of the card
sealer location, step slowly back to the load station, and display a Success
message at the terminal.
• Error [0X31] Motor stalled – There is most likely a problem with the transport
mechanical components, the Motor or the front Transport Sensor on the Cassette
Encoder Board.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-47
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
Troubleshooting
• Error [0x32] Position was lost – There is most likely a problem with the middle
Transport Sensor on the Cassette Encoder Board.
6.4.5.7
TRANS_TO_CASS (Alignment mode only)
Format: TRANS_TO_CASS
Description: TRANS_TO_CASS moves the cassette such that the cassette bar code
ID lines up with the Bar Code Scanner. It requires the cassette to be loaded on the
Transport Block. It only moves the cassette in toward the Home Reflective Sensor.
6.4.5.8
DUMP_CO
Format: DUMP_CO (0 – 1 cassette object)
Description: When a cassette is processing through the transport, this command
displays the cassette contents and other cassette specific information. If DUMP_CO 0
does not display cassette contents, use the command DUMP_CO 1. The arguments 0
and 1 reference two different memory locations in NV Ram, and are not consistent.
Example:
Figure 6-39: DUMP_CO 0 Output Example
6.4.5.9
DUMP_VCD
Format: DUMP_VCD (1 – 9 Cassette ID)
Description: DUMP_VCD can be used when a cassette was previously scanned at the
host PC and is processing through the transport. It displays the cassette’s contents
and other cassette-specific information.
Example: DUMP_VCD 8
6-48
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
6.4.6
Bar Code Commands
6.4.6.1
TRIGGER_BARCODE
Format: TRIGGER_BARCODE (timeout in seconds)
Description: TRIGGER_BARCODE turns the Bar Code Scanner beam on and reads a
bar code for the number of seconds included in the argument.
• If the bar code read is successful, the value prints on the DML screen.
• If the bar code read fails, a Failed message displays.
Example: TRIGGER_BARCODE 5
6.4.7
Sealer Commands
6.4.7.1
INIT_SEALER (Alignment mode only)
Format: INIT_SEALER
Description: INIT_SEALER initializes the Sealer. If the cycle is completed without
errors, the message Success displays.
Alias Macro: seal_init
6.4.7.2
EXTEND_SEALER (Alignment mode only)
Format: EXTEND_SEALER
Description: EXTEND_SEALER moves the Sealer Motor until the Sealer Wire is
extended to its aligned position. The Sealer heating element is not turned on.
6.4.7.3
RETRACT_SEALER (Alignment mode only)
Format: RETRACT_SEALER
Description: RETRACT_SEALER retracts the Sealer Motor so the Sealer Wire is
contained inside the Sealer Housing. Use this command with the command
EXTEND_SEALER.
6.4.7.4
SEALER_ON (Alignment mode only)
Format: SEALER_ON
Description: SEALER_ON moves the Sealer Motor until the Sealer Wire is extended
to its aligned position and turns the Sealer heating element ON.
Alias Macro: seal_on
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-49
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
6.4.7.5
Troubleshooting
SEALER_OFF (Alignment mode only)
Format: SEALER_OFF
Description: SEALER_OFF retracts the Sealer Motor so the Sealer Wire is contained
inside the Sealer Housing and turns off the Sealer heating element. This command is
to be used with the command SEALER_ON.
Alias Macro: seal_off
6.4.7.6
TEST_SEALER (Alignment mode only)
Format: TEST_SEALER
Description: TEST_SEALER turns the sealer element on momentarily and displays
the current and voltage. Normal current should be between 7.6 A and 9.6 A.
Example:
Figure 6-40: TEST_SEALER Output Example
6.4.8
Autoloader Commands
6.4.8.1
INIT_AL (Alignment mode only)
Format: INIT_AL
Description: INIT_AL initializes the Autoloader Motor to the Autoloader Home Sensor.
If the cycle completes without errors, the message Success displays.
Alias Macro: al_init
6.4.8.2
CYCLE_AL (Alignment mode only)
Format: CYCLE_AL
Description: CYCLE_AL performs an Autoloader cycle.
Alias Macro: al_cycle
6-50
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
6.4.9
Incubator/Carousel Commands
6.4.9.1
INCUBATOR_STATUS
Format: INCUBATOR_STATUS
Description: INCUBATOR_STATUS displays the status of the incubator. This is
real-time information about the Incubator. The temperature accessed through the
User Interface does not show this value, but instead is a three-minute average.
Example:
Figure 6-41: INCUBATOR_STATUS
• Card – A calculated card temperature referencing the actual reading (there is no
thermistor for this value). The Incubator maintains card temperature at
35.5 °C ±1 °C.
• Actual – The real-time temperature of the Thermistor located inside the incubator,
behind the air table.
• Heater – The temperature reading from the Thermistor located next to the Heater.
• State – The state of the Incubator. (1 is warming; 2 is stable) Anything other than
1 or 2 signifies the heater is not functioning properly.
• Heater Drive – The percentage of output for the Heater located inside the
Carousel Incubator.
Alias Macro: incu_stat
6.4.9.2
INIT_CARO (Alignment mode only)
Format: INIT_CARO
Description: INIT_CARO initializes the carousel by referencing the Incubator Home
Sensor and positioning the Carousel slot 0 in line with the Reader. If the cycle is
completed without errors, a Success message displays.
6.4.9.3
HOME_CARO (Alignment mode only)
Format: HOME_CARO
Description: HOME_CARO homes the Carousel without looking for the presence of
the Quadrousels.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-51
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
6.4.9.4
Troubleshooting
SHOW_INCU_TEMP_INFO
Format: SHOW_INCU_TEMP_INFO
Description: SHOW_INCU_TEMP_INFO reads the current Incubator card
temperature, the tachometer outputs of the Incubator Fan, and the tachometer
outputs of the Heater Fan.
Example:
Figure 6-42: SHOW_INCU_TEMP_INFO Output Example
6.4.9.5
INIT_HEATER
Format: INIT_HEATER
Description: INIT_HEATER initializes the Incubator Heater.
6.4.9.6
DUMP_CM
Format: DUMP_CM <0 or 1>
Description: DUMP_CM displays the contents of the Carousel Map. DUMP_CM 0 only
shows the active Carousel slots. DUMP_CM 1 shows the status of all 60 Carousel
slots. If the instrument is configured to have a 30-card capacity, every other slot is
available for a test card and the remaining are always marked as reserved. If the
instrument is configured to have a 15-card capacity, every fourth slot is available for a
test card and the remaining are always marked as reserved.
Example:
Figure 6-43: DUMP_CM 0
• Available slots – Indicates how many slots are available in the Carousel.
6-52
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
• Slot – Indicates the slot position that the cards occupy in the Carousel. The slot
position with a –> indicates the current read position (such as position –>12
above).
• State – There are eight states:
• Empty – The slot is unoccupied and available for loading.
• Processing – This is the normal state where the slot is occupied and the
card is scheduled for readings.
• Completed – The slot is occupied and the card is ready for disposal. No
more readings are taken.
• Reading – The card is currently being read by the Transmittance Optics in
the Reader Head.
• Ejecting – The card is currently in the Reader Head moving towards the
Waste Bin.
• Loading – The slot is currently being loaded with a card.
• Terminated – The instrument is unsure of whether the slot is filled so it
remains unused. No reading, loading, or disposal occurs.
• Reserved – The slot is not used because the instrument is set up to read a
maximum of 15 or 30 cards, instead of a maximum of 60 cards.
• Bar Code – Indicates the Bar Code Number for the card in that slot position.
• Elapsed Time – Indicates the amount of time the card in that slot position has
been processing.
• Read Count – Indicates the number of attempted reads already performed on the
card in that slot position. If the transmittance is non-functional, this counter
continues to increment.
• Last Read – Indicates how long it has been since the last attempted read of the
card in that slot position.
• Reason – Indicates the reason for the state condition.
Alias Macro: caramap
6.4.9.7
CARO_STATUS
Format: CARO_STATUS
Description: CARO_STATUS shows several status conditions of the carousel and
waste container as well as several carousel counter mechanisms. See the following
for descriptions.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-53
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
Troubleshooting
Example:
Figure 6-44: CARO_STATUS
• Carousel State: The state of the instrument. This includes: uninitialized, idle,
loading, processing, carousel cleaning, and paused.
• Current Upper Slot: The carousel slot located in front of the Reader.
• Current Lower Slot: The carousel slot located in front of the Autoloader.
• Read Mode: This is the Carousel’s Read Mode. Under normal operation, the
status displayed is either normal or first read. If the carousel was placed in fast
read via a DML command, the status displays fast mode. If the time between
card reads was altered via a DML command, then the status displays short
cycle. If it is both in fast read and short cycle, the status fast mode and short
cycle display.
• Cards in Caro?: Indicates if there are any cards in the Carousel.
• SI Available Slots: The number of slots available for loading cards into the
Carousel (also displayed on the User Interface Status screen). This quantity
includes the number of cards being processed in the Carousel and Transport.
• CM Available Slots: The number of cards being processed in the Carousel.
• Capacity Key: The total capacity of the instrument based on if the Hardware Key
or 15-card capacity jumper is installed. (15 = no Hardware Key installed, but
15-card capacity jumper is installed; 30 = no Hardware Key installed; 60 =
Hardware Key installed)
• Instrument State: The status displayed on the instrument User Interface screen.
The status can be: OK, Warming, Error, or Maintenance.
• User Access Door: Indicates if the Front and/or Top User Access Door is open
or closed.
• Carousel Cover: Indicates if the Carousel/Incubator Cover is on or off.
6-54
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
• Waste Door: Indicates if the Waste Container Door is open or closed.
• Waste Container: Indicates if the Waste Container is present (installed) or
absent.
• Waste Clogged: Indicates if the Waste Container Chute is blocked.
• Waste Count: Indicates the number of cards in the Waste Container.
• Quad Count: Indicates how many Quadrousels are installed.
• Time Since Load: The time since the last card was loaded in the Carousel. Cards
need to be read within five minutes of loading.
• Time Since Fill: Indicates the time since the last cassette was filled. Cards need
to be read within 30 minutes of filling.
6.4.9.8
PAUSE_CARO
Format: PAUSE_CARO
Description: PAUSE_CARO stops the Carousel processing. Cards are not read.
Alias Macro: seq_pause
6.4.9.9
RESUME_CARO
Format: RESUME_CARO
Description: RESUME_CARO restarts the Carousel processing, if currently in a
paused condition. Cards begin to be read.
Alias Macro: seq_resume
6.4.9.10
CLEAR_CARO_SLOT
Format: CLEAR_CARO_SLOT <slot 0 – 59>
Description: CLEAR_CARO_SLOT changes the status of the card in a specified slot
location to Empty. If a card physically exists in the specified Carousel position, it is
necessary to use the CARO command to gain access to the card and then remove it
by hand.
Example: CLEAR_CARO_SLOT 44
6.4.9.11
CLEAR_CARO
Format: CLEAR_CARO
Description: CLEAR_CARO changes the status of ALL cards in the carousel to
Empty. If a card physically exists in any position of the Carousel, it is necessary to
use the CARO command to gain access to the card and remove it by hand. (Two
other options are: putting the instrument in Alignment mode and using the
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-55
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
Troubleshooting
CARO_QUAD command or performing a Carousel Cleaning (see Section E.3.2,
Cleaning the Carousel).
Alias Macro: zeroslots
6.4.9.12
LOAD
Format: LOAD <#cards> <card type>
Description: LOAD loads cards into the Carousel by means of the Reader Head.
When loading a card into the front of the Reader, the card must be oriented properly.
The interrupt holes of the card must be toward the bottom of the instrument and the
remaining transfer tube must be to the left of the Reader. The LOAD command also
requires some additional information. It needs to know how many cards are being
loaded and the card type. (See WELLMAPS for the card type.) This command can be
used in conjunction with UNLOAD or UNLOAD_CARD.
Example: LOAD 3 9
6.4.9.13
UNLOAD_CARD
Format: UNLOAD_CARD <slot>
Description: UNLOAD_CARD changes the status of the card in a specified card slot
to Completed. With a status of Completed, the card is ejected the next time that card
slot is aligned with the Reader.
Example: UNLOAD_CARD 29
6.4.9.14
UNLOAD
Format: UNLOAD
Description: UNLOAD changes the status of all the cards in the carousel to
Completed. With a status of Completed, all cards eject the next time that the card
slot is aligned with the Reader.
6.4.9.15
CARO
Format: CARO <slot>
Description: CARO rotates the Carousel to the reader position, as indicated in the
command, referencing the Incubator Top Sensor. The Carousel slot positions are
numbered 0 to 59. This command can be used in conjunction with the
UNLOAD_CARD command.
Example: CARO 29
6-56
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
6.4.9.16
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
CT (Alignment mode only)
Format: CT <slot>
Description: CT rotates the Carousel to the Reader position, as indicated in the
command, referencing the Incubator Top Sensor (used in Alignment mode). The
carousel slot positions are numbered 0 to 59. This command can be used in
conjunction with the UNLOAD_CARD command.
Example: CT 30
6.4.9.17
CARO_BOTTOM
Format: CARO_BOTTOM <slot>
Description: CARO_BOTTOM rotates the Carousel to the Autoloader position, as
indicated in the command, referencing the Incubator Bottom Sensor. The Carousel
slot positions are numbered 0 to 59.
Example: CARO_BOTTOM 29
6.4.9.18
CB (Alignment mode only)
Format: CB <slot>
Description: CB rotates the Carousel to the Autoloader position, as indicated in the
command, referencing the Incubator Bottom Sensor (used in Alignment mode). The
Carousel slot positions are numbered 0 to 59.
Example: CB 13
6.4.9.19
CARO_QUAD
Format: CARO_QUAD <quad #>
Description: CARO_QUAD specifies the Quadrousel designator of 0, 1, 2, or 3 and
rotates the corresponding Quadrousel to the Incubator Access Cover.
Example: CARO_QUAD 1
6.4.9.20
CHECK_CARO_SLOP (Alignment mode only)
Format: CHECK_CARO_SLOP
Description: CHECK_CARO_SLOP checks and displays backlash in the Carousel
Assembly.
Alias Macro: caro_slop
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-57
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
6.4.9.21
Troubleshooting
INIT_EJECTOR (Alignment mode only)
Format: INIT_EJECTOR
Description: INIT_EJECTOR initializes the Ejector to its Ejector Home Sensor by
cycling the Ejector Motor. If the cycle is completed without errors, a message
Success displays.
Alias Macro: ejector_init
6.4.9.22
CYCLE_EJECTOR (Alignment mode only)
Format: CYCLE_EJECTOR
Description: CYCLE_EJECTOR performs an ejector cycle. If the cycle is completed
without errors, a message Success displays.
Alias Macro: ejector_cycle
6.4.10
Reader/Transmittance/CAM Commands
6.4.10.1
CAL_TX
Format: CAL_TX <module: 1 – 3>
Description: CAL_TX calibrates, checks, and returns a status of the Transmittance
Optics. It is necessary to enter the Optics number after this command. For example,
CAL_TX 1 for Transmittance Optics 1 (TX1) or CAL_TX 3 for Transmittance Optics 3
(TX3).
Example:
Figure 6-45: CAL_TX 1 Output Example
Alias Macro: calwave
6-58
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
6.4.10.2
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
CHECK_CAL_TX
Format: CHECK_CAL_TX <module: 1 – 3>
Description: CHECK_CAL_TX checks the calibration of the Transmittance Optics and
returns a status. It is necessary to enter the Optics number after this command. This
command is used only as a check. To confirm proper functionality of the
Transmittance Optics, use the CAL_TX command.
Example: CHECK_CAL_TX 3 (for Transmittance Optics 3 [TX3])
Alias Macro: valwave
6.4.10.3
SCAN_TX_SENSORS (Alignment mode only)
Format: SCAN_TX_SENSORS <0 – 1>
Description: SCAN_TX_SENSORS tests the Transmittance Optical Position Sensors.
• The command SCAN_TX_SENSORS 0 turns optical interrupts of all of the
installed Transmittance Optics ON.
• The command SCAN_TX_SENSORS 1 cycles optical interrupts of all of the
installed Transmittance Optics OFF (1) and ON (0).
Example:
Figure 6-46: SCAN_TX_SENSORS 0 Output Example
Figure 6-47: SCAN_TX_SENSORS 1 Output Example
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-59
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
6.4.10.4
Troubleshooting
READ_TX
Format: Read_TX <module: 1 – 3>
Description: READ_TX reads the Transmittance Optics. It is necessary to enter the
Optics number after the command. For example, READ_TX 1 reads the
Transmittance Optic 1 or READ_TX 3 reads the Transmittance Optic 3.
Example:
Figure 6-48: READ_TX 1 Output Example
Alias Macro: readwave
6.4.10.5
BURN_TX_SENSORS (Alignment mode only)
Format: BURN_TX_SENSORS <Module ID: 1 – 3> <# cycles><0 – 1: stopOnError>
Description: BURN_TX_SENSORS rapidly turns the Optical Interrupt Sensor of the
specified Transmittance Optics ON and OFF. This simulates Optical Interrupt Sensor
functionality when cards are read. The command can be set to stopOnError so if the
illumination of the Optical Interrupt Sensor is not detected, the burn_tx_sensors
routine stops, and an error is noted.
Example: BURN_TX_SENSORS 1 100 1 (Cycles the Optical Interrupt Sensors of
transmittance 1 100 times. It stops if an error is detected and issues a response.)
Alias Macro: opt_int_burn
6.4.10.6
TEST_BELT
Format: TEST_BELT
Description: TEST_BELT tests the Read Head Belt by looking for noisy Transmittance
Optical Interrupt Position Sensors or excessive Belt frays.
6.4.10.7
INIT_CAM (Alignment mode only)
Format: INIT_CAM
Description: INIT_CAM initializes the Cam to its Ejector Home Sensor by cycling the
Cam Motor. If the cycle completes without errors, a message Success displays.
Alias Macro: cam_init
6-60
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
6.4.10.8
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
CYCLE_CAM (Alignment mode only)
Format: CYCLE_CAM
Description: CYCLE_CAM performs a Cam cycle. If the cycle completes without
errors, a message Success displays.
Alias Macro: cam_cycle
6.4.11
UPS Commands
6.4.11.1
UPS_STATUS
Format: UPS_STATUS
Description: UPS_STATUS displays the UPS Power and Battery status.
Note:
If no UPS is connected, the Power and Battery status displays as OK.
Example:
Figure 6-49: UPS_STATUS Output Example
6.4.11.2
CHECK_UPS_BATTERY
Format: CHECK_UPS_BATTERY
Description: CHECK_UPS_BATTERY checks the state of the UPS Battery Signal. If
the UPS is installed, but the battery is low, the instrument user interface displays the
following icon:
6.4.11.3
CHECK_UPS_POWER
Format: CHECK_UPS_POWER
Description: CHECK_UPS_POWER checks the state of the UPS Power Signal. If the
UPS is installed, but there is no power to the UPS, the instrument User Interface
displays the following icon:
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-61
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
Troubleshooting
6.4.12
Host Communication
6.4.12.1
COM_STATUS
Format: COM_STATUS
Description: COM_STATUS displays the communications status of sent/received
commands.
Note:
CTDB_STATUS displays the status of unsent commands.
Example:
Figure 6-50: COM_STATUS Output Example
6.4.12.2
CTDB_STATUS
Format: CTDB_STATUS
Description: CTDB_STATUS displays Card Test DataBase status information about
the Logical Data Manager (LDM). This includes the status of Raw Data
Retransmission from the instrument to the Host (rexmit status), Critical Data Record
Counters (see following table), as well as the total Sent and Unsent Message status to
the Host.
During normal operation, the CTDB tracks the number of unsent messages that are
stored in the database and have not been sent to the Host PC. This occurs when host
communication is down and cards are processing. When host communications is
restored, the CTDB reads the unsent data records and forwards them to the host PC.
The data records are sent in a first-in-first-out fashion, even while new data is
currently being collected. This process repeats until all of the unsent data transmits.
Table 6-3: Critical Data Description
Critical
Data
6-62
Description
CD
MsgCardData: 1 data reading collected while processing a card.
CE
MsgCardEjected: Indicates that a card was ejected from the system.
CI
MsgCardInfo: Indicates that a card has been successfully loaded into the
Transport System.
CIE
MsgCardInfoEnd: Indicates that the last MsgCardInfo Message has been sent
for a particular cassette.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
Table 6-3: Critical Data Description (Continued)
Critical
Data
Description
CL
MsgCardLoad: Indicates that a card has been successfully loaded into the
Carousel.
CLF
MsgCardLoadFailed: Indicates that a card for which a MsgCardInfo message
was sent failed to be loaded into the Carousel.
CR
MsgCardRejected: Indicates that a card was received by the instrument but will
not be processed. This is sent in place of a MsgCardInfo message for that card.
E
MsgFillerEvent: Conveys the success or failure of a fill cycle to the host.
TA
MsgTransferAborted: Sent when the user aborts the processing of a filled
cassette.
TT
MsgTransferTimeout: Sent when a filled cassette has not been loaded within the
allowed time window.
Example:
Figure 6-51: CTDB_STATUS Output Example
6.4.12.3
DUART_STATUS
Format: DUART_STATUS A
Description: DUART_STATUS A displays the status information for DUART A. This is
used to identify if there are communication frames or parity errors.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-63
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
Troubleshooting
6.4.13
Flash Log Commands
6.4.13.1
LOGS
Format: LOGS
Description: LOGS displays the entire contents of the Flash Log contained in the
Flash Memory of the Bay Controller Board, starting from the earliest logged messages
to the most recent. When this command is executed, the earliest logged messages
scroll to fill the screen, then a prompt displays at the bottom of the screen giving the
following display type options:
Press any key to continue (ESC or 'Q' to quit, 'G' to never pause)...
Alias Macro: flash_logs
6.4.13.2
LOGS_AND_HISTORY
Format: LOGS_AND_HISTORY
Description: LOGS_AND_HISTORY gives the same information as the LOGS
command as well as displaying the Command Line Interface (CLI) Flash History. CLI
Flash History is the history of the buttons accessed on the User Interface and the
commands typed in DML.
6.4.13.3
TAIL_LOG
Format: TAIL_LOG <tail count>
Description: TAIL_LOG lists the number of specified lines, starting from the most
recently logged messages contained in the Flash Memory of the Bay Controller
Board.
Example: Tail_Log 5 lists the last five log lines entered into the Flash Memory of the
Bay Controller Board.
Figure 6-52: TAIL_LOG 5 Output Example
Alias Macro: flash_log_tail
6-64
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
6.4.13.4
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
BOOT_LOG
Format: BOOT_LOG
Description: BOOT_LOG lists all boot times in Flash Memory of the Bay Controller
Board and all logged messages since the last instrument boot.
6.4.13.5
GREP_LOG
Format: GREP_LOG <string pattern>
Description: GREP_LOG searches for specific text from the Flash Log and displays
the corresponding lines found. The text searched should follow the GREP_LOG
command and is case-sensitive.
Example: GREP_LOG fill (lists all logged messages containing the word “fill”)
Figure 6-53: GREP_LOG fill
Alias Macro: flash_log_grep
6.4.13.6
HISTORY
Format: HISTORY
Description: HISTORY displays the contents of the FLASH Command Line Interface
(CLI) history. CLI Flash History is the history of the buttons accessed on the User
Interface and the commands typed in DML.
6.4.13.7
TAIL_HISTORY
Format: TAIL_HISTORY <tail count>
Description: TAIL_HISTORY lists the number of specified lines from CLI history,
starting from the most recently logged messages contained in the Flash Memory of
the Bay Controller Board.
Example: TAIL_HISTORY 5 (lists the last five lines of the CLI).
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-65
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
6.4.13.8
Troubleshooting
GREP_HISTORY
Format: GREP_HISTORY <string pattern>
Description: GREP_HISTORY searches for specific text from the CLI history and
displays the corresponding lines found. The text being searched should follow the
GREP_HISTORY command and is case-sensitive.
Example: GREP_HISTORY dump (list all CLI text containing the word “dump”)
6.4.13.9
ERASE_LOG_HISTORY
Format: ERASE_LOG_HISTORY
Description: ERASE_LOG_HISTORY erases the entire contents of the Flash Log and
the flash Command Line Interface (CLI) History. CLI History is the history of the
buttons accessed on the User Interface and the commands typed in DML.
6.4.14
Diagnostic Commands
6.4.14.1
CLS
Format: CLS
Description: CLS clears the Diagnostic screen.
6.4.14.2
LOOP
Format: LOOP <#> {block}
Description: LOOP repeats the execution of other commands the given number of
times.
Example:
• LOOP 10 CYCLE_CAM (cycles the cam 10 times)
• LOOP 10 {SEALER_ON SEALER_OFF} (cycles the SEALER_ON and
SEALER_OFF commands 10 times)
6.4.14.3
LOOPK
Format: LOOPK {block}
Description: LOOPK repeats the execution of other commands until a key is pressed.
Example:
• LOOPK CYCLE_CAM (cycles the Cam until a key is pressed)
6-66
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
• LOOPK {SEALER_ON SEALER_OFF} (executes the SEALER_ON and
SEALER_OFF commands until a key is pressed)
6.4.14.4
PR
Format: PR <var> | <“text”>
Description: PR prints the value of a variable or specific text.
Example:
• PR $LINES_PER_SCREEN
• PR “test”
6.4.14.5
$LINES_PER_SCREEN
Format: $LINES_PER_SCREEN <=#>
Description: $LINES_PER_SCREEN sets the number of lines to be displayed on one
screen. This variable can adjust to the screen size used. If the output of the logs scroll
off the screen, change the variable to a smaller number.
6.4.15
Motor Commands
6.4.15.1
MN
Format: MN <motor name>
Description: MN addresses a Motor by name. See Table 6-4 for VITEK® 2 Compact
Motor Names.
Table 6-4: VITEK® 2 Compact Motor Names
CARD_TRANS
Card Transport
CARD_SEALER
Sealer Motor
CARD_AUTOLOADER
Autoloader Motor
CAROUSEL
Carousel Motor
CARD_CAM
(Reader) Cam Motor
EJECTOR
Card Ejector Motor
Example: MN CARD_TRANS
Note:
MN H lists all of the instrument motor names.
Note:
The Reader Motor is connected to the Head Controller Board and is not
accessible through a node. Instead use the MOV and DISABLE commands.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-67
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
6.4.15.2
Troubleshooting
CHECKHOME
Format: CHECKHOME
Description: CHECKHOME the current Motor (synchronous) and print any step loss.
See the MN command.
6.4.15.3
HOME
Format: HOME
Description: HOME the current Motor (synchronous). See the MN command.
6.4.15.4
IN
Format: IN <steps>
Description: IN moves the current Motor a given number of steps in (toward the
sensor). See the MN command.
Example: IN 10
6.4.15.5
OUT
Format: OUT <steps>
Description: OUT moves the current Motor out a given number of steps. See the MN
command.
Example: OUT 10
6.4.15.6
MOTOR_ON
Format: MOTOR_ON
Description: MOTOR_ON turns the current Motor on. See the MN command.
6.4.15.7
MOTOR_OFF
Format: MOTOR_OFF
Description: MOTOR_OFF turns the current Motor off. See the MN command.
6.4.15.8
MOV
Format: MOV <steps>
Description: MOV moves the reader Motor x steps, leaving the motor phases active. It
is specifically used to move the Reader Motor in a positive or negative direction and
6-68
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
requires a specified number of steps. The Motor phases are locked after the MOV
command is given. When finished with this command, the operator must type
DISABLE to disable the lock.
Example:
MOV 1500 (moves the reader motor clockwise toward the carousel)
MOV –1500 (moves the reader motor counterclockwise toward the waste bin)
6.4.15.9
DISABLE
Format: DISABLE
Description: DISABLE unlocks the reader motor phases after the MOV command has
been given.
6.4.16
Firmware Commands
6.4.16.1
REQUEST_FIRMWARE
Format: REQUEST_FIRMWARE 0
Description: REQUEST_FIRMWARE 0 causes the instrument to request a BCB
firmware download from the host PC. Then a file is transferred from the Host PC to the
instrument Bay Controller Board Flash Memory.
Note:
Argument 1 is for possible future development and Argument 2 is for
development purposes only.
6.4.17
Macro Commands
6.4.17.1
MAC
Format: MAC
Description: MAC lists all macros contained in instrument memory. A macro is a small
program that allows multiple commands to be combined into one.
6.4.17.2
ED
Format: ED <macro name>
Description: ED allows editing of an existing macro.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-69
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
6.4.17.3
Troubleshooting
SETMAC
Format: SETMAC <macro name> <body>
Description: SETMAC creates a macro.
6.4.17.4
DELMAC
Format: DELMAC <macro name>
Description: DELMAC deletes a specified macro.
6.4.17.5
COPYMAC
Format: COPYMAC <macro name> <new copy’s name>
Description: COPYMAC copies a specified macro to a different name.
6.4.17.6
CLEAR_ALL_MACROS
Format: CLEAR_ALL_MACROS
Description: CLEAR_ALL_MACROS deletes all macros.
6.4.17.7
REFRESHMAC
Format: REFRESHMAC
Description: REFRESHMAC restores all default macros.
6.4.17.8
ALIGNMENT
Format: ALIGNMENT
Description: Refer to the VITEK® 2 Compact Alignment Procedure (Drawing 532600)
for the proper usage of the alignment commands.
6.4.17.9
ALIGN_ON
Format: ALIGN_ON
Description: ALIGN_ON configures the instrument for alignment, which includes
unlocking the doors. While in Alignment mode, the User Interface indicates or displays
that it is in Maintenance mode.
If the instrument is uninitialized or processing cards, the following warnings display
prior to entering Alignment mode:
6-70
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
• WARNING: Cards are processing in the front end (the front end includes a
cassette being processed in the Filler or Transport System).
• WARNING: Cards are processing in the back end, use ‘PAUSE_CARO’
before opening any doors (the back end includes cards being processed in the
Carousel and Reader).
• Warning: The current instrument state is UNINITIALIZED.
Note:
6.4.17.10
If in burn-in, the current burn-in operations are suspended. These operations
can be resumed once the Alignment mode is exited.
ALIGN_OFF
Format: ALIGN_OFF
Description: ALIGN_OFF disables the instrument Alignment mode. If the instrument
is processing cards in the back end, prior to exiting alignment mode, a reminder
warning displays instructing you to RESUME_CARD. If PAUSE_CARO was executed,
use RESUME_CARO.
6.4.17.11
ALIGN_TRANS_CASSETTE
Format: ALIGN_TRANS_CASSETTE
Description: ALIGN_TRANS_CASSETTE performs an automatic alignment of the
cassette transport, with respect to the Card Presence Sensor and the Bar Code
Reader.
6.4.17.12
ALIGN_SEALER
Format: ALIGN_SEALER
Description: ALIGN_SEALER allows alignment of the Sealer Wire a specified
distance from a processing card.
6.4.17.13
CAL_SEALER
Format: CAL_SEALER
Description: CAL_SEALER performs an automatic calibration of the Sealer
Assembly.
6.4.17.14
ALIGN_CARO_TOP
Format: ALIGN_CARO_TOP
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-71
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
Troubleshooting
Description: ALIGN_CARO_TOP allows alignment of the Carousel so that the
Carousel Slot is centered at the Reader mechanism during a Carousel Slot Read
movement.
6.4.17.15
ALIGN_CARO_BOTTOM
Format: ALIGN_CARO_BOTTOM
Description: ALIGN_CARO_BOTTOM allows alignment of the Carousel so the
Carousel Slot is centered at the Autoloader opening at the bottom of the Carousel
during a Carousel Slot Load movement.
6.4.17.16
ALIGN_CAM
Format: ALIGN_CAM
Description: ALIGN_CAM allows alignment of the Reader Cam.
6.4.17.17
SET_AL_HEIGHT
Format: SET_AL_HEIGHT
Description: SET_AL_HEIGHT assists in the alignment of the height of the Autoloader
Pusher.
6.4.17.18
ALIGN_AL
Format: ALIGN_AL
Description: ALIGN_AL allows alignment of the autoloader.
6.4.17.19
CALIBRATE_FILLER
Format: CALIBRATE_FILLER
Description: CALIBRATE_FILLER is a calibration routine used during instrument
alignment to establish a reference for the Filler’s Pressure Transducer.
6.4.17.20
INIT_PROP_VALVE
Format: INIT_PROP_VALVE
Description: INIT_PROP_VALVE puts the Filler Chamber in a vacuum state. As the
Proportional Valve opens, it identifies when the pressure in the chamber begins to
rise. This value is then recorded and referenced for future filler cycles.
6-72
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
6.4.17.21
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
SAVE_ALIGNMENTS
Format: SAVE_ALIGNMENTS
Description: SAVE_ALIGNMENTS saves the alignment information from the SPN
Boards to the Bay Controller Board. Failure to enter this command after an alignment
change results in the instrument not functioning.
6.4.17.22
RESTORE_ALIGNMENTS
Format: RESTORE_ALIGNMENTS
Description: RESTORE_ALIGNMENTS restores all saved alignment variables from
the Bay Controller Board to the SPN Boards.
6.4.17.23
SHOW_ALIGNMENTS
Format: SHOW_ALIGNMENTS
Description: SHOW_ALIGNMENTS displays all of the current alignments on both the
BCB and SPN. It also indicates if there is a difference.
Example:
Figure 6-54: SHOW_ALIGNMENTS Output Example
6.4.17.24
DEFAULT_ALIGNMENT
Format: DEFAULT_ALIGNMENT <Alignment Number 1 – 13 or ALL>
Description: DEFAULT_ALIGNMENT sets the target SPN alignment variable to a
default setting. The alignment number corresponds to the order shown in the
SHOW_ALIGNMENTS output (Figure 6-54).
Example: DEFAULT_ALIGNMENT 5 (defaults the Carousel Top Bias alignment SPN
setting)
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-73
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
6.4.18
Troubleshooting
BURN-IN Commands
BURN-IN exercises the instrument to identify and remove latent parts. It is not
intended to identify misaligned components. A hidden menu from the instrument User
Interface may also access these burn-in activities. This is achieved from the Main
Status screen by entering the password 7763 followed by the Status/Menu button. A
production menu displays.
IMPORTANT:
This password is only to be used by trained bioMérieux personnel, and
must not be given to the customer. (See the VITEK® 2 Compact
Instrument Manufacturing Commands [Drawing 532611] for more
information.)
Note:
When entering Alignment mode, all of the statistics (cycle counts and errors)
relating to each component remain in non-volatile memory, therefore they
are not lost.
Table 6-5 shows the individual components available for burn-in as well as their
corresponding groups. The Recommended Cycling Mode indicates the best method
for cycling a component.
Table 6-5: Components Available for BURN-IN
Component
Vacuum
Vacuum
Individual
Component
Front End
Sealer
Individual
Component
Transport
Individual
Component
Autoloader
Individual
Component
Bar Code
Scanner
Individual
Component
Individual testing requires full cassette in
transport, beginning at Load/Unload Door.
Carousel
Back End
Group
Use QUICK_LOAD to load 30 cards in the
Carousel, prior to starting Back End group
cycling.
Cam
Back End
Group
Use QUICK_LOAD to load 30 cards in the
Carousel, prior to starting Back End group
cycling.
Ejector
Back End
Group
Use QUICK_LOAD to load 30 cards in the
Carousel, prior to starting Back End group
cycling.
Reader Head
and Optics
Individual
Component
Requires at least one filled card in the
Carousel. Individual testing is performed with
the Ejector and Cam cycling one card from the
Carousel to the Reader and then back again.
Back End
6-74
Recommended
Cycling Mode
Group
Notes
Vacuum door must be closed.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
Table 6-5: Components Available for BURN-IN
Door
Locks
6.4.18.1
Door Locks
Individual
Component
Front Access Door and Load Door must be
closed.
ENABLE_BURN
Format: ENABLE_BURN
Description: ENABLE_BURN changes the instrument to Burn-In mode.
6.4.18.2
START_BURN
Format: START_BURN <component, group or ALL>
Description: START_BURN sets the state of the components or group to RUN.
6.4.18.3
SET_BURN_DEFAULTS
Format: SET_BURN_DEFAULTS
Description: SET_BURN_DEFAULTS sets the default counters and thresholds for
each component and group. It then clears all pending errors.
6.4.18.4
BURN_STATS
Format: BURN_STATS
Description: BURN_STATS displays the Burn-In statistics for all of the components
and groups.
6.4.18.5
CHANGE_CYCLE_COUNTS
Format: CHANGE_CYCLE_COUNTS <new cycle count> <component>
Description: CHANGE_CYCLE_COUNTS sets the number of cycles Burn-In performs
on an individual component. See Table 6-5 for a list of components.
6.4.18.6
CHANGE_ERROR_THRESHOLD
Format: CHANGE_ERROR_THRESHOLD <Threshold> <component>
Description: CHANGE_ERROR_THRESHOLD sets the Error Threshold for the given
component.
6.4.18.7
CHANGE_GROUP_COUNTS
Format: CHANGE_GROUP_COUNTS <new cycle count> <group>
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-75
Firmware Diagnostic Commands
Troubleshooting
Description: CHANGE_GROUP_COUNTS set the number of cycles Burn-In
performs on a Group. See Table 6-5 for list of Groups.
6.4.18.8
CLEAR_ERROR
Format: CLEAR_ERROR <component>
Description: CLEAR_ERROR clears all pending Burn-In errors for the given
component and resets the cycles count. This can only be performed at the DML. This
is not an option at the User Interface hidden menu.
6.4.18.9
DISABLE_BURN
Format: DISABLE_BURN
Description: DISABLE_BURN changes the instrument to Normal mode. Any cards
that are processing in the Carousel are ejected.
6.4.18.10
DUMP_STATS
Format: DUMP_STATS
Description: See Section 6.4.2.19, DUMP_STATS.
6.4.18.11
MONITOR_BURN
Format: MONITOR_BURN
Description: MONITOR_BURN displays statistics of components and group while
refreshing the DML.
6.4.18.12
PAUSE_BURN
Format: PAUSE_BURN <component, group or ALL>
Description: PAUSE_BURN sets the state of a component or group to PAUSE.
6.4.18.13
QUICK_LOAD
Format: QUICK_LOAD
Description: QUICK_LOAD allows for quick loading of cards into Quad 1 and 2 for
Burn-In.
6-76
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
6.5
User Interface Hidden Menu Access
User Interface Hidden Menu Access
Functions provided by the User Interface Screen are normally hidden. A password
code must be entered to allow access to the Service menu tree. From the Main Status
Screen press the password 7378 followed by the Status/Menu button. A hidden
service menu will display.
IMPORTANT:
This login is only to be used by trained bioMérieux personnel, and
must not be given to the customer. (See the VITEK® 2 Compact Field
Service Commands [Drawing 532612] for more information.)
Note:
As a memory tool, SERV when dialed on a telephone is numerically 7378.
6.5.1
Sensor States
SPN board sensor states are displayed on the LCD screen.
For each SPN board, a separate screen is displayed. These screens can be
sequenced through by using the up and down arrow keys.
Note:
The SPN board sensor states will update only when the screen is first
displayed. To refresh the states, exit and then re-enter the screen.
The following SPN board sensor state screens are available:
• Carousel
• Transport
• Front Panel
• Filler / Sealer
6.5.2
Keypad Test
As each key is pressed the corresponding key is shown on the LCD.
6.5.3
Indicator Test
The front panel indicators can be turned on and off.
6.5.4
LCD Test
All LCD pixels are on, then all LCD pixels are off, then several grid and stripe patterns
are shown. To sequence through these screens, a keypad key is pressed.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-77
General Instrument Troubleshooting
6.5.5
Troubleshooting
Select Language
This will display a list of languages and allow selection of the desired language that
will then be used to display all User Interface text.
Note:
6.5.6
If the instrument is hooked to a host PC with Compact software, the
instrument language will update according to the host PC settings.
Trigger Bar Code Reader
This will trigger a bar code scan and display the resulting bar code on the GUI screen.
If the bar code read fails, a failure is indicated.
6.5.7
Ship Prep
No function at this time.
6.6
General Instrument Troubleshooting
The general troubleshooting information is to be used only by an authorized
VITEK® 2 Compact instrument service representative. All safety and hazard
information must be clearly understood and exercised any time the instrument is
serviced.
Note:
6.6.1
Before performing any of the commands listed, reference the relevant
command found earlier in this chapter.
AC Power to Instrument Has Failed
General Troubleshooting Action(s):
• Verify the AC power switch is in the ON position.
• Verify the AC power cord is properly connected to the power source.
• Verify the proper voltages at the power source.
• Check the AC power switch fuses in the Power Entry Module.
• Check the AC voltage selector of the Power Entry Module.
• Check the fuses in AC Power Supply assembly.
• Check the AC power cord for damage.
• Verify the proper functioning of AC power switch on the instrument.
• Check the output side of Power Entry Module for proper AC voltage. Replace
the filter if voltage is incorrect.
6-78
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
6.6.2
General Instrument Troubleshooting
No Power Output at AC Power Distribution Board
General Troubleshooting Action(s):
• Check the incoming AC power.
• Check the installed fuses.
• Check the Toroid Transformer windings.
• Replace the transformer if windings are bad.
• Replace the AC power board.
6.6.3
BCB Board – Power Indicators Not Illuminated
General Troubleshooting Action(s):
• Verify the incoming AC power to the instrument.
• Verify for proper functioning of the power supply.
• Check the fuses on the BCB.
• Replace the BCB.
6.6.4
DC Power Distribution Board – Indicator Lights Not Illuminated
General Troubleshooting Action(s):
• Verify the incoming power to the board.
• Verify for proper functioning of incoming power supply.
• Replace the DC power supply board.
6.6.5
Transport Failures
General Troubleshooting Action(s):
• Run TEST_TRANSPORT (Alignment mode only) to check the Cassette
Reflective Sensor, the Transport Home Reflective Sensor and the Transport
Motor.
• Run TRANS_TO_BAR_CODE (Alignment mode only) to check the front and
back Transport Sensors on the Cassette Encoder Board.
• Run TRANS_TO_SEALER (Alignment mode only) to check the middle
Transport Sensor on the Cassette Encoder Board.
• To view the Sensor status, use the SPN_SENSORS command or access the
Sensor States in the User Interface hidden menu, as described in Section 6.5,
User Interface Hidden Menu Access.
• Ensure proper Sealer calibration/alignment. Refer to Drawing 532600.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-79
General Instrument Troubleshooting
6.6.6
Troubleshooting
Transmittance Optical Interrupt Failures
General Troubleshooting Action(s):
• With cards processing, refer to Section F.5.7, Cleaning the Optics (With
Cards Processing — Power On).
• With no cards processing or Carousel paused (PAUSE_CARO), from the
instrument Diagnostics menu, enter into Alignment mode (ALIGN_ON).
Run SCAN_TX_SENSORS (Alignment mode only) and/or
BURN_TX_SENSORS (Alignment mode only) to check the proper functioning
of Transmittance Optical Interrupts. Clean both Emitter and Detector Glass of
Transmittance Optics. Replace corresponding Transmittance Optics based on
information attained.
6.6.7
Transmittance Calibration Errors / Failures
General Troubleshooting Action(s):
• With cards processing, refer to Section F.5.7, Cleaning the Optics (With
Cards Processing — Power On).
• With no cards processing or Carousel paused (PAUSE_CARO), run CAL_TX
from the instrument Diagnostics menu to test the Transmittance Optics
(X= the suspected optic 1, 2 or 3).
• Check the flat ribbon cable connection.
• Replace corresponding Transmittance Optics based on information attained.
6.6.8
Reader Jamming
General Troubleshooting Action(s):
• Visually check the integrity of the Reader Head Roller Plate and Belt as well
as running the TEST_BELT command.
• Check for proper functioning of the Reader Head Motor and Pulley.
• Check Reader Head to Carousel alignment by checking the top bias. (Refer to
Drawing 532600.)
• Check for proper functioning of Cam Assembly by using the commands
INIT_CAM (Alignment mode only) and CYCLE_CAM (Alignment mode only).
• Check the Cam alignment. (Refer to Drawing 532600.)
• Check the Carousel Quadrant for obstructions.
• Test for proper functioning of the power supply 24 VDC (refer to Section 7.3,
PC Board Test Points).
6-80
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
6.6.9
General Instrument Troubleshooting
Carousel Jamming
General Troubleshooting Action(s):
• Confirm that the Quadrant is properly seated into Carousel Hub.
• Run HOME_CARO (Alignment mode only) to check the Home Carousel
Sensor (and proper Motor operation).
• Check the Reader Head to Carousel alignment by checking the top bias and
bottom bias. (Refer to Drawing 532600.)
• Check for proper functioning of the Ejector by using the commands
INIT_EJECTOR (Alignment mode only) and CYCLE_EJECTOR (Alignment
mode only).
• Check for proper functioning of the Cam Assembly by using the commands
INIT_CAM (Alignment mode only) and CYCLE_CAM (Alignment mode only).
• Check the Cam alignment. (Refer to Drawing 532600.)
• Check the integrity of Home, Top and Bottom Carousel Optical Sensors by
using the commands CARO_TOP (or CT (Alignment mode only)) and
CARO_BOTTOM (or CB (Alignment mode only)).
• To view the Sensor status use the SPN_SENSORS command or access the
Sensor States in the User Interface hidden menu, as described in Section 6.5,
User Interface Hidden Menu Access.
• Verify the proper functioning of the power supply 24 VDC (refer to
Section 7.3, PC Board Test Points).
6.6.10
Incubator Temperature Failures and Errors
General Troubleshooting Action(s):
• Run SHOW_INCU_TEMP_INFO to check Carousel temperatures and the
status of both Incubator Fans.
• Check the integrity and connection of the Thermistor Assembly located inside
the lower Carousel Stack.
• Check the integrity and connection of the Thermistor Assembly located below
the Heater Assembly.
• Check the integrity of Heater Assembly located beneath the Carousel Fan
Assembly.
• Check the power supply voltages (refer to Section 7.3, PC Board Test Points).
• Check the Solid-State Relay for proper functioning.
6.6.11
Ambient Temperature Out of Range
General Troubleshooting Action(s):
• Run SHOW_INCU_TEMP_INFO to check the cabinet temperatures and the
status of both Cabinet Fans.
• Check the lab for excessively high ambient temperature.
• To check the Fan, use the command SET_CAB_FAN_SPEED.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-81
General Instrument Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
• Ensure that the Intake Cabinet Fan Filter is clean.
• Check for obstructions on the outside of the instrument, and verify proper
clearances around the instrument.
Note:
6.6.12
Airflow of the Fan behind the Transport should be blowing into the
instrument. Airflow of the fan behind the Filler should be blowing out of
instrument.
Drive Motor(s) Will Not Operate
General Troubleshooting Action(s):
• Verify 12 V and 24 V Motor supply voltages on the DC Power Distribution
Board (refer to Section 7.3, PC Board Test Points).
• Verify the Optical Positioning Sensor integrity. To view the Sensor status use
the SPN_SENSORS command or access the User Interface hidden menu as
described in Section 6.5, User Interface Hidden Menu Access, and select
Sensor States.
• Use the DML commands that correspond with the Motor to check for proper
functionality.
6.6.13
Instrument Not Communicating Messages
General Troubleshooting Action(s):
• Run CTDB_STATUS and determine if there are Unsent commands.
• Verify that the RS232 cable between the instrument and the computer is
connected.
• Reboot the host PC.
• Verify the power supply voltages on the DC Power Distribution Board (refer to
Section 7.3, PC Board Test Points).
6.6.14
Filler/Vacuum System
6.6.14.1
Alarms or Failures
General Troubleshooting Action(s):
• Run DUMP_FILLER to determine the status of the last Filler cycle.
• Run FILLER_STATUS to determine the overall status of the Filler.
• Run CYCLE_FILLER to perform a normal Filler cycle.
• Run FILLER_LEAK_TEST (Alignment mode only) to test for Filler leaks. (See
Section 6.6.14.4, Leak Test Procedure.)
• Ensure the Filler Door Seal and mating surface are clean.
• Ensure proper Filler calibration/alignment. (Refer to Drawing 532600.)
• Check the Solid-State Relay operation for the Vacuum Pump.
6-82
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
General Instrument Troubleshooting
• Check voltage available to the Vacuum Pump.
• Check the Vacuum Pump operation, and replace Pump if necessary.
• Check piping components (tubing and fittings).
6.6.14.2
Theory of Operation
A typical vacuum cycle for a VITEK® 2 Compact instrument consists of the following
steps:
Note:
For additional information see Section 4.4, Vacuum/Filler Station.
1. The filler door is closed and the filler cycle is initiated.
2. The filler system checks the ambient pressure to ensure it is in a normal range.
3. The 3-way valve sets to connect the vacuum pump to the vacuum chamber.
4. The proportional valve opens fully, allowing an air leak into the filler system to
control the down slope.
5. The vacuum pump turns on.
6. After a vacuum seal is established, the vacuum begins to remove air from the
chamber. As the pressure decreases, the proportional valve closes slowly and
tries to maintain a down slope of 0.5 PSI/Second. Once the pressure set point is
achieved (calibrated to 0.89 +/- 0.04 PSIA), the 3-way valve closes and the
vacuum pump turns off.
7. The firmware calculates the down slope for the vacuum cycle by dividing the
change in pressure by the time it took to get from ambient pressure to the set
point pressure.
8. The system dwells at the set point for five seconds.
9. The proportional valve opens slowly and tries to maintain a return up slope of
0.5 PSIA/Second.
10. The firmware calculates the up slope for the vacuum cycle by dividing the
change in pressure by the time it took to get from the set point pressure to
ambient pressure.
11. The user opens the door and removes the cassette.
6.6.14.3
Vacuum System Errors
The following list contains the error codes sent from the SPN board to the BCB in
response to vacuum failures. These error codes are found in the instrument log file.
• 0x70 – No vacuum
This error is reported if the pressure does not drop by 0.5 PSI within 10 seconds
of starting the vacuum pump. This occurs if the vacuum chamber is not sealed or
if there is a large leak in the system, such as a vacuum tube not attached.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-83
General Instrument Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
• 0x71 – Pressure not returning to ambient
This error is reported if the system pressure did not return to ambient pressure
within 60 to 80 seconds after the end of the hold time. This is caused by the
proportional valve not opening quickly enough to release the vacuum. Typically
this means the proportional valve is defective.
• 0x72 – Vacuum lock
This error is reported if the system cannot return to ambient pressure in 20
seconds from the time a vacuum cycle is aborted. This is caused by the
proportional valve not opening quickly enough to release the vacuum. Typically
this means the proportional valve is defective.
• 0x75 – Ambient pressure high or low
This error is reported and the cycle is aborted if the ambient pressure taken by the
vacuum SPN board is not between 9.0 PSIA and 17.0 PSIA before the vacuum
cycle starts. This indicates that either the pressure transducer is defective and the
vacuum SPN board needs to be replaced, or the local ambient pressure is very
high or very low due to altitude and weather conditions.
• 0x76 – Vacuum Low
This error is reported if the pressure does not reach the set point pressure within
55 seconds of starting the vacuum pump. This typically indicates either a leak in
the system or a weak vacuum pump. A weak vacuum pump can be caused by
either a defective pump or low input power to the instrument. If the instrument is
run under low voltage or low frequency conditions, the instrument may function
normally since the DC power supplies are self-adjusting, but the vacuum pump
may fail.
• 0x77 – Up Slope high or low
When the vacuum up slope is calculated after a vacuum cycle, the slope must be
between 0.4 and 0.6 PSI/Second. If the slope is not within this range, this error is
generated. Possible causes for a high up slope are system leaks or the
proportional valve is defective. Possible cause for a low up slope is that the
proportional valve is defective.
• 0x78 – Down slope high or low
When the vacuum down slope is calculated after a vacuum cycle, the slope must
be between 0.4 and 0.6 PSI/Second. If the slope is not within this range, this error
is generated.
Possible causes for a high down slope include a defective proportional valve or
conditions that facilitate very strong vacuum pumping. These conditions include
high atmospheric pressure (good weather and low altitudes) and strong power to
the vacuum pump (high voltage and/or high frequency).
Possible causes for a low down slope include a leak, a defective proportional
valve, or conditions that facilitate very weak vacuum pumping. These conditions
include low atmospheric pressure (bad weather and high altitudes) and weak
power to the vacuum pump (low voltage and/or low frequency).
6-84
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
General Instrument Troubleshooting
• 0x79 – Vacuum leak
This error is reported if the difference between the hold pressure at the start and
end of the dwell is greater than 0.3 PSI. Perform Section 6.6.14.4, Leak Test
Procedure.
6.6.14.4
Leak Test Procedure
The following procedure can be used to determine if the vacuum system has a leak.
1. At the Prompt > type ALIGN_ON and press Enter. This configures the
instrument for alignment, which includes unlocking the doors, displaying the
word ALIGN in the diagnostic prompt, and indicating on the User Interface that it
is in Maintenance mode.
2. Ensure that the Filler Door is closed.
3. At the Prompt > type FILLER_LEAK_TEST and press Enter. The firmware
starts the Vacuum Pump, pulls down to the calibrated PSIA value, holds for 30
seconds, and returns to ambient pressure. Confirm that no errors occur.
• Confirm that the message “Success: NO leak was detected during the fill
cycle” appears.
• If the message “Error: leak was detected during the fill cycle” occurs,
there was a loss greater than or equal to 0.06 PSIA during the hold time.
Continue with Step 4.
4. If a leak is detected:
• Clean the vacuum chamber and door gasket.
• Check the vacuum tubing for loose tubing or fittings.
• Replace the valve assembly.
6.6.15
Sealer Alarms or Failures
General Troubleshooting Action(s):
• Run TEST_SEALER (Alignment mode only) to test the heating functionality of
the Sealer Assembly.
• Run EXTEND_SEALER (Alignment mode only) and RETRACT_SEALER
(Alignment mode only) to test the mechanical functionality of the Sealer
Assembly.
• Ensure proper Sealer calibration/alignment. (Refer to Drawing 532600.)
• Check cutting wire integrity, and replace Assembly if necessary.
• Check Vac/Seal SPN board integrity, and replace if necessary.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-85
General Instrument Troubleshooting
6.6.16
Troubleshooting
UPS Failure
General Troubleshooting Action(s):
• Run UPS_STATUS to determine the status of the UPS.
• Check AC supply voltage to the UPS.
• Check and verify that communication cables and power cables are properly
installed.
6.6.17
Power Supply Information
This section includes power supply information at the component level.
Power Supply
65 W, +24 V
Power Supply
65 W, +5 V,
+12 V, –12 V
Pump Control
Solid-State
Relay (SSR)
Power Supply
+12 V, 110 W
Step Up/Down
Toroidal
Transformer
Power Entry
Module, 6 A
Fan Assembly
Power Supply
Figure 6-55: Power Supply Components
6-86
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
6.6.17.1
General Instrument Troubleshooting
Power Supply 65 W, +5 V, +12 V, –12 V
Table 6-6: +12/–12 VDC Power Supply Information
+12/–12 VDC Supplied by the +5 / +12 / –12, 65 W Power Supply:
Components
Information
DC Power Distribution Board
For +12 and –12 VDC power present LEDs
HCB
For transmittance optics
Table 6-7: +5 VDC Power Supply Information
+5 VDC Supplied by the +5 / +12 / –12, 65 W Power Supply:
Components
Information
DC Power Distribution Board
For +5 VDC power present LED
BCB
• User Interface
• LCD
HCB
• Bar Code Reader
6.6.17.2
Power Supply +12 V, 110 W
Table 6-8: 12 VDC Power Supply Information
12 VDC Supplied by the 12 VDC, 110 W Power Supply:
Components
Information
Power Supply Fan
Wired Directly from power supply
DC Power Distribution Board
For UPS interface and +12 VDC power present LED
SPN – Transport
• Transport Motor
Unipolar Motor / Unipolar Drive
• Cam Motor
Unipolar Motor / Unipolar Drive
• Cabinet Fan (Input)
• Cabinet Fan (Exhaust)
SPN Front Panel
• Load Door Lock Solenoid
• Access Door Lock Solenoid
• Filler Door LED Indicator
• Load Door LED Indicator
SPN – Incubator
• Carousel Motor
Unipolar Motor / Unipolar Drive
• Ejector Motor
Unipolar Motor / Unipolar Drive
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-87
General Instrument Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
Table 6-8: 12 VDC Power Supply Information (Continued)
12 VDC Supplied by the 12 VDC, 110 W Power Supply:
Components
Information
• Lower Incubator Fan
• Heater Incubator Fan
VAC/Seal Board
• Sealer Motor
Unipolar Motor / Unipolar Drive
• Sealer Wire
• Proportional Valve
6.6.17.3
Power Supply 65 W, +24 V
Table 6-9: 24 VDC Power Supply Information
24 VDC Supplied by the 24 VDC, 65 W Power Supply:
Components
Information
DC Power Distribution Board
For 24 VDC power present LED
• Load Door Lock Solenoid
24 V only supplied at initial energizing of solenoid. Then it
maintains the locked condition using 12 VDC from the SPN.
• Access Door Lock Solenoid
24 V only supplied at initial energizing of solenoid. Then it
maintains the locked condition using 12 VDC from the SPN.
SPN – Transport
• Autoloader Motor
Unipolar Motor / Bipolar Drive
VAC/Seal Board
• Vac Soleniod 3-way valve
LCD Backlight
Reader Head Motor
Unipolar Motor / Bipolar Drive located on BCB (connection
is routed through HCB)
BCB
24 V to supply Reader Head Motor
6.6.17.4
120 VAC Information
Table 6-10: 120 VAC Information
Supplied by 120 VAC:
Components
Incubator Heater
Vacuum Pump
+5 / +12 / –12, 65 W Power Supply
12 VDC, 110 W Power Supply
24 VDC, 65 W Power Supply
6-88
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
120VAC
Power Supply
Subsystem
100 / 120 / 220 / 240 VAC
Power
Entry
Toroid
-12VDC
+12VDC
+5VDC
+24VDC
+12VDC
MOT
120VAC
120VAC
AC Power
Supply
Assembly
Board
120VAC
Power
Supply
65 W
Power
Supply
65 W
+ 24 V
Power
Supply
110 W
+12 V
UPS
Connector
Board
Incubator
SSR
120VAC
Incubator
Heater
Vac
Pump
R
E
S
E
T
S
P
N
N
E
T
&
S
P
N
Optical &
Reflective
Sensors
Proportional
Valve
Hot
Wire
Sealer
Motor
(SPN Bus Node 6)
Vac / Sealer Board
Sealer Wire
3-Way
Valve
-12VDC
(ANALOG)
+12VDC
(ANALOG)
+5VDC (LOGIC)
+24VDC (MOTOR)
+12VDC MOT
(MOTOR)
120VAC
Vacuum
Pump
SSR
DC
Power
Supply
Board
Workstation
Connector
Board
Load
Door
LED
Indicator
Load
Door
Lock
Solenoid
Cabinet
Temperature
Thermistor #1
Filler
Door LED
Indicator
Keypad
Optical
Sensors
Access
Door Lock
Solenoid
(Slot 3)
428 nm , 568 mn
TX Optics
(Slot 1)
660 nm TX Optics
Detector
Emitter
(SPN Bus Node 2 )
Front Panel Board
Head Control Board
SPI
Bay Controller Board
Instrument
Speaker
Cabinet
Temperature
Thermistor #2
Power
Supply
Thermistor
Autoloader
Motor
Optical &
Reflective
Sensors
Cam
Motor
(SPN Bus Node 3 )
Transport Board
Bar Code
Reader
Indicator
PCBs
Backlight
HCB / Bar Code
Connector
Cabinet
Fans
Transport
Motor
Reader
Head
Motor
User
Interface
Board
LCD
UIF Subsystem
Incubator
Thermistors
Ejector &
Carousel
Motors
Upper & Lower
Incubator Fans
Optical
Sensors
(SPN Bus Node 8)
Carousel / Incubator SPN Board
6.6.18
Fan
UPS
Comm
Workstation Serial Comm
Diagnostic Serial Comm
Troubleshooting
General Instrument Troubleshooting
VITEK® 2 Compact Electrical Architecture
Figure 6-56: VITEK® 2 Compact Electrical Architecture
6-89
Viewing Host PC Software Version
6.7
Troubleshooting
Viewing Host PC Software Version
To view the Host PC software version, first perform the following logins:
• Log in to an administrator account of the Windows® host PC operating system.
(See Section 9.6.1, Log in to Host PC Operating System.)
• Start the system software application. (See Section 9.6.2, Start System Software
Application.)
• Log in to the system software. (See Section 9.6.3, Log in to System Software.)
6.7.1
Check System Software Version
1. From the navigation bar, click the VITEK® 2 Systems Main view icon.
2. Click the Configuration icon.
3. From the Configuration Option drop-down menu, select Version.
4. Review the current VITEK® 2 Systems software version.
5. Navigate to the Main View.
6.8
Windows® Event Logs
From the My Computer icon, right-click and select Manage to open the Computer
Management application. From this application, you can choose to view the
Application, Security, or System event logs. These are Windows® event logs.
Figure 6-57: Computer Management Screen
6-90
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Windows® Event Logs
Troubleshooting
• The Application Event Log contains informational messages, warnings, and
errors generated by applications running under the Windows® operating system.
You can review these logs to determine how the various VITEK® 2 Compact
applications are interacting with the operating system. The application developers
decide what events are recorded in this log.
• The Security Event Log records operating system events related to the
Windows® operating system. You can use this log to help you diagnose problems
with account access. This log records login attempts, resource use, and security
configuration changes. The group policy settings determine what this log
monitors.
• The System Event Log records operating system events. You can use this log to
help when diagnosing problems with the operating system. Failures of drivers or
other system components will be recorded in this log. The Windows® operating
system predetermines what is recorded in this log.
6.8.1
VITEK® 2 Compact System Logs
The VITEK® 2 Compact logs are located off of the root directory (D:\Program
Files\Vitek 2 Compact). These logs are useful for troubleshooting the application.
Primarily, the software developers will use these logs for third-level support. For
problems requiring third-level support, these logs should be captured for further
analysis. In limited cases, field personnel could examine these logs to help
troubleshoot a system.
There are two top-level directories that store product processing details.
• Directory 1:
\instrument_messages\device_COM5
\instrument_messages\device_COM7
These folders contain a temporary list of messages that have been received from
the instrument but have not yet been processed by the host PC. The messages in
sub-directories are named by the COM port the message came in from.
What kind of data (and how it gets written) is stored here?:
The serial port listening thread of the DeviceComm process writes each incoming
message to a unique file in the directory before sending the <ACK>
(acknowledgement) back to the instrument. The message processing thread will
read files from this directory, send the message to the CORE processing task and
if (and only if) it is successfully received by the CORE processing task is the
message file deleted from this directory.
The presence of these log files confirms that instrument messages are arriving
over the serial port to the host PC.
• Directory 2:
D:\Program Files\Vitek 2 Compact\log\card
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-91
Windows® Event Logs
Troubleshooting
D:\Program Files\Vitek 2 Compact\log\client
D:\Program Files\Vitek 2 Compact\log\server
These folders contain diagnostic output from the host PC processing tasks. The
information in these directories are maintained by the EndOfDay processing task
on a nightly basis so that there are only four days of data in this directory tree.
Under the \log\card directory are sub-directories that are named with the bar
code of the disposable that was processed.
What kind of data (and how it gets written) is stored here?:
Within the \<barcode> subdirectory are log files written by the ID analysis engine
(named serveranalysis.exe) or AST analysis engine (named AST.exe) (depending
on the card type). There is a reading.log file and a results.log file that contain
the reading data and the raw analysis results data, respectively.
Under the \log\client directory are sub-directories that are named as the date
(dd-mmm-yy format) on which the client application(s) were run.
What kind of data (and how it gets written) is stored here:
Within the \dd-mmm-yy subdirectory are sets of log files, one set of logging files
for each of the client applications. The base name of the log file set maps to the
application that generated the output. Here is a table that shows the mapping
between log file name and application:
Table 6-11: File Descriptions
Logfile Base Name
Application
Exe Name
Renaissance User Interface
Main Client app
V2C.exe
FirmwareUpdate
Firmware Update
FirmwareUpdate.exe
RexmitRequest
Retransmit
Request
RenRexmitRequest.exe
Backup_Restore_Isolate_Data_Client
Backup/Restore
BackupRestoreIsolateData.exe
Within each set there are up to 20 log files to store the diagnostic output from the
application. The individual log file names are made by taking the base name and
adding a 0.*.log to the end, where the * is a number. The newest activity from the
application is always written to the 0.0.log file. Once the log file exceeds about
1MB in size the file is renamed to 0.1.log and the 0.0.log is then available for the
new log info. If there is already a 0.1.log file, it is renamed to 0.2.log and so on. If
there is so much information that the 0.19.log is pushed, it is deleted, thereby
limiting the log information to 20 1MB log files.
Within the log file all of the log output records have a standard header. The
header contains the timestamp, JAVA memory information, the name of the
6-92
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Troubleshooting
DensiCHEK™ and DensiCHEK™ Plus Calibration/Verification
method that created the log record followed by the data of the log record. The
data can be anything that the developer chooses to write out at that time.
Under the \log\server directory are sub-directories that are named as the date
(dd-mmm-yy format) on which the server application(s) were run.
What kind of data (and how it gets written) is stored here:
Within the \dd-mmm-yy subdirectory are sets of log files, one set of logging files
for each of the server applications. The base name of the log file set maps to the
application that generated the output. Here is a table that shows the mapping
between log file name and application:
Table 6-12: File Descriptions
Logfile Base Name
Application
Exe Name
CoreServer
Main Business Process
CoreServer.exe
Renaissance Device Communication
Device Comm Process
DeviceCommServer.exe
ShutdownMonitor
ShutdownMonitor
bmxJavaService.exe
EndOfDayProcessing
End Of Day Processing
EndOfDayProcessing.exe
For each set, the log file uses the same 20 1MB log file naming scheme as the
client applications.
6.9
DensiCHEK™ and DensiCHEK™ Plus Calibration/Verification
6.9.1
Check and Calibrate DensiCHEK™
To check and calibrate the DensiCHEK™, perform the Software Manual instructions
included in the DensiCHEK™ Field Service Software Kit P/N 4550636A or
P/N 99820-100 (US only). Calibrate using the DensiCHEK™ Calibration Kit (P/N
99001).
Kit 99820-100 consists of the following:
• Software Manual
• Software Floppy Disk
• Serial Cable to connect from a laptop to a DensiCHEK™. (This is a DB25 to 8 pin
Molex connector. A DB25 male to DB9 female adapter may be required for some
laptops.)
Kit 99001 consists of the following:
• Standard Zero in glass tube with cap.
• Middle Range Control in glass tube with cap.
• High Range Control in glass tube with cap.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
6-93
DensiCHEK™ and DensiCHEK™ Plus Calibration/Verification
6.9.2
Troubleshooting
DensiCHEK™ Plus Instrument Verification
Verify the DensiCHEK™ Plus measurement performance using one or more of the
McFarland standards (0.5, 2.0 or 3.0) after zeroing the instrument with the 0.0 McF
Standard (blank):
• upon receipt and prior to first use
• according to your local regulatory guidelines or at least on a monthly basis
IMPORTANT:
Before using Standards to verify measurement performance, confirm
the GLASS tube setting is displayed. For information on changing the
tube type settings, refer to the current version of the DensiCHEK™
Plus User Manual.
1. Select the 0.0 McF Standard and clean the outside surface with a lens tissue.
2. Gently invert the 0.0 McF Standard five to six times to ensure it is
homogeneous.
CAUTION: Do not shake the Standard. Air bubbles will affect readings.
3. Ensure the instrument is on and insert the 0.0 McF Standard into the instrument
and press the Zero/Scroll key. Slowly rotate the standard one full rotation. The
instrument will display a series of dashes followed by 0.00.
4. Select the desired Standard (0.5, 2.0 or 3.0) and clean the outside surface with
a lens tissue.
5. Gently invert the standard five to six times to ensure it is homogeneous.
6. Insert the Standard into the instrument and rotate slowly one full rotation until a
numerical value is displayed.
7. Check that the displayed McFarland value is within the acceptable range.
Table 6-13: Standard Acceptable Range
Standard
Acceptable Range
0.5 McF
0.44
0.56
2.0 McF
1.85
2.15
3.0 McF
2.79
3.21
8. Repeat Step 5 through Step 7 for the remaining Standards as desired.
CAUTION: If any Standards are outside of the acceptable range, repeat
the steps in this procedure. If the Standard is still out of range, contact
bioMérieux.
6-94
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Chapter 7: Schematics, Diagrams and Test Points
About This Chapter
This chapter shows the VITEK® 2 Compact instrument wiring diagrams, block
diagrams, PC boards, and PC board test points.
Chapter Contents
7.1
Instrument Wiring Diagram • 7-2
7.2
PC Boards • 7-9
7.3
PC Board Test Points • 7-10
7.4
Bay Controller Board • 7-12
7.5
DC Power Distribution Board • 7-15
7.6
Head Control Board • 7-16
7.7
Sample Prep Node (SPN) Board • 7-17
7.7.1
SPN Board Block Diagrams • 7-20
7.8
Vacuum Sealer Board • 7-23
7.9
Transmittance Optics System Cross-Section • 7-26
7.8.1
Vacuum Sealer Board Block Diagram • 7-25
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
7-1
Instrument Wiring Diagram
7.1
Schematics, Diagrams and Test Points
Instrument Wiring Diagram
Full Scale
Attachment
Figure 7-1: Instrument Schematic and Wiring Diagram (Power Supply)
7-2
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Schematics, Diagrams and Test Points
Instrument Wiring Diagram
Full Scale
Attachment
Figure 7-2: Instrument Schematic and Wiring Diagram (Transport SPN Board)
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
7-3
Instrument Wiring Diagram
Schematics, Diagrams and Test Points
Full Scale
Attachment
Figure 7-3: Instrument Schematic and Wiring Diagram (Front Panel SPN Board)
7-4
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Schematics, Diagrams and Test Points
Instrument Wiring Diagram
Full Scale
Attachment
Figure 7-4: Instrument Schematic and Wiring Diagram (Incubator SPN Board)
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
7-5
Instrument Wiring Diagram
Schematics, Diagrams and Test Points
Full Scale
Attachment
Figure 7-5: Instrument Schematic and Wiring Diagram (Vacuum Sealer SPN Board)
7-6
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Schematics, Diagrams and Test Points
Instrument Wiring Diagram
Full Scale
Attachment
Figure 7-6: Instrument Schematic and Wiring Diagram (Head Control Board)
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
7-7
Instrument Wiring Diagram
Schematics, Diagrams and Test Points
Full Scale
Attachment
Figure 7-7: Instrument Schematic and Wiring Diagram (BCB, Power Distribution and User Interface)
7-8
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Schematics, Diagrams and Test Points
7.2
PC Boards
PC Boards
Figure 7-8 shows a board layout diagram for the VITEK® 2 Compact instrument.
Figure 7-8: Top Level Board Block Diagram
Figure 7-9 shows the VITEK® 2 Compact instrument system electronics and the
connections.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
7-9
PC Board Test Points
Schematics, Diagrams and Test Points
LCD Assy
- See HCB Diagram -
J2
Thermistor
Rear Fan
Keypad Assy
EL
J4
Bulkhead
Connector
J1
J1
J2
Solenoid
2-Wire
Harness
40 Pin TP
Ribbon Cable
LED
34 Pin TP
Ribbon Cable
Solenoid
P6
J2
P1
LED
10 Pin TP
Ribbon Cable
P2
DB25 Conn
Vacuum
Sealer
J1
SPN
14 Pin TP
Ribbon Cable
P4
P15
J10
24 Pin TP
Ribbon Cable
UPS I/F
BCB Hardware Key
Incubator
SPN
J10
Trans
SPN
J10
Front
Panel
SPN
(16 Pin Ribbon Cables)
J2
J4
J8 J10
J5-J7, J9
J3
SPN Board Connectors
DC Power Distribution Board
DB9 Conn
Figure 7-9: VITEK® 2 Compact Electronics and Connections
7.3
PC Board Test Points
Test supplied voltages at the listed test points for each of the circuit boards, as
indicated in the following tables.
Table 7-1: Bay Controller Board — Voltage Test Points
Bay Controller Board (P/N 531750-903, 531750-915, 531750-904, 531750-90415,
6200113, 6200114)
Test Point
7-10
Signal
Voltage
Comments
TP1
VCC
+5 VDC
4.80 VDC ≤ TP1 ≤ 5.25 VDC
TP2
GND
0 VDC
0 VDC
TP3
GND
0 VDC
0 VDC
TP4
+24 V
+24 VDC
22.8 VDC ≤ TP4 ≤ 25.2 VDC
TP5
GND
0 VDC
0 VDC
TP6
–RS232
–8.3 VDC
Typical –8.3 VDC. No
specification on min/max.
TP7
+RS232
+8.97 V
Typical +8.97 VDC. No
specification on min/max.
TP8
MGND
0 VDC
0 VDC
TP9
SPIN.IN
0 VDC to +5 VDC
0 VDC ≤ TP9 ≤ 5.25 VDC
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Schematics, Diagrams and Test Points
PC Board Test Points
Table 7-2: DC Power Distribution Board — Voltage Test Point
DC Power Distribution Board (P/N 530774)
Test Point
Signal
Voltage
Comments
TP1
+5 V
+5 VDC
4.80 VDC ≤ TP1 ≤ 5.25 VDC
TP2
+12 V
+12 VDC
11.4 VDC ≤ TP2 ≤ 12.6 VDC
TP3
–12 V
–12 VDC
–12.6 VDC ≤ TP3 ≤ –11.4 VDC
TP4
+12 MOT
+12 VDC
11.4 VDC ≤ TP4 ≤ 12.6 VDC
TP5
+24 V
+24 VDC
22.8 VDC ≤ TP5 ≤ 25.2 VDC
TP6
GND
0 VDC
0 VDC
Table 7-3: Head Control Board (HCB) — Voltage Test Point
Head Control Board (HCB) (P/N 530772)
Test Point
Signal
Voltage
Comments
TP1
–12 V
–12 VDC
–12.6 VDC ≤ TP1 ≤ –11.4 VDC
TP2
+12 V
+12 VDC
11.4 VDC ≤ TP2 ≤ 12.6 VDC
TP3
GND
0 VDC
0 VDC
TP4
+5 V
+5 VDC
4.80 VDC ≤ TP4 ≤ 5.25 VDC
TP6
GND
0 VDC
0 VDC
TP7
GND
0 VDC
0 VDC
TP8
DACOUT
0 VDC to +5 VDC
Variable output voltage.
Table 7-4: User Interface Board — Voltage Test Point
User Interface Board (P/N 530748)
Test Point
Signal
Voltage
Comments
TP1
+5 V
+5 VDC
4.80 VDC ≤ +5 ≤ 5.25 VDC
TP2
GND
0 VDC
0 VDC
TP3
GND
0 VDC
0 VDC
TP4
V2, LCD_BIAS
–5.80 VDC to –14.62 VDC Variable, via firmware control
TP5
V1
–6.20 VDC to –10.80 VDC Variable, via firmware control
TP6
+5 V
+5 VDC
4.80 VDC ≤ TP6 ≤ 5.25 VDC
Table 7-5: Host PC Connector — Voltage Test Point
Host PC Connector (P/N 531732)
Test Point
Signal
Voltage
Comments
TP1
DIA_TXD
–8.0 VDC
RS232 Signal
–15 VDC ≤ TP1 ≤ 15 VDC
TP2
DIA_RXD
3.0 VDC
RS232 Signal
–15 VDC ≤ TP2 ≤ 15 VDC
TP3
SGND
0 VDC
RS232 Signal
GND (0 VDC)
TP4
WS_RXD
3.0 VDC
RS232 Signal
–15 VDC ≤ TP4 ≤ 15 VDC
TP5
WS_TXD
–8.0 VDC
RS232 Signal
–15 VDC ≤ TP5 ≤ 15 VDC
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
7-11
Bay Controller Board
Schematics, Diagrams and Test Points
Table 7-6: HCB/Bar Code Connector — Voltage Test Points
HCB/Bar Code Connector (P/N 531730)
Test Point
Signal
Voltage
Comments
TP1
+5 V
+5 VDC
4.80 VDC ≤ TP1 ≤ 5.25 VDC
TP2
TXD
+5 VDC
4.80 VDC ≤ TP2 ≤ 5.25 VDC
TP3
GND
0 VDC
0 VDC
TP4
RXD
+0.2 VDC
TP4 ≤ 0.5 VDC
TP5
TRIG
+5 VDC
4.80 VDC ≤ TP5 ≤ 5.25 VDC
Table 7-7: SPN Board — Voltage Test Points
SPN Board (P/N 531720-2 and P/N 531720)
Test Point
Signal
Voltage
Comments
TP1
+24 VDC
+24 VDC
21.6 VDC ≤ TP1 ≤ 26.4 VDC
TP2
+12 VDC
+12 VDC
10.80 VDC ≤ TP2 ≤ 13.2 VDC
TP3
+5 VDC
+5 VDC
4.80 VDC ≤ TP3 ≤ 5.20 VDC
TP4
GND
0 VDC
0 VDC
Table 7-8: Vacuum/Sealer Board — Voltage Test Points
Vacuum/Sealer Board (P/N 531728)
7.4
Test Point
Signal
Voltage
Comments
TP1
+12 VDC
+12 VDC
10.80 VDC ≤ TP1 ≤ 13.2 VDC
TP2
+5 VDC
+5 VDC
4.80 VDC ≤ TP2 ≤ 5.25 VDC
TP3
+24 VDC
+24 VDC
21.6 VDC ≤ TP3 ≤ 26.4 VDC
TP4
GND
0 VDC
0 VDC
Bay Controller Board
A Bay Controller Board (BCB) controls the optics, the communications to the host PC,
the user interface, and serves as the master controller for the Sample Prep Node
(SPN) boards. Figure 7-10 shows an illustration of BCB part number 531750.
Note:
The illustration for BCB part number 531750 is also a valid representation of
BCB part numbers 6200113 and 6200114.
The BCB jumper settings define the functionality of the instrument, including three
different card processing capacities: 15 card, 30 card, and 60 card. For the proper
BCB jumper settings, see Table 7-9, Table 7-10, and Table 7-11.
Note:
7-12
For a detailed description of the Bay Controller Board headers, see Drawing
531602-1, VITEK® 2 Compact System Electronics Jumper and Test Point
Specification.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Schematics, Diagrams and Test Points
Bay Controller Board
F1=5 A
F2=1.5 A
Full Scale
Attachment
Figure 7-10: Bay Controller Board (BCB) Layout (531750)
Table 7-9: VITEK® 2 Compact 15 — BCB Jumper Settings
Header
Installed Jumpers
HDR1
All
HDR2
None
HDR4
None
HDR5
All
HDR6
None
HDR7
1–2
HDR8
1–2, indicates Compact Instrument (not a
VITEK® 2)
3–4, user I/F LCD Installed
11-12, indicates a Compact 15 configuration
HDR11
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
None
7-13
Bay Controller Board
Schematics, Diagrams and Test Points
Table 7-9: VITEK® 2 Compact 15 — BCB Jumper Settings (Continued)
Header
Installed Jumpers
HDR12
11–12
HDR13
Speaker
HDR16
All
HDR19
None
HDR20
2–3
HDR21
2–3
P12
None
P15
None
13–14
Table 7-10: VITEK® 2 Compact 30 — BCB Jumper Settings
Header
Installed Jumpers
HDR1
All
HDR2
None
HDR4
None
HDR5
All
HDR6
None
HDR7
1–2
HDR8
1–2, indicates Compact Instrument (not a
VITEK® 2)
3–4, user I/F LCD Installed
HDR11
None
HDR12
11–12
13–14
HDR13
Speaker
HDR16
All
HDR19
None
HDR20
2–3
HDR21
2–3
P12
None
P15
None
Table 7-11: VITEK® 2 Compact 60 — BCB Jumper Settings
Header
Installed Jumpers
HDR1
All
HDR2
None
HDR4
None
HDR5
All
HDR6
None
HDR7
1–2
HDR8
1–2, indicates Compact Instrument (not a
VITEK® 2)
3–4, user I/F LCD Installed
7-14
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Schematics, Diagrams and Test Points
DC Power Distribution Board
Table 7-11: VITEK® 2 Compact 60 — BCB Jumper Settings (Continued)
Header
Installed Jumpers
HDR11
None
HDR12
11–12
13–14
HDR13
7.5
Speaker
HDR16
All
HDR19
None
HDR20
2–3
HDR21
2–3
P12
None
P15
531736-1 Assy., Hardware Key
DC Power Distribution Board
The DC Power Distribution Board provides power to the Bay Controller Board, the
Head Controller Board, the SPN Boards, the LCD, the two door LEDs, and the two
solenoid locks (see Figure 7-11). Figure 7-12 shows the board layout.
- See Compact Electronics and Connections Diagram Solenoid
LED
Solenoid
LED
Compact
BCB/LVM
Assembly
Bulkhead
Connector
P4
LCD Assy
J8
J10
J2
HCB
J4
J1
J3
J5-J7, J9
SPN Board Connectors
UPS I/F
J1
J10
Vacuum
Sealer
SPN
Incubator
SPN
J10
J10
Trans
SPN
Front
Panel
SPN
Figure 7-11: DC Power Distribution Board
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
7-15
Head Control Board
Schematics, Diagrams and Test Points
Full Scale
Attachment
Figure 7-12: DC Power Distribution Board Layout (P/N 530774)
7.6
Head Control Board
The Head Control Board (HCB) connects to the BCB and provides local control
functions and data sharing for the bar code reader and the instrument optics.
Figure 7-13 shows a block diagram of the HCB connections. Figure 7-14 shows an
illustration of HCB part number 530772.
Transmittance
Emitter
16 Pin Ribbon Cable
(P/N 531807-1)
J3
J10
J11
Compact
P1
BCB/LVM Assembly
(P/N 531750-X,
6200113, 6200114)
J2
34 Pin Ribbon
Cable
(P/N 531816-1)
Transmittance
Detector
J12
24 Pin TP
Ribbon Cable
(P/N 531806-1)
J1
J8
6-Wire
Harness
Reader Head
Motor
(P/N 530115-1)
J6
14 Pin TP
Ribbon Cable
(P/N 531815-1)
Barcode
Adapter Board
(P/N 531730-1)
DC Power
Distribution
Board
(P/N 530774-5)
J4
10 Pin TP
Ribbon Cable
(P/N 531824-1)
Bar Code
Reader
(P/N 192068-1)
Figure 7-13: Head Control Board for the VITEK® 2 Compact
7-16
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Schematics, Diagrams and Test Points
Sample Prep Node (SPN) Board
Full Scale
Attachment
Figure 7-14: Head Control Board Layout (P/N 530772)
7.7
Sample Prep Node (SPN) Board
The SPN boards are used to control the different systems in the VITEK® 2 Compact
Instrument. The SPN board jumpers JP1 through JP8 identify which system the SPN
board controls. Only one jumper should be installed per board, according to
Table 7-12.
Note:
The node number listed in Table 7-12 refers to the number the BCB uses to
communicate with the SPN board.
Table 7-12: SPN Board Jumper Setting
SPN Board (P/N: 531720-2, -3 and -5 and
6200271)
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Jumper Position
Board Function
Node
JP1
–
–
JP2
Front Panel
2
JP3
Transport
3
JP4
–
–
JP5
–
–
JP6
–
–
JP7
–
–
JP8
Carousel
8
7-17
Sample Prep Node (SPN) Board
Schematics, Diagrams and Test Points
The SPN boards receive power from the DC Power Distribution Board. Figure 7-15
and Figure 7-16 show illustrations of the SPN board. Table 7-13 describes some
general information about the SPN boards.
Full Scale
Attachment
Figure 7-15: Sample Prep Node (SPN) Board Layout (P/N 531720)
7-18
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Schematics, Diagrams and Test Points
Sample Prep Node (SPN) Board
Full Scale
Attachment
Figure 7-16: Sample Prep Node (SPN) Board Layout (P/N 6200271)
Table 7-13: SPN Board – General Information
SPN Board
Locations
Operating Condition
Definition
LED 1
Red/Flashing
Network
LED 2
Solid Green
+ 5 VDC
LED 3
Red when the DC fans or
solenoids are engaged.
Examples:
Incubator SPN LED 3 is always
illuminated, because the Carousel DC
fans are always running.
Transport SPN LED 3 illuminates
when the cabinet fans run.
J7 and J8
Bipolar Motor Connection
24 V
J5 and J6
Unipolar Motor Connection
12 V
F1
Fuse 1
24 V Bipolar Motor Fuse
F2
Fuse 2
SPN Network Fuse
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
7-19
Sample Prep Node (SPN) Board
7.7.1
Schematics, Diagrams and Test Points
SPN Board Block Diagrams
Figure 7-17 through Figure 7-19 show block diagrams of the SPN boards and the
major components sensed or controlled by each board.
Cassette Transport Subsystem
Cassette Encoder Board
Transport
Front
Sensor
Transport
Middle
Sensor
Transport
Rear Sensor
J14 J20 J4
Cassette
Presence
Sensor
J2
Transport
Home
Sensor
J5
Transport Motor
J9
J16
Card
Presence
Sensor
Power
Supply
Temp
Sensor
TO:
DC Power Distribution
Board
Network
J19
Autoloader
Home
Sensor
J10
J1
J3
Cam Home
Sensor
J6
J8
J17
J18
J23
Autoloader Motor
Autoloader
Subsystem
Cam Motor
Cam Subsystem
Cabinet Fan
#1
Input
Cabinet
Temp
Sensor #2
Cabinet Fan
#2
Exhaust
Cabinet Cooling Subsystem
Blank
J7
J11
J12
J13
J15
J21
Figure 7-17: Transport SPN Board
7-20
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Schematics, Diagrams and Test Points
Sample Prep Node (SPN) Board
Load Door Subsystem
Load Door
LED Indicator
Load Door Lock
Solenoid
Load Door
Sensor
Load Door
Solenoid
Sensor
Filler Door
Sensor
TO:
DC Power Distribution
Board
Network
Filler Door
Subsystem
J6
J1
J2
J15
J18
Cabinet
Temp
Sensor #1
J10
Waste Door
Sensor
J14
Waste Door
Subsystem
User Access
Top Door
Sensor
Filler Door
LED Indicator
J9
J3
User Access
Front Door
Sensor
J4
User Access
Door
Solenoid
Sensor
J5
User Access
Door Lock
Solenoid
User Access Door Subsystem
Blank
J7
J8
J11
J12
J13
J16
J17
J19
J20
J21
J23
Figure 7-18: Front Panel SPN Board
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
7-21
Sample Prep Node (SPN) Board
Schematics, Diagrams and Test Points
Carousel / Incubator Subsystem
TO:
DC Power Distribution
Board
Network
Carousel Motor
Ejector
Home
Sensor
Carousel
Home
Sensor
J5
Carousel
Bottom
Index
Sensor
Carousel
Top Index
Sensor
J2
J14
J16
J1
Carousel
Cover
Sensor
Incubator Fan
Upper
Incubator Fan
Lower
J23
J17
J10
J18
Incubator
Carousel
Temp
Sensor
J19
Incubator
Heater
Temp
Sensor
J3
J11
Ejector Motor
J6
J9
Heater SSR
Ejector
Subsystem
Card
Presence
Sensor
(MFG Test
Location)
Blank
J4
J7
J8
J12
J13
J15
J20
J21
Figure 7-19: Carousel/Incubator SPN Board
7-22
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Schematics, Diagrams and Test Points
7.8
Vacuum Sealer Board
Vacuum Sealer Board
The Vacuum Sealer Board is used to control the Vacuum/Filler Station and the Card
Sealer Assembly.
The Vacuum Sealer Board receives power from the DC Power Distribution Board.
Figure 7-20 and Figure 7-21 show illustrations of the Vacuum Sealer Board.
Table 7-14 describes some general information about the Vacuum Sealer Board.
Full Scale
Attachment
Figure 7-20: Vacuum Sealer Board Layout (P/N 531728)
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
7-23
Vacuum Sealer Board
Schematics, Diagrams and Test Points
Full Scale
Attachment
Figure 7-21: Vacuum Sealer Board Layout (P/N 6200270)
Table 7-14: Vacuum Sealer Board – General Information
7-24
SPN Board
Locations
Operating Condition
Definition
LED 1
Solid Green
+12 VDC
LED 2
Green/Flashing
Network
J2
Unipolar Motor Connection
12 V
F1
Fuse 1 (3 A)
SPN Network Fuse
F2
Fuse 2 (3 A)
+24 VDC
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Schematics, Diagrams and Test Points
7.8.1
Vacuum Sealer Board
Vacuum Sealer Board Block Diagram
Figure 7-22 shows a block diagram of the Vacuum Sealer Board, with the major
components sensed or controlled.
TO:
DC Power Distribution
Board
Network
Sealer Subsystem
Sealer
Home
Sensor
Sealer Motor
Sealer
Connector
Board / Sealer
Wire
J8
J2
J4
J14
Waste
Chute
Sensor
J13
Waste
Container
Sensor
J1
J9
3-Way Valve
Assembly
J5
Proportional
Valve
J7
Pump SSR
Waste
Subsystem
Blank
J6
J10
J11
J15
Filler Subsystem
Figure 7-22: Vacuum Sealer SPN Board
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
7-25
Transmittance Optics System Cross-Section
7.9
Schematics, Diagrams and Test Points
Transmittance Optics System Cross-Section
Emitter (LED)
Emitter Ceramic Substrate
Emitter Aperture
Sample Well
TOP VIEW
Detector Aperture
Detector (Photodiode)
Detector Ceramic Substrate
Emitter Output
SIDE VIEW
Sample Well
Figure 7-23: Transmittance Optics System — Cross-Section
7-26
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Chapter 8: Instrument Error Codes
About this Chapter
This chapter describes how to determine the status of the VITEK® 2 Compact
instrument, how to identify error codes within instrument diagnostics, and how to
determine why errors are generated by reviewing the bay controller board error code
detail found in Table 8-1.
For information about reviewing Warning and Error Messages from the User Interface,
see Appendix F, User Diagnostics.
Chapter Contents
8.1
Instrument Firmware Error Codes • 8-2
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.1.4
Diagnostic Login Information • 8-2
Instrument Status • 8-2
Error Code Description • 8-2
Error Code List • 8-3
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
8-1
Instrument Firmware Error Codes
8.1
Instrument Error Codes
Instrument Firmware Error Codes
This section contains a list of all the possible warning and error codes that can be
generated by a VITEK® 2 Compact instrument.
8.1.1
Diagnostic Login Information
1. To achieve a successful Service login, at the diagnostic Prompt > type LOGIN
watson9 and press Enter.
A line describing the login group confirms a successful login.
Note:
IMPORTANT:
8.1.2
Logins are case-sensitive.
This login is only to be used by trained bioMérieux personnel, and
must not be disseminated. (See Drawing 532612 – VITEK® 2 Compact
Field Service Commands for more information.)
Instrument Status
To review the instrument's pending messages, from the diagnostic Prompt > type
DUMP_COMPSTAT and press Enter.
To review the instrument's historical messages, from the diagnostic Prompt > type
DUMP_EQM and press Enter.
To review the instrument’s log and error messages, refer to Section 6.4.13, Flash Log
Commands.
8.1.3
Error Code Description
When the instrument encounters a warning or error, the instrument detailed Error
Message Queue must be accessed. The error code is located in the lower right corner
of the detailed User Interface Error Message Queue.
The error code will be displayed in the following manner:
<user code> : <sub-system> . <component> . <detail code>
Example: 3:13.00.154
• The Detail Code number is the last number in the error code and is the primary
number to look for when a warning or error occurs. This number refers the user to
the corresponding set of User Code, Subsystem, Component, and a Detail Code
Description found in the Error Code List.
• The User Code is the first number displayed in the error code. It describes the
severity (i.e. Warning or Error) and the actual Message text displayed in the
detailed Error Message Queue.
8-2
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Instrument Error Codes
Instrument Firmware Error Codes
• The Subsystem identification is the second number displayed in the error code. It
describes the affected subsystem in the instrument.
• The Component identification is the third number displayed in the error code. It
describes the affected individual component in the instrument.
• The Detail Code Description is a description pertaining to the error and is found in
the error code table of this document. This information is to assist in the
troubleshooting and diagnosing of an instrument fault condition.
8.1.4
Error Code List
The table that follows shows all of the unique Bay Controller Board Detail Codes that
can be generated by the instrument, along with the corresponding User Code,
Subsystem identification, Component identification, and a Detail Code Description.
Table 8-1: BCB Error Code List
Detail
Code
User Code
Subsystem
Component
Detail Code Description
1
N/A
N/A
N/A
2
1
Software Failure
5
Software
10
Sw General
SPN message length (2)
3
1
Software Failure
5
Software
10
Sw General
Network send call made without a
mailbox
4
1
Software Failure
5
Software
10
Sw General
No kernel timer for system timer
class
5
1
Software Failure
5
Software
10
Sw General
Task class dtor called
6
1
Software Failure
5
Software
10
Sw General
Processor exception
7
1
Software Failure
5
Software
10
Sw General
Generic Software Panic
8
1
Software Failure
5
Software
11
Sw Heap
Heap - unknown error
9
1
Software Failure
5
Software
11
Sw Heap
Heap bad free (invalid block)
10
1
Software Failure
5
Software
11
Sw Heap
Heap corrupt
11
1
Software Failure
5
Software
11
Sw Heap
Heap out of memory
12
12
Software Warning
5
Software
11
Sw Heap
Heap low. Reserve heap added
13
1
Software Failure
9
Barcode
Scanner
10
Sw General
Bar Code Scanner software
initialization failure
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
N/A
8-3
Instrument Firmware Error Codes
Instrument Error Codes
Table 8-1: BCB Error Code List (Continued)
Detail
Code
8-4
User Code
Subsystem
Component
Detail Code Description
14
3
Vacuum/Loader Failure
9
Barcode
Scanner
13
Hw General
Bar Code Scanner hardware
initialization failure
15
8
Autoloader Jam
2
Autoloader
30
Autoloader
Motor
Autoloader motor failed to home
16
7
Transport Jam
7
Transport
32
Transport
Motor
Transport motor failed to home
during initialization.
17
7
Transport Jam
7
Transport
32
Transport
Motor
Transport motor failed to home
during loading (after cassette
inspection)
18
9
Sealer Jam
8
Sealer
31
Sealer Motor
Sealer motor failed to home
(during initialization or retraction)
19
3
Vacuum/Loader Failure
8
Sealer
41
Sealer Wire
Sealer low voltage (during
initialization or sealer cycle)
20
3
Vacuum/Loader Failure
8
Sealer
41
Sealer Wire
Sealer high voltage (during
initialization or sealer cycle)
21
3
Vacuum/Loader Failure
8
Sealer
41
Sealer Wire
Sealer low current (during
initialization or sealer cycle)
22
3
Vacuum/Loader Failure
8
Sealer
41
Sealer Wire
Sealer high current (during
initialization or sealer cycle)
23
13
Load Door Open
7
Transport
42
Load Door
Load door open while attempting
initialization
24
13
Load Door Open
7
Transport
42
Load Door
Load door open while attempting
to initiate a cassette load
25
3
Vacuum/Loader Failure
7
Transport
42
Load Door
Load door won't lock
26
3
Vacuum/Loader Failure
7
Transport
42
Load Door
Load door won't unlock
27
7
Transport Jam
7
Transport
32
Transport
Motor
* OBSOLETE * Cassette is not
hooked on transport block pins (1)
28
7
Transport Jam
7
Transport
32
Transport
Motor
Cassette is not hooked on
transport block pins during
initialization
29
7
Transport Jam
7
Transport
32
Transport
Motor
Transport motor stalled while
counting cards
30
NA
NA
NA
NA
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Instrument Error Codes
Instrument Firmware Error Codes
Table 8-1: BCB Error Code List (Continued)
Detail
Code
User Code
Subsystem
Component
Detail Code Description
31
7
Transport Jam
7
Transport
32
Transport
Motor
Transport motor stalled while
reading card bar code
32
7
Transport Jam
7
Transport
32
Transport
Motor
Transport motor stalled while
moving cassette toward load door
during bar code retry
33
7
Transport Jam
7
Transport
32
Transport
Motor
Transport motor stalled while
moving cassette toward load door
when skipping sealing operation
34
7
Transport Jam
7
Transport
32
Transport
Motor
Transport motor stalled while
sealing
35
7
Transport Jam
7
Transport
32
Transport
Motor
Transport motor stalled while
loading cards into carousel
36
7
Transport Jam
7
Transport
32
Transport
Motor
Transport motor stalled while
unloading cassette
37
8
Autoloader Jam
2
Autoloader
30
Autoloader
Motor
Autoloader motor stalled while
loading cards into carousel
38
3
Vacuum/Loader Failure
10
Spn Board
60
Vacuum Spn
Vacuum SPN board did not
respond or has an error
39
4
Carousel/Reader Failure
10
Spn Board
62
Carousel Spn
Carousel SPN board did not
respond or has an error
40
3
Vacuum/Loader Failure
10
Spn Board
61
Transport Spn
Transport SPN board did not
respond or has an error
41
NA
NA
NA
42
10
Host Communication
Failure
5
Software
50
Sw Hostcom
Bad command header received
43
10
Host Communication
Failure
5
Software
50
Sw Hostcom
Bad, unrecognized, command
name or version received.
44
10
Host Communication
Failure
5
Software
50
Sw Hostcom
Bad command received: authOff,
version 1
45
10
Host Communication
Failure
5
Software
50
Sw Hostcom
Bad command received: authOn,
version 1
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
<unused>
8-5
Instrument Firmware Error Codes
Instrument Error Codes
Table 8-1: BCB Error Code List (Continued)
Detail
Code
8-6
User Code
Subsystem
Component
Detail Code Description
46
10
Host Communication
Failure
5
Software
50
Sw Hostcom
Bad command received:
authSetMode, version 1
47
10
Host Communication
Failure
5
Software
50
Sw Hostcom
Bad command received: cardmap,
version 1
48
10
Host Communication
Failure
5
Software
50
Sw Hostcom
Bad command received:
ejectCard, version 1
49
10
Host Communication
Failure
5
Software
50
Sw Hostcom
Bad command received:
firmwareUpdate, version 1
50
10
Host Communication
Failure
5
Software
50
Sw Hostcom
Bad command received:
infoRequest, version 1
51
10
Host Communication
Failure
5
Software
50
Sw Hostcom
Bad command received:
langChange, version 1
52
10
Host Communication
Failure
5
Software
50
Sw Hostcom
Bad command received:
rexmitRequest, version 1
53
10
Host Communication
Failure
5
Software
50
Sw Hostcom
Bad command received:
statusRequest, version 1
54
10
Host Communication
Failure
5
Software
50
Sw Hostcom
Bad command received:
timeResponse, version 1
55
10
Host Communication
Failure
5
Software
50
Sw Hostcom
Bad command received:
vcDefine1, version 1
56
10
Host Communication
Failure
5
Software
50
Sw Hostcom
Bad command received: vcFlush,
version 1
57
15
Carousel Cover Missing
1
Caro
47
Caro Cover
Carousel cover is missing during
pre-initialization check
58
15
Carousel Cover Missing
1
Caro
47
Caro Cover
Carousel cover missing during
carousel initialization
59
15
Carousel Cover Missing
1
Caro
47
Caro Cover
Carousel cover detected missing
during move
60
14
User Access Door Open
1
Caro
44
Access Door
User access door is open during
initialization
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Instrument Error Codes
Instrument Firmware Error Codes
Table 8-1: BCB Error Code List (Continued)
Detail
Code
User Code
Subsystem
Component
Detail Code Description
61
3
Vacuum/Loader Failure
1
Caro
44
Access Door
User access door won't lock
62
3
Vacuum/Loader Failure
1
Caro
44
Access Door
User access door won't unlock
63
18
Carousel Section
Missing
1
Caro
48
Caro Quad
Quad missing during initialization
64
6
Carousel Jam
1
Caro
33
Carousel
Motor
Carousel motor failed to home
during initialization
65
4
Carousel/Reader Failure
12
Incubator
36
Incubator
Incubator temperature controller
did not initialize
66
5
Reader Jam
4
Ejector
34
Ejector Motor
67
5
Reader Jam
3
Cam
20
Sensor 1
Cam motor failed to home during
initialization
68
1
Software Failure
1
Caro
10
Sw General
Unable to find an empty carousel
slot while loading (internal
firmware error)
69
1
Software Failure
1
Caro
10
Sw General
Bad carousel state while autoloading
70
1
Software Failure
1
Caro
10
Sw General
Bad carousel slot state while autoloading (internal firmware error)
71
1
Software Failure
1
Caro
10
Sw General
Bad bar code while loading
(internal firmware error)
72
17
Card(s) Terminated
1
Caro
10
Sw General
All cards unloaded due to
incubator temperature fault,
carousel position lost or unload via
DML
73
17
Card(s) Terminated
1
Caro
10
Sw General
Cards unloaded because their
wellmap changed
74
6
Carousel Jam
1
Caro
33
Carousel
Motor
Carousel motor stalled
75
4
Carousel/Reader Failure
1
Caro
33
Carousel
Motor
Carousel position lost (all cards
unloaded)
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Ejector motor failed to home
during initialization
8-7
Instrument Firmware Error Codes
Instrument Error Codes
Table 8-1: BCB Error Code List (Continued)
Detail
Code
8-8
User Code
Subsystem
Component
Detail Code Description
76
37
The card in slot (X) of
cassette (X) was
rejected because this
instrument did not have
an appropriate wellmap
1
Caro
10
Sw General
Wellmap doesn't exist for a card
during cassette inspection
77
17
Card(s) Terminated
1
Caro
10
Sw General
Fill-to-load timeout was exceeded
(card(s) unloaded)
78
17
Card(s) Terminated
1
Caro
70
Reader Head
Could not find the first edge of the
card (terminated slot)
79
5
Reader Jam
1
Caro
70
Reader Head
Could not find the first edge of the
card (we are JAMMED)
80
17
Card(s) Terminated
1
Caro
70
Reader Head
Each optical position mark was not
detected in the card while moving
out (terminated slot)
81
5
Reader Jam
1
Caro
70
Reader Head
Each optical position mark was not
detected in the card while moving
out (we are JAMMED)
82
19
Waste Bucket Full or
Waste Door Open
1
Caro
49
Waste Bucket
Could not unload card, waste tray
is full
83
19
Waste Bucket Full or
Waste Door Open
1
Caro
49
Waste Bucket
Could not unload card, waste door
is open
84
19
Waste Bucket Full or
Waste Door Open
1
Caro
49
Waste Bucket
Could not unload card, waste
bucket is not present
85
19
Waste Bucket Full or
Waste Door Open
1
Caro
49
Waste Bucket
Could not unload card, waste
chute is clogged
86
19
Waste Bucket Full or
Waste Door Open
1
Caro
70
Reader Head
Failed to eject card into waste
bucket (card was still in read head)
87
5
Reader Jam
1
Caro
70
Reader Head
Failed to place the card back into
carousel while verifying the head
was clear (we are JAMMED)
88
5
Reader Jam
1
Caro
70
Reader Head
Could not find the first edge of the
card while reading (we are
JAMMED)
89
17
Card(s) Terminated
1
Caro
70
Reader Head
Could not find the first edge of the
card while reading (terminated
slot)
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Instrument Error Codes
Instrument Firmware Error Codes
Table 8-1: BCB Error Code List (Continued)
Detail
Code
User Code
Subsystem
Component
Detail Code Description
90
5
Reader Jam
1
Caro
70
Reader Head
Each optical position mark (Air)
was not detected while reading
(we are JAMMED)
91
17
Card(s) Terminated
1
Caro
70
Reader Head
Each optical position mark (Air)
was not detected while reading
(terminated slot)
92
5
Reader Jam
1
Caro
70
Reader Head
Each optical position mark
(Plastic) was not detected while
reading (we are JAMMED)
93
17
Card(s) Terminated
1
Caro
70
Reader Head
Each optical position mark
(Plastic) was not detected while
reading (terminated slot)
94
5
Reader Jam
1
Caro
70
Reader Head
The last edge of the card was not
detected while reading (we are
JAMMED)
95
17
Card(s) Terminated
1
Caro
70
Reader Head
The last edge of the card was not
detected while reading (terminated
slot)
96
5
Reader Jam
1
Caro
70
Reader Head
An additional row was detected
while reading (we are JAMMED)
97
17
Card(s) Terminated
1
Caro
70
Reader Head
An additional row was detected
while reading (terminated slot)
98
5
Reader Jam
3
Cam
0
Na
Cam failure while reading (we are
JAMMED)
99
5
Reader Jam
3
Cam
0
Na
Cam failure while retrying to return
card to the carousel, double fault
(we are JAMMED)
100
5
Reader Jam
3
Cam
0
Na
Cam failure while retrying to return
card to carousel, double fault after
jogging the carousel (we are
JAMMED)
101
5
Reader Jam
3
Cam
0
Na
Carousel jam after a Cam failure
while retrying to return card to
carousel, double fault while
jogging the carousel (we are
JAMMED)
102
5
Reader Jam
3
Cam
0
Na
Cam failure while placing the card
back into the carousel after a
power-fail, double fault (we are
JAMMED)
103
4
Carousel/Reader Failure
1
Caro
93
Hcb
Head Control Board failed self-test
during initialization or before card
reading
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
8-9
Instrument Firmware Error Codes
Instrument Error Codes
Table 8-1: BCB Error Code List (Continued)
Detail
Code
User Code
Subsystem
Component
Detail Code Description
104
43
Optics problem (may
need cleaning)
1
Caro
90
Tx1
Transmittance Optics module TX1
failed calibration
105
43
Optics problem
(may need cleaning)
1
Caro
91
Tx2
Transmittance Optics module TX2
failed calibration
106
43
Optics problem
(may need cleaning)
1
Caro
92
Tx3
Transmittance Optics module TX3
failed calibration
107
43
Optics problem
(may need cleaning)
1
Caro
90
Tx1
Transmittance Optics module TX1
position sensor not functional
108
43
Optics problem
(may need cleaning)
1
Caro
91
Tx2
Transmittance Optics module TX2
position sensor not functional
109
43
Optics problem
(may need cleaning)
1
Caro
92
Tx3
Transmittance Optics module TX3
position sensor not functional
110
21
Optics Almost Out of
Calibration
1
Caro
90
Tx1
Transmittance Optics module TX1
nearing calibration limits
111
21
Optics Almost Out of
Calibration
1
Caro
91
Tx2
Transmittance Optics module TX2
nearing calibration limits
112
21
Optics Almost Out of
Calibration
1
Caro
92
Tx3
Transmittance Optics module TX3
nearing calibration limits
113
43
Optics problem
(may need cleaning)
1
Caro
90
Tx1
Transmittance Optics module TX1
is not available to process this
card
114
43
Optics problem
(may need cleaning)
1
Caro
91
Tx2
Transmittance Optics module TX2
is not available to process this
card
115
43
Optics problem
(may need cleaning)
1
Caro
92
Tx3
Transmittance Optics module TX3
is not available to process this
card
116
43
Optics problem
(may need cleaning)
1
Caro
90
Tx1
Transmittance Optics module TX1
reference readings out of range
117
43
Optics problem
(may need cleaning)
1
Caro
91
Tx2
Transmittance Optics module TX2
reference readings out of range
8-10
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Instrument Error Codes
Instrument Firmware Error Codes
Table 8-1: BCB Error Code List (Continued)
Detail
Code
User Code
Subsystem
Component
Detail Code Description
118
43
Optics problem
(may need cleaning)
1
Caro
92
Tx3
Transmittance Optics module TX3
reference readings out of range
119
11
Internal Data Error
11
Bcb
81
Ldm Nvram
Component Stat were all zeros,
NVRAM failure
120
11
Internal Data Error
11
Bcb
81
Ldm Nvram
Component Stats Primary and
backup copies have failed
121
11
Internal Data Error
11
Bcb
81
Ldm Nvram
Component Stats header was bad
during a backup restore
122
11
Internal Data Error
11
Bcb
81
Ldm Nvram
Carousel Map was all zeros,
NVRAM failure
123
11
Internal Data Error
11
Bcb
81
Ldm Nvram
Carousel Map Primary and backup
copies have failed
124
11
Internal Data Error
11
Bcb
81
Ldm Nvram
Carousel Map header was bad
during a backup restore
125
11
Internal Data Error
11
Bcb
80
Ldm Flash
Cassette Object Primary and
backup copies have failed
126
12
Software Warning
11
Bcb
80
Ldm Flash
FLASH write did not complete
from last session, therefore Critical
data has been lost
127
11
Internal Data Error
11
Bcb
80
Ldm Flash
FLASH write failure. Could not
mark packet as 'sent'
128
11
Internal Data Error
11
Bcb
80
Ldm Flash
FLASH erase failure. Could not
erase/format the database (CTDB)
129
12
Software Warning
11
Bcb
80
Ldm Flash
Database is full, older unsent
critical data has been erased for
the new critical data
130
11
Internal Data Error
11
Bcb
80
Ldm Flash
FLASH erase failure. Could not
erase the next sector (CTDB)
131
11
Internal Data Error
11
Bcb
80
Ldm Flash
FLASH program failure. Could not
write the sector Id (sector header)
132
11
Internal Data Error
11
Bcb
80
Ldm Flash
FLASH program failure. Could not
write record header
133
11
Internal Data Error
11
Bcb
80
Ldm Flash
FLASH program failure. Could not
write record payload
134
11
Internal Data Error
11
Bcb
80
Ldm Flash
FLASH program failure. Could not
write record CRC
135
11
Internal Data Error
11
Bcb
80
Ldm Flash
FLASH read failure. Could not
read the sector Id (sector header)
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
8-11
Instrument Firmware Error Codes
Instrument Error Codes
Table 8-1: BCB Error Code List (Continued)
Detail
Code
User Code
Subsystem
Component
Detail Code Description
136
11
Internal Data Error
11
Bcb
80
Ldm Flash
FLASH erase failure. Could not
erase the next sector (LHDB)
137
11
Internal Data Error
11
Bcb
80
Ldm Flash
FLASH program failure. Could not
write record payload (LHDB)
138
11
Internal Data Error
11
Bcb
80
Ldm Flash
FLASH program failure. Could not
write record CRC (LHDB)
139
11
Internal Data Error
11
Bcb
81
Ldm Nvram
EQM was all zeros, NVRAM
failure
140
11
Internal Data Error
11
Bcb
81
Ldm Nvram
EQM Primary and backup copies
have failed
141
11
Internal Data Error
11
Bcb
81
Ldm Nvram
EQM header was bad during a
backup restore
142
12
Software Warning
11
Bcb
80
Ldm Flash
VCM CRC Failed, installing
defaults
143
11
Internal Data Error
11
Bcb
80
Ldm Flash
FLASH program failure. Could not
write wellMaps to FLASH
144
12
Software Warning
11
Bcb
80
Ldm Flash
WellMap Manager CRC Failed,
installing defaults
145
11
Internal Data Error
11
Bcb
80
Ldm Flash
WellMap Manager can not add
more WellMaps, we are full
146
22
Hardware Failure
13
Hardware
12
Spnvarsync
SPN Variable Sync failed
147
NA
NA
NA
<unused>
148
NA
NA
NA
<unused>
149
NA
NA
NA
<unused>
150
NA
NA
NA
<unused>
151
NA
NA
NA
<unused>
152
20
Doors opened while
processing - Emergency
Stop occurred
13
Hardware
0
Na
Emergency Stop - door open while
locks engaged
153
22
Hardware Failure
11
Bcb
82
Clock
RTC and CPU Xtal cross-check
failure - frequency mismatch
154
3
Vacuum/Loader Failure
13
Hardware
0
Na
Cabinet Temperature High
155
22
Hardware Failure
13
Hardware
0
Na
Power Supply Temperature High
8-12
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Instrument Error Codes
Instrument Firmware Error Codes
Table 8-1: BCB Error Code List (Continued)
Detail
Code
User Code
Subsystem
Component
Detail Code Description
156
24
UPS power failure or
battery bad
13
Hardware
83
Ups
UPS indicates a power failure has
occurred
157
24
UPS power failure or
battery bad
13
Hardware
83
Ups
UPS Battery has failed
158
22
Hardware Failure
13
Hardware
25
Fan
Cabinet intake fan is not rotating
159
22
Hardware Failure
13
Hardware
25
Fan
Cabinet exhaust fan is not rotating
160
23
Incubator failure
12
Incubator
25
Fan
Incubator heater fan is not rotating
161
23
Incubator failure
12
Incubator
25
Fan
Incubator circulation fan is not
rotating
162
23
Incubator failure
12
Incubator
36
Incubator
Incubator temperature is out of
specification
163
25
Filler failure
6
Vacuum
0
Na
Filling chamber did not return to
ambient pressure after cycle
164
25
Filler failure
6
Vacuum
0
Na
Vacuum system - ambient
pressure is out of range
165
25
Filler failure
6
Vacuum
0
Na
Insufficient vacuum level achieved
during fill cycle
166
25
Filler failure
6
Vacuum
0
Na
Incorrect up slope during fill cycle
167
25
Filler failure
6
Vacuum
0
Na
Incorrect down slope during fill
cycle
168
25
Filler failure
6
Vacuum
0
Na
Leak detected in filling chamber
169
25
Filler failure
6
Vacuum
0
Na
Filler did not initialize properly
170
26
The card in slot (X) of
cassette (X) will not be
loaded because it was
not detected after a
power failure
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
The card was removed from the
cassette during a power failure
and was replaced with another
card.
171
26
The card in slot (X) of
cassette (X) will not be
loaded because it was
not detected after a
power failure
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
The card was removed from the
cassette during a power failure.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
8-13
Instrument Firmware Error Codes
Instrument Error Codes
Table 8-1: BCB Error Code List (Continued)
Detail
Code
User Code
Subsystem
Component
Detail Code Description
172
27
The card in slot (X) of
cassette (X) will not be
loaded because it could
not be scanned after a
power failure
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
The card was no longer readable
after a power failure.
173
28
The card in slot (X) of
cassette (X) will not be
loaded because it
exceeded the loading
timeout
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
The card was not loaded in the
time allowed [1] (power failure).
174
28
The card in slot (X) of
cassette (X) will not be
loaded because it
exceeded the loading
timeout
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
The card was not loaded in the
time allowed [2] (power failure).
175
29
The card in slot (X) of
cassette (X) will not be
loaded because it
encountered a
mechanical error while
sealing
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
The card was being sealed when a
mechanical error occurred [1].
(Power Failure)
176
29
The card in slot (X) of
cassette (X) will not be
loaded because it
encountered a
mechanical error while
sealing
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
OBSOLETE The card was being
sealed when a mechanical error
occurred [2]. (Power Failure)
177
29
The card in slot (X) of
cassette (X) will not be
loaded because it
encountered a
mechanical error while
sealing
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
The card was being sealed when a
transport mechanical error
occurred. (Alarm)
178
29
The card in slot (X) of
cassette (X) will not be
loaded because it
encountered a
mechanical error while
sealing
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
The card was being sealed when a
transport mechanical error
occurred. (jam)
8-14
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Instrument Error Codes
Instrument Firmware Error Codes
Table 8-1: BCB Error Code List (Continued)
Detail
Code
User Code
Subsystem
Component
Detail Code Description
179
30
The card in slot (X) of
cassette (X) was
rejected because it has
expired
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
The card was rejected because
the card is expired.
180
31
The card in slot (X) of
cassette (X) was
rejected because of
insufficient carousel
capacity
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
The card was rejected because of
insufficient carousel capacity.
181
32
The card in slot (X) of
cassette (X) was
rejected because it was
introduced after the
cards in the cassette
were sealed
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
The card was rejected because it
was introduced in place of another
card during a power failure.
182
32
The card in slot (X) of
cassette (X) was
rejected because it was
introduced after the
cards in the cassette
were sealed
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
The card was rejected because it
was introduced where no previous
card was during a power failure.
183
33
The card in slot (X) of
cassette (X) was
rejected because this
instrument is not
configured with the
required optics
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
The card was rejected because
the instrument does not have the
required optics.
184
34
The card in slot (X) of
cassette (X) was
rejected because a
virtual card was defined
for that slot and not
detected
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
The card was defined in a VC and
was not detected during
processing.
185
35
The card in slot (X) of
cassette (X) was
rejected because the
scanned card did not
match the virtual card
defined for that slot
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
The card was rejected because it
mismatched the VC definition.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
8-15
Instrument Firmware Error Codes
Instrument Error Codes
Table 8-1: BCB Error Code List (Continued)
Detail
Code
User Code
Subsystem
Component
Detail Code Description
186
36
The card in slot (X) of
cassette (X) was
rejected because the
scanned card did not
match the virtual card
when the cassette timed
out
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
The card was rejected because it
mismatched the VC definition
during a timeout.
187
37
The card in slot (X) of
cassette (X) was
rejected because this
instrument did not have
an appropriate wellmap
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
The card was rejected because
the instrument did not have a
proper wellmap.
188
40
The card in slot (X) of
cassette (X) was not
loaded due to a
biological timeout
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
The card was rejected because
the cassette load timer timed out.
189
40
The card in slot (X) of
cassette (X) was not
loaded due to a
biological timeout
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
The card was rejected because
the cassette load timer timed out
over a power failure.
190
41
The card in slot (X) of
cassette (X) was not
loaded because it timed
out and was unreadable
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
The card was rejected because
the intervention timer timed out
and the bar code was unreadable.
191
42
The card in slot (X) of
cassette (X) was
rejected
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
The card was rejected. (User
skipped)
192
38
Cassette @cassette@
was aborted by the user
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
The cassette transfer was aborted
by the user.
193
39
Cassette @cassette@
was terminated due to a
fill failure
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
A filling failure occurred (cassette
canceled)
194
44
Component Stats
10
Spn Board
64
Spn
SPN Command Failed, no node
available
195
44
Component Stats
10
Spn Board
64
Spn
SPN Command Failed, no
response
196
44
Component Stats
10
Spn Board
64
Spn
SPN Command Failed, functional
component is not initialized
8-16
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Instrument Error Codes
Instrument Firmware Error Codes
Table 8-1: BCB Error Code List (Continued)
Detail
Code
User Code
Subsystem
Component
Detail Code Description
197
44
Component Stats
10
Spn Board
64
Spn
SPN Command Failed,
OP_FAILURE
198
44
Component Stats
10
Spn Board
64
Spn
SPN Network command failure
(unknown)
199
44
Component Stats
10
Spn Board
64
Spn
Motor home verification failure
200
44
Component Stats
10
Spn Board
64
Spn
Motor home failure
201
44
Component Stats
8
Sealer
41
Sealer Wire
Sealer low voltage (stats)
202
44
Component Stats
8
Sealer
41
Sealer Wire
Sealer high voltage (stats)
203
44
Component Stats
8
Sealer
41
Sealer Wire
Sealer low current (stats)
204
44
Component Stats
8
Sealer
41
Sealer Wire
Sealer high current (stats)
205
44
Component Stats
6
Vacuum
60
Vacuum Spn
No Vacuum detected
206
44
Component Stats
6
Vacuum
60
Vacuum Spn
Pressure not returning to ambient
207
44
Component Stats
6
Vacuum
60
Vacuum Spn
Ambient pressure out of range
(High/Low)
208
44
Component Stats
6
Vacuum
60
Vacuum Spn
Vacuum Low
209
44
Component Stats
6
Vacuum
60
Vacuum Spn
Vacuum up slope out of range
(High/Low)
210
44
Component Stats
6
Vacuum
60
Vacuum Spn
Vacuum down slope out of range
(High/Low)
211
44
Component Stats
6
Vacuum
60
Vacuum Spn
Vacuum system leak was detected
212
44
Component Stats
7
Transport
61
Transport Spn
Transport System Failed to Home
213
44
Component Stats
1
Caro
47
Caro Cover
Carousel Door Open
214
44
Component Stats
10
Spn Board
64
Spn
215
44
Component Stats
1
Caro
70
Reader Head
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Motor Stall
Could not find the first edge of the
card
8-17
Instrument Firmware Error Codes
Instrument Error Codes
Table 8-1: BCB Error Code List (Continued)
Detail
Code
User Code
Subsystem
Component
Detail Code Description
216
44
Component Stats
9
Barcode
Scanner
37
Bc Scanner
Bar Code String Length Error
217
44
Component Stats
9
Barcode
Scanner
37
Bc Scanner
Bar Code String contains invalid
data characters
218
44
Component Stats
1
Caro
93
Hcb
219
12
Software Warning
5
Software
10
Sw General
SPN Variable Patch warning due
to node version too low
220
1
Software Failure
5
Software
10
Sw General
SPN Variable Patch error due to
node version too low
221
12
Software Warning
5
Software
10
Sw General
SPN Variable Patch warning due
to node version too high
222
1
Software Failure
5
Software
10
Sw General
SPN Variable Patch error due to
node version too high
223
12
Software Warning
5
Software
10
Sw General
SPN Variable Patch warning set
failed
224
1
Software Failure
5
Software
10
Sw General
SPN Variable Patch error set
failed
225
12
Software Warning
5
Software
10
Sw General
A DML 'LOGIN' macro is present
226
1
Software Failure
5
Software
10
Sw General
Task stack spare space too low
227
46
Cassette @cassette@
was not transferred to
the loader within the
appropriate time.
0
Na
10
Sw General
The Cassette was not transferred
in the allotted time. (10 Minutes)
228
47
The scanned cassette
ID did not match the
stored cassette ID while
verifying an accepted
cassette.
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
The scanned cassette ID did not
match the scanned ID
229
48
Cassette @cassette@
was filling when power
failed and has been
discarded.
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
A cassette was filling when a
power failure occurred.
230
1
Software Failure
0
Na
10
Sw General
The Executive has detected a bad
state variable!
8-18
Transmittance Optics failed
calibration
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Instrument Error Codes
Instrument Firmware Error Codes
Table 8-1: BCB Error Code List (Continued)
Detail
Code
User Code
Subsystem
Component
Detail Code Description
231
28
The card in slot (X) of
cassette (X) will not be
loaded because it
exceeded the loading
timeout
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
The card was not loaded in the
time allowed[2] (power failure).
232
1
Software Failure
5
Software
0
Na
Reboots halted due to repeating
error
233
22
Hardware Failure
13
Hardware
0
Na
Extra SPN boards found on
network
234
22
Hardware Failure
13
Hardware
64
Spn
SPN board reset when not
expected to
235
22
Hardware Failure
10
Spn Board
63
Front Panel
Spn
Emergency Stop - Front Panel
SPN board failure
236
44
Component Stats
1
Caro
70
Reader Head
Each optical position mark was not
detected while moving through the
optical system
237
44
Component Stats
1
Caro
70
Reader Head
Retries were detected during an
Optical Measurement
238
45
BurnIn
9
Barcode
Scanner
37
Bc Scanner
Bar code expected but not read
239
45
BurnIn
9
Barcode
Scanner
37
Bc Scanner
Bar code doesn't match previous
reading
240
45
BurnIn
7
Transport
10
Sw General
No cards in cassette
241
45
BurnIn
1
Caro
10
Sw General
Slot states for carousel cards are
invalid for BurnIn
242
49
A fill was stopped
because no vacuum
was achieved (Clean the
Seal).
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
A vacuum was not achieved
during a fill.
243
50
Detected a loose read
head belt or noisy
optical position sensor
1
Caro
70
Reader Head
Position sensor TX1 tripped during
reader head belt test, off condition
244
50
Detected a loose read
head belt or noisy
optical position sensor
1
Caro
70
Reader Head
Position sensor TX2 tripped during
reader head belt test, off condition
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
8-19
Instrument Firmware Error Codes
Instrument Error Codes
Table 8-1: BCB Error Code List (Continued)
Detail
Code
User Code
Subsystem
Component
Detail Code Description
245
50
Detected a loose read
head belt or noisy
optical position sensor
1
Caro
70
Reader Head
Position sensor TX3 tripped during
reader head belt test, off condition
246
50
Detected a loose read
head belt or noisy
optical position sensor
1
Caro
70
Reader Head
Position sensor TX1 tripped during
reader head belt test, on condition
247
50
Detected a loose read
head belt or noisy
optical position sensor
1
Caro
70
Reader Head
Position sensor TX2 tripped during
reader head belt test, on condition
248
50
Detected a loose read
head belt or noisy
optical position sensor
1
Caro
70
Reader Head
Position sensor TX3 tripped during
reader head belt test, on condition
249
4
Carousel/Reader Failure
10
Spn Board
62
Carousel Spn
Carousel SPN board not
communicating
250
3
Vacuum/Loader Failure
10
Spn Board
61
Transport Spn
Transport SPN board not
communicating
251
3
Vacuum/Loader Failure
10
Spn Board
60
Vacuum Spn
Vacuum SPN board not
communicating
252
22
Hardware Failure
10
Spn Board
63
Front Panel
Spn
Front-panel SPN board not
communicating
253
40
The card in slot (X) of
cassette (X) was not
loaded due to a
biological timeout
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
The card was rejected because
the first read timer timed out.
254
40
The card in slot (X) of
cassette (X) was not
loaded due to a
biological timeout
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
The card was rejected because
the first read timer timed out.
255
41
The card in slot (X) of
cassette (X) was not
loaded because it timed
out and was unreadable
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
The card was rejected because
the intervention timer timed out
and the bar code was unreadable.
256
1
Software Failure
7
Transport
10
Sw General
Invalid transport state or bad
parameter
257
1
Software Failure
5
Software
0
Na
Watchdog reset due to task
timeout
8-20
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Instrument Error Codes
Instrument Firmware Error Codes
Table 8-1: BCB Error Code List (Continued)
Detail
Code
User Code
Subsystem
Component
Detail Code Description
The Cassette was removed over a
power failure while it was in
process.
258
51
The card in slot (X) of
cassette (X) was
terminated because the
cassette was not
present after a power
failure.
0
Na
10
Sw General
259
1
Software Failure
5
Software
0
Na
260
45
BurnIn
9
Barcode
Scanner
37
Bc Scanner
Card not detected by card
presence sensor
261
44
Component Stats
6
Vacuum
60
Vacuum Spn
Vacuum system lock was detected
262
1
Software Failure
5
Software
11
Sw Heap
263
40
The card in slot (X) of
cassette (X) was not
loaded due to a
biological timeout
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
The card was rejected because
the first read timer timed out
(power failure).
264
40
The card in slot (X) of
cassette (X) was not
loaded due to a
biological timeout
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
The card was rejected because
the cassette load timer timed out
(power failure).
265
41
The card in slot (X) of
cassette (X) was not
loaded because it timed
out and was unreadable
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
The card was rejected because
the intervention timer timed out
and the bar code was unreadable
(power failure).
266
42
The card in slot (X) of
cassette (X) was
rejected
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
The card was rejected because it
has a duplicate in the cassette or
carousel.
267
42
The card in slot (X) of
cassette (X) was
rejected
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
The card was rejected because
the cassette is out of alignment.
268
3
Vacuum/Loader Failure
8
Sealer
41
Sealer Wire
Sealer voltage not off when turning
off sealer
269
3
Vacuum/Loader Failure
8
Sealer
41
Sealer Wire
Sealer current not off when turning
off sealer
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
SPN response received from
incorrect variable or command
Heap - free twice
8-21
Instrument Firmware Error Codes
Instrument Error Codes
Table 8-1: BCB Error Code List (Continued)
Detail
Code
User Code
Subsystem
Component
Detail Code Description
270
44
Component Stats
8
Sealer
41
Sealer Wire
Sealer voltage not off (stats)
271
44
Component Stats
8
Sealer
41
Sealer Wire
Sealer current not off (stats)
272
10
Host Communication
Failure
5
Software
50
Sw Hostcom
Host communications has been
down for 60 minutes.
273
17
Card(s) Terminated
1
Caro
10
Sw General
Card(s) terminated due to missing
card in carousel from same
cassette
274
42
The card in slot (X) of
cassette (X) was
rejected
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
A card that was previously loaded
was rejected because the cassette
processing verification failed.
275
42
The card in slot (X) of
cassette (X) was
rejected
0
Na
94
Sw Workflow
A card that was previously loaded
was rejected because the verify
cassette set up (power failure or
jam) failed.
8-22
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Chapter 9: Host Computers
About this Chapter
This chapter shows examples of the different host computers models used in the
VITEK® 2 Compact system. It also describes how to perform a host computer full
system image, a full system restore, a data backup, and a data restore.
Note:
To view the VITEK® 2 Compact system cabling diagrams and the
corresponding validated peripheral configurations, see Chapter 2, System
Setup, Figure 2-5 to Figure 2-10.
Chapter Contents
9.1
HP® d530 Host PC • 9-2
9.2
HP® dc7100 Host PC • 9-3
9.3
HP® dc7700 Host PC • 9-4
9.4
HP® dc7800 Host PC • 9-5
9.5
HP® rp5700 Host PC • 9-6
9.6
Software Login • 9-7
9.6.1
9.6.2
9.6.3
Log in to Host PC Operating System • 9-7
Start System Software Application • 9-8
Log in to System Software • 9-9
9.7
Full System Image (Backup) • 9-10
9.8
Full System Image Restore • 9-11
9.9
Data Backup • 9-11
9.9.1
9.9.2
9.9.3
9.9.4
9.9.5
Recommended Backup Strategy • 9-11
Automatic Data Backup • 9-14
Backup Failures • 9-15
Manual Data Backup • 9-15
Data Backup – CD Drive Defective (Software Version Earlier Than 5.01)
• 9-17
9.10 Data Restore • 9-18
9.10.1 Automated Data Restore (All System Software Except 3.01) • 9-19
9.10.2 Automated Data Restore (3.01 System Software Only) • 9-21
9.10.3 Correct Continuous Reboot After Restore – 3.01 System Software • 9-23
9.10.4 Manual Data Restore (2.01 or Higher System Software) • 9-24
9.10.5 Manual Data Restore (System Software Earlier Than 2.01) • 9-27
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
9-1
HP® d530 Host PC
9.1
Host Computers
HP® d530 Host PC
HP® d530 Host PC Characteristics:
• Pentium® 4, 2.8 GHz processor
• 512 MB of RAM
• DVD + Rewritable Drive
• 40 GB Hard Drive
• 1.44 MB Floppy Drive
• Windows® Operating System
Figure 9-1: HP® d530 Host PC – Front
Figure 9-2: HP® d530 Host PC – Back
Figure 9-3: HP® d530 Host PC – Cable
9-2
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
HP® dc7100 Host PC
Host Computers
9.2
HP® dc7100 Host PC
Characteristics:
• Pentium® 4, 3.2 GHz processor
• 1 GB of RAM
• DVD + Rewritable Drive
• 40 GB Hard Drive
• Windows® Operating System
Figure 9-4: HP® dc7100 Host PC – Front
Figure 9-5: HP® dc7100 Host PC – Back
Figure 9-6: HP® dc7100 Host PC – Cable
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
9-3
HP® dc7700 Host PC
9.3
Host Computers
HP® dc7700 Host PC
Characteristics:
• Intel Core 2 E6600 Processor
• 2 GB of RAM
• DVD + Rewritable Drive
• 250 GB Hard Drive
• Windows® Operating System
Figure 9-7: HP® dc7700 Host PC – Front
Figure 9-8: HP® dc7700 Host PC – Back
Figure 9-9: HP® dc7700 Host PC – Cable
9-4
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
HP® dc7800 Host PC
Host Computers
9.4
HP® dc7800 Host PC
Characteristics:
• Intel Core 2 E6750 Processor
• 2GB of RAM
• DVD + Rewritable Drive
• 250 GB Hard Drive
• Windows® Operating System
Figure 9-10: HP® dc7800 Host PC – Front
Figure 9-11: HP® dc7800 Host PC – Back
Figure 9-12: HP® dc7800 Host PC – Cable
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
9-5
HP® rp5700 Host PC
9.5
Host Computers
HP® rp5700 Host PC
Characteristics:
• Intel Core 2 Duo E6400 Processor at 2.13GHz
• 2GB of RAM
• DVD + Rewritable Drive
• 250 GB Hard Drive
• Windows® Operating System
Figure 9-13: HP® rp5700 Host PC – Front
Figure 9-14: HP® rp5700 Host PC – Back
9-6
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Host Computers
Software Login
9.6
Software Login
9.6.1
Log in to Host PC Operating System
Table 9-1: Pre-Defined User Accounts
Pre-Defined
User Account
User Name
Default Password
Usage
Administrator
Admin
bmx_admin
Intended for limited
use in recovery of
locked account.
Administrator
bmx_admin
“password of the day” or
“password of the
month”1
Used by bioMérieux
Personnel for on-site
servicing. Password
changes daily (d530,
dc7100) or monthly
(dc7700 and newer)
depending on
computer model.
Administrator
bmx_remote2
“password of the
month”1
Used by bioMérieux
personnel for remote
servicing. Password
changes monthly.
Administrator
temp_admin3
“password of the hour”1
bioMérieux technical
support can provide to
customer when
assisting them over
the phone. Password
changes hourly.
Administrator
LabAdmin
labadmin
Customer login for
managing the PC.
Lab Supervisor
LabSuper
labsuper
Customer login for
managing the
VITEK® 2 Systems
software.
Lab Technologist
LabTech
labtech
Customer login for
managing the
VITEK® 2 Systems
software.
1These passwords are set automatically by the PC in order to enhance security and
availability of these accounts. These passwords can be obtained from the GCS portal.
2
The bmx_remote account is only available on dc7800 and newer PCs or PCs with ViLINK®
installed.
3The temp_admin account is only available on dc7700 and newer PCs.
1. Log in to an administrator account of the Windows® host PC operating system.
• Default Administrator login. Below is the factory default password for
Administrator. This password may have been changed.
User Name: Admin
Password: bmx_admin
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
9-7
Software Login
Host Computers
• d530 and dc7100 bmx_admin login. The password of this login is a
proprietary algorithm and changes daily. To determine the appropriate
password, refer to the GCS Portal.
User Name: bmx_admin
Password: password of the day (proprietary algorithm)
• dc7700, dc7800, and rp5700 bmx_admin login. The password of this
login is a proprietary algorithm and changes monthly. To determine the
appropriate password, refer to the GCS Portal.
User Name: bmx_admin
Password: password of the month (proprietary algorithm)
IMPORTANT:
9.6.2
The bmx_admin login and password is only to be used by trained
bioMérieux personnel, and must not be disseminated.
Start System Software Application
1. Double-click the VITEK® 2 Technology icon on the desktop to start the
application, or from the Start menu, select Programs > VITEK 2 Systems >
VITEK 2 Systems software.
2. A splash screen appears when the system software initializes.
Note:
If the software has recently been restarted, it may take several seconds for
the VITEK® 2 Systems software application to start while it is performing
normal database startup operations.
Figure 9-15: Splash Screen
Note:
9-8
If an error occurs, a message appears describing the error and providing a
suggested course of action. If the system software is already initialized the
splash screen will not appear.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Host Computers
9.6.3
Software Login
Log in to System Software
After the login window appears, log in to the system software. If you do not know an
appropriate user account to use, speak with the lab supervisor.
Default Login Example:
User Name: LabAdmin
Password: labadmin
Figure 9-16: Login Screen
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
9-9
Full System Image (Backup)
9.7
Host Computers
Full System Image (Backup)
Perform a host PC full system image (backup) at the time of system installation, at the
end of system preventive maintenance (PM), and at the end of a software update.
1. Insert the VITEK® 2 Systems Base OS DVD into the host PC DVD drive. (The
appropriate base OS Image is supplied with each host PC.)
2. Restart the host PC from the Windows® task bar by selecting Start > Shut
Down > Restart and click OK.
The computer boots from the Base OS DVD.
3. If prompted, select the language in which to see the backup/restore instructions,
and press Enter.
4. Select the backup option and press Enter.
Note:
The system will briefly display several screens as it prepares for the backup.
The host PC will display the following message:
Error accessing CD/DVD disk (52101). CD/DVD is not blank. Insert media
not previously written to.
5. Remove the Base OS DVD and insert a blank DVD+R disk. Wait 30 seconds or
until the drive light dims.
6. After the disk initializes, press Retry.
The host PC displays the overall backup progress/percent complete of the DVD
image backup. When complete, the host PC will open the DVD tray and display
a message that the backup is complete.
Note:
Depending on the size of your database, the full system image creation
process may require more than one DVD+R. If a second DVD+R is required
to continue the process, the system will prompt you to remove the full
DVD+R and insert another blank DVD+R.
7. When the process finishes (it takes approximately 30 minutes), remove the
newly created Full System Backup DVD. Label it with “Full System Backup”, the
current host PC software version, and the date.
Note:
If the full system image process required multiple DVD+Rs, label the first
DVD “Disk 1” and the second DVD “Disk 2”.
8. Close the DVD drive tray.
9. After you have removed the full system image DVD+R, press any key to reboot
the system.
10. Give the full system image DVDs to the customer for safe keeping.
9-10
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Host Computers
9.8
Full System Image Restore
Full System Image Restore
This procedure describes how to restore a VITEK® 2 Compact System from a
Customer Backup DVD.
CAUTION: A Full Disk Restore may only be performed on the same
host PC model that created the Full System Image (backup). For
example, a Full System Image that is created on a HP® d530 model can
ONLY be restored on a HP® d530 model.
1. Power on the VITEK® 2 Compact host PC.
2. Insert the Full System Backup DVD into the DVD drive.
3. Restart the computer, booting to the Full Disk Backup DVD.
4. Follow the prompts to select the full system image restore option, and press
Enter.
5. When prompted with the Warning message, press Enter to acknowledge that
the hard drive contents will be erased. The Norton Ghost® program will launch
and start the restore.
6. After the image is restored, follow the prompts to remove the DVD and reboot
the computer.
7. If a more recent copy of the customer's data is available, determine the host PC
system software version, and then restore the customer’s data using the
appropriate procedure:
• Section 9.10.1, Automated Data Restore (All System Software Except 3.01)
• Section 9.10.2, Automated Data Restore (3.01 System Software Only).
9.9
Data Backup
This section is derived from the VITEK® 2 Systems Software User Manual . It
describes recommended backups, the automatic data backup, and how to initiate a
manual data backup.
The database created from an automatic data backup and an initiated backup
includes isolate information in the active workspace, information in the inactive
workspace, and user custom settings.
9.9.1
Recommended Backup Strategy
It is very important to create backups on a regular basis. The following instructions
provide a recommended strategy to ensure all of the data is saved appropriately.
Note:
It is recommended that a minimum of five individual backups be maintained
at all times. If the storage device or drive reaches the maximum memory
capacity, the newest automatic backup will overwrite the oldest record.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
9-11
Data Backup
9.9.1.1
Host Computers
Daily
Use an external storage device or network drive to backup data for each day of the
week that the system is actively used.
9.9.1.2
Weekly
Once a week, replace the oldest backup record on the external storage device or
network drive location with a new one.
9.9.1.3
Long-Term USB Data Storage using the Burn Backup Application
For long-term storage, backup data can be transferred from a USB storage device
and archived to a DVD+R using the Burn Backup software.
Note:
A USB storage device should already be installed on the workstation and
assigned to the F: drive.
1. Insert a Blank DVD+R into the DVD drive. Wait 30 seconds, or until the drive
light dims.
2. From the desktop, double-click the Burn Backup icon.
Figure 9-17: Launch Burn Backup
The Burn Backup window displays and the files copy from the USB storage
device to the DVD+R.
Figure 9-18: Burn Backup
IMPORTANT:
Do not remove the USB storage device while the data is being copied.
3. The Burn Backup application displays the results of the data backup. Click OK
to acknowledge the successful backup and exit the application. If an error
9-12
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Host Computers
Data Backup
occurs, the application displays a specific error code. For more information
about error codes, see Table 9-2: Burn Backup Error Messages.
Figure 9-19: Burn Backup Result
4. Remove the DVD+R from the disk drive. Label the DVD+R and store it in a safe
location.
Once backup data has been archived to a DVD+R, it can be deleted from the
USB storage device. If the backup data is not deleted from the device, it will
automatically be overwritten to make room for newer backup records as
needed.
9.9.1.4
Burn Backup Error Messages
Table 9-2: Burn Backup Error Messages
Error Message Code
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Description
Resolution
No more free space in temp
folder.
Contact bioMérieux.
There is no media in the
drive.
Insert blank media.
The media is not blank.
Insert blank media.
The current media type is
unsupported.
Insert a blank DVD+R. Only
DVD+R media is supported.
9-13
Data Backup
Host Computers
Table 9-2: Burn Backup Error Messages (Continued)
Error Message Code
9.9.2
Description
Resolution
Size of the data to archive is
larger than the media size.
Insert a blank DVD+R. Only
DVD+R media is supported.
Burn failed.
Discard the media. Insert a
blank DVD+R and retry. If
the problem continues,
contact bioMérieux.
Burn failed.
Discard the media. Insert a
blank DVD+R and retry. If
the problem continues,
contact bioMérieux.
Unsupported recorder media
type.
Contact bioMérieux.
Source folder not found.
Check that USB storage
device is installed and
assigned to the F: drive.
Burn failed.
Discard the media. Insert a
blank DVD+R and retry. If
the problem continues,
contact bioMérieux.
Automatic Data Backup
Nightly backups of the database can be performed automatically and unattended. The
system software is set up to initiate a nightly backup. This is enabled in the General
Configuration view. For details, refer to the VITEK® 2 Systems Software User Manual.
When automatic backup is enabled or when a laboratory technologist initiates a
backup, the system software will fail if the external storage device or network drive
location is damaged or unavailable (reliability for data storage).
9-14
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Host Computers
Data Backup
If a failure occurs, the system software logs the backup failure and notes the reason
for failure.
If the storage device or drive reaches its maximum memory capacity, the newest
automatic backup will overwrite the oldest record.
If the nightly automatic backup fails to complete, you may receive a “Backup failed”
error alarm. You will be notified of this failure upon logging into your system. If the
nightly automatic backup fails, you can perform a manual backup. For more
information on how to perform a manual backup, refer to the VITEK® 2 Systems
Software User Manual.
9.9.3
Backup Failures
If the external storage device fails or the network drive location is unavailable during
an unattended backup, the system software logs the backup failure and notes the
reason for failure. This information can be considered an unacknowledged system
software alarm and is displayed to the next user to log in. An automatic or unattended
backup failure is logged in the alarm history.
If the backup was initiated by a laboratory technologist, the system software informs
the laboratory technologist that backup failed and the message notes the reason for
failure.
9.9.4
Manual Data Backup
A data backup may also be performed manually by initiating the Isolate Data Backup:
1. Select Start > Programs > VITEK 2 Systems > VITEK 2 Systems Backup
Restore.
IMPORTANT:
Logging in to the Backup/Restore program will automatically terminate
all remote client connections in 30 seconds. Remote users will be
prompted to log off.
2. Log in to the Backup/Restore application.
IMPORTANT:
A user with at least Supervisor level access must log in to the Backup/
Restore application.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
9-15
Data Backup
Host Computers
Figure 9-20: Backup Login
3. The system software will verify your User ID and password.
4. Select the Backup icon.
Figure 9-21: Backup Icon
5. From the Pick a Backup Location window, navigate to select a valid backup file
location.
The software will check for the following items:
• External storage device has been installed, and/or network drive location is
available.
• Verify that the external storage device or network drive location has
adequate free-space.
6. Choose Select Location to continue backup.
Figure 9-22: Select a Backup Location
9-16
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Host Computers
Data Backup
The system copies the entire system software database to the selected external
storage device or network drive location. Access to the system software will be
disabled for all users during the backup.
7. When backup completes, the lab supervisor is notified that the backup was
successful.
8. Click OK.
9. To begin using the VITEK® 2 Systems, you will need to log in again.
9.9.5
Data Backup – CD Drive Defective (Software Version Earlier Than
5.01)
If the CD drive fails on a Compact host PC, the system will not be able to create the
most recent database back-up onto a CD. Use the following procedure to copy the
most current backup files to a USB storage device. Then use these files to create a
back-up CD on a PC with a functional CD Read/Write drive. The created CD can then
be used to restore the database on a new Compact host PC.
IMPORTANT:
This procedure is not valid for software version 5.01 or higher. Starting
with the software version 5.01 release, data backups are saved to the
USB flash drive.
Materials Needed:
• USB Storage Device large enough to contain the zipped database files.
• PC with functional CD Read/Write Drive
• Blank CD
1. Logon to the Compact host PC using the Admin or BMX_Admin account. (See
Section 9.6.1, Log in to Host PC Operating System.)
2. Perform a manual data backup (Section 9.9.4, Manual Data Backup).
A warning message will indicate there was an issue with the drive, but the
appropriate files will write to the D:\ drive.
3. Double-click the Admin on BMXHOST 1 icon, or applicable icon. (This is the
My Computer icon on a standard PC desktop.)
4. Navigate to the directory D:\Program Files\VITEK 2
Compact\Externalization\Backup. The directory will contain a folder for each
day of the week a backup was created.
5. Double-click the folder containing the backup just performed. To do this, it may
be easier to click the Views icons and select Details. Then sort by Date
Modified.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
9-17
Data Restore
Host Computers
Figure 9-23: Backup Directory
6. This directory will contain two files, a Zip® file, and a text file. Select both files,
then right-click one of the files and select Copy.
Figure 9-24: Backup Zip® Files
7. Place a USB Storage Device into an open USB port on the PC.
8. Browse to the USB device on the host PC and Paste the two files onto the USB
Storage Device.
9. Use the Safely Remove Hardware icon on the right side of the bottom task bar.
10. Remove the USB Storage Device.
11. Insert the USB Storage Device and a blank CD into a PC with a working CD
Read/Write Drive. Copy the files from the USB Storage Device to the blank CD.
12. This CD can now be used as a backup CD to restore the new Compact host PC.
9.10
Data Restore
If there is a problem and you need to restore the system data, you can do so from the
backup media or from the defined drive location containing the data. This should
recover the data from a serious system error. The purpose of restoring the system
data is to recover the system database. The isolate data includes raw data and any
user-defined custom settings required to complete analysis.
9-18
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Host Computers
Data Restore
The application services must not be running when performing the data restore
procedure. The system software checks to see if the client is running. If the client is
running, a message appears asking you to close the application before performing a
restore.
If an automated data restore needs to be performed, first determine the host PC
System Software version.
• If the System Software version is higher or lower than 3.01, perform
Section 9.10.1, Automated Data Restore (All System Software Except 3.01).
• If the System Software version is 3.01, perform Section 9.10.2, Automated Data
Restore (3.01 System Software Only).
IMPORTANT:
9.10.1
It is very important to perform the correct automated data restore
procedure, based on the host PC system software version. A known
issue exists when performing the procedure improperly for the 3.01
System Software Version. The result is that the host PC continuously
reboots. To correct this issue, refer to Section 9.10.3, Correct
Continuous Reboot After Restore – 3.01 System Software.
Automated Data Restore (All System Software Except 3.01)
.
CAUTION: Do not perform this data restore procedure if the host PC is
at VITEK® 2 System Software version 3.01. Instead, refer to
Section 9.10.2, Automated Data Restore (3.01 System Software Only).
Note:
The application services must NOT be running when performing the data
restore procedure.
To restore isolate data follow these steps:
1. To start the restore, Start > Programs > VITEK 2 Systems > VITEK 2
Systems Backup Restore.
2. Log in to the Backup/Restore application.
IMPORTANT:
A user with at least Supervisor level access must log in to the Backup/
Restore application.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
9-19
Data Restore
Host Computers
Figure 9-25: Restore Login
3. The system software will verify your User ID and password.
4. Select the Restore icon.
Figure 9-26: Restore Icon
Note:
IMPORTANT:
If the VITEK® 2 Systems software is running, a message appears asking you
to close the application before performing a restore.
All current user data will be deleted from the workstation. The
workstation will automatically restart after a successful restore.
Figure 9-27: Restore Warning
9-20
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Host Computers
Data Restore
5. Click Yes to continue the restore process, or click No to cancel.
6. Navigate to the preferred backup drive/location (default value is the same as the
backup location defined in General Configuration).
If an external storage device contains the backup data for the restore, ensure
that device is properly installed (e.g., USB drive).
7. Click Restore.
8. The software will check for the following items:
• External storage device containing the Isolate Data has been installed, and/
or network drive location is available.
• Isolate data is compatible with the current installed system software. If the
data is not compatible with the installed system software, you will need to
restore the system software to the correct version. Then you will be able to
restore the isolate data following the appropriate steps.
The system will restore backup data from the selected external storage device
or network drive location. Access to the system software will be disabled for all
users during the restore.
9. When restore completes, the lab supervisor is notified that the data was
successfully restored.
10. Click OK. The computer restarts and the system software starts up
automatically.
11. To begin using the VITEK® 2 Systems, you will need to log in again.
9.10.2
Automated Data Restore (3.01 System Software Only)
1. Log in to the host PC as a member of the Administrator group. (See
Section 9.6.1, Log in to Host PC Operating System.)
2. Make sure Core is running by attempting to launch the System Software
Application. If you get the login screen, then Core is running. There is no need
to log in. Just quit the application. If Core is not running, then do not attempt the
restore.
3. Select Start > Programs > VITEK 2 Systems > VITEK 2 Systems Backup
Restore.
4. Login to the Backup Restore application as a member of the supervisor group.
Default Login Example:
User Name: LabSuper
Password: labsuper
5. With the backup/restore window displayed, press Ctrl + Alt + Delete to launch
the Task Manager.
6. Click the Processes tab
7. Click the column heading, Image Name, until the image names are sorted
alphabetically, in ascending order.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
9-21
Data Restore
Host Computers
8. Locate the bmxJavaService.exe process from the list.
9. Select bmxJavaService.exe so the letters are white and highlighted in blue.
Figure 9-28: bmxJavaService.exe in Task Manager
10. Insert the 3.01 data backup CD into the DVD drive.
11. Click the Restore icon.
12. Click yes on the Confirm window
13. If necessary, select the bmxJavaService.exe process again. The text must be
white with blue highlight.
14. Watch the backup/restore window closely until the progress bar displays.
Figure 9-29: Restore Progress Bar
15. Monitor the CORESE~1.EXE process in Task Manager very closely.
9-22
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Host Computers
Data Restore
16. Immediately after CORESE~1.EXE disappears from view, while
bmxJavaService.exe is still selected, click the End Process button.
17. Click Yes to confirm the removal of this process.
18. Allow the restore process to complete normally. The system will generate a
pop-up that the restore was successful.
19. If you do not see the restore successful message and the computer begins to
reboot constantly, refer to Section 9.10.3, Correct Continuous Reboot After
Restore – 3.01 System Software.
9.10.3
Correct Continuous Reboot After Restore – 3.01 System Software
An issue has been identified with VITEK® 2 Systems Software Version 3.01 that
causes the restore of a data backup to fail. If this occurs, the system will be in an
unusable state and the host PC will continuously reboot. The following outlines how to
correct such an issue.
IMPORTANT:
To avoid this issue, anytime a VITEK® 2 Systems 3.01 database needs
to be restored, perform Section 9.10.2, Automated Data Restore (3.01
System Software Only).
1. As soon as possible, after the host PC reboots, login to the host PC using an
account belonging to the Administrator group. (See Section 9.6.1, Log in to Host
PC Operating System.)
2. Simultaneously press the Ctrl + Alt + Delete keys to bring up the Windows®
security dialog.
3. Click the Task Manager button to start the Windows® Task Manager.
4. Click the Processes tab and look through the list of active processes to find
bmxJavaService.exe.
5. Select bmxJavaService.exe and click the End Process button. This will keep
the PC from rebooting and allow restore of the backup data files.
Figure 9-30: bmxJavaService.exe in Task Manager
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
9-23
Data Restore
Host Computers
6. Perform a restore of the VITEK® 2 Systems Database beginning with Step 5 of
Section 9.10.4, Manual Data Restore (2.01 or Higher System Software).
9.10.4
Manual Data Restore (2.01 or Higher System Software)
When a manual data restore to a host PC with System Software versions 2.01 or
higher is performed, the data files are manually copied from the backup source and
then pasted to a specific file location on the host PC. This is necessary after
performing Section 9.10.3, Correct Continuous Reboot After Restore – 3.01 System
Software. This section may also be used as a reference to understand where files are
located.
IMPORTANT:
Do not use this procedure for regular data restores. Instead refer to
Section 9.10.1, Automated Data Restore (All System Software Except
3.01) and Section 9.10.2, Automated Data Restore (3.01 System
Software Only).
Note
If the VITEK® 2 Systems software is installed on the C:\ drive of the host PC
instead of the D:\ drive, for all steps of this procedure navigate to the C:\
drive.
1. Log in to the host PC operating system using an admin account. (See
Section 9.6.1, Log in to Host PC Operating System.)
2. Navigate to D:\Program Files\VITEK 2 compact\bin.
3. Double-click stopall.bat to execute batch file.
4. Wait for the DOS window to close.
5. Verify the backup CD is in the disk drive and the drive is ready for operation. If
restoring from a USB flash drive, verify the device is ready for operation.
6. Navigate to D:\VITEK 2 Compact\database\postgresql and delete the data
folder.
Note
If VITEK® 2 Systems software version 5.01 or higher is installed, the data
folder will be named data_xxxx, where xxxx represents the version of the
software installed. An example of the naming convention for a data folder on
an instrument with software version 5.01 installed would be data_0501.
7. Navigate to the CD drive (or USB flash drive) and open the compressed
(zipped) folder. The zipped folder will be named V2CBkp-nnnnnnnnnnnnn.zip
and will be referred to throughout this procedure as the backup zipped folder.
You should see four folders within the backup zipped folder for software
versions prior to 5.01 and seven folders within the backup zipped folder for
software versions 5.01 and higher.
IMPORTANT:
9-24
The files RenaissanceBackup.txt and VersioInfo.xml should not be
copied.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Host Computers
Data Restore
IMPORTANT:
Be very careful that you are in the correct folder before pasting any
files. This procedure contains two very similar paths to paste files:
• D:\Program Files\VITEK 2 compact
• D:\VITEK 2 Compact
8. From the backup zipped folder, open the db folder.
9. From the db folder, select and copy all of the files.
10. Navigate to D:\Program Files\VITEK 2 compact\database\BO and paste the
copied files into the current folder. Answer Yes to All in the Confirm File
Replace window.
Note:
If you do not get the Confirm File Replace window, you are not in the correct
folder.
11. Navigate to the backup zipped folder and then open the recovery folder.
12. Select and copy the .rcy file.
13. Navigate to D:\Program Files\VITEK 2 compact\database\BO\recovery and
paste the copied file into the current folder. Answer Yes in the Confirm File
Replace window.
Note:
If you do not get the Confirm File Replace window, you are not in the correct
folder.
14. Navigate to backup zipped folder and copy the data folder.
Note
If VITEK® 2 Systems software version 5.01 or higher is installed, the data
folder will be named data_xxxx, where xxxx represents the version of the
software installed. An example of the naming convention for a data folder on
an instrument with software version 5.01 installed would be data_0501.
15. Navigate to D:\VITEK2 Compact\database\postgresql and paste the copied
folder into the current folder.
16. Navigate to the backup zipped folder and open the bci folder.
17. From the bci folder, select and copy all of the files.
18. Navigate to D:\Program Files\VITEK 2 compact\BCI-RS232\config and paste
the files copied into the current folder. Answer Yes to All in the Confirm File
Replace window.
Note:
If you do not get the Confirm File Replace window, you are not in the correct
folder.
19. Navigate to the backup zipped folder and open the BCINet configuration
folder.
20. From the BCINet configuration folder, select and copy all of the files.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
9-25
Data Restore
Host Computers
21. Navigate to D:\VITEK 2 Compact\BCINet\BciRoot\Config and paste the files
copied into the current folder. Answer Yes to All in the Confirm File Replace
window.
Note:
If you do not get the Confirm File Replace window, you are not in the correct
folder.
22. Navigate to the backup zipped folder and open the fmla folder.
23. From the fmla folder, select and copy all of the files.
24. Navigate to D:\VITEK 2 Compact\fmla and paste the files copied into the
current folder. Answer Yes to All in the Confirm File Replace window.
Note:
If you do not get the Confirm File Replace window, you are not in the correct
folder.
25. Navigate to the backup zipped folder and open the fmlaConfig folder.
26. From the fmlaConfig folder, select and copy all of the files.
27. Navigate to D:\VITEK 2 Compact\fmlaConfig and paste the files copied into
the current folder. Answer Yes to All in the Confirm File Replace window.
Note:
If you do not get the Confirm File Replace window, you are not in the correct
folder.
28. Navigate to D:\VITEK 2 Compact\database\postgresql\data\pg_tblspc. If
renEmptyFolderMarker is listed, delete the file.
Note
If VITEK® 2 Systems software version 5.01 or higher is installed, the path
will be D:\VITEK 2 Compact\database\postgresql\data_xxxx\pg_tblspc,
where xxxx represents the version of the software installed. An example of
the path on an instrument with software version 5.01 installed would be
D:\VITEK 2 Compact\database\postgresql\data_0501\pg_tblspc.
29. Navigate to D:\VITEK 2 Compact\database\postgresql\data. If
postmaster.pidrenEmptyFolderMarker is listed, delete the file.
Note
If VITEK® 2 Systems software version 5.01 or higher is installed, the path
will be D:\VITEK 2 Compact\database\postgresql\data_xxxx, where xxxx
represents the version of the software installed. An example of the path on
an instrument with software version 5.01 installed would be D:\VITEK 2
Compact\database\postgresql\data_0501.
30. Navigate to D:\Program Files \VITEK 2 compact\database\BO.
If _bmxShutdownSuccessfully.tmp is listed, delete the file.
31. Remove the backup CD.
32. Reboot the host PC.
9-26
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Host Computers
Data Restore
33. Wait for the database integrity check process to complete. Then confirm the
VITEK® 2 Software starts and the restored data appears in the application.
9.10.5
Manual Data Restore (System Software Earlier Than 2.01)
A defect exists in the VITEK® 2 Compact Software. This defect prevents the automatic
database restore operation from restoring a backup database. This defect occurs if
the current database in use by the VITEK® 2 Compact Software is corrupted. The
software will detect the corrupted database and will fail to initialize. If this occurs, the
automatic database restore software will not run. A manual data restore to a host PC
can be performed by manually copying from the backup source and then pasting to a
specific file location on the host PC.
IMPORTANT:
Do not use this procedure for regular data restores. Instead refer to
Section 9.10.1, Automated Data Restore (All System Software Except
3.01) and Section 9.10.2, Automated Data Restore (3.01 System
Software Only).
Note
If the VITEK® 2 Systems software is installed on the C:\ drive of the host PC
instead of the D:\ drive, for all steps of this procedure navigate to the C:\
drive.
1. Log in to the host PC operating system. (See Section 9.6.1, Log in to Host PC
Operating System.)
2. Make sure Core is running by attempting to launch the System Software
Application. If the login screen appears, the Core is running. There is no need to
log in. Just quit the application. If Core is not running, then do not attempt the
restore.
3. Navigate to D:\Program Files\VITEK 2 compact\bin and launch stopAll.bat
by double-clicking the file icon.
4. Navigate to the most recent backup. This may be on a backup CD or in a folder
under D:\Program Files\VITEK 2 compact\Externalization\Backup.
5. Double-click the backup Zip® file and then double-click the db folder (within the
Zip® file).
6. Copy the following files from the backup Zip® db folder to the D:\Program
Files\VITEK 2 compact\database\BO folder:
• objects.dat
• _objects.dat
• objects.idx
• _objects.idx
7. Press the Back button on the menu bar and within the Zip® file double-click the
recovery folder.
8. Copy the data0000.rcy file from the backup Zip® recovery folder to the
D:\Program Files\VITEK 2 compact\database\BO\recovery folder.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
9-27
Data Restore
Host Computers
9. Close the backup Zip® window and reboot the PC.
9-28
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Appendix A:
Instrument Specifications
About this Appendix
This appendix outlines the physical and electrical characteristics of the VITEK® 2
Compact instrument, and the environment the instrument is designed to operate.
Appendix Contents
A.1
Physical Characteristics • A-2
A.2
Environmental Characteristics • A-2
A.3
Electrical Characteristics • A-3
A.4
Optical Characteristics • A-3
A.5
General Characteristics • A-3
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
A-1
Physical Characteristics
A.1
Instrument Specifications
Physical Characteristics
Dimensions
Height: 60 cm (23.6 in.)
Width: 72 cm (28.3 in.)
Depth: 68 cm (26.8 in.)
Mass
Approximately 75 kg (165 lb)
Ventilation
• Instrument can be placed with its back against the
wall, providing nothing is obstructing the instrument’s
fan air flow.
• Minimum of 11 cm (4.3 in.) clearance on the left and
right side.
• Minimum of 21 cm (8.3 in.) clearance above.
Minimum Installation Altitude
–100 m sea-level
Maximum Installation Altitude
2000 m sea-level
Leveling
Benchtop should be level within ±3 degrees
Handling
Two people, using only the handhold pockets on all four
sides of the gray Base Pan
CAUTION: The VITEK® 2 Compact instrument is heavy. Use at least
two people to move it. When lifting the instrument, it is essential to use
only the handhold pockets on all four sides of the gray Base Pan to
prevent severe damage to the instrument and/or personal injury.
A.2
A-2
Environmental Characteristics
Installation Location
Indoor usage only. Do not install in direct sunlight.
Ambient Room Temperature
15 °C to 30 °C
Shipping/Storage Temperature
–20 °C to 55 °C
Relative Humidity
20% to 80% non-condensing
Pollution Degree
Degree 2 in accordance with IEC 664
Overvoltage
Category II per IEC 664
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Instrument Specifications
A.3
Electrical Characteristics
Electrical Characteristics
Power Cord
Detachable 3-wire with ground, per IEC 320
Input Voltage
100/120/220/240 VAC
50/60 Hz
Maximum Input Current
4 A at 120 VAC
2.2 A at 240 VAC
Nominal Input Current
2.5 A at 120 VAC
1.25 A at 240 VAC
A.4
Heat
1025 BTU/HR (nominal)
Power
300 W nominal, 600 W peak
Optical Characteristics
Transmittance Optics
Emission wavelengths: 660 nm, 568 nm, 428 nm LED
WARNING
There is a potential for non-laser optical energy emanation from the
optics which could result in personal injury or damage to the
instrument.
A.5
General Characteristics
Instrument Capacity
15, 30, or 60 cards per Incubator (depending on
configuration)
Cassette Capacity
10 cards per cassette
Vacuum (Filler)
Minimum level: 0.89 PSIA ±0.04 PSIA
Sealer
Stub length 1.25 ±0.25 mm, sealed
Incubator Temperature
35.5 °C ±1 °C average
Note:
It is important to consult your local regulations with regard to instrument
disposal.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
A-3
General Characteristics
A-4
Instrument Specifications
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Appendix B:
Instrument Decontamination
About this Appendix
This appendix describes the decontamination procedure for the VITEK® 2 Compact
instrument.
WARNING
Potential Biohazardous Material! Instrument surfaces and
contaminated test kit components are potentially biohazardous and
should be handled according to good laboratory practices. Observe
universal precautions when operating the instrument and when
performing maintenance or troubleshooting.
Appendix Contents
B.1
Decontaminating the VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument • B-2
B.2
Decontaminating Tools • B-2
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
B-1
Decontaminating the VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument
B.1
Instrument Decontamination
Decontaminating the VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument
Before an instrument is returned or relocated, decontamination must be performed as
described in this appendix. When decontamination is complete, label the instrument in
accordance with local subsidiary practice/procedures.
IMPORTANT:
All decontamination must be performed with a 10% bleach solution,
using good laboratory practices.
1. Wipe down all exterior surfaces.
2. Perform:
• Section E.3, Cleaning the Carousel
• Section E.4, Cleaning the Cassettes
• Section E.5, Instrument Shutdown
• Section E.6, Cleaning the Optics (Power Off)
• Section E.7, Cleaning Instrument Exterior and User Access Doors
• Section E.8, Cleaning Interior Instrument Components
3. Remove any debris from inside the unit and dispose of it in a biohazard bag.
4. When cleaning the carousel, wipe down the base of the carousel, making sure
to clean all the way around.
B.2
Decontaminating Tools
All tools used while servicing the VITEK® 2 Compact should be cleaned using a 10%
bleach solution as follows:
1. Moisten a foam or gauze sponge in the bleach solution and wipe all tool
surfaces.
2. Allow the bleach solution to react for a minimum of 10 minutes.
3. Wipe off the bleach with water using a moistened foam or gauze sponge.
4. Rinse all areas thoroughly.
B-2
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Appendix C:
Installation Checklist
About this Appendix
This appendix includes the VITEK® 2 Compact installation checklist. The installation
checklist is provided in this appendix in two ways. The installation checklist is
available by double-clicking the blue paperclip below. The checklist will open using
Microsoft Word. The checklist is also included in this chapter, beginning on page C-2,
for FSEs that would rather print the checklists out and complete them manually.
Note:
Checklists that are included in this manual may appear to be a different size
or have different formatting. The content of the checklist is still the same.
VITEK® 2 Compact
Installation Checklist
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
C-1
Installation Checklist
VITEK® 2 Compact Installation Checklist
Site Name
Service Call #
Site Number
Date
Page 1 of 3
Modem #
Type of Installation:
Complete Installation
Reader only
Instrument 1 serial #
Instrument 2 serial #
Instrument 3 serial #
Instrument 4 serial #
Compact Computer
serial #
OBSERVA® Computer
serial #
DensiCHEK™ Plus
serial #
DensiCHEK™ Plus
serial #
1.
Inspect System for damage (Section 2.2)
2.
Verify all outlets for proper grounding. (SM Section 2.4, Step 1)
3.
Place the instrument(s) in the designated location. (SM Section 2.4, Step 2)
4.
Configure the VITEK® 2 Compact instrument’s power entry module (PEM) to the appropriate power configuration
(100 V, 120 V, 220 V or 240 V) per Table 2-2. See Figure 2-2. (SM Section 2.4, Step 3)
5.
Place the host PC, monitor, printer, and any other optional peripherals in their permanent location. (SM Section 2.4,
Step 4)
6.
Configure the host PC switch setting to the appropriate power configuration (110 V or 220 V) (SM Section 2.4, Step 5)
7.
Configure the system peripherals to the appropriate input voltage. (SM Section 2.4, Step 6)
8.
Properly connect all power cables and system cables, interfacing the VITEK® 2 Compact, host PC, monitor and
printer. Refer to Section 2.5, System Cabling Diagrams, for power and cabling diagrams. (SM Section 2.4, Step 7)
Ź 9.
KVM Switch Installed
Yes
No (Refer to the current version of the VITEK® 2 Systems and OBSERVA® PC Peripheral Sharing
Installation Instructions)
10. Clean the instrument Vacuum Chamber door seal with a water-dampened cloth or paper towel. (SM Section 2.6,
Step 1)
11. Clean the glass surfaces of the transmittance optics with a lint free lens paper or an alcohol wipe with the excess
alcohol squeezed out, followed by lint free lens paper. (SM Section 2.6, Step 2)
12. Open the instrument front and top access doors and install the carousel cover. (SM Section 2.6, Step 3 and Step 4)
13. Install a NIST traceable dial thermometer (optional)
Yes
No Serial #
(SM Section 2.6, Step 5)
14. Turn the thermometer ON and close the instrument front and top access doors. (SM Section 2.6, Step 6 and Step 7)
15. If applicable, turn ON the UPS and power conditioner. (Both of these are supplied only as options with the
Check If Not Applicable (SM Section 2.7.1, Step 1)
VITEK® 2 Compact system.)
16. Turn the monitor and printer power switches ON. (SM Section 2.7.1, Step 2)
17. Turn the host PC power switch ON. (SM Section 2.7.2.1, Step 1)
18. Configure the host PC date and time settings. (SM Section 2.7.2.1, Step 3)
06/2010
C-2
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Installation Checklist
VITEK® 2 Compact Installation Checklist
19. If applicable, perform non-English setup.
Page 2 of 3
Check If Not Applicable (SM Section 2.7.2.2)
20. If applicable, configure the host PC for multiple instruments.
Check If Not Applicable (SM Section 2.7.2.3)
®
21. Turn the VITEK 2 Compact instrument power switch ON. (SM Section 2.7.3, Step 1)
22. Install all four carousel quadrousels from the User Interface by selecting Main Menu > Maintenance > Replace
Carousel. (SM Section 2.7.3, Step 7)
23. Review the instrument Status screen and ensure that the carousel capacity is correct, based on instrument
15 slots
configuration.
30 slots
60 slots (SM Section 2.7.3, Step 10)
24. Verify Printer is set to default and print test page
25. Create and Connect a Diagnostic Connection (SM Section 2.8.2, Step 1 and Step 2)
Ź 26. Verify and record firmware versions: (SM Section 2.8.2, Step 3)
Item
BCB
BOOT
Carousel SPN
Filler SPN
Front Panel SPN
Transport SPN
Instrument 1
Instrument 2
Instrument 3
Instrument 4
27. Set System Number (SET_SYS_NUM) (SM Section 2.8.2, Step 4 and Step 5)
Ź 28. Verify Temperature readings below: (SM Section 2.8.2, Step 7, Step 9, Step 10)
Incubator Temperature Range 35.5ºC ± 1.0
Display Temperature Reading
Dial Temperature Reading
Instrument 1
Instrument 2
Instrument 3
Instrument 4
29. From the ALIGN_ON mode, perform Filler Leak Test (SM Section 2.8.2, Step 11 and Step 13)
Ź 30. Verify Vacuum is 0.89 PSIA ± 0.04. Inst.1 Reading:
Inst. 4 Reading:
Inst. 2 Reading:
Inst. 3 Reading:
(SM Section 2.8.2, Step 22) If alignments changed, use the command SAVE_ALIGNMENTS.
31. Exit Alignment mode by using the command ALIGN_OFF. (SM Section 2.8.2, Step 25)
Ź 32. Perform Section 5.20.2, Transmittance Minimum Threshold Reading Test and HCB Test. Verify Minimum
Thresholds for Transmittance Optics below: (SM Section 2.8.2, Step 27)
Location
TX1 verify all values are • 3750
TX3 verify all values are • 3618
Instrument 1
Record Lowest
Value:
Record Lowest
Value:
Instrument 2
Record Lowest
Value:
Record Lowest
Value:
Instrument 3
Record Lowest
Value:
Record Lowest
Value:
Instrument 4
Record Lowest
Value:
Record Lowest
Value:
33. Perform Simulated Process Cycle, Verify Alignments (SM Section 2.9)
34. Perform Fill Cycle Test (SM Section 2.9.3)
35. Perform Cassette Scan Test (Internal Bar Code Scanner) (SM Section 2.9.4)
36. Perform Sealing and Cassette Removal (SM Section 2.9.5)
37. Verify Card Reading and Unload into Waste Container (SM Section 2.9.6)
06/2010
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
C-3
Installation Checklist
VITEK® 2 Compact Installation Checklist
Ź 38. Verify straw stub length is 1.25 mm ±0.25 mm (0.049 in ± 0.010 in). Inst. 1:
Inst 4:
Page 3 of 3
Inst 2:
Inst 3:
(SM Section 2.9.6, Step 6)
39. Verify the doors are closed and reboot the instrument by typing COLD. Confirm that the instrument initializes
properly and no errors or warnings occur. (SM Section 2.9.6, Step 14)
40. Confirm Remote Diagnostics (Record Modem # on Page 1) (SM Section 2.10)
41. Verify Instrument Alarm Statuses on the host PC (SM Section 2.11, Step 6)
Ź 42. If applicable, set host PC to Industry mode.
Check If Not Applicable (SM Section 2.12)
Ź 43. If applicable, configure host PC to 21 CFR Part 11 mode.
Check If Not Applicable (SM Section 2.12)
44. Perform a Full System Backup on the Compact Computer. (SM Section 2.14)
Ź 45. OBSERVA® Computer installed. (Optional)
Yes
No. Software Version:
(Refer to the current version of the
®
OBSERVA On-site Installation Instructions.)
A.
Set up pcAnywhere®.
B.
Install the OBSERVA® printer.
C.
Set the date/time.
D.
Verify OBSERVA® Communications with Compact host PC.
E.
Perform a Full System Backup on the OBSERVA® Computer.
FSE Name
FSE Signature
Notes:
06/2010
C-4
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Appendix D:
Instrument Improvements
About this Appendix
This appendix includes instrument improvements not previously discussed in this
manual.
Note:
This appendix does not include all historical instrument improvements.
Appendix Contents
D.1 Magnetic Door Latches • D-2
D.1.1 Magnetic Door Latch Installation • D-3
D.2 Host PC Multiple Instrument Configuration • D-4
D.2.1 Host PC Multiple Instrument Configuration Installation • D-5
D.3 Sample Prep Node (SPN) Board Update • D-10
D.4 Molded Reader Ledge Upgrade • D-11
D.4.1 Molded Reader Ledge Installation • D-11
D.5 Reader Head Roller Plate Update • D-12
D.5.1 Reader Head Roller Plate Update Installation • D-12
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
D-1
Magnetic Door Latches
D.1
Instrument Improvements
Magnetic Door Latches
There are four door latches installed in the VITEK® 2 Compact instrument.
Instruments with the serial number 3976 and higher include magnetic door latches.
The instruments made before serial number 3976 should be upgraded from the old
dual ball door latches to the magnetic door latches.
A kit (P/N 533346-901) is available to update the instrument’s four dual ball door
latches to magnetic door latches. Also contained in the kit are replacements for the
springs between the vacuum door and vacuum plate. The springs must be changed
during the magnetic door latches update to prevent the vacuum door from opening
unexpectedly.
Table D-1: VITEK® 2 Compact Door Latch Kit Contents (P/N 533346-901)
Part Number
Quantity
Description
533346-1
3
Magnet Latch - 2 Magnet
Catch
533346-2
1
Magnet Latch - 3 Magnet
Catch (For Use on the
Vacuum (Fill) Door ONLY)
532389-1
4
Magnet Latch - Keeper
Portion
337200-1
4
Conical Springs
310402-310
16
Flat Head M3x10 Screw
Two different latch catch assemblies are included in the Door Latch Kit. One latch
catch has three magnets installed, and is in a bag by itself. This bag is marked, “This
Magnet Latch is for the vacuum door only. Do NOT install on the User Access Door or
Cassette Process Door.” If the three magnet latch catch is accidently installed on a
door with a door lock, the center magnet will continuously hold the door lock springloaded solenoid in the locked position. If this occurs, remove the top panel of the
instrument, pull the door lock out manually, and then install the two magnet latch
catch.
IMPORTANT:
Do NOT install the three magnet latch catch on the Front User Access
Door or the Load Door.
Figure D-1 and Figure D-2 show the proper placement of the two magnet latch catch
and the three magnetic latch catch.
D-2
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Instrument Improvements
Magnetic Door Latches
Door Lock
Two Magnets
No Magnet
Figure D-1: Two Magnet Latch Catch with Door Lock
No Door Lock
Three Magnets
Figure D-2: Three Magnet Latch Catch without Door Lock
D.1.1
Magnetic Door Latch Installation
1. Remove both sides of the four spring-loaded dual ball catches from the four
doors.
Figure D-3: Spring-Loaded Dual Ball Catches (Old)
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
D-3
Host PC Multiple Instrument Configuration
Instrument Improvements
2. Install the four new magnet latch keeper portions onto the instrument using the
M3x10 flat head screws provided in the kit.
3. Change the four springs between the vacuum plate and the vacuum door:
a. Remove the four shoulder bolts holding the vacuum plate to the vacuum
door.
b. Replace the old springs with the springs provided in the kit. Place the
wide side of the springs against the metal vacuum plate.
Wide Side of
Springs
Figure D-4: Vacuum Plate and Springs
4. Locate the three magnet latch catch from the Door Latch Kit. This latch is in a
bag by itself and is marked, “This Magnet Latch is for the vacuum door only. DO
NOT install on the User Access Door or Cassette Process Door.” Install the
three magnet latch catch onto the Vacuum (Fill) Door using the screws provided
in the kit.
5. Install the two magnet latch catch onto the Front User Access Door, the Load
Door, and the Waste Collection Door.
6. Before closing the Front User Access Door and Load Door, ensure there is no
magnet in the middle position of the magnet latch catch.
D.2
Host PC Multiple Instrument Configuration
With the VITEK® 2 Systems 05.01 software release, up to four VITEK® 2 Compact
instruments may be installed with the host PC using a 4 Port USB Serial Adapter (P/N
6200211). The 4 Port USB Serial Adapter can only be installed on VITEK® 2 PC
models dc7700, dc7800, and rp5700. These PCs already have the appropriate drivers
installed and are able to handle the additional load required by up to four instruments.
IMPORTANT:
D-4
Do not attempt to install more than two instruments on any host PC
other than the dc7700, dc7800, or rp5700.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Instrument Improvements
IMPORTANT:
D.2.1
Host PC Multiple Instrument Configuration
For three or four instruments to be configured with the host PC using
the 4 Port USB Serial Adapter, all of the instruments must be VITEK® 2
Compact instruments. You cannot configure VITEK® 2 and/or
VITEK® 2 XL instruments with VITEK® 2 Compact instruments on the
same host PC.
Host PC Multiple Instrument Configuration Installation
1. Make sure the PC is turned on and operational.
2. Log in to the bmx_admin account. The password of this login is a proprietary
algorithm and changes daily. To determine the appropriate password, refer to
the GCS Portal.
User Name: bmx_admin
Password: password of the day or password of the month (proprietary
algorithm)
Note:
Password changes daily (d530, dc7100) or monthly (dc7700 and newer)
depending on computer model.
3. Connect the 4 Port USB Serial Adapter to an available USB port on the back of
the host PC.
Note:
The host PC should automatically detect the new hardware, display a Found
New Hardware message, and install the appropriate drivers.
4. Wait for the host PC to finish installing the drivers.
Note:
When the host PC has finished installing the appropriate drivers, a message
will appear stating that the new hardware is ready to use.
5. If the Systems Settings Change window appears and prompts you to restart the
system, click Yes.
Figure D-5: System Settings Change Window
6. Once the host PC completes startup, log back in to the bmx_admin account.
7. Right-click the computer desktop icon (i.e. LabAdmin on BMXHOST1) and
select Manage.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
D-5
Host PC Multiple Instrument Configuration
Instrument Improvements
Figure D-6: Computer Desktop Icon Menu
8. From the navigation tree, expand System Tools and select the Device Manager
folder.
Figure D-7: Computer Management Window — Device Manager
9. From the Computer Management workspace, expand the Ports (COM & LPT)
entry.
D-6
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Instrument Improvements
Host PC Multiple Instrument Configuration
Figure D-8: Computer Management Window — Ports
10. Verify the ports listed for SeaPORT +4/232 USB to RS-232 Converter are
configured as shown in Table D-2.
Table D-2: SeaPORT +4/232 USB to RS-232 Converter Port Configuration
Note:
SeaPORT +4/232
USB to RS-232
Converter Port
Number
COM Port Number
Port 1
COM11
Port 2
COM12
Port 3
COM13
Port 4
COM14
If the ports listed for SeaPORT +4/232 USB to RS-232 Converter are
configured correctly, the multiple port configuration is complete. If the ports
listed for SeaPORT +4/232 USB to RS-232 Converter were not configured
correctly, perform Step 11 through Step 37 to configure the ports.
11. From the Ports (COM & LPT) window, right-click Port 4 of the SeaPORT +4/232
USB to RS-232 Converter and select Properties.
12. Click the Port Settings tab in the Properties window.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
D-7
Host PC Multiple Instrument Configuration
Instrument Improvements
Figure D-9: Properties Window — Port Settings
13. Click the Advanced button.
14. Click the arrow next to the COM Port Number field and select COM14 from the
drop-down list.
Figure D-10: Advanced Settings
15. Click OK to save the setting and close the Advanced Settings window.
16. Click OK to close the Properties window.
17. From the Ports (COM & LPT) window, right-click Port 3 of the SeaPORT +4/232
USB to RS-232 Converter and select Properties.
18. Click the Port Settings tab in the Properties window.
19. Click the Advanced button.
20. Click the arrow next to the COM Port Number field and select COM13 from the
drop-down list.
21. Click OK to save the setting and close the Advanced Settings window.
22. Click OK to close the Properties window.
23. From the Ports (COM & LPT) window, right-click Port 2 of the SeaPORT +4/232
USB to RS-232 Converter and select Properties.
24. Click the Port Settings tab in the Properties window.
D-8
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Instrument Improvements
Host PC Multiple Instrument Configuration
25. Click the Advanced button.
26. Click the arrow next to the COM Port Number field and select COM12 from the
drop-down list.
27. Click OK to save the setting and close the Advanced Settings window.
28. Click OK to close the Properties window.
29. From the Ports (COM & LPT) window, right-click Port 1 of the SeaPORT +4/232
USB to RS-232 Converter and select Properties.
30. Click the Port Settings tab in the Properties window.
31. Click the Advanced button.
32. Click the arrow next to the COM Port Number field and select COM11 from the
drop-down list.
33. Click OK to save the setting and close the Advanced Settings window.
34. Click OK to close the Properties window.
35. Right-click Ports (COM & LPT) and select Scan for hardware changes.
Figure D-11: Computer Management — Scan for Hardware Changes
36. Verify the ports listed for SeaPORT +4/232 USB to RS-232 Converter are
configured as shown in Figure D-12.
Figure D-12: Computer Management — Port Settings
37. If the ports are not configured correctly, repeat Step 11 through Step 36.
38. Place the additional VITEK® 2 instrument(s) in the permanent location (see
Section 2.4, System Placement and Connections).
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
D-9
Sample Prep Node (SPN) Board Update
Instrument Improvements
IMPORTANT: It is extremely important to ensure that there is adequate power available for the
number of instruments installed.
39. Connect the cables from instrument 3 to COM11 and COM12 on the 4 Port USB
Serial Adapter.
40. Connect the cables from instrument 4 to COM13 and COM14 on the 4 Port USB
Serial Adapter, if applicable.
41. Perform Section 2.6, Prepare Instrument for Power Up.
42. Perform Section 2.7.1, Power On Peripherals.
43. Perform Section 2.7.3, Power On Instrument.
44. Perform Section 2.8, Verify Proper Instrument Operation for each new
instrument.
45. Perform Section 2.9, Simulated Processing Cycle for each new instrument.
D.3
Sample Prep Node (SPN) Board Update
This is to inform you of two improved SPN Boards, P/N 6200271 for general use and
P/N 6200270 for Vacuum Sealer Board use, now available as a service replacement
part.
In June 2010, manufacturing began assembling VITEK® 2 Compact instruments with
the new SPN Boards. This started with serial number 7047.
Please see the following list of part numbers to determine which configurations the
SPN Boards can be used on:
Table D-3: Instrument Configurations for SPN Boards
Part Name
Previous
Part Number
New Part
Number
Sample Prep Node (SPN) Board
531720-5
6200271
Vacuum/Sealer Board
531728-3
6200270
The SPN Board is a direct replacement for the previous SPN Board. The new part
number should be used for all service spares. See Section 5.13, Sample Prep Node
(SPN) Board Replacement, for the procedure to remove the old SPN Boards and
install the new SPN Boards.
IMPORTANT:
D-10
Sample Prep Node Boards with part numbers 6200271 (General) and
6200270 (Vacuum) can only be used with BCB firmware version 1.10 or
higher.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Instrument Improvements
D.4
Molded Reader Ledge Upgrade
Molded Reader Ledge Upgrade
A new molded Reader Ledge is now in use in VITEK® 2 Compact instruments. The
original machined Reader Ledge is no longer available.
The new molded reader ledges do not use the hex head captive screws used on the
original reader ledge. When replacing the machined Reader Ledge with the molded
Reader Ledge, order the kit (P/N 533348-901). The kit contains the reader ledge and
necessary mounting hardware.
IMPORTANT:
Do not re-use the mounting hardware from the machined reader ledge
when installing the new molded reader ledge.
This design improvement was implemented into instrument production on 3 April 2008
beginning with the instrument serial number 5531.
D.4.1
Molded Reader Ledge Installation
1. Ensure that the instrument power is turned OFF.
2. While supporting each of the Optics Modules, one at a time push the Clamp
Lever on the top of each Optics Module. Gently allow the Optics to hinge down.
3. Remove three screws securing the Reader Ledge to the Reader Frame.
4. Remove the Reader Ledge from the Reader Frame.
Screws
Reader Ledge
Optics
Module
Figure D-13: Machined Reader Ledge
5. Position the molded Reader Ledge on the Reader Frame.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
D-11
Reader Head Roller Plate Update
Instrument Improvements
Screws
Reader Ledge
Optics
Module
Figure D-14: Molded Reader Ledge
6. Install three screws to secure the Reader Ledge to the Reader Frame.
7. Carefully close each of the Optics Modules until the Clamp Lever locks in place,
ensuring that the Drive Belt is in the proper position on the Rollers.
8. Turn the power switch ON and verify proper operation.
9. Make sure all doors to the instrument are closed.
10. Perform Section 5.20.2, Transmittance Minimum Threshold Reading Test and
HCB Test.
D.5
Reader Head Roller Plate Update
A new Reader Head Roller Plate is now available for the VITEK® 2 Compact
instrument. The redesigned Reader Head Roller Plate will route the belt below the
optics. Instruments with the serial number 6660 and higher include the new Reader
Head Roller Plate. A kit (P/N 6200088) has been created to allow units in the field to
be updated.
D.5.1
Reader Head Roller Plate Update Installation
1. Ensure that the instrument power is turned OFF.
2. While supporting the optics assembly, one at a time push the clamp lever on top
of each Transmittance Optics Assembly. Gently allow the optics assembly to
hinge down.
3. Press on the belt where the Transmittance Optics Assembly sits, and note the
belt tension. Also, turn the motor shaft and pulley of the Reader Head Motor,
and note the force required to turn them by hand. (The replacement belt must
be adjusted accordingly.)
4. Close each optics assembly until the clamp lever locks in place.
5. Note the placement of the Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt.
6. Tag and disconnect the Motor wires attached to the Head Control Board.
D-12
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Instrument Improvements
Reader Head Roller Plate Update
7. Remove two motor bracket screws securing the Reader Head Motor Bracket to
the Roller Plate Assembly.
Springs
Roller Plate
Screws (8)
Reader Head
Motor Bracket
Roller Plate
Figure D-15: Reader Head Roller Plate
8. Remove eight screws, lock washers, and flat washers securing the Roller Plate
Assembly.
9. Remove three springs from the Roller Plate Assembly.
10. Carefully remove the Roller Plate Assembly from the Reader Head Assembly.
Note:
Take care not to allow the linear way rails to drop from the Reader Head
Assembly.
11. Position the Reader Head Motor Bracket on the new Roller Plate Assembly.
12. Loosely install two screws to secure the Reader Head Motor Bracket to the
Roller Plate Assembly.
IMPORTANT:
Do not tighten the screws.
13. Route the Reader Head Drive Belt on the Roller Plate Assembly. See
Figure D-16 for the proper routing of the Reader Head Drive Belt.
Drive Belt
Figure D-16: Reader Head Drive Belt Routing
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
D-13
Reader Head Roller Plate Update
Instrument Improvements
14. Apply pressure to the Reader Head Motor to tension the Reader Head Drive
Belt and tighten the two screws securing the Reader Head Motor Bracket to the
Roller Plate Assembly.
15. Position the Roller Plate Assembly over the lugs on the Reader Head
Assembly.
16. Loosely install eight screws, lock washers, and flat washers to secure the Roller
Plate Assembly to the linear bearings on the Reader Head Assembly.
IMPORTANT:
Do not tighten the screws.
17. Install three springs on the Roller Plate Assembly.
18. Tighten the eight screws securing the Roller Plate Assembly to the linear
bearings on the Reader Head Assembly.
19. Connect the accessible ribbon cable (detector cable).
20. Turn the power switch ON and verify proper operation.
21. Make sure all doors to the instrument are closed.
22. Perform Section 5.20.2, Transmittance Minimum Threshold Reading Test and
HCB Test.
D-14
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Appendix E:
Maintaining the Instrument
About this Appendix
These procedures are derived from the VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument User Manual.
They are to assist Field Service when installing a VITEK® 2 Compact instrument, or
when cleaning or decontaminating (disinfecting) the instrument.
Appendix Contents
E.1
Unlock Front User Access Door • E-2
E.2
Manual Temperature Check (Optional) • E-2
E.3
Cleaning the Carousel • E-4
E.3.1 Removing the Carousel • E-4
E.3.2 Cleaning the Carousel • E-8
E.3.3 Replacing the Carousel • E-8
E.4
Cleaning the Cassettes • E-11
E.5
Instrument Shutdown • E-12
E.6
Cleaning the Optics (Power Off) • E-14
E.7
Cleaning Instrument Exterior and User Access Doors • E-16
E.8
Cleaning Interior Instrument Components • E-17
E.8.1 Cleaning the Waste Collection Bin • E-17
E.8.2 Cleaning the Filler Station • E-18
E.8.3 Cleaning the Cassette Load/Unload Station • E-18
E.9
Turning the Instrument On • E-19
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
E-1
Unlock Front User Access Door
E.1
Maintaining the Instrument
Unlock Front User Access Door
This is the first option in the Maintenance menu and is a manual override of the
locking system. Use caution when selecting this option. Cards will not process when
the User Access Doors are open.
Note:
When cards are incubating and this option is selected, a confirmation screen
appears to confirm pausing the card processing.
1. Access the Unlock User Access Door using the path:
Main Menu > Maintenance > Unlock User Access Door
2. A message appears asking the user to confirm unlocking the User Access
Doors.
Note:
If the cassette is processing in the Filler Station or in the Cassette Load/
Unload Station the user is not able to unlock the door.
3. A warning message appears if the cards are processing in the carousel. The
user must confirm pausing card processing.
4. When the Front User Access Door is unlocked, both User Access Doors can be
opened.
5. Close the User Access Doors when you are done.
Note:
E.2
A warning message appears if the process exceeds four minutes.
Manual Temperature Check (Optional)
This procedure should only be performed when:
• More than one hour has passed from the time of power up.
• More than one hour has passed after cards were loaded into the carousel.
• The overall instrument status is OK.
1. Access the Temperature Check option using the path:
Main Menu > Maintenance > Temperature Check
2. A message appears asking the user to check the temperature.
Note:
If the cassette is processing in the Filler Station or in the Cassette Load/
Unload Station, the user is not able to check the temperature.
3. A warning message appears if the cards are processing in the carousel. The
user must confirm pausing card processing.
4. When the Front User Access Door is unlocked, both User Access Doors can be
opened to check the temperature.
E-2
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Maintaining the Instrument
Manual Temperature Check (Optional)
5. To perform a manual temperature check, insert the optional thermometer into a
small hole in the left side of the incubator cover.
Figure E-1: Incubator with Thermometer
6. Clip the thermometer into place on the white plastic clip (Figure E-2).
Figure E-2: Thermometer Clip
7. Remove the thermometer by lifting the clip and gently pulling it straight out of
the cover. You may also leave the thermometer in place.
8. Check the temperature and close the User Access Doors when you are done.
Note:
A warning message appears if the process exceeds four minutes.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
E-3
Cleaning the Carousel
E.3
Maintaining the Instrument
Cleaning the Carousel
Remove and clean the four sections of the carousel monthly, or as conditions require.
E.3.1
Removing the Carousel
WARNING
The carousel should be considered as potentially contaminated and
should be handled appropriately. Qualified laboratory personnel
should take the usual precautions necessary for infectious agents.
WARNING
Elevated Temperatures. Do not touch the metallic incubator venting
plate (located behind the carousel sections).
WARNING
Do not put your hands in the carousel when the carousel is rotating,
otherwise an injury could occur.
CAUTION: Perform this procedure when the VITEK® 2 Compact
instrument is completely idle (no cards are processing anywhere in the
instrument).
1. From the Main menu, select Maintenance.
Figure E-3: Main Menu
E-4
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Maintaining the Instrument
Cleaning the Carousel
2. Access the Carousel Cleaning function from the Maintenance screen by
selecting Remove Carousel.
Note:
If there are cards processing anywhere in the instrument, a screen prompts
you to make sure processing is complete and all cards were ejected from the
instrument before cleaning.
If cards are not processing in the incubator, and the carousel sections were not
removed, the following screen displays and the Front User Access Door
unlocks.
Figure E-4: Carousel Removal Confirmation
CAUTION: Do not open the User Access Doors and remove the cover
as soon as ‘Yes’ is selected. The carousel has moving parts that are
rotating into position. Wait until the carousel stops moving.
IMPORTANT:
If you press the Yes function key, you must remove all of the sections.
This requires about four minutes. Selecting No is the only opportunity
to cancel this operation.
3. Press the Yes function key. The following screen displays.
Figure E-5: Preparing for Section Removal
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
E-5
Cleaning the Carousel
Maintaining the Instrument
Followed by:
Figure E-6: Remove Carousel Section
4. When the screen displays Remove Section 1, open the Front User Access
Door.
5. Open the Top User Access Door.
Figure E-7: Carousel with Cover
6. Remove the carousel cover from the carousel by lifting the top of the cover
straight up from the instrument.
E-6
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Maintaining the Instrument
Cleaning the Carousel
Figure E-8: Carousel without Cover
Note:
Once the carousel is moved to the correct position, the message on the
screen changes (Figure E-9).
7. Grasp the first carousel section and tilt it to the left, then toward you.
8. Press the Done function key to confirm removal of the carousel section. The
following screen appears.
Figure E-9: Rotating Carousel
The carousel turns so you can remove the next section. During this time the
message Preparing for Section Removal displays again on the screen.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
E-7
Cleaning the Carousel
Maintaining the Instrument
9. Repeat this procedure until all four carousel sections are removed. The
following screen appears.
Figure E-10: Removal Complete
10. Carefully replace the carousel cover over the carousel and close the User
Access Doors.
11. After the four carousel sections are removed, the Maintenance menu appears.
For instructions on replacing the carousel, see Section E.3.3, Replacing the Carousel.
E.3.2
Cleaning the Carousel
Thoroughly clean and dry the four sections of the carousel before replacing them in
the VITEK® 2 Compact instrument. The carousel material is designed to withstand
any of the following cleaning methods:
• Automatic dishwasher with standard laboratory detergent
CAUTION: Dishwasher temperatures during the washing and drying
cycles must not exceed 85 °C (185 °F). Exceeding this temperature
causes damage to the carousel sections. Use the top rack of the
dishwasher.
• 5% bleach solution
• Phenolic cleaning solution
Note:
E.3.3
To disinfect a contaminated surface, use a 10% bleach solution and allow it
to remain in contact with the contaminated surface for five minutes.
Replacing the Carousel
1. Open the Front User Access Door and remove the carousel cover.
2. Access the Replace Carousel function using the path:
Main Menu > Maintenance > Replace Carousel
E-8
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Maintaining the Instrument
Cleaning the Carousel
The following screen displays.
Figure E-11: Ready to Replace Carousel
3. Press Yes to continue with the carousel replacement.
Figure E-12: Preparing to Replace Carousel
The carousel rotates until it is in position to replace the section.
Figure E-13: Ready to Replace Carousel
4. Take any one of the carousel sections and orient it (Figure E-14). The bottom of
the section should touch the base plate and the top portion should tilt slightly
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
E-9
Cleaning the Carousel
Maintaining the Instrument
toward the left of the instrument. Align the notch to the spring-loaded pin for the
correct locking position.
Figure E-14: Carousel Replacement
5. Slide the section down along the base plate while maintaining the tilted angle.
6. When the section is pushed down all the way, release the top portion, allowing it
to rest against the base plate. Two pins on the back of the section should
engage the two holes in the base plate and secure the section.
7. Press the Done function key when the section is in place.
8. The carousel turns 90° to move the first section out of the way. During this time,
the message Rotating Carousel: Please Wait displays on the screen.
9. Repeat this procedure until all four carousel sections are replaced.
The screen displays the following message:
Figure E-15: Carousel Replacement Complete
10. Replace the carousel cover over the carousel. If this is not replaced, a jam
condition intervention occurs.
11. Lower the Top User Access Door.
E-10
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Maintaining the Instrument
Cleaning the Cassettes
12. Close the Front User Access Door, making sure it latches completely.
Note:
E.4
The Front User Access Door does not latch unless the Top User Access
Door is closed.
Cleaning the Cassettes
1. Clean cassettes monthly, or as conditions require.
CAUTION: It is important to remove the bar codes before cleaning the
cassettes.
WARNING
The cassettes should be considered as potentially contaminated and
should be handled appropriately. Qualified laboratory personnel
should take the usual precautions necessary for infectious agents.
The cassette material is designed to withstand any of the following cleaning methods.
• Automatic dishwasher with standard laboratory detergent
CAUTION: Dishwasher temperatures during the washing and drying
cycles must not exceed 85 °C (185 °F). Exceeding this temperature
causes damage to the cassettes. Use the top rack of the dishwasher
and remove the bar code insert from the cassette to prevent damage
and negative impact on test results.
• 5% bleach solution
• Phenolic cleaning solution
Note:
To disinfect a contaminated surface, use a 10% bleach solution, and allow it
to remain in contact with the contaminated surface for five minutes.
2. Thoroughly clean and dry cassettes before using them again.
3. Replace cassette bar code label.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
E-11
Instrument Shutdown
E.5
Maintaining the Instrument
Instrument Shutdown
It is recommended that you shut down the instrument and turn the power OFF during
some of the maintenance procedures. The remaining cleaning processes described in
this chapter require the power to be turned OFF. Always use the shut-down function
from the user interface to turn off the instrument.
You may clean the following components with the instrument’s power still on:
• cassettes
• waste collection bin
• filler station
• optics
CAUTION: There are elevated temperatures and hot surfaces inside the
instrument. Shut down the instrument before starting the cleaning or
any other procedures inside the instrument.
Note:
It is recommended all cards finish processing before beginning this
procedure.
1. Access the Shutdown function using the following path:
Main Menu > Maintenance > Shutdown
Figure E-16: Shutdown System
If any cards are processing, the instrument displays the following screen:
E-12
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Maintaining the Instrument
Instrument Shutdown
Figure E-17: Confirm Shutdown
2. Select Yes to shut down the instrument.
The instrument briefly displays the following message while it moves some
internal components to their shutdown positions.
Figure E-18: Shutdown in Progress
When this process is complete, the instrument displays the message Ready for
Shutdown.
Figure E-19: Shutdown Ready
3. Press the AC power switch to shut the instrument OFF.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
E-13
Cleaning the Optics (Power Off)
Maintaining the Instrument
4. Remove the AC power cord to prevent any possible electrical hazard.
5. It is now safe to access the inside of the instrument.
WARNING
Electric shock hazard. Always turn the instrument OFF prior to
removing the power cord.
E.6
Cleaning the Optics (Power Off)
Note:
bioMérieux recommends that you shut down and power OFF the instrument
during this maintenance procedure.
After performing the procedure for instrument shutdown, follow these steps to clean
the optics.
1. Open the Front User Access Door.
2. Lift the Top User Access Door. This exposes the transmittance optics, as shown
in the following figure.
Figure E-20: Optics Assembly
The transmittance optics consist of two modules that are hinged on the bottom
and held in place by spring-loaded levers.
3. Using your right hand, grasp the module units and place your thumb on the
levers (Figure E-21). Both optics units must be released simultaneously to
rotate down for cleaning.
E-14
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Maintaining the Instrument
Cleaning the Optics (Power Off)
Figure E-21: Optics Cleaning
4. Push down on the levers to release both units and rotate downward.
5. Inspect the glass on all surfaces for cracks or scratches.
6. Clean both glass surfaces of each Transmittance Optics with a lint-free lens
paper, or an alcohol wipe with the excess alcohol squeezed out followed by a
lint-free lens paper. While cleaning the emitter side of the Transmittance Optics,
push the reader head plate down and clean the glass as close to the belt as
possible. If foreign material or streaks remain on any glass surface, repeat this
step.
Note:
If Reader Head Roller Plate (P/N 532151-903) is installed, the belt will not be
routed close to the emitter side of the Transmittance Optics.
7. Rotate the units back into place while pushing down slightly on the lever. The
units click into place when secured.
8. Close the Top User Access Door.
9. Close the Front User Access Door.
If you are not performing the remaining cleaning procedures in this section and
the instrument is already turned off, go to the procedure Section E.9, Turning
the Instrument On.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
E-15
Cleaning Instrument Exterior and User Access Doors
E.7
Maintaining the Instrument
Cleaning Instrument Exterior and User Access Doors
WARNING
Biohazardous materials could come in contact with the exterior of the
VITEK® 2 Compact instrument. All organism suspensions, cards,
cassettes, test tubes, sample transfer tubes, waste bin and the user
interface panel should be considered as potentially infectious.
Note:
bioMérieux recommends that you shut down and power OFF the instrument
during this maintenance procedure.
The instrument exterior is designed to withstand any of the following cleaning
methods:
• 5% bleach
• Phenolic cleaning solution
1. Dampen a cloth with one of these approved solutions and wipe off any dust or
dirt from the top, front, and side surfaces of the instrument. Wipe off all User
Access Doors.
Note:
To disinfect a contaminated surface, use a 10% bleach solution and allow it
to remain in contact with the contaminated surface for five minutes.
2. Dampen a separate cloth with plain water and wipe the surface again to remove
any disinfectant residue.
WARNING
Do not liberally apply liquid to the exterior surface of the instrument,
display, or keypad. Ingress of liquid could result in loss of instrument
function or a shock hazard.
CAUTION: Do not apply cleaning solutions or water to any sensors in
the instrument, otherwise a malfunction may occur.
E-16
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Maintaining the Instrument
E.8
Cleaning Interior Instrument Components
Cleaning Interior Instrument Components
Note:
bioMérieux recommends that you shut down and power OFF the instrument
during this maintenance procedure.
WARNING
Biohazardous materials could come in contact with the interior of the
VITEK® 2 Compact instrument. All organism suspensions, cards,
cassettes, test tubes, sample transfer tubes, and waste bin should be
considered as potentially infectious.
CAUTION: Do not apply cleaning solutions or water to any sensors in
the instrument, otherwise a malfunction may occur.
E.8.1
Cleaning the Waste Collection Bin
1. Open the Waste Collection door and remove the waste collection bin. Empty the
bin if any cards are present.
2. Thoroughly clean and dry the bin before replacing it in the VITEK® 2 Compact
instrument.
The bin material is designed to withstand any of the following cleaning methods:
• Automatic dishwasher with standard laboratory detergent
CAUTION: Dishwasher temperatures during the washing and drying
cycles must not exceed 85 °C (185 °F). Exceeding this temperature
causes damage to the cassettes. Use the top rack of the dishwasher.
• 5% bleach solution
• Phenolic cleaning solution
Note:
To disinfect a contaminated surface, use a 10% bleach solution and allow it
to remain in contact with the contaminated surface for five minutes. Using
plain water, wipe the surface again to remove any disinfectant/residue.
3. Replace the waste collection bin in the Waste Collection station and close the
Waste Collection door.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
E-17
Cleaning Interior Instrument Components
E.8.2
Maintaining the Instrument
Cleaning the Filler Station
The Filler Seal and Filler Station are designed to withstand any of the following
cleaning methods.
• 5% bleach solution
• Phenolic cleaning solution
1. Dampen a cloth with one of the approved solutions and wipe off any dust or dirt
from the rubber seal on the fill door and its contact surface.
Note:
To disinfect a contaminated surface, use a 10% bleach solution and allow it
to remain in contact with the contaminated surface for five minutes.
CAUTION: Do not apply cleaning solutions or water to any sensors in
the instrument, otherwise a malfunction may occur. Instead, use a dry
cloth or lens paper.
2. Using plain water, wipe the same surfaces again to remove any disinfectant
residue.
3. Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 to clean the interior surface of the Filler Station.
E.8.3
Cleaning the Cassette Load/Unload Station
Note:
bioMérieux recommends that you shut down and power OFF the instrument
during this maintenance procedure.
The Cassette Load/Unload Station is designed to withstand any of the following
cleaning methods:
• 5% bleach solution
• Phenolic cleaning solution
1. Dampen a cloth with one of these approved solutions and wipe the inside base
surface of the instrument, where the cassette is processed.
Note:
To disinfect a contaminated surface, use a 10% bleach solution and allow it
to remain in contact with the contaminated surface for five minutes.
2. Dampen a separate cloth with plain water and wipe the surface again to remove
any disinfectant residue.
CAUTION: Do not apply cleaning solution or water to any sensors in
the instrument, a loss of instrument function may occur.
E-18
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Maintaining the Instrument
E.9
Turning the Instrument On
Turning the Instrument On
1. Make sure the AC power cord is plugged into the instrument.
2. Close all doors.
3. Move the AC power switch to the ON position.
4. The system goes through the initialization process. The Status screen displays
a status of OK.
Note:
If the instrument was shut down for a long period of time, the status may be
Warming. Wait until the status is OK before resuming test card processing.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
E-19
Turning the Instrument On
E-20
Maintaining the Instrument
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Appendix F:
User Diagnostics
About this Appendix
The intention of this appendix is to provide service with the basic user diagnostics and
troubleshooting already included in the VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument User Manual.
There are some references within this appendix that direct the user to contact
bioMérieux. It should be understood that service is to resolve the cause of such
problems.
Table F-1, VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument Error Code User Response Table includes
the same error message descriptions provided in the VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument
User Manual. For a technical description of VITEK® 2 Compact instrument error
messages, see Section 8.1.4, Error Code List.
Appendix Contents
F.1
Error Handling System • F-2
F.1.1 Error Alarm Notification • F-3
F.2
Error Message Queue Screens • F-3
F.3
Intervention Screen • F-5
F.3.1
F.3.2
F.3.3
F.3.4
F.3.5
F.4
F.5
Instrument Error Code User Response • F-11
User Interface Instrument Diagnostics • F-38
F.5.1
F.5.2
F.5.3
F.5.4
F.5.5
F.5.6
F.5.7
F.5.8
F.5.9
F.6
Contents of Intervention Messages • F-5
Interventions During Filling • F-5
Interventions During Loading • F-6
Interventions During Bar Code Reading • F-7
Jam Condition Intervention Messages • F-10
Instrument Diagnostics Menu • F-38
Diagnostic Tests • F-38
Filler Test • F-38
Checking the Instrument Temperature • F-38
Displaying Version Information • F-39
Last Maintenance Date • F-39
Cleaning the Optics (With Cards Processing — Power On) • F-40
Optics Self Test • F-41
Subsystem Error Status • F-42
Cycling the Power of the Instrument • F-42
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
F-1
Error Handling System
F.1
User Diagnostics
Error Handling System
The VITEK® 2 Compact instrument continually monitors itself to ensure that it is
operating within specifications. To do this, it uses numerous optical, mechanical, and
temperature sensors located within each subsystem.
If a sensor detects a problem, the VITEK® 2 Compact instrument alerts you to the
situation, and provides you with the information you need to resolve the problem. We
refer to this process as the Error Handling System. Figure F-1 illustrates these
elements.
VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument
Instrument Programming:
• Interprets sensor signal
• Attempts to self-correct
• Selects error message
• Activates alarms
• Send message to queue
Instrument Sensors:
• Detect an error
Visual/Audible Alarms
Error Message Queue and/or Intervention screen
VITEK® 2 Compact User
Intervention screen:
• Review the screen
Error Message Queue:
• Access the queue
• Record Error Message Queue
Screens
Troubleshooting:
• Look up the type of Intervention Screen.
• Follow Section F.4, Instrument Error Code
User Response procedure.
Note: The dashed arrow indicates a possible
path.
Troubleshooting:
• Look up error code in Table F-1,
VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument Error
Code User Response Table
Figure F-1: Error Handling Flowchart
There are two major types of error handling:
• Error Message Queue — For errors that do not need a user’s immediate
response or that provide details to interventions. This is indicated by a blinking/
audible alert and the moving (!) on the Status screen.
• Intervention — Errors that need the user’s immediate response. This is indicated
by a pop-up Intervention screen and a visual/audible alert.
F-2
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
User Diagnostics
F.1.1
Error Message Queue Screens
Error Alarm Notification
VITEK® 2 Compact has two types of alarm notification to alert you to the presence of
an error condition. You can select either the audible or the visible alarm on the
instrument, or set both alarms to alert you.
• Audible Alarm. This alarm sounds at the VITEK® 2 Compact instrument. An
instrument configuration option allows you to select the alarm. Another instrument
configuration option allows you to set the volume of the audible alarm.
• Visual Alarm. This alarm uses the screen on the interface display. When the
visual alarm is activated, the screen flashes to indicate the presence of an error
condition. An instrument configuration option allows you to select the visual alarm.
F.2
Error Message Queue Screens
On the Status screen, a New Error/Warning indicator to the left of the Instrument
Status signifies that a new warning or error message was generated. To insure proper
operation of the instrument when an error occurs, you should review it as soon as
possible.
There are two Error Message Queue screens, the first is in a list form and the second
is in detail form. You must review the detailed message to clear the New Error/
Warning indicator.
The queue may contain as many as 250 messages, beginning with the most recent.
Number 001 (Figure F-2) is the most recent. When a new message is generated, it
assumes number 001 and the other messages move down the list.
1. To review a message, press the Message Key (!) on the user interface.
Figure F-2: Error Message Queue (List Form)
The Error Message Queue screen displays a list of error messages.
• An arrow to the left of the message points to the error to be displayed when
the Message Key (!) is pressed again.
• An asterisk (*) to the far left of a message signifies that it has never been
reviewed.
• An exclamation (!) to the immediate left of a message signifies that it is an
error instead of a warning.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
F-3
Error Message Queue Screens
User Diagnostics
2. Use the Arrow Keys to move the pointer to the desired message. The Up and
Down Arrow keys move the pointer one message at a time. The Left Arrow
key scrolls to the previous page of messages. The Right Arrow key scrolls to
the next page of messages.
3. Press the Message Key (!) again to display the detailed message.
Figure F-3: Error Message Queue (Detail Form)
A row of numbers is listed just above a dash line at the bottom of the screen.
The numbers pertain to the error:
• The time the error occurred
• The date the error occurred
• The last number is the code for the error:
Example: 20:13.00.152
• 20 is the primary code
• 152 is the detailed part of the code
Record this row of numbers for use when troubleshooting or contacting bioMérieux
Customer Support.
You can locate the detail code number in the first column of Table F-1 located in
Section F.4, Instrument Error Code User Response.
Review the Error Message queue for any error message the VITEK® 2 Compact
instrument has generated. Resolve the problem as indicated in the Error Code User
Response Table.
F-4
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
User Diagnostics
F.3
Intervention Screen
Intervention Screen
An Intervention screen is only displayed if there is an error warning during initialization
or card cassette processing that needs the user’s immediate attention. It contains
intervention messages and any other pertinent information. The Intervention screen
always requires some type of response by the user.
Following is an example of an Intervention screen.
Figure F-4: Intervention Sample Screen
F.3.1
Contents of Intervention Messages
Note:
Some Intervention screens need a timeout counter. This countdown timer
displays on the upper right corner of the Intervention message and indicates
the total number of minutes left for the user to intervene.
The top section of the Intervention screen is comprised of three parts:
• Main Message at the top
• detailed message/input located on the left
• two active function buttons located on the right
F.3.2
Interventions During Filling
The following intervention messages can display after the user presses Start Fill on
the Main Status screen. These messages do not have a countdown timer, since the
timeout is not critical until after a successful fill.
The Fill Intervention screen remains until you intervene.
F.3.2.1
Limited Slots in Carousel
Less than 10 slots are available in the carousel.
Select either:
• Cancel Fill or
• Continue
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
F-5
Intervention Screen
F.3.2.2
User Diagnostics
Incubator Not Ready
Incubator temperature is not within the allowed range (for example, instrument status
is Warming).
Figure F-5: Incubator Not Ready
Select either:
• Cancel Fill or
• Continue
F.3.2.3
Fill Door Open
Filling cannot start.
1. Close Fill door.
2. Select OK.
3. Press Start Fill again.
F.3.2.4
Fill Failure – Discard All Cards
1. Enter the Cassette ID to Delete.
2. Select OK.
3. Discard all cards in the cassette.
4. Review any recent errors in the Error Message Queue and refer to Appendix C
for further information.
Note:
F.3.3
The OK function button will not appear until the user enters a digit.
Interventions During Loading
The following intervention message can display after a fill successfully completes, but
the user has not successfully loaded the cassette into the Loader. This message does
not have a countdown timer since this is a non-correctable error and the cards
terminate.
F-6
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
User Diagnostics
Intervention Screen
The Load Intervention screen remains until you intervene.
F.3.3.1
Transfer Failure – Discard All Cards
The cassette was not moved from the Filler Station to the Cassette Load/Unload
Station in the allowed time of 10 minutes.
Figure F-6: Transfer Failure
1. Enter the Cassette ID to Delete.
2. Select OK.
3. Discard all cards in the cassette.
Note:
F.3.4
The OK function button does not appear until the user enters a digit.
Interventions During Bar Code Reading
The following intervention messages display when an error is detected during bar
code reading. These interventions are time-critical, and a timeout counter displays.
When timed out, if the user has not resolved all of the interventions, the Intervention
screen disappears and the cassette continues to process if the load door is closed.
The instrument terminates cards with unresolved bar code errors, loads the rest of the
cards into the carousel, and logs a message into the Error Message Queue.
If the load door is opened, all cards are terminated and no card is loaded.
F.3.4.1
Cassette Bar Code Unreadable
1. Using the numeric keypad on the instrument user interface screen, enter
Cassette ID.
2. Select either:
• Clear or
• Accept
Note:
The Accept function key does not appear until the user enters a digit.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
F-7
Intervention Screen
User Diagnostics
After timeout, if the user has not entered a cassette ID, the cassette is left in the
loader, the door is closed, and if the card bar codes are readable, then the instrument
loads the cards into the carousel, sends a Cassette ID to the host PC, and logs a
message in the Error Message Queue.
F.3.4.2
Card [X] Bar Code Unreadable (Virtual Cassette Only)
Note:
[X] is the card slot number.
1. Enter the last two digits of the bar code using the numeric keypad on the
instrument user interface screen:
2 2 2 2 8 8 8 8 3 3 3 3 7 7 7 7 __ __ (example)
2. Select either:
• Skip or
• Accept
Note:
If the Skip function is selected, the card(s) specified in the Intervention
screen will not load and are terminated. The instrument returns the card(s) to
the Cassette Load/Unload station for discard.
The Accept function key appears only after you enter the last two digits correctly. Use
the Left Arrow key to move back, and the Right Arrow key to move to the next digit,
if that digit is already entered.
F.3.4.3
Card [X] Bar Code Unreadable (Setup Cards Post Entry)
Note:
[X] is the card slot number.
1. Using the numeric keypad on the instrument user interface screen, enter the bar
code number: _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
2. Select either:
• Skip or
• Accept
Note:
If the Skip function is selected, the card(s) specified in the Intervention
screen will not load and are terminated. The instrument returns the card(s) to
the Cassette Load/Unload station and the card(s) should be discarded.
The Accept function key appears only after you enter all digits correctly. Use the Left
Arrow key to move back, and the Right Arrow key to move to the next digit if that
digit is already entered.
F-8
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
User Diagnostics
F.3.4.4
Intervention Screen
Card [X] Bar Code Mismatch (Virtual Cassette)
Bar code Scan: 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 (example)
VC: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 (example)
1. Remove the cassette from the Cassette Load/Unload Station and locate the
card(s) in the position that was previously entered on the host PC.
2. Reinstall the cassette in the Cassette Load/Unload station, and close the door.
3. Select either:
• Skip or
• Fixed
Note:
F.3.4.5
If the Skip function is selected, the card(s) specified in the Intervention
screen will not load and are terminated. The instrument returns the card(s) to
the Cassette Load/Unload station for discard.
Insufficient Slots in Carousel
1. Remove the cassette from the Cassette Load/Unload station.
2. Remove [Y] cards from slots:[X][X]. Discard these cards.
Note:
[Y] represents the number of cards and [X] represents the card slot number.
3. Replace the cassettes.
4. Select Continue.
F.3.4.6
Error: Cannot Proceed
1. Ensure that the cassette is placed properly in the Cassette Load/Unload
Station.
2. Verify that the door is closed.
F.3.4.7
Timed Out
1. Remove cassette and close the Cassette Load/Unload door.
2. Discard all cards.
3. Select Continue.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
F-9
Intervention Screen
F.3.5
User Diagnostics
Jam Condition Intervention Messages
The instrument detects this kind of jam when cards are processing anywhere in the
instrument.
CAUTION: When clearing a jam, do not swap carousel sections or
individual cards in the carousel. Doing so causes incorrect patient test
results to occur.
1. Select Yes when the Unlock user access door screen appears.
Figure F-7: Jam Condition
Figure F-8: Jam Condition Fix Intervention
2. Open User Access Doors.
3. Determine the location of the jam (to determine this, review the Error Message
Queue).
WARNING
Unexpected mechanical movement can occur when the jam is cleared.
4. Resolve any jam conditions and close the User Access Doors.
F-10
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
User Diagnostics
F.4
Instrument Error Code User Response
Instrument Error Code User Response
The Error Code User Response Table is designed to provide, where possible, the
recovery procedure that is most likely to restore the instrument to normal operation. If
the described user response does not prevent recurrences of the error, call
bioMérieux for assistance.
1. Locate the detail code from the Error Message Queue screen described in the
Section F.2, Error Message Queue Screens.
2. Find the Detail Code from the first column of the Table F-1. Detail codes are
listed numerically.
3. Read the corresponding Detail Code Description.
4. Read and follow the directions found in the User Response column of the table
and address accordingly.
5. If the error recurs, or the User Response advises a call to bioMérieux, inform
the service representative of the error number found in the lower right portion of
the message screen.
Table F-1: VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument Error Code User Response Table
Detail
Code
Primary Code
Detail Code
Description
User Response
1
NA
<unused>
NA
2
1 Software Failure
Instrument Failure
Cycle Power. Report to bioMérieux.
3
1 Software Failure
Instrument Failure
Cycle Power. Report to bioMérieux.
4
1 Software Failure
Instrument Failure
Cycle Power. Report to bioMérieux.
5
1 Software Failure
Instrument Failure
Cycle Power. Report to bioMérieux.
6
1 Software Failure
Instrument Failure
Cycle Power. Report to bioMérieux.
7
1 Software Failure
Instrument Failure
Cycle Power. Report to bioMérieux.
8
1 Software Failure
Instrument Failure
Cycle Power. Report to bioMérieux.
9
1 Software Failure
Instrument Failure
Cycle Power. Report to bioMérieux.
10
1 Software Failure
Instrument Failure
Cycle Power. Report to bioMérieux.
11
1 Software Failure
Instrument Failure
Cycle Power. Report to bioMérieux.
12
12 Software Warning
Instrument Failure
This warning indicates that an internal software
resource has fallen below the expected
minimum level. The instrument is still
functioning normally.
Report to bioMérieux.
13
1 Software Failure
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Bar Code Reader failure
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
F-11
Instrument Error Code User Response
User Diagnostics
Table F-1: VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument Error Code User Response Table (Continued)
Detail
Code
Primary Code
Detail Code
Description
User Response
14
3 Vacuum/Loader
Failure
Bar Code Reader failure
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
15
8 Autoloader Jam
Autoloader motor failed
to home
This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
mechanical or electrical failure.
1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the
jam condition.
2) Open user access doors and/or Load Door.
3) Examine the affected component for dirt or
obstruction (normal jam-clearing actions).
4) If this is related to a transport jam, reposition
the cassette on the transport block before
closing door.
5) If the failure recurs, call bioMérieux.
16
7 Transport Jam
Transport motor failed to
home during
initialization
This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
mechanical or electrical failure.
1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the
jam condition.
2) Open user access doors and/or Load Door.
3) Examine the affected component for dirt or
obstruction (normal jam-clearing actions).
4) If this is related to a transport jam, reposition
the cassette on the transport block before
closing door.
5) If the failure recurs, call bioMérieux.
17
7 Transport Jam
Transport motor failed to
home during loading
(after cassette
inspection)
This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
mechanical or electrical failure.
1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the
jam condition.
2) Open user access doors and/or Load Door.
3) Examine the affected component for dirt or
obstruction (normal jam-clearing actions).
4) If this is related to a transport jam, reposition
the cassette on the transport block before
closing door.
5) If the failure recurs, call bioMérieux.
F-12
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
User Diagnostics
Instrument Error Code User Response
Table F-1: VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument Error Code User Response Table (Continued)
Detail
Code
Primary Code
18
9 Sealer Jam
Detail Code
Description
Sealer motor failed to
home
User Response
This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
mechanical or electrical failure.
1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the
jam condition.
2) Open user access doors and/or Load Door.
3) Examine the affected component for dirt or
obstruction (normal jam-clearing actions).
4) If this is related to a transport jam, reposition
the cassette on the transport block before
closing door.
5) If the failure recurs, call bioMérieux.
19
3 Vacuum/Loader
Failure
Sealer failure
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
20
3 Vacuum/Loader
Failure
Sealer failure
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
21
3 Vacuum/Loader
Failure
Sealer failure
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
22
3 Vacuum/Loader
Failure
Sealer failure
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely needed.
23
13 Load Door Open
Load Door open while
attempting initialization
Close door and cycle power.
24
13 Load Door Open
Load Door open while
attempting to initiate a
cassette load
Close door and cycle power.
25
3 Vacuum/Loader
Failure
Load Door will not lock
Ensure that the Load Door is fully closed.
Check the latching mechanism for foreign
materials.
26
3 Vacuum/Loader
Failure
Load Door will not
unlock
Cycle Power. Report to bioMérieux.
27
NA
<unused>
NA
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
F-13
Instrument Error Code User Response
User Diagnostics
Table F-1: VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument Error Code User Response Table (Continued)
Detail
Code
Primary Code
28
7 Transport Jam
Detail Code
Description
Cassette is not hooked
on transport block pins
during initialization
User Response
This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
mechanical or electrical failure.
1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the
jam condition.
2) Open user access doors and/or Load Door.
3) Examine the affected component for dirt or
obstruction (normal jam-clearing actions).
4) If this is related to a transport jam, reposition
the cassette on the transport block before
closing door.
5) If the failure recurs, call bioMérieux.
29
7 Transport Jam
Transport motor stalled
while counting cards
This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
mechanical or electrical failure.
1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the
jam condition.
2) Open user access doors and/or Load Door.
3) Examine the affected component for dirt or
obstruction (normal jam-clearing actions).
4) If this is related to a transport jam, reposition
the cassette on the transport block before
closing door.
5) If the failure recurs, call bioMérieux.
30
NA
<unused>
NA
31
7 Transport Jam
Transport motor stalled
while reading card bar
code
This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
mechanical or electrical failure.
1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the
jam condition.
2) Open user access doors and/or Load Door.
3) Examine the affected component for dirt or
obstruction (normal jam-clearing actions).
4) If this is related to a transport jam, reposition
the cassette on the transport block before
closing door.
5) If the failure recurs, call bioMérieux.
F-14
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
User Diagnostics
Instrument Error Code User Response
Table F-1: VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument Error Code User Response Table (Continued)
Detail
Code
Primary Code
32
7 Transport Jam
Detail Code
Description
Transport motor stalled
while moving cassette
toward the Load Door
during bar code retry
User Response
This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
mechanical or electrical failure.
1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the
jam condition.
2) Open user access doors and/or Load Door.
3) Examine the affected component for dirt or
obstruction (normal jam-clearing actions).
4) If this is related to a transport jam, reposition
the cassette on the transport block before
closing door.
5) If the failure recurs, call bioMérieux.
33
7 Transport Jam
Transport motor stalled
while moving cassette
toward the Load Door
This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
mechanical or electrical failure.
1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the
jam condition.
2) Open user access doors and/or Load Door.
3) Examine the affected component for dirt or
obstruction (normal jam-clearing actions).
4) If this is related to a transport jam, reposition
the cassette on the transport block before
closing door.
5) If the failure recurs, call bioMérieux.
34
7 Transport Jam
Transport motor stalled
while sealing
This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
mechanical or electrical failure.
1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the
jam condition.
2) Open user access doors and/or Load Door.
3) Examine the affected component for dirt or
obstruction (normal jam-clearing actions).
4) If this is related to a transport jam, reposition
the cassette on the transport block before
closing door.
5) If the failure recurs, call bioMérieux.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
F-15
Instrument Error Code User Response
User Diagnostics
Table F-1: VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument Error Code User Response Table (Continued)
Detail
Code
Primary Code
35
7 Transport Jam
Detail Code
Description
Transport motor stalled
while loading cards into
carousel
User Response
This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
mechanical or electrical failure.
1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the
jam condition.
2) Open user access doors and/or Load Door.
3) Examine the affected component for dirt or
obstruction (normal jam-clearing actions).
4) If this is related to a transport jam, reposition
the cassette on the transport block before
closing door.
5) If the failure recurs, call bioMérieux.
36
7 Transport Jam
Transport motor stalled
while unloading
cassette
This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
mechanical or electrical failure.
1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the
jam condition.
2) Open user access doors and/or Load Door.
3) Examine the affected component for dirt or
obstruction (normal jam-clearing actions).
4) If this is related to a transport jam, reposition
the cassette on the transport block before
closing door.
5) If the failure recurs, call bioMérieux.
37
8 Autoloader Jam
Autoloader motor stalled
while loading cards into
carousel
This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
mechanical or electrical failure.
1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the
jam condition.
2) Open user access doors and/or Load Door.
3) Examine the affected component for dirt or
obstruction (normal jam-clearing actions).
4) If this is related to a transport jam, reposition
the cassette on the transport block before
closing door.
5) If the failure recurs, call bioMérieux.
38
3 Vacuum/Loader
Failure
Vacuum SPN board
failure
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
39
4 Carousel/Reader
Failure
Carousel SPN board
failure
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
40
3 Vacuum/Loader
Failure
Transport SPN board
failure
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
F-16
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
User Diagnostics
Instrument Error Code User Response
Table F-1: VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument Error Code User Response Table (Continued)
Detail
Code
Primary Code
Detail Code
Description
User Response
41
NA
<unused>
NA
42
10 Host
Communication
Failure
Bad command received
A communications error has occurred. Report
to bioMérieux.
43
10 Host
Communication
Failure
Bad command received
A communications error has occurred. Report
to bioMérieux.
44
10 Host
Communication
Failure
Bad command received
A communications error has occurred. Report
to bioMérieux.
45
10 Host
Communication
Failure
Bad command received
A communications error has occurred. Report
to bioMérieux.
46
10 Host
Communication
Failure
Bad command received
A communications error has occurred. Report
to bioMérieux.
47
10 Host
Communication
Failure
Bad command received
A communications error has occurred. Report
to bioMérieux.
48
10 Host
Communication
Failure
Bad command received
A communications error has occurred. Report
to bioMérieux.
49
10 Host
Communication
Failure
Bad command received
A communications error has occurred. Report
to bioMérieux.
50
10 Host
Communication
Failure
Bad command received
A communications error has occurred. Report
to bioMérieux.
51
10 Host
Communication
Failure
Bad command received
A communications error has occurred. Report
to bioMérieux.
52
10 Host
Communication
Failure
Bad command received
A communications error has occurred. Report
to bioMérieux.
53
10 Host
Communication
Failure
Bad command received
A communications error has occurred. Report
to bioMérieux.
54
10 Host
Communication
Failure
Bad command received
A communications error has occurred. Report
to bioMérieux.
55
10 Host
Communication
Failure
Bad command received
A communications error has occurred. Report
to bioMérieux.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
F-17
Instrument Error Code User Response
User Diagnostics
Table F-1: VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument Error Code User Response Table (Continued)
Detail
Code
Primary Code
Detail Code
Description
User Response
56
10 Host
Communication
Failure
Bad command received
A communications error has occurred. Report
to bioMérieux.
57
15 Carousel Cover
Missing
Carousel cover is
missing during preinitialization check
Ensure that the carousel cover is properly
installed.
58
15 Carousel Cover
Missing
Carousel cover missing
during carousel
initialization
Ensure that the carousel cover is properly
installed.
59
15 Carousel Cover
Missing
Carousel cover detected
missing during move
This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
mechanical or electrical failure.
1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the
jam condition.
2) Open user access doors.
3) Examine the affected component for dirt or
obstruction (normal jam-clearing actions).
4) If this is related to a transport jam, reposition
the cassette on the transport block before
closing door.
5) If the failure recurs, call bioMérieux.
60
14 User Access
Door Open
User access door is
open during initialization
Close door and cycle power.
61
3 Vacuum/Loader
Failure
User access door will
not lock
Ensure that the user access door is fully
closed. Check the latching mechanism for
foreign materials.
62
3 Vacuum/Loader
Failure
User access door will
not unlock
Cycle power and report to bioMérieux.
63
18 Carousel Section
Missing
Quad missing during
initialization
Referring to the carousel cleaning section of
this manual, ensure that all quads are properly
installed.
64
6 Carousel Jam
Carousel motor failed to
home during
initialization
This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
mechanical or electrical failure.
1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the
jam condition.
2) Open user access doors.
3) Examine the affected component for dirt or
obstruction (normal jam-clearing actions).
4) If this is related to a transport jam, reposition
the cassette on the transport block before
closing door.
5) If the failure recurs, call bioMérieux.
F-18
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
User Diagnostics
Instrument Error Code User Response
Table F-1: VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument Error Code User Response Table (Continued)
Detail
Code
Primary Code
Detail Code
Description
65
4 Carousel/Reader
Failure
Incubator temperature
failure
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
66
5 Reader Jam
Ejector motor failed to
home during
initialization
This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
mechanical or electrical failure.
1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the
jam condition.
User Response
2) Open user access doors.
3) Examine the affected component for dirt or
obstruction (normal jam-clearing actions).
4) If this is related to a transport jam, reposition
the cassette on the transport block before
closing door.
5) If the failure recurs, call bioMérieux.
67
5 Reader Jam
Cam motor failed to
home during
initialization
This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
mechanical or electrical failure.
1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the
jam condition.
2) Open user access doors.
3) Examine the affected component for dirt or
obstruction (normal jam-clearing actions).
4) If this is related to a transport jam, reposition
the cassette on the transport block before
closing door.
5) If the failure recurs, call bioMérieux.
68
1 Software Failure
Instrument failure
Call bioMérieux. A power cycle may be
required.
69
1 Software Failure
Instrument failure
Call bioMérieux. A power cycle may be
required.
70
1 Software Failure
Instrument failure
Call bioMérieux. A power cycle may be
required.
71
1 Software Failure
Instrument failure
Call bioMérieux. A power cycle may be
required.
72
17 Card(s)
Terminated
All cards unloaded due
to incubator
temperature fault,
carousel position lost or
unload via DML
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
73
17 Card(s)
Terminated
Cards unloaded
because their wellmap
changed
Call bioMérieux.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
F-19
Instrument Error Code User Response
User Diagnostics
Table F-1: VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument Error Code User Response Table (Continued)
Detail
Code
Primary Code
Detail Code
Description
74
6 Carousel Jam
Carousel motor stalled
User Response
This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
mechanical or electrical failure.
1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the
jam condition.
2) Open user access doors.
3) Examine the affected component for dirt or
obstruction (normal jam-clearing actions).
4) If this is related to a transport jam, reposition
the cassette on the transport block before
closing door.
5) If the failure recurs, call bioMérieux.
75
4 Carousel/Reader
Failure
Carousel position lost
(all cards unloaded)
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
All cards in the carousel are terminated and an
attempt is made to unload them into the waste
collection bin.
76
37 The card in slot
(X) of cassette (X)
was rejected
because this
instrument did not
have an appropriate
wellmap
Wellmap does not exist
for a card during
cassette inspection
77
17 Card(s)
Terminated
Fill-to-load timeout was
exceeded (card[s]
unloaded)
Card(s) were terminated due to excessive time
elapsing between the filling operation and the
cassette loading being performed.
78
17 Card(s)
Terminated
Could not find the first
edge of the card
(terminated slot)
A card edge or hole could not be found. The
card in this carousel slot is terminated. When
instrument processing is idle, perform a
carousel cleaning to gain access to the card
and make the slot available.
79
5 Reader Jam
Could not find the first
edge of the card
(JAMMED)
This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
mechanical or electrical failure.
1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the
jam condition.
This card is rejected (and terminated) due to
the wellmap not being present.
Enter the needed wellmap before attempting to
process any further cards of this type.
2) Open user access doors.
3) Examine the affected component for dirt or
obstruction (normal jam-clearing actions).
4) If this is related to a transport jam, reposition
the cassette on the transport block before
closing door.
5) If the failure recurs, call bioMérieux.
F-20
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
User Diagnostics
Instrument Error Code User Response
Table F-1: VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument Error Code User Response Table (Continued)
Detail
Code
Primary Code
Detail Code
Description
User Response
80
17 Card(s)
Terminated
Each optical position
mark was not detected
in the card while moving
out (terminated slot)
A card edge or hole could not be found. The
card in this carousel slot was terminated. When
instrument processing is idle, perform a
carousel cleaning to gain access to the card
and make the slot available.
81
5 Reader Jam
Each optical position
mark was not detected
in the card while moving
out (JAMMED)
This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
mechanical or electrical failure.
1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the
jam condition.
2) Open user access doors.
3) Examine the affected component for dirt or
obstruction (normal jam-clearing actions).
4) If this is related to a transport jam, reposition
the cassette on the transport block before
closing door.
5) If the failure recurs, call bioMérieux.
82
19 Waste Bucket
Full or Waste Door
Open
Could not unload card,
waste tray is full
Empty the waste bin.
83
19 Waste Bucket
Full or Waste Door
Open
Could not unload card,
waste door is open
Close waste door.
84
19 Waste Bucket
Full or Waste Door
Open
Could not unload card,
waste bin is not present
Replace the waste bin and close waste door.
85
19 Waste Bucket
Full or Waste Door
Open
Could not unload card,
waste chute is clogged
Ensure that the waste bin is empty, present,
and that the waste door is closed. Check to be
sure there are no cards remaining in the waste
chute.
86
19 Waste Bucket
Full or Waste Door
Open
Failed to eject card into
waste bin (card was still
in read head)
Ensure that the waste bin is empty, present,
and that the waste door is closed. Check to be
sure there are no cards remaining in the waste
chute.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
F-21
Instrument Error Code User Response
User Diagnostics
Table F-1: VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument Error Code User Response Table (Continued)
Detail
Code
Primary Code
87
5 Reader Jam
Detail Code
Description
Failed to place the card
back into carousel while
verifying the head was
clear (JAMMED)
User Response
This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
mechanical or electrical failure.
1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the
jam condition.
2) Open user access doors.
3) Examine the affected component for dirt or
obstruction (normal jam-clearing actions).
4) If this is related to a transport jam, reposition
the cassette on the transport block before
closing door.
5) If the failure recurs, call bioMérieux.
88
5 Reader Jam
Could not find the first
edge of the card while
reading (JAMMED)
This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
mechanical or electrical failure.
1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the
jam condition.
2) Open user access doors.
3) Examine the affected component for dirt or
obstruction (normal jam-clearing actions).
4) If this is related to a transport jam, reposition
the cassette on the transport block before
closing door.
5) If the failure recurs, call bioMérieux.
89
17 Card(s)
Terminated
Could not find the first
edge of the card while
reading (terminated slot)
A card edge or hole could not be found. The
card in this carousel slot was terminated. When
instrument processing is idle, perform a
carousel cleaning to gain access to the card
and make the slot available.
90
5 Reader Jam
Each optical position
mark (Air) was not
detected while reading
(JAMMED)
This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
mechanical or electrical failure.
1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the
jam condition.
2) Open user access doors.
3) Examine the affected component for dirt or
obstruction (normal jam-clearing actions).
4) If this is related to a transport jam, reposition
the cassette on the transport block before
closing door.
5) If the failure recurs, call bioMérieux.
91
F-22
17 Card(s)
Terminated
Each optical position
mark (Air) was not
detected while reading
(terminated slot)
A card edge or hole could not be found. The
card in this carousel slot was terminated. When
instrument processing is idle, perform a
carousel cleaning to gain access to the card
and make the slot available.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
User Diagnostics
Instrument Error Code User Response
Table F-1: VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument Error Code User Response Table (Continued)
Detail
Code
Primary Code
92
5 Reader Jam
Detail Code
Description
Each optical position
mark (Plastic) was not
detected while reading
(JAMMED)
User Response
This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
mechanical or electrical failure.
1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the
jam condition.
2) Open user access doors.
3) Examine the affected component for dirt or
obstruction (normal jam-clearing actions).
4) If this is related to a transport jam, reposition
the cassette on the transport block before
closing door.
5) If the failure recurs, call bioMérieux.
93
17 Card(s)
Terminated
Each optical position
mark (Plastic) was not
detected while reading
(terminated slot)
A card edge or hole could not be found. The
card in this carousel slot is terminated. When
instrument processing is idle, perform a
carousel cleaning to gain access to the card
and make the slot available.
94
5 Reader Jam
The last edge of the
card was not detected
while reading
(JAMMED)
1) This may be the result of a jam due to
foreign material in the mechanism, or it may
indicate a mechanical or electrical failure.
Respond to the Intervention screen for the
jam condition.
2) Open user access doors.
3) Examine the affected component for dirt or
obstruction (normal jam-clearing actions).
4) If this is related to a transport jam, reposition
the cassette on the transport block before
closing door.
5) If the failure recurs, call bioMérieux.
95
17 Card(s)
Terminated
The last edge of the
card was not detected
while reading
(terminated slot)
A card edge or hole could not be found. The
card in this carousel slot was terminated. When
instrument processing is idle, perform a
carousel cleaning to gain access to the card
and make the slot available.
96
5 Reader Jam
An additional row was
detected while reading
(JAMMED)
This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
mechanical or electrical failure.
1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the
jam condition.
2) Open user access doors.
3) Examine the affected component for dirt or
obstruction (normal jam-clearing actions).
4) If this is related to a transport jam, reposition
the cassette on the transport block before
closing door.
5) If the failure recurs, call bioMérieux.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
F-23
Instrument Error Code User Response
User Diagnostics
Table F-1: VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument Error Code User Response Table (Continued)
Detail
Code
Primary Code
Detail Code
Description
User Response
97
17 Card(s)
Terminated
An additional row was
detected while reading
(terminated slot)
A card edge or hole could not be found. The
card in this carousel slot was terminated. When
instrument processing is idle, perform a
carousel cleaning to gain access to the card
and make the slot available.
98
5 Reader Jam
Cam failure while
reading (JAMMED)
This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
mechanical or electrical failure.
1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the
jam condition.
2) Open user access doors.
3) Examine the affected component for dirt or
obstruction (normal jam-clearing actions).
4) If this is related to a transport jam, reposition
the cassette on the transport block before
closing door.
5) If the failure recurs, call bioMérieux.
99
5 Reader Jam
Cam failure (JAMMED)
This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
mechanical or electrical failure.
1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the
jam condition.
2) Open user access doors.
3) Examine the affected component for dirt or
obstruction (normal jam-clearing actions).
4) If this is related to a transport jam, reposition
the cassette on the transport block before
closing door.
5) If the failure recurs, call bioMérieux.
100
5 Reader Jam
Cam failure (JAMMED)
This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
mechanical or electrical failure.
1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the
jam condition.
2) Open user access doors.
3) Examine the affected component for dirt or
obstruction (normal jam-clearing actions).
4) If this is related to a transport jam, reposition
the cassette on the transport block before
closing door.
5) If the failure recurs, call bioMérieux.
F-24
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
User Diagnostics
Instrument Error Code User Response
Table F-1: VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument Error Code User Response Table (Continued)
Detail
Code
Primary Code
101
5 Reader Jam
Detail Code
Description
Carousel jam after a
Cam failure (JAMMED)
User Response
This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
mechanical or electrical failure.
1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the
jam condition.
2) Open user access doors.
3) Examine the affected component for dirt or
obstruction (normal jam-clearing actions).
4) If this is related to a transport jam, reposition
the cassette on the transport block before
closing door.
5) If the failure recurs, call bioMérieux.
102
5 Reader Jam
Cam failure (JAMMED)
This may be the result of a jam due to foreign
material in the mechanism, or it may indicate a
mechanical or electrical failure.
1) Respond to the Intervention screen for the
jam condition.
2) Open user access doors.
3) Examine the affected component for dirt or
obstruction (normal jam-clearing actions).
4) If this is related to a transport jam, reposition
the cassette on the transport block before
closing door.
5) If the failure recurs, call bioMérieux.
103
4 Carousel/Reader
Failure
Head Control Board
failure
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
104
43 Optics problem
(may need cleaning)
Transmittance Optics
module TX1 failed
calibration
Ensure that the TX optics modules are closed
and perform TX optics cleaning.
105
43 Optics problem
(may need cleaning)
Transmittance Optics
module TX2 failed
calibration
Ensure that the TX optics modules are closed
and perform TX optics cleaning.
106
43 Optics problem
(may need cleaning)
Transmittance Optics
module TX3 failed
calibration
Ensure that the TX optics modules are closed
and perform TX optics cleaning.
107
43 Optics problem
(may need cleaning)
Transmittance Optics
module TX1 position
sensor not functional
Ensure that the TX optics modules are closed
and perform TX optics cleaning.
108
43 Optics problem
(may need cleaning)
Transmittance Optics
module TX2 position
sensor not functional
Ensure that the TX optics modules are closed
and perform TX optics cleaning.
109
43 Optics problem
(may need cleaning)
Transmittance Optics
module TX3 position
sensor not functional
Ensure that the TX optics modules are closed
and perform TX optics cleaning.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
F-25
Instrument Error Code User Response
User Diagnostics
Table F-1: VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument Error Code User Response Table (Continued)
Detail
Code
Primary Code
Detail Code
Description
User Response
110
21 Optics Almost
Out of Calibration
Transmittance Optics
module TX1 nearing
calibration limits
The instrument is still functioning normally,
however perform optics cleaning.
111
21 Optics Almost
Out of Calibration
Transmittance Optics
module TX2 nearing
calibration limits
The instrument is still functioning normally,
however perform optics cleaning.
112
21 Optics Almost
Out of Calibration
Transmittance Optics
module TX3 nearing
calibration limits
The instrument is still functioning normally,
however perform optics cleaning.
113
43 Optics problem
(may need cleaning)
Transmittance Optics
module TX1 is not
available to process this
card
Ensure that the TX optics modules are closed
and perform TX optics cleaning.
114
43 Optics problem
(may need cleaning)
Transmittance Optics
module TX2 is not
available to process this
card
Ensure that the TX optics modules are closed
and perform TX optics cleaning.
115
43 Optics problem
(may need cleaning)
Transmittance Optics
module TX3 is not
available to process this
card
Ensure that the TX optics modules are closed
and perform TX optics cleaning.
116
43 Optics problem
(may need cleaning)
Transmittance Optics
module TX1 reference
readings out of range
Ensure that the TX optics modules are closed
and perform TX optics cleaning.
117
43 Optics problem
(may need cleaning)
Transmittance Optics
module TX2 reference
readings out of range
Ensure that the TX optics modules are closed
and perform TX optics cleaning.
118
43 Optics problem
(may need cleaning)
Transmittance Optics
module TX3 reference
readings out of range
Ensure that the TX optics modules are closed
and perform TX optics cleaning.
119
11 Internal Data
Error
Component Statistics
failure
Report to bioMérieux.
120
11 Internal Data
Error
Component Statistics
failure
Report to bioMérieux.
121
11 Internal Data
Error
Component Statistics
failure
Report to bioMérieux.
F-26
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
User Diagnostics
Instrument Error Code User Response
Table F-1: VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument Error Code User Response Table (Continued)
Detail
Code
122
Primary Code
Detail Code
Description
11 Internal Data
Error
Carousel Map memory
failure.
User Response
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
Any tests running in the carousel are lost.
Perform a carousel cleaning to manually
remove all cards from the carousel.
123
11 Internal Data
Error
Carousel Map memory
failure
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
Any tests running in the carousel are lost.
Perform a carousel cleaning to manually
remove all cards from the carousel.
124
11 Internal Data
Error
Carousel Map memory
failure
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
Any tests running in the carousel are lost.
Perform a carousel cleaning to manually
remove all cards from the carousel.
125
11 Internal Data
Error
Cassette memory failure
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
Any tests running in either the filler or transport
are lost. Discard cards.
126
12 Software Warning
Memory failure
Some card reading data may be lost due to a
power failure, software crash, or turning off the
instrument without first performing the
shutdown process.
This may prevent results from being obtained
for one or more samples.
127
11 Internal Data
Error
Memory failure.
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
128
11 Internal Data
Error
Memory failure.
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
129
12 Software Warning
Memory failure.
Some card reading data may be lost due to loss
of communications with the host PC.
This may prevent results from being obtained
for one or more samples.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
F-27
Instrument Error Code User Response
User Diagnostics
Table F-1: VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument Error Code User Response Table (Continued)
Detail
Code
Primary Code
Detail Code
Description
User Response
130
11 Internal Data
Error
Memory failure.
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
131
11 Internal Data
Error
Memory failure.
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
132
11 Internal Data
Error
Memory failure.
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
133
11 Internal Data
Error
Memory failure.
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
134
11 Internal Data
Error
Memory failure.
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
135
11 Internal Data
Error
Memory failure.
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
136
11 Internal Data
Error
Memory failure.
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
137
11 Internal Data
Error
Memory failure.
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
138
11 Internal Data
Error
Memory failure.
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
139
11 Internal Data
Error
Memory failure.
Report to bioMérieux.
The instrument’s error code history is lost.
140
11 Internal Data
Error
Memory failure.
Report to bioMérieux.
The instrument’s error code history is lost.
141
11 Internal Data
Error
Memory failure.
Report to bioMérieux.
The instrument’s error code history is lost.
142
12 Software Warning
Memory failure.
Report to bioMérieux.
143
11 Internal Data
Error
Memory failure.
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
144
12 Software Warning
Memory failure.
Report to bioMérieux.
F-28
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
User Diagnostics
Instrument Error Code User Response
Table F-1: VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument Error Code User Response Table (Continued)
Detail
Code
Primary Code
Detail Code
Description
145
11 Internal Data
Error
WellMap Manager can
not add more WellMaps
Report to bioMérieux.
146
22 Hardware Failure
SPN board failure
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
147
NA
<unused>
NA
148
NA
<unused>
NA
149
NA
<unused>
NA
150
NA
<unused>
NA
151
NA
<unused>
NA
152
20 Doors opened
while processing –
Emergency Stop
occurred
Emergency Stop – door
open while locks
engaged
A door was opened while locked. As this could
present a hazard to the user, all instrument
operations are halted.
User Response
Ensure doors are closed and then cycle power
to the instrument.
If a cassette was processing in the transport, it
tries to recover when power is restored. (Do not
remove cassette unless prompted.)
153
22 Hardware Failure
RTC and CPU Xtal
cross-check failure –
frequency mismatch
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
154
3 Vacuum/Loader
Failure
Cabinet Temperature
High
Ensure that the instrument’s ambient
temperature specifications are not exceeded.
Ensure that the cabinet ventilation fans are not
blocked and that all air filters are clean.
155
22 Hardware Failure
Power Supply
Temperature High
Ensure that the instrument’s ambient
temperature specifications are not exceeded.
Ensure that the cabinet ventilation fans are not
blocked and that all air filters are clean.
156
24 UPS power
failure or battery bad
UPS indicates a power
failure has occurred
A power failure has occurred and the
instrument is operating on the UPS battery.
157
24 UPS power
failure or battery bad
UPS Battery has failed
The battery in the UPS may be defective.
Call bioMérieux.
158
22 Hardware Failure
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Cabinet intake fan is
rotating too slowly.
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
F-29
Instrument Error Code User Response
User Diagnostics
Table F-1: VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument Error Code User Response Table (Continued)
Detail
Code
Primary Code
Detail Code
Description
User Response
159
22 Hardware Failure
Cabinet exhaust fan is
rotating too slowly.
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
160
23 Incubator failure
Incubator heater fan is
rotating too slowly.
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
161
23 Incubator failure
Incubator circulation fan
is rotating too slowly.
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
162
23 Incubator failure
Incubator temperature is
out of specification
Ensure that the instrument’s ambient
temperature specifications are not exceeded.
Ensure that the cabinet ventilation fans are not
blocked and that all air filters are clean.
Cycle Power. Report to bioMérieux.
163
25 Filler failure
Fill cycle failure
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux. A field service visit is likely
required.
164
25 Filler failure
Fill cycle failure
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux. A field service visit is likely
required.
165
25 Filler failure
Insufficient vacuum
level achieved during fill
cycle
Enter cassette ID as prompted and discard
cards.
Ensure that the door seal on the vacuum filler is
clean, then perform filler test.
166
25 Filler failure
Incorrect up slope
during fill cycle
Enter cassette ID as prompted and discard
cards.
Ensure that the door seal on the vacuum filler is
clean, then perform filler test.
167
25 Filler failure
Incorrect down slope
during fill cycle
Enter cassette ID as prompted and discard
cards.
Ensure that the door seal on the vacuum filler is
clean, then perform filler test.
168
25 Filler failure
Fill cycle failure
Enter cassette ID as prompted and discard
cards.
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
F-30
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
User Diagnostics
Instrument Error Code User Response
Table F-1: VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument Error Code User Response Table (Continued)
Detail
Code
Primary Code
Detail Code
Description
169
25 Filler failure
Fill cycle failure
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
170
26 The card in slot
(X) of cassette (X)
will not be loaded
because it was not
detected after a
power failure
The card was removed
from the cassette during
a power failure and
replaced with another
card.
Discard the identified card(s). It was not
accepted for processing.
171
26 The card in slot
(X) of cassette (X)
will not be loaded
because it was not
detected after a
power failure
The card was removed
from the cassette during
a power failure.
Discard the identified card(s). It was not
accepted for processing.
172
27 The card in slot
(X) of cassette (X)
will not be loaded
because it could not
be scanned after a
power failure
The card was no longer
readable after a power
failure.
Discard the identified card(s). It was not
accepted for processing.
173
28 The card in slot
(X) of cassette (X)
will not be loaded
because it exceeded
the loading timeout
The card was not
loaded in the time
allowed (power failure).
Discard the identified card(s). It was not
accepted for processing.
174
28 The card in slot
(X) of cassette (X)
will not be loaded
because it exceeded
the loading timeout
The card was not
loaded in the time
allowed (power failure).
Discard the identified card(s). It was not
accepted for processing.
175
29 The card in slot
(X) of cassette (X)
will not be loaded
because it
encountered a
mechanical error
while sealing
The card was being
sealed when a
mechanical error
occurred. (Power
Failure)
Discard the identified card(s). It was not
accepted for processing.
176
NA
<unused>
NA
177
29 The card in slot
(X) of cassette (X)
will not be loaded
because it
encountered a
mechanical error
while sealing
The card was being
sealed when a transport
mechanical error
occurred. (Alarm)
Discard the identified card(s). It was not
accepted for processing.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
User Response
F-31
Instrument Error Code User Response
User Diagnostics
Table F-1: VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument Error Code User Response Table (Continued)
Detail
Code
Primary Code
Detail Code
Description
User Response
178
29 The card in slot
(X) of cassette (X)
will not be loaded
because it
encountered a
mechanical error
while sealing
The card was being
sealed when a transport
mechanical error
occurred. (jam)
Discard the identified card(s). It was not
accepted for processing.
179
30 The card in slot
(X) of cassette (X)
was rejected
because it has
expired
The card was rejected
because the card is
expired.
Discard the identified card(s). It was not
accepted for processing.
180
31 The card in slot
(X) of cassette (X)
was rejected
because of
insufficient carousel
capacity
The card was rejected
because of insufficient
carousel capacity.
Discard the identified card(s). It was not
accepted for processing.
181
32 The card in slot
(X) of cassette (X)
was rejected
because it was
introduced after the
cards in the cassette
were sealed
The card was rejected
because it was
introduced in place of
another card during a
power failure.
Discard the identified card(s). It was not
accepted for processing.
182
32 The card in slot
(X) of cassette (X)
was rejected
because it was
introduced after the
cards in the cassette
were sealed
The card was rejected
because it was
introduced where no
previous card was
during a power failure.
Discard the identified card(s). It was not
accepted for processing.
183
33 The card in slot
(X) of cassette (X)
was rejected
because this
instrument is not
configured with the
required optics
The card was rejected
because the instrument
does not have the
required optics.
Discard the identified card(s). It was not
accepted for processing.
184
34 The card in slot
(X) of cassette (X)
was rejected
because a virtual
card was defined for
that slot and not
detected
The card was defined
and was not detected
during processing.
Discard the identified card(s). It was not
accepted for processing.
F-32
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
User Diagnostics
Instrument Error Code User Response
Table F-1: VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument Error Code User Response Table (Continued)
Detail
Code
Primary Code
Detail Code
Description
User Response
185
35 The card in slot
(X) of cassette (X)
was rejected
because the
scanned card did not
match the virtual
card defined for that
slot
The card was rejected
because it mismatched
the definition.
Discard the identified card(s). It was not
accepted for processing.
186
36 The card in slot
(X) of cassette (X)
was rejected
because the
scanned card did not
match the virtual
card when the
cassette timed out
The card was rejected
because it mismatched
the definition during a
timeout.
Discard the identified card(s). It was not
accepted for processing.
187
37 The card in slot
(X) of cassette (X)
was rejected
because this
instrument did not
have an appropriate
wellmap
The card was rejected
because the instrument
did not have a proper
wellmap.
Discard the card(s).
188
40 The card in slot
(X) of cassette (X)
was not loaded due
to a biological
timeout
The card was rejected
because the cassette
load timer timed out.
Discard the identified card(s). It was not
accepted for processing.
189
40 The card in slot
(X) of cassette (X)
was not loaded due
to a biological
timeout
The card was rejected
because the cassette
load timer timed out
over a power failure.
Discard the identified card(s). It was not
accepted for processing.
190
41 The card in slot
(X) of cassette (X)
was not loaded
because it timed out
and was unreadable
The card was rejected
because the
intervention timer timed
out and the Bar Code
was unreadable.
Discard the identified card(s). It was not
accepted for processing.
191
42 The card in slot
(X) of cassette (X)
was rejected
The card was rejected
(user skipped).
Discard the identified card(s). It was not
accepted for processing.
192
38 Cassette (X) was
aborted by the user
The cassette transfer
was aborted by the
user.
Discard the cards in the specified cassette.
They were not accepted for processing.
193
39 Cassette (X) was
terminated due to a
fill failure
A filling failure occurred
(cassette canceled)
Discard the cards in the specified cassette.
They were not accepted for processing.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
The “Maintain AST definitions” data entry for
this card type should be performed before
attempting to process additional cards of this
type.
F-33
Instrument Error Code User Response
User Diagnostics
Table F-1: VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument Error Code User Response Table (Continued)
Detail
Code
Primary Code
Detail Code
Description
194218
44 Component Stats
NA
Instrument errors of this type should not occur
in normal processing mode. (Factory only.)
219
12 Software Warning
SPN Variable Error
Call bioMérieux.
220
1 Software Failure
SPN Variable Error
Call bioMérieux.
221
12 Software Warning
SPN Variable Error
Call bioMérieux.
222
1 Software Failure
SPN Variable Error
Call bioMérieux.
223
12 Software Warning
SPN Variable Error
Call bioMérieux.
224
1 Software Failure
SPN Variable Error
Call bioMérieux.
225
12 Software Warning
A DML ‘LOGIN’ macro
is present
Call bioMérieux.
226
1 Software Failure
Memory failure
Cycle Power. Report to bioMérieux.
227
46 Cassette (X) was
not transferred to the
loader within the
appropriate time.
The Cassette was not
transferred in the
allotted time. (10
Minutes)
Discard the cards in the specified cassette.
They were not accepted for processing.
228
47 The scanned
cassette ID did not
match the stored
cassette ID while
verifying an
accepted cassette.
The scanned cassette
ID did not match the
scanned ID
This error indicates that after a power failure or
clearing of a jam, the cassette ID that was
scanned does not match the original ID that
was scanned or user-entered.
229
48 Cassette (X) was
filling when power
failed and has been
discarded.
A cassette was filling
when a power failure
occurred.
Discard the cards in the specified cassette.
They were not accepted for processing.
230
1 Software Failure
Instrument failure
Call bioMérieux. A power cycle may be
required.
231
28 The card in slot
(X) of cassette (X)
will not be loaded
because it exceeded
the loading timeout
The card was not
loaded in the time
allowed. (power failure).
Discard the identified card(s). It was not
accepted for processing.
232
1 Software Failure
Reboots halted due to
repeating error
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
233
22 Hardware Failure
SPN board failure
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
F-34
User Response
If the bar code of the cards match the originally
scanned bar codes, this error is informational
only. If they did not match, other errors relating
to those cards rejections are logged. This error
code provides information only.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
User Diagnostics
Instrument Error Code User Response
Table F-1: VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument Error Code User Response Table (Continued)
Detail
Code
Primary Code
Detail Code
Description
234
22 Hardware Failure
SPN board failure
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
235
22 Hardware Failure
Emergency Stop – Front
Panel SPN board failure
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
236 241
44 Component Stats
NA
Instrument errors of this type should not occur
in normal processing mode. (Factory only.)
242
49 A fill was stopped
because no vacuum
was achieved (Clean
the Seal).
A vacuum was not
achieved during a fill.
Ensure that the door seal on the vacuum filler is
clean and then re-try the filling operation.
243
50 Detected a loose
read head belt or
noisy optical position
sensor
Position sensor TX1
tripped during reader
head belt test, off
condition
Call bioMérieux.
244
50 Detected a loose
read head belt or
noisy optical position
sensor
Position sensor TX2
tripped during reader
head belt test, off
condition
Call bioMérieux.
245
50 Detected a loose
read head belt or
noisy optical position
sensor
Position sensor TX3
tripped during reader
head belt test, off
condition
Call bioMérieux.
246
50 Detected a loose
read head belt or
noisy optical position
sensor
Position sensor TX1
tripped during reader
head belt test, on
condition
Call bioMérieux.
247
50 Detected a loose
read head belt or
noisy optical position
sensor
Position sensor TX2
tripped during reader
head belt test, on
condition
Call bioMérieux.
248
50 Detected a loose
read head belt or
noisy optical position
sensor
Position sensor TX3
tripped during reader
head belt test, on
condition
Call bioMérieux.
249
4 Carousel/Reader
Failure
SPN board failure
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
250
3 Vacuum/Loader
Failure
SPN board failure
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
User Response
F-35
Instrument Error Code User Response
User Diagnostics
Table F-1: VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument Error Code User Response Table (Continued)
Detail
Code
Primary Code
Detail Code
Description
User Response
251
3 Vacuum/Loader
Failure
SPN board failure
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
252
22 Hardware Failure
SPN board failure
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
253
40 The card in slot
(X) of cassette (X)
was not loaded due
to a biological
timeout
The card was rejected
because the first read
timer timed out.
The card was not loaded, probably due to a
power failure or jam recovery. Discard the
card(s) in the specified cassette. It was not
accepted for processing.
254
40 The card in slot
(X) of cassette (X)
was not loaded due
to a biological
timeout
The card was rejected
because the first read
timer timed out.
The card was not loaded, probably due to a
power failure or jam recovery. Discard the
card(s) in the specified cassette. It was not
accepted for processing.
255
41 The card in slot
(X) of cassette (X)
was not loaded
because it timed out
and was unreadable
The card was rejected
because the
intervention timer timed
out and the bar code
was unreadable.
Discard the card(s) specified. It was not
accepted for processing.
256
1 Software Failure
Instrument failure
Call bioMérieux. A power cycle may be
required.
257
1 Software Failure
Instrument has reset
Report to bioMérieux.
258
51 The card in slot
(X) of cassette (X)
was terminated
because the
cassette was not
present after a
power failure.
The Cassette was
removed over a power
failure while it was in
process.
Discard the card(s) specified. It was not
accepted for processing.
259
1 Software Failure
Instrument failure
Call bioMérieux. A power cycle may be
required.
260261
45 BurnIn
NA
Instrument errors of this type should not occur
in normal processing mode. (Factory only.)
262
1 Software Failure
Instrument failure
Call bioMérieux. A power cycle may be
required.
263
40 The card in slot
(X) of cassette (X)
was not loaded due
to a biological
timeout
The card was rejected
because the first read
timer timed out (power
failure).
Discard the card(s) specified. It was not
accepted for processing.
F-36
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
User Diagnostics
Instrument Error Code User Response
Table F-1: VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument Error Code User Response Table (Continued)
Detail
Code
Primary Code
Detail Code
Description
User Response
264
40 The card in slot
(X) of cassette (X)
was not loaded due
to a biological
timeout
The card was rejected
because the cassette
load timer timed out
(power failure).
Discard the card(s) specified. It was not
accepted for processing.
265
41 The card in slot
(X) of cassette (X)
was not loaded
because it timed out
and was unreadable
The card was rejected
because the
intervention timer timed
out and the Bar Code
was unreadable (power
failure).
Discard the card(s) specified. It was not
accepted for processing.
266
42 The card in slot
(X) of cassette (X)
was rejected
The card was rejected
because it has a
duplicate in the cassette
or carousel.
Discard the card(s) specified. It was not
accepted for processing.
267
42 The card in slot
(X) of cassette (X)
was rejected
The card was rejected
because the cassette is
out of alignment.
Discard the card(s) specified. It was not
accepted for processing.
268
3 Vacuum/Loader
Failure
Sealer failure
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
269
3 Vacuum/Loader
Failure
Sealer failure
The instrument is in a fault condition. Call
bioMérieux.
A field service visit is likely required.
270271
44 Component Stats
NA
Instrument errors of this type should not occur
in normal processing mode. (Factory only.)
272
10 Host
Communication
Failure
No response from the
host PC for 1 hour.
Host PC may be turned off or may not be
connected. Check the power on the PC and be
sure the data cable is secure.
273
17 Card(s)
Terminated
Card(s) terminated due
to missing card in
carousel from same
cassette.
Discard the card(s). Call bioMérieux.
274
42 The card in slot
(X) of cassette (X)
was rejected
A card that was
previously loaded was
rejected because the
cassette processing
verification failed.
Discard the card(s) indicated. Call bioMérieux.
275
42 The card in slot
(X) of cassette (X)
was rejected
A card that was
previously loaded was
rejected because the
verify cassette set up
(power failure or jam)
failed.
Discard the card(s) indicated. Call bioMérieux.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
F-37
User Interface Instrument Diagnostics
F.5
User Diagnostics
User Interface Instrument Diagnostics
Some of the error recovery procedures in this chapter direct you to perform a
diagnostic test on one of the stations in the VITEK® 2 Compact instrument. This
section tells you how to access and use those tests.
F.5.1
Instrument Diagnostics Menu
All of the diagnostic tests for the instrument are located on the Diagnostics Menu,
which you can access using the following path:
Main Menu > Diagnostics
F.5.2
Diagnostic Tests
Following are the tests found on the Diagnostics menu, and their function:
Table F-2: Diagnostic Tests
Diagnostic
Test
F.5.3
Function
Possible Results
Temperature
Reads the temperature Displays the incubator and
in the reader carousel internal cabinet temperature in
incubator.
degrees Celsius.
Optics
Performs a self-test of
the transmittance
optics system.
Pass/Fail
Filler Test
There are times when you may need to run a Filler Test.
1. Remove any cassette from the Filler Station.
2. Close the Fill Door.
3. Press the Start Fill button to begin the filling process.
4. At the completion of a successful fill cycle (the Filler’s blue LED blinks), cancel
the cassette using the menu path:
Main Menu > Error Handling > Cancel Cassette
Note:
F.5.4
The cancel cassette function will only be active for ten minutes after which
an error will occur.
Checking the Instrument Temperature
Access the Temperature Diagnostics using the path:
Main Menu > Diagnostics > Temperature
F-38
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
User Diagnostics
User Interface Instrument Diagnostics
The screen displays the Incubator temperature and the temperature inside the
instrument cabinet (Figure F-9).
Figure F-9: Temperatures
F.5.5
Displaying Version Information
This function allows you to view the current instrument firmware version for your
instrument. Customer Support may ask you to supply this information if you need
assistance with any of the recovery procedures.
1. Access the Versions function using the following path:
Main Menu > Diagnostics > Versions
A screen similar to Figure F-10 displays.
Figure F-10: Version Information
2. Use the Arrow keys on the keypad to scroll to additional information.
F.5.6
Last Maintenance Date
This function is used to view the last time a field service engineer performed
preventive maintenance. The format is the same as that configured for Date Format.
Access the Last Maintenance Date function using the following path:
Main Menu > Diagnostics > Last Maintenance Date
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
F-39
User Interface Instrument Diagnostics
User Diagnostics
Figure F-11: Last Maintenance Date
F.5.7
Cleaning the Optics (With Cards Processing — Power On)
This procedure describes how to clean and verify the optics while test cards are still
processing. If the instrument is shut down, you may also clean the optics. See Section
E.6, Cleaning the Optics (Power Off).
IMPORTANT:
All steps in this procedure must be completed.
1. Access the Optics Cleaning using the path:
Main Menu > Maintenance > Optics Cleaning
2. A message appears asking the user to confirm cleaning the optics.
Note:
If the cassette is processing in the Filler Station or in the Cassette Load/
Unload Station, the user is not able to unlock the door.
3. A warning message appears if the cards are processing in the carousel. The
user must confirm pausing card processing.
Figure F-12: Optics Cleaning
4. When the Front User Access Door is unlocked, both User Access Doors can be
opened to clean the optics.
F-40
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
User Diagnostics
User Interface Instrument Diagnostics
Figure F-13: Optics Cleaning Ready
5. Close the User Access Doors when you are done.
6. An optics self test is performed automatically, press OK when the results are
displayed.
Note:
F.5.8
You have four minutes from the time that you press Yes to complete the
cleaning procedure. A warning message appears if the process exceeds
four minutes.
Optics Self Test
Verifying the optics can be performed with or without cards processing.
1. Access the Optical Diagnostic Test using the following path:
Main Menu > Diagnostics > Optics Self Test
A question displays, “Perform optics self test?”
Figure F-14: Optics Self Test
2. Select Yes to continue.
3. When the test is complete, select OK to exit the screen.
4. If the optical test fails, call bioMérieux Customer Support.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
F-41
Cycling the Power of the Instrument
F.5.9
User Diagnostics
Subsystem Error Status
View the Subsystem Error Status screen when the instrument status is in an error
condition. This screen provides additional details about the error.
Access the Subsystem Error Status screen using the following path:
Menu > Diagnostics > Subsystem Error Status
Figure F-15: Subsystem Error Status Screen
F.6
Cycling the Power of the Instrument
Several of the User Response procedures in the table instruct you to cycle the power
of the instrument. To do this:
1. Perform Section E.5, Instrument Shutdown.
2. Wait at least 10 seconds.
3. Move the AC power switch to the ON position.
F-42
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Appendix G: Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
About this Appendix
This appendix is to establish guidelines for protecting Electrostatic Discharge
Sensitive (ESDS) components, and assemblies containing ESDS components, from
static electricity. Failure to comply with this document could result in damaged or
destroyed components.
Appendix Contents
G.1 Equipment, Materials, or Supplies • G-2
G.2 General Requirements • G-2
G.3 Work Area Preparation • G-2
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
G-1
Equipment, Materials, or Supplies
G.1
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
Equipment, Materials, or Supplies
• Wrist Strap Conductive – bioMérieux P/N 399106-1 or equivalent
• Soldering Iron, electrostatically shielded with a ground tip
• Fluke 87 multimeter or equivalent
G.2
General Requirements
You are responsible for ESD awareness and practices.
• You are required to wear a grounded wrist strap prior to, and while, handling
ESDS components or assemblies. The wrist strap shall make constant
contact with your bare wrist and not be placed over shirt sleeves or gloves.
• Keep static-sensitive assemblies inside antistatic packages, when not in use.
• Prior to carrying an ESDS component or assembly, always place it completely
inside an antistatic bag. (Do not partially wrap the ESDS component or
assembly with an antistatic bag.)
• Discard any antistatic bag with holes or other visible damage.
• If you need to ship an ESDS component or part, package it in appropriate
antistatic packaging. (For example, antistatic tubes, carriers or conductive
bags.) If possible, mark the outside of the package as containing ESDS
components.
• Do not staple antistatic bags containing ESDS components. To seal the bag,
fold the open end of the bag and apply tape to the outside.
• Do not place paper or other foreign items inside the antistatic packages. If
documentation needs to be kept with the ESDS component, tape it on the
outside of the package.
• All tools should be static free, where possible.
• Probing of circuits containing ESDS components with ungrounded
instrumentation (VOM, DVM, etc.) or similar type equipment is prohibited,
except when battery-operated or plastic-cased instruments must be used, or
when required measurement must be obtained with a piece of test equipment
that is isolated from ground.
G.3
Work Area Preparation
At a system or instrument location, prior to handling or installing ESDS components,
perform the following.
1. Remove all static generating material (polyethylene film, Styrofoam, paper, etc.)
from the work area.
2. If possible, ground the assembly in which the ESDS components are to be
installed.
3. Verify the proper functioning of wrist strap and cord as defined below.
G-2
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
Work Area Preparation
• Using a multimeter, measure the resistance from the wrist strap to the end of
the cord. Discard and replace the wrist strap if the resistance is less than
800k ohms or greater than 1.2M ohms.
4. Put the grounding wrist strap on, and clip the cord end to a chassis ground point
of the instrument/module you will be repairing.
IMPORTANT:
When working on ESDS equipment, you must discharge through a
grounded wrist strap. Do not allow your skin to come into contact with
the instrument chassis, until after you connect the wrist strap alligator
clip to a known chassis ground point.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
G-3
Work Area Preparation
G-4
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Reference Documents
About this Appendix
The table below lists engineering drawings and bills of material used as references
when this service manual was created and edited.
Drawing /
Part Number
Drawing
BOM
Rev/Edition
BOM
Rev
186197-100
B
Cable, Sealevel 7803 8-Port
24482
05/2010
VITEK® 2 Systems Software User Manual
Description
VITEK® 2 Systems 05.01 Update
Instructions Firmware, Software &
Software Manual
514685-1EN1
24410
09/2009
VITEK® 2 Compact Instrument User
Manual
530772-1
A
Head Control Assembly
530774-5
B
DC Power Distribution Assembly
531602-1
C
531720-5
A
Sample Prep Node (SPN) Assembly
531728-3
A
Vacuum Sealer Assembly (PCB)
531750-3
A
Compact BCB/LVM Assembly
531900-2
B
532610
A
VITEK® 2 Compact Firmware Error
Codes
6200270
A
Vacuum Sealer Assembly (PCB)
6200271
A
Sample Prep Node (SPN) Assembly
V2SYSCONFIG-002V09.doc
Version 9
VITEK® 2 Systems Configuration
Specification
W0447IR
A
Computer, VITEK® 2 Systems,
HP® dc7700, 8 Port, Configured
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
VITEK® 2 Compact System Electronics
Jumper and Test Point Specification
Schematic/Wiring Diagram CARD
Reference Documents-1
Reference Documents
Reference Documents-2
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Change Summary
About this Appendix
This section contains a summary of significant changes made to each released
revision of this service manual.
Part
Number
CR #
Originated/Revised By:
510779-5EN1
SC10-0047
Patricia Stelbrink
Description of Change:
How to Use this Manual - Added information on the Microsoft Word attachment icon.
System Setup - Added Figure 2-11, Figure 2-12, Figure 2-15, and Figure 2-16 to Section 2.5, System
Cabling Diagrams, to show multiple instrument configurations. Changed the title of Section 2.7.2.2, NonEnglish Setup, and added steps and figures for input languages that require selection of an Input Method
Editor and updated the steps for installing the Software User Manual in other languages. Updated Table 2-4
to clarify usage definitions and include new pre-defined user accounts. Added Section 2.7.2.3, Multiple
Instrument Port Configuration, to address the multiple configuration installation. Changed the title of the
Prepare and Verify DensiCHEK™ section to Prepare and Verify DensiCHEK™ Plus in Section 2.15, and
updated the information in the section to refer the setup of the instrument to the DensiCHEK™ Plus User
Manual.
Instrument Overview - N/A
Instrument Components - N/A
Component Replacement - Added VITEK® 2 Systems software release 5.01 information to Table 5-1 and
Table 5-2. Updated Section 5.16.1, Transport Linear Actuator Motor, to include information on the new Motor/
Guide Rod Mount. Updated Figure 5-34, Transport Replacement (shown from rear of instrument), to show the
Transport Assembly with the new Motor/Guide Rod Mount. Changed Section 5.22, Reader Head Assembly
Drive Belt Replacement to include two different replacement procedures (Section 5.22.1, Reader Head
Assembly Drive Belt (P/N 6200190) Replacement and Section 5.22.2, Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt (P/N
333612-2) Replacement) and the associated subsections for the Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt because
of changes made to the Reader Head Roller Plate (information taken from Design Note 10-009). Changed
Section 5.23, Reader Head Roller Plate Assembly Replacement to include two different replacement
procedures (Section 5.23.1, Reader Head Roller Plate (P/N 532151-903) Replacement and Section 5.23.2,
Reader Head Roller Plate (P/N 532151-902) Replacement) and the associated subsections for the Reader
Head Roller Plate and Extension Plate because of changes made to the Reader Head Roller Plate
(information taken from Design Note 10-009). Replaced the graphic in Figure 5-50 to show the new molded
Reader Ledge. Updated Section 5.23.3, Reader Ledge Replacement to include the new molded Reader
Ledge (information taken from Design Note 09-007).
Troubleshooting - Added Section 6.9, DensiCHEK™ and DensiCHEK™ Plus Calibration/Verification. Made
the previous DensiCHEK™ Check and Calibration procedure a subsection of Section 6.9, DensiCHEK™ and
DensiCHEK™ Plus Calibration/Verification. Added the subsection DensiCHEK™ Plus Instrument Verification
to Section 6.9, DensiCHEK™ and DensiCHEK™ Plus Calibration/Verification.
Schematics, Diagrams and Test Points - Updated Table 7-12 to add new SPN board number. Added Figure
7-16 and full scale attachment of SPN Board (P/N 6200271) to Section 7.7, Sample Prep Node (SPN) Board.
Added Figure 7-21 and full scale attachment of Vacuum Sealer Board (P/N 6200270) to Section 7.8, Vacuum
Sealer Board.
Instrument Error Codes - N/A
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Change Summary-1
Change Summary
Part
Number
CR #
Originated/Revised By:
Host Computers - Updated Table 9-1 to clarify usage definitions and include new pre-defined user accounts.
Updated Section 9.9, Data Backup, Section 9.9.1, Recommended Backup Strategy, Section 9.9.2, Automatic
Data Backup, Section 9.9.3, Backup Failures, Section 9.9.4, Manual Data Backup, and Section 9.9.5, Data
Backup – CD Drive Defective (Software Version Earlier Than 5.01) to include changes as a result of the
software version 5.01 release. Updated Section 9.10.1, Automated Data Restore (All System Software Except
3.01). Updated Section 9.10.4, Manual Data Restore (2.01 or Higher System Software) to include changes as
a result of the software version 5.01 release.
Instrument Specifications - N/A
Instrument Decontamination - N/A
Installation Checklist - Deleted Table C-1 and updated the chapter to include the installation checklist in
Microsoft Word format and updated the checklist to match the Installation chapter.
Instrument Improvements - Added Section D.2, Host PC Multiple Instrument Configuration. Added
Section D.3, Sample Prep Node (SPN) Board Update. Added Section D.4, Molded Reader Ledge Upgrade
(information taken from Design Note 09-007). Added Section D.5, Reader Head Roller Plate Update
(information taken from Design Note 10-009).
Maintaining the Instrument - N/A
User Diagnostics - N/A
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) - N/A
Reference Documents - Updated the list of reference documents.
Design Notes referenced: 09-007, 10-009
GCS Info referenced: N/A
510779-4EN1
SC08-0140
Sherry Higgins
Description of Change:
How to Use this Manual - Moved referenced documents table to Chapter 1.
System Setup - Added direct sunlight warning, Smart Manometer component details, step to verify outlets
properly grounded, push reader head plate down when cleaning detail, steps to configure instrument and
peripherals to appropriate voltage, step to verify/enter instrument name, SAVE_ALIGNMENTS, Industry and
21 CFR Part 11 Setup, steps to perform Full System Image to DVD, and specific DML login information.
Moved BCB Hardware Key Installation to Component Replacement. Updated Non-English Setup and System
cabling diagrams.
Instrument Overview - Chapter renamed.
Instrument Components - Chapter renamed. Updated Vacuum/Filler Station and Cassette Load/Unload
Station. Added Temperature Monitoring System.
Component Replacement - Moved Power Supply Voltage tables to Troubleshooting. Changed +5V
adjustment range to 5.20 VDC - 5.25 VDC. Added Power Supply Fan Assembly Replacement, BCB Battery
Replacement, Reader Ledge Replacement, and Transmittance Minimum Threshold Reading Test and HCB
Test. Updated BCB Replacement, SPN Replacement, and Reader Head Roller Plate Replacement.
Troubleshooting - Added Diagnostics Terminal information, Pre-Defined User Accounts table, bmx_admin
login for d530 and dc7100, bmx_admin login for dc7700 and dc7800, Remote Desktop information, How to
Use Diagnostics Terminal, User Interface Hidden Menu Access, Filler/Vacuum System troubleshooting
information, VITEK® 2 Compact Electrical Architecture, Log in to Operating System, Start the System
Software, Log in to System Software, Check System Software Version, and specific DML login information.
Schematics, Diagrams and Test Points - Added chapter.
Change Summary-2
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Change Summary
Part
Number
CR #
Originated/Revised By:
Instrument Error Codes - Moved from appendix to chapter and updated.
Host Computers - Chapter added.
Instrument Specifications - Changed Maximum input current to “4 amps @ 120 VAC or 2.2 amps @ 240
VAC”.
Instrument Decontamination - Renamed appendix. Added “label in accordance with local subsidiary”.
Installation Checklist - Updated appendix per System Setup updates.
Instrument Improvements - Appendix added.
Maintaining the Instrument - Appendix added.
User Diagnostics - Appendix added.
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) - Appendix added.
Design Notes referenced: 00-018J, 03-009, 04-009, 05-009B, 06-011B, 06-014, 07-001A, 07-008, 07-016,
07-018, 07-022, 07-023B, 08-003A, 08-004, 08-009, 08-016, 08-017
GCS Info referenced: 2008-13-R0
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Change Summary-3
Change Summary
Change Summary-4
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Glossary
Bar Code
An alphanumeric interface identifier label affixed to each VITEK® 2
test card and cassette. The card bar code contains the card’s test
type, lot number, and expiration date, which is entered either by bar
code wanding, or when read by the internal instrument Bar Code
Reader. The cassette bar code identifies the cassette to the
instrument.
Bar Code Reader
(Instrument)
This station reads the bar code label on each cassette and test card
after the test cards are loaded into the Cassette Load/Unload
Station. It then transfers all of the test card bar code data to the
VITEK® 2 Compact host PC.
Carousel
The rotating incubator section, which holds up to 15, 30, or 60 test
cards, depending on the instrument model.
Cassette
The cassette is a carrier that holds up to 10 test cards and their
inoculum test tubes. It is used for sample preparation and
processing inside the instrument. The cassette is equipped with a
bar code that identifies the cassette to the instrument.
CTDB
Card Test Database
EQM
Error Queue Manager
Filler Station
The Filler Station inoculates all of the cards in a cassette with the
suspension contained in their corresponding test tubes. It uses a
Vacuum Chamber and air pump.
Host Computer
The host computer (host PC) is the primary processor used in
calculating test results. The host PC can also be used as a means
to interface the instrument with a central laboratory information
system (LIS) or hospital computer system.
The host PC provides the user with the graphical user interface
used with the mouse pointing device and a monitor, and a text
interface for the keyboard. It is also used to configure some options
on the VITEK® 2 Compact system (e.g. time of AST card ejection,
manually delete/eject cards, etc.).
Incubator
The incubator contains a heater and a circulating fan used to
incubate the cards at optimal environmental conditions during
testing. The temperature is monitored and controlled through the
use of two remote precision thermistors monitored by a
microprocessor holding the card at an average temperature of
35.5 °C.
LED
Light emitting diode, a light emitting device used in optical displays.
See also, transmittance optics.
Sealer Station
This station seals each test card by cutting and sealing its
associated inoculum transfer tube using a hot wire.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Glossary-1
Glossary
Test Card
A plastic card with 64 growth wells for biological testing in VITEK® 2
systems. Each well contains an air-dried suspension of a
biochemical or antibiotic.
Transmittance Optics
A combination of light-emitting diodes (emitters) and photodiodes
used to read the growth results in the card wells.
User Access Doors
VITEK® 2 Compact has two doors to enable the operator to access
the internal systems and stations to perform maintenance and
cleaning procedures: Top User Access Door and Front User Access
Door.
User Interface (UI)
The portion of the system in which the user and the system’s
software interact. The system has two user interfaces:
• A host PC, with a monitor, keyboard, and mouse.
• A VITEK® 2 Compact instrument, with a keypad and screen.
Waste Collection
Station
Glossary-2
This station includes a waste collection bin which holds up to 60 test
cards. Ejected test cards are collected in the bin for removal from
the instrument and disposal.
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Index
A
last maintenance date F-39
Circuit Board
Accessing DML 6-5
test point voltages 7-10
Alarm
Cleaning
audible F-3
error F-3
system software alarms 2-45
visual F-3
carousel E-4–E-10
cassettes E-11
instrument E-17
optics F-40
waste collection bin E-17
Autoloader Station 3-9
Configuration 2-46
B
instrument 4-26
Backup
Configuration Settings
defective drive 9-17
full system 9-10
unlock/lock 2-46
Connecting Instrument 2-4
Backup Isolate Data
Conventions
automatic 9-14
manual 9-15
typographic 1-5
usage 1-5
Bar Code Reader 3-7
BCB Battery
D
replacement 5-25
Data Backup
BCB Board
manual 9-15
diagram 7-12
DC Power Supply Board
BCB Hardware Key Installation 5-24
diagram 7-15
Burn Backup Error Messages 9-13
Decontaminating Tools B-2
DensiCHEK™ Plus
C
instrument verification 6-94
Cabling Diagram 2-8
Diagnostic
commands 6-29
instrument 6-5
Card
bar code mismatch F-9
bar code unreadable F-8
bar code unreadable (setup cards post entry) F-8
processing jam F-10
reading test 2-43
sealer assembly 3-8
Diagnostics
instrument F-38
optical F-41
test F-38
Diagrams 7-1
Carousel
Disinfect Contaminated Surfaces E-8
cleaning E-4–E-10
removing E-4
DML
accessing 6-5
commands 6-29
Carousel SPN Board
diagram 7-22
Door Latch
Cassette
bar code unreadable F-7
cleaning E-11
scan test 2-42
setup 2-41
CD Drive
defective 9-17
Checking
kit D-2
E
Electrical Architecture
instrument 6-89
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
guidelines G-1
instrument temperature F-38
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Index-1
Index
Error
I
alarm F-3
codes 8-1
handling F-2
handling system F-2
types F-3
what to do F-2
Icon Key 6-28
Incubator
heater assembly 3-10
not ready F-6
SPN board diagram 7-22
Indicator
F
information 4-11
warning 4-11
Fill
Instrument
cycle test 2-41
failure F-6
cabling, diagram 2-8
cleaning E-17
configuration 4-26
connections 2-4
diagnostic 6-5
diagnostics F-38
electrical architecture 6-89
error codes 8-1
error handling system F-2
instrument messages 2-45
placement 2-4
restarting F-42
setup 2-40
shut down E-12
specifications A-1
status 4-6
temperature F-38
temperature manual check E-2
troubleshooting 6-78
turning on E-19
Filler
complete 4-8
filling 4-8
idle 4-8
not ready 4-9
Filler Station 3-5
Filling
intervention F-5
Finding Topics
in this manual 1-5
Flowchart
error handling F-2
Full System Image
backup 9-10
restore 9-11
G
Insufficient Slots in Carousel F-9
General
Intervention
status 4-11
during filing F-5
screen layouts F-5
timeout status F-5
Guidelines
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) G-1
H
Isolate Data
backup 9-21
Handhold Locations 2-3
Isolate Data Backup
Hardware Key, BCB 5-24
automatic 9-14
HCB Board
diagram 7-16
Hidden Menu
user interface 6-77
Host Computer
HP® d530 9-2
HP® dc7100 9-3
HP® dc7700 9-4
HP® dc7800 9-5
HP® rp5700 9-6
Index-2
J
Jam
card processing F-10
Jumper
bay controller board (BCB) 7-13
HDR8 4-26
SPN board 7-17, 7-23
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Index
K
O
Keypad 3-3
Operating System
log on 6-4
login 9-7
Kit
magnetic door latch D-2
Operation 3-2
L
Optical
diagnostic F-41
Last Maintenance Date F-39
Optics
Limited Slots
cleaning F-40
verifying F-41
message F-5
Load/Unload Station 3-6
Overview, System 3-1
Loader
cassette number 4-11
empty status 4-9
reading bar code 4-10
remove 4-10
sealing 4-10
status 4-9
virtual cassette icon 4-10
P
PC Board
layout 7-9
layout diagrams 7-1
Power Connection, Diagram 2-7
Power Entry Module, Diagram 2-5
Log In
Power Supply
operating system 9-7
system software 9-9
voltage information 6-86
Power Supply Drawer
Log On
diagram 7-2
operating system 6-4
Power Up Instrument 2-20
M
Processing Cycle 2-40
Magnetic Door Latch
kit D-2
R
Reader Head Assembly Drive Belt
Maintenance
replacement 5-62
date F-39
Reader System 3-10
Manual
Reader/Incubator Station 3-9
finding topics 1-5
standard symbols i-i, 1-8
typographic conventions 1-5
usage conventions 1-5
Recommended Backup Strategy 9-13
Burn Backup Application 9-12
Reference Documents
Manual Data Backup 9-15
Documents, Reference 1-4
Menu system 4-5
Replacement
Message
card bar code unreadable F-8
card code mismatch F-9
card processing jam F-10
cassette bar code unreadable F-7
fill failure F-6
incubator not ready F-6
instrument 2-45
insufficient slots in carousel F-9
limited slots F-5
timed out F-9
transfer failure F-7
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
reader head assembly drive belt 5-62
Response Table F-11
Restore
full system 9-11
Restore System Data from Backup 9-18
S
Schematics 7-1
Screen
instrument status 4-6
layout intervention F-5
Index-3
Index
Sealing and Cassette Removal Test 2-42
Timed Out F-9
Setup System 2-1
Timeout Status F-5
Shutting Down E-12
Tools
decontaminating B-2
system setup 2-2
Simulated Processing Cycle 2-40
Specifications
Topics
instrument A-1
finding in this manual 1-5
SPN Board
Transfer Failure F-7
block diagram 7-20
carousel/incubator 7-22
configuration jumpers 7-17
diagram 7-18, 7-23
front panel diagram 7-21
jumpers 7-23
transport diagram 7-20
vacuum sealer diagram 7-25
Transmittance Optics
cleaning F-40
cross-section diagram 7-26
Troubleshooting 6-1
general instrument 6-78
Turning Off Instrument E-12
Turning On Instrument 2-20, E-19
Standard Symbols
Types of Errors F-3
usage in this manual i-i
use in manual 1-8
Typographic Conventions
this manual 1-5
Status
instrument 4-6
screen 4-6
screen with messages F-3
U
Unlocking User Access Door E-2
Symbols
Unpacking System 2-2
in this manual
Usage Conventions
standard symbols i-i
this manual 1-5
System Electronics 7-9
User Access Door
System Overview 3-1
unlocking E-2
System Placement 2-4
User Interface 3-3
System Setup 2-1
hidden menu 6-77
System Software
User Response Table
backup
backup failure 9-15
system-initiated nightly backup 9-14–9-15
log on 9-9
restore isolate data from backup 9-18
system software alarms 2-45
instrument error code F-11
V
Verification
DensiCHEK™ Plus 6-94
Verifying
T
instrument operation 2-37, 6-27
Temperature
checking the instrument F-38, F-40
manual check E-2
Version Information F-39
Voltage
power supply 6-86
test points 7-10
Test
card reading 2-43
cassette scan 2-42
fill cycle 2-41
sealing and cassette removal 2-42
waste container unloading 2-43
Test Points
voltages 7-10
Index-4
W
Warning
indicator 4-11
Waste Collection Bin
cleaning E-17
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Index
Waste Collection Station 3-11
Waste Container Unloading Test 2-43
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Index-5
Index
Index-6
VITEK® 2 Compact Service Manual
510779-5EN1
Recommended Changes
You can improve this manual by recommending improvements using the
Recommended Changes to Service Documentation Form. Fill it out as shown on the
sample below and send it to the e-mail, fax number, or address shown in the table
below.
Recommended Changes to Service Documentation Forms can be accessed by
double-clicking the paperclip next to the sample form to open the form as a Microsoft
Word document. A blank form is also included in this chapter for FSEs that would
rather print the form without using Microsoft Word and complete it manually.
Note:
The Recommended Changes to Service Documentation Forms may only be
used for service documentation for the VITEK® 2, VITEK® 2 Compact,
BacT/ALERT 3D®, and PREVI™ Isola product lines.
Fax Number
E-mail Address
Mail Address
314-731-8689
Attn: PL&D RCSD
patricia.stelbrink@biomerieux.com
bioMérieux
Attn: PL&D RCSD
595 Anglum Rd
Hazelwood, MO 63042
Recommended Changes to Service
Documentation
TO:
Fax No. 123-456-7899
MANUAL NUMBER
510726-4EN1
CHAPTER
NO.
2
SECTION
NO.
2.3.2
PAGE
NO.
2-4
Recommended
Changes to Service
Documentation
Form
DATE: 12JUN09
FROM:
John Doe
55 bioMérieux Way
Anytown, CA, 123456 USA
REVISION DATE
MANUAL TITLE
07/2006
VITEK® 2 and VITEK® 2 XL Integrated System
Service Manual
FIGURE
TABLE
RECOMMENDED CHANGES AND REASON
NO.
NO.
(Provide exact wording of changes, if possible.)
2-2
The black plastic card part number is listed
incorrectly. It should be XXXXX-XX.
SAMPLE
NAME AND JOB TITLE
John Doe, Field Service Engineer
Date Received
TTP #
TELEPHONE NO.
123-456-7890
SIGNATURE
John Doe
FOR PL&D USE ONLY
Entered By
Date Entered
03/2010
Recommended Changes to Service
Documentation
DATE:
TO:
FROM:
MANUAL NUMBER
CHAPTER
NO.
SECTION
NO.
PAGE
NO.
NAME AND JOB TITLE
Date Received
REVISION DATE
MANUAL TITLE
FIGURE
NO.
RECOMMENDED CHANGES AND REASON
(Provide exact wording of changes, if possible.)
TABLE
NO.
TELEPHONE NO.
TTP #
SIGNATURE
FOR PL&D USE ONLY
Entered By
Date Entered
03/2010